JP6804816B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachinko machine").

Conventionally, as seen in Patent Document 1, for example, there is known a gaming machine in which a special game in which a large amount of prize balls are paid out when a predetermined condition is satisfied is performed.

That is, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, first, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has won a prize at the starting port. Then, when the game ball is won at the starting port, a lottery process for winning a big hit (a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device) is performed with a predetermined winning probability. As a result, when a big hit is won, a special game is performed in which a large number of prize balls are paid out to the player.

Further, in the game machine described in the same document 1, when a lottery process for a big hit is performed, an image is displayed on a predetermined display screen to perform an effect. As a result, the player can recognize the result of the lottery process for the big hit depending on the display mode related to the effect.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2004-194223

However, in recent years, even if the production is performed on a predetermined display screen, it is becoming more complicated in order to improve the interest of the game. For example, a production that makes the player guess the lottery result is performed. There is also. Therefore, a player who is not accustomed to such a complicated production has no choice but to see the productions appearing one after another without understanding the meaning of the productions, and as a result, not only cannot enjoy such productions, but also, for example, a game. Even if you win a big hit that is of great value to a person, you may not notice it.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decline in a game interest.

In order to achieve such an object, in the invention according to claim 1, the game area where the game ball is launched, the starting port which can receive the game ball driven into the game area, and the game area are arranged. Based on a large winning opening that facilitates the acceptance of game balls by the operation of a predetermined opening / closing means, a lottery means that draws a lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball to the starting opening, and a lottery result by the lottery means. The identification symbol control means that determines the fluctuation time of the identification symbol, changes the identification symbol by the determined fluctuation time, and then stops and displays the identification symbol, and the identification based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means. After the identification symbol is stopped and displayed by the symbol control means, the opening / closing control means capable of executing the control related to the operation of the predetermined opening / closing means so as to facilitate the acceptance of the game ball at the winning opening, and the lottery. In operating the effect executing means for displaying information on the result of the lottery by the means by the display effect on the predetermined effect display device and the predetermined opening / closing means based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means being a hit. A closed state maintaining means capable of maintaining the predetermined opening / closing means in a closed state for a predetermined period after the identification symbol is stopped and displayed is provided, and the display effect on the predetermined effect display device is different from the display of the identification symbol. It is an effect using an image, and the effect executing means is the predetermined effect when the first effect mode is determined based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means being a specific hit among the hits. The display effect in the effect display device is executed as a display effect in which the hit effect image appears within the fluctuation time until the identification symbol is stopped and displayed by the identification symbol control means, so that the game ball at the grand prize opening The first effect execution means indicating that an opportunity for facilitating acceptance of the above is given, and the second effect mode based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means being a specific hit among the hits. When determined, the display effect on the predetermined effect display device is displayed in the period until the end of the fluctuation time and the predetermined period maintained by the closed state maintaining means after the end of the fluctuation time. It has a second effect executing means to be executed, and in the display effect executed by the second effect executing means, the hit effect image by the first effect executing means does not appear, and the identification symbol is stopped and displayed. The display effect that appeared on the predetermined effect display device within the fluctuation time until the above is maintained by the closed state maintaining means. The predetermined opening / closing means, which is continued until the predetermined period and is maintained in the closed state by the closed state maintaining means, starts operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the lottery by the lottery means is performed. Based on the fact that the result is a specific hit among the hits, it is determined that the information regarding the result of the lottery is shown in the first effect mode, and the first effect execution means is used until the identification symbol is stopped and displayed. after the display demonstration has been executed, in the predetermined period in which the predetermined opening and closing means by said closed state maintaining means until is maintained in the closed state the predetermined opening and closing means is operated, depending prior Symbol second demonstration execution means The gist is that a display urging the player to launch a game ball is performed without executing the display effect to be executed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which make up a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame which make up a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame. It is a front view of the outer frame. It is a rear view of the outer frame. 10 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB (A) and FIG. 12A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC (B), a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD (C), and a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE (D). It is a perspective view for demonstrating the attachment / detachment structure of the upper shaft support metal fitting of the main body frame, and the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view (A) and the perspective view (B) seen from the bottom which shows the attachment state of the lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of an outer frame. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the relationship between a shaft support pin and a lock member. It is a back view of the upper support metal fitting part for demonstrating the operation of the lock member. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of a door frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit and looked at from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the left unit of the side speaker illumination unit in the door frame base unit disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 26 viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view of the right unit of the side speaker illumination unit in the door frame base unit disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 28 viewed from behind. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the ball feed unit in the door frame base unit by disassembling. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a portion of the joint unit in the door frame base unit, and (B) is an exploded perspective view showing the joint unit in an exploded manner. (A) is a front perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit. It is a perspective view which shows the top lamp illumination unit diagonally from the front lower part. (A) is an exploded perspective view showing the top lamp illumination unit disassembled for each main configuration from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view showing (A) afterwards. It is an exploded perspective view which shows from the front together with the top lamp base by disassembling the top lamp reflector unit in the top lamp illumination unit. FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 35 later. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the left rotating lamp in the top lamp illumination unit by disassembling. It is an exploded perspective view which shows disassembled the right-handed rotating lamp in a top lamp illumination unit. It is an exploded perspective view which shows disassembled the central rotating lamp in a top lamp illumination unit. It is a front perspective view of a dish unit. It is a rear perspective view of a dish unit. It is a top view of the dish unit. It is sectional drawing of AA in FIG. 42. It is a rear view which shows the state which the dish back plate of a dish unit is removed. It is a perspective view which shows later with the plate back plate of the plate unit and the ball rental unit removed. It is an exploded perspective view which shows from the front by disassembling the dish unit for each main component. FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 46 from behind. It is an exploded perspective view which shows from the front by disassembling the dish unit main body in a dish unit. FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 48 from behind. It is a rear view which shows the 1st ball pulling mechanism in a dish unit. It is a perspective view which shows the 2nd ball pulling mechanism in a dish unit later. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the operation button unit in the dish unit by disassembling. It is the bottom view of the operation button unit board of the operation button unit in a dish unit with the board removed. It is the bottom perspective view which shows the main button of the operation button unit in a dish unit from the bottom. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the main button of the operation button unit in a dish unit by disassembling. It is sectional drawing of the handle device attached to the door frame. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between the operation handle part which constitutes a handle device, and a joint unit. It is an exploded perspective view of the operation handle part in a handle device. It is an operation diagram for demonstrating the operation of an operation handle part and a joint unit. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between the handle device and the hitting ball launching device provided in the main body frame. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state which connects the handle device and the hitting ball launching device. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball in the plate unit, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the second ball outlet and the flow of the game ball in the plate unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the horizontally long ball inlet and a storage dish in a dish unit. It is a front perspective view of a glass unit. It is an exploded perspective view which shows from the front by disassembling the glass unit. FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 65 later. It is a front view of the main body frame main body before mounting a part. It is a rear view of the main body frame main body before mounting a part. It is a side view of the main body frame main body before mounting a part. It is a perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame main body before mounting a component. It is a perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame which attached the component. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which supported the main body frame which attached the component to the outer frame, from the front. It is a rear view of the main body frame in which a component is attached. It is a perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame which attached the component. It is sectional drawing of the pachinko machine cut by the horizontal line in the middle (main control board box part) of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view seen from the front of the game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of the game board. It is a top view of the game board. It is an enlarged perspective view of the removal prevention mechanism part formed in a game board. It is a partial perspective view of the main body frame which shows the structure of the main body frame side with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of a game board. It is sectional drawing which shows the front component, the game panel, and the panel holder of a game board cut in the vertical direction in the assembled state. It is an exploded perspective view which viewed diagonally from the front by disassembling the front component, the game panel, the panel holder, etc. which mainly constitute a game board. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 83 viewed diagonally from the rear. It is the perspective view which shows from the diagonal rear with the main control board box fixed to the board board holder for a board. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view which is disassembled into a board holder for a board, a drawer holder, and a main control board box and shown diagonally from behind. It is the schematic of the exploded perspective view of the function display unit in a game board. It is the schematic of the function display sticker. It is a partial view which looked at the function display sticker of a game board through a game window. It is a perspective view (A) of the whole of the hitting ball launching apparatus, and the perspective view (B) in a state where the launching motor part is removed. It is an exploded perspective view of the hitting ball launching apparatus. It is a front view (A) which shows the relationship between a hitting ball launching apparatus and a launching rail, and a perspective view (B) of a launching motor part. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between a hitting ball launching apparatus and a launching rail in a state where the operation handle portion is not operated. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hitting ball launching apparatus and the launching rail in the state of operating the operation handle part. It is a plan view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C) seen from the front, and AA cross-sectional view (D) of the front view (B) of the slide member provided in the ball striking device. It is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of a prize ball tank. It is a top view which shows the pressure state of the ball in the discharge port part of the conventional prize ball tank (A), (B) and the prize ball tank (C) which concerns on this embodiment. It is a perspective view seen from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball passage unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. It is a perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball passage unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. It is sectional drawing (A) and plan view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of a tank rail member, and the upstream part of a ball passage unit. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the relationship between the main body frame, a ball passage unit, and a prize ball unit. It is a rear view which shows the relationship with a ball passage unit and a prize ball unit. It is a perspective view seen from the back of the ball passage unit. It is a front view of the ball passage unit. It is a side view for demonstrating the connection structure of a ball passage unit and a prize ball unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back side of a prize ball unit. It is a rear view for demonstrating the relationship between a payout motor and a sprocket as a payout member. It is a rear view for demonstrating the passage and driving relation of a prize ball unit. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a prize ball unit and a full tank unit. It is a perspective view of a full tank unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of a full tank unit. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of a full tank unit. It is a partially broken perspective view which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is sectional drawing which cut at the bottom rocking plate part provided in the full tank unit. It is sectional drawing which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is a rear perspective view which shows the relationship between a lock device and a main body frame. It is an enlarged side sectional view which shows the hooking structure to the main body frame of a lock device. It is a partial cross-sectional view cut in the horizontal direction at a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction of the pachinko machine. It is an enlarged sectional view which shows the detailed relationship between the lock device and the side wall of a main body frame. It is a side view (A) of the lock device, and the perspective view (B) seen from the front side. A perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the lock device, a perspective view (B) of a sliding rod for a glass door and a sliding rod for a main body frame slidably provided inside the U-shaped substrate of the lock device, (C). It is an exploded perspective view of a lock device. It is a front view for demonstrating the operation of the sliding rod for a glass door and the sliding rod for a main body frame. It is a front view for demonstrating the operation of the fraud prevention member. It is a perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back side. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back side of a substrate unit. It is a perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the front side. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of a substrate unit. It is a front view seen from the front side of the frame board holder which is the main body of a board unit. It is a rear view of the substrate holder for a frame. It is a rear view of a board unit. It is a rear view of the board unit with the payout control board box and the terminal board box removed. It is a top view which shows the connection relation of each board provided in a board unit. It is a schematic diagram which shows the electrical connection between a board unit and a game board. It is a part of the rear view of the pachinko machine showing the wiring between the payout control board and the board unit. It is a front view of the game board for demonstrating the cross-sectional part of the cross-sectional view of FIG. 138. FIG. 3 is a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 137. It is a perspective view seen from the back of the pachinko machine to which the cover body which concerns on 2nd Embodiment is attached, and the cover body is opened. It is a side view of the pachinko machine to which the cover body which concerns on 2nd Embodiment is attached. It is a pachinko machine to which the cover body which concerns on 2nd Embodiment is attached, and is the perspective view seen from the open side of the cover body. It is a pachinko machine to which the cover body which concerns on 2nd Embodiment is attached, and is the perspective view seen from the shaft support side of the cover body. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine to which the cover body which concerns on 2nd Embodiment is attached. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine with the cover body which concerns on 2nd Embodiment removed. It is a perspective view of the payout control board box which overlaps with the lower side part of the cover body which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a perspective view seen from the inside of the cover body which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a rear view for demonstrating the operation of the cylinder lock provided in the cover body which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 143 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. It is a BB sectional view of FIG. 143. It is a CC sectional view of FIG. 143. It is a front view of a game board. It is a perspective view of the game board viewed diagonally from the front right. It is a perspective view of the game board viewed diagonally from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board diagonally from the left rear. It is a perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main component and viewed diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the disassembled thing diagonally from the back. It is a perspective view of each device mounted on a game panel disassembled for each member and seen from diagonally front. It is a perspective view which looked at the attacker unit diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the side winning opening member diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view of the center accessory viewed diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the center accessory for each main member and looked at diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the frame member of a center accessory and looked at diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the base plate of a center accessory diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view of the start port unit of a center accessory viewed diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the start port unit and looked at diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view of the drive mechanism part of a start port unit disassembled and seen from diagonally front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main part of the drive mechanism part diagonally from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the sub liquid crystal unit diagonally from the front. It is a side view which looked at the mounting state of the sub liquid crystal unit from the right side. It is the perspective view which disassembled the sub liquid crystal unit and looked at diagonally from the front. It is a front view which shows the state which shielded the front of the sub liquid crystal unit by a 1st role unit and a 2nd role unit. It is a front view which shows the state which the front of the sub liquid crystal unit is open. It is a perspective view of the first accessory unit viewed diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view of the first accessory unit disassembled and viewed diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view of the right movable part unit of the first accessory unit disassembled and seen diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the 2nd role unit diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the 2nd role unit and looked at diagonally from the front. It is a right side view which shows the movable part unit of the 2nd role unit. It is the perspective view which disassembled the movable part unit and looked at diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the drive part of the 2nd role unit and looked at diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the drive part diagonally from the rear. It is a right side view which shows the operation of the movable part unit with respect to a sub liquid crystal unit. It is a perspective view which looked at the back unit diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the back unit and looked at diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view which saw the shutter type accessory of a back unit diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view of the shutter type accessory disassembled and seen diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view of the left inner shutter of a shutter type accessory disassembled and seen diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view of the left inner shutter viewed diagonally from the rear, and is an enlarged view of the main part thereof. It is a perspective view of the decorative plate of the left inner shutter viewed diagonally from the front, and an enlarged view of the main part thereof. It is a perspective view which looked at the right inner shutter of a shutter type accessory diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view of the left outer shutter of a shutter type accessory disassembled and seen diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view of the right outer shutter of a shutter type accessory viewed diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view of the drive part of a shutter type accessory disassembled and seen diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the state which opened each shutter diagonally from the front in the shutter type accessory. It is a perspective view of the lower accessory unit viewed diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view of the lower accessory unit disassembled and viewed diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view of the lower drive unit of the lower accessory unit disassembled and viewed diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the distribution effect device of the lower drive part unit and looked at diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the distribution part of the distribution effect apparatus and looked at diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the rocking drive part of a distribution effect device diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the rocking drive part diagonally from the rear. It is the perspective view which disassembled the elevating mechanism of the lower drive part unit and looked at diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the elevating mechanism and looked at diagonally from the rear. It is a front view of the lower drive part unit which shows the state which supplies a game ball to a distribution effect apparatus. It is a front view of the lower drive part unit which shows the state which raised the distribution effect apparatus. It is a front view of the lower drive part unit which shows the state which the distribution part of a distribution effect apparatus is inclined to the left. It is a front view of the lower drive part unit which shows the state which the distribution part of a distribution effect apparatus is inclined to the right. It is a perspective view of the game medium supply mechanism of the lower accessory unit viewed diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the game medium supply mechanism and looked at diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the game medium supply mechanism and looked at diagonally from the rear. It is a perspective view of the passage formation unit of the lower accessory unit viewed diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the passage formation unit diagonally from the rear. It is a perspective view which shows the operation by the return passage of the passage formation unit. It is a perspective view which shows the operation by the discharge passage of the passage formation unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the other structure in the back box unit from the diagonal front. It is a perspective view which looked at diagonally from the front by disassembling other configurations. It is a perspective view of the horizontal decoration unit disassembled and viewed diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the movable decorative part of the horizontal decoration unit and looked at diagonally from the front. It is the perspective view which disassembled the horizontal base member and looked at diagonally from the front. It is a block diagram of a main board and a peripheral board. It is a block diagram which shows the real-time clock function in particular among the functions of a peripheral control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power failure occurrence. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special control process. It is a flowchart which shows the start opening winning process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing during fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot game start processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit game start processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot game processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a small hit game processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the table structure in the random number storage means for a special symbol. It is a front view which shows the other form of the function display unit. It is a table which shows each characteristic for each type of jackpot. It is a figure which shows an example of the variation pattern table which can be usually selected in the external unfavorable game state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the sub-main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of 16ms steady-state processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the decorative symbol variation start processing (step S1210). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the stop symbol determination process (step S1225a) in the 1st effect mode. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the stop symbol determination process (step S1225b) in the 2nd effect mode. (A) is a diagram for explaining an extension effect pattern at the time of a big hit, (b) is a diagram for explaining an extension effect pattern at the time of a small hit, and (c) is a diagram for explaining a challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a big hit. It is a figure for demonstrating, and (d) is a figure for demonstrating the challenge bonus production pattern at the time of a small hit. It is a time chart which shows an example of the display effect which appears in the liquid crystal display device 1400 when any one of the effect commands "01H" to "04H" is received from the main control MPU 4100a side. It is a time chart which shows an example of the display effect which appears in the liquid crystal display device 1400 when any one of the effect commands "09H" to "11H" is received from the main control MPU 4100a side. (A) is a table showing the jackpot expectation when in the first production mode for each production content series, and (b) is the challenge bonus rush expectation when in the second production mode. It is a table which shows each production content series separately. It is a time chart which shows another example about the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "01H" in the 1st effect mode. It is a time chart which shows another example about the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "02H" in the 1st effect mode.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko machine according to the embodiment and the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 6 is an outer frame, a main body frame, a game board, It is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the door frame, and FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame constituting the pachinko machine.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 7, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is pivotally supported by an outer frame 2 installed on an island (not shown) of a game hall and an outer frame 2 and is a game board. A game window 101 and its game window 101 in which a player can visually recognize a main body frame 3 on which the 4 can be mounted, and a game area 605 formed on the game board 4 which is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 and into which a ball is driven. The door frame 5 is provided with a dish unit 300 as a storage dish for storing balls that are arranged below and paid out as a result of the game.

A cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 for reinforcing the decorative cover plate 15 is fixed to the outer frame 2 in front of the lower portion. Further, in addition to the game board 4 being detachably attached to the main body frame 3 as described above, the ball striking device 650 (see FIG. 5) is attached to the lower part of the back surface thereof, and the door frame 5 and the main body excluding the game board 4 are attached. A board unit 1100 provided with various control boards, power supply boards, etc. for controlling electrical components provided in the frame 3 is attached, and covers the rear opening 580 (see FIG. 6) of the main body frame 3. The cover body 1250 is detachably provided. Further, in addition to the plate unit 300 described above, the door frame 5 is provided with a glass unit 450 and a handle device 400 so as to close the game window 101. The door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 have substantially the same square size when viewed from the front, so that the main body frame 3 cannot be visually recognized from the front. Hereinafter, the members constituting the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail.

[1-1. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16. 8 is a front perspective view of the outer frame 2, FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame 2, FIG. 10 is a front view of the outer frame 2, and FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame 2. 12 is a rear view of the outer frame 2, FIG. 12 is a sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 10, a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 12A, and a sectional view taken along the line DD (C). , EE sectional view (D). Further, FIG. 13 is a perspective view for explaining a detachable structure between the upper shaft support metal fitting of the main body frame and the upper support metal fitting of the outer frame, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of a lock member provided on the back surface of the upper support metal fitting of the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view (A) which shows the mounting state, and the perspective view (B) which is seen from the bottom. Further, FIG. 15 is a back view of the upper support metal fitting portion for explaining the relationship between the shaft support pin and the lock member, and FIG. 16 is a back view of the upper support metal fitting portion for explaining the operation of the lock member.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 according to the present embodiment includes upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and lower frame plates 11 extending in the horizontal direction, and left and right side frame plates 12 extending in the vertical (vertical) direction. , 13 are assembled in a square shape by connecting with a connecting member 19 for connecting the respective ends. Specifically, the connecting member 19 is formed in a podium shape with a step between the center and the left and right, and the protruding central portion is formed in the center of both ends of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The back surface of the upper frame plate 10 and the upper surface of the lower frame plate 11 are in contact with the flat surfaces of the left and right portions that are fitted to the portions 20 and are lowered by one step, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 are attached to one side surface of the left and right portions that are lowered by one step. The inner surface of the is in contact with each other.

Then, in that state, the insertion holes 21 formed on both sides of the engaging notch 20 of the upper frame plate 10 and both sides of the engaging notch 20 of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right one steps of the connecting member 19 are lowered. Although it is displayed on the connecting member 19 that connects the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 of FIG. 9 (two in the case of the drawing) of the plurality of connecting holes 22 formed on the plane of the portion of the above, the other connecting member 19 It is fastened with a plurality of connecting screws 23 (two in the case of the drawing) from above or below in accordance with (also present in the above), and further, a plurality of (two in the case of the drawing) are bored in the upper and lower ends of the side frame plates 12 and 13. A plurality of (two in the case of the drawing) mounting holes 24 and a plurality of (three in the case of the drawing) connecting holes 25 formed on the side surfaces of the left and right portions lowered by one step of the connecting member 19 are matched and a plurality (three in the case of the drawing) from the lateral outside. By fastening with the connecting screws 26 and 27 (three in the case of the figure), the upper and lower upper frame plates 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 are firmly connected and fixed. However, of the three connecting screws 26 and 27, one connecting screw 27 does not connect the side frame plates 12 and 13 and the connecting member 19, but connects to the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11. The member 19 is directly connected from the side.

Of the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 and the side frame plates 12 and 13 constituting the outer frame 2, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wood as before, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 Is composed of a lightweight metal, for example, an extruded plate of an aluminum alloy. The reason why the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are made of the same wooden material as before is that when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on an island lined up in a game hall, a predetermined angle is set with respect to the vertical surface of the island. It is necessary to perform the fixing work, but such work is performed by driving nails to the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the island, so that the nails can be easily driven. On the other hand, the reason why the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of an extruded aluminum alloy plate is that the wall thickness can be formed thinner while maintaining the strength as compared with the conventional wood, so that the inside of the side frame plates 12 and 13 is formed. The left and right widths when viewed from the front of the side walls 540 to 543 (see FIG. 69) of the main body frame 3 adjacent to the main frame 3 can be widened. Therefore, the game board 4 having a large size in the left-right direction can be mounted on the main body frame 3, and as a result, the game area 605 of the game board 4 can be formed large.

If the side frame plates 12 and 13 are made of aluminum alloy flat plates, sufficient rigidity cannot be ensured. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12C, the side frame plates 12 (the side frame plates 13 also have exactly the same structure). A space 28 (the space 28 of the side frame plate 13 is shown in FIG. 11) is formed inside the rear portion of the rear portion by a rib and is drawn out so that the wall thickness h1 of the rear portion becomes thick. There is. Of course, this wall thickness h1 has a size equal to or slightly thinner than the conventional wooden wall thickness.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12 (B) and 12 (D), in front of the space 28 of the side frame plate 12, a groove 29 (side) into which one of the left and right portions lowered by one step of the connecting member 19 is fitted. The groove 29 of the frame plate 13 is shown in FIG. 8). As shown in FIGS. 12 (B) to 12 (D), the side frame plate 12 from the groove 29 to the front end has a flat plate shape whose inner side surface is in contact with the other portion of the left and right portions of the connecting member 19 lowered by one step. However, a shallow recess is formed in the flat plate portion for reducing the material. Further, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 12 (B), a recess 30 (side frame) into which the hanging piece portion 53 of the upper support metal fitting 45 is inserted is inserted into the opposite surface (outer surface) on which the groove portion 29 is formed. The recess 30 of the plate 13 is formed (shown in FIG. 9).

Then, in addition to the configuration for attaching the connecting member 19, the hanging piece portion 53 of the upper support metal fitting 45 is placed on the outer side of the side frame plate 12 on the shaft support side formed as described above. A mounting hole 31 for fastening with the fastening screw 32 is bored in the bearing screw 32, and the fastening screw 34 aligns with the mounting hole 69 formed in the vertical contact piece 72 of the lower support metal fitting 66 at the lower portion thereof. A mounting hole 33 for fastening is bored. Further, a mounting hole 35 for fastening the side frame plate 12 and the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 with the fastening screw 36 is formed in the lower portion of the mounting hole 33 and in the front portion of the side frame plate 12.

On the other hand, in the side frame portion 13 on the open side, in addition to the configuration for mounting the connecting member 19, a mounting hole 37 for mounting the closing protrusion 38 with the mounting screw 39 is bored in the upper portion thereof, and is closed in the lower portion thereof. A mounting hole 40 for mounting the protrusion 41 with the mounting screw 42 is bored, and a mounting hole 43 for fastening the side frame plate 13 and the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 with the fastening screw 44 is provided at the lowermost position. It is formed.

The closing protrusions 38 and 41 are attached to the hook portion 1054, 1065 of the locking device 1000 along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 (FIG. 121). (See), and as will be described in detail later, the hook portion 1054, 1065 and the closing protrusions 38, 41 are connected by inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and rotating it in one direction. The engagement can be disengaged and the main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

Further, the cover reinforcing metal fittings 14 fixed to the lower front surface of the lower frame plate 11 and the left and right side frame plates 12 and 13 have the main body frame 3 mounted on the upper surface thereof when closed, and the cover reinforcing metal fittings 14 The surface and side surfaces of the are covered with a decorative cover plate 15. A guide plate 18 for smoothly guiding the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed is replaceably mounted on the upper surface of the outer frame 2 on the open side of the decorative cover plate 15.

By the way, as a structure for pivotally supporting the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, the upper support metal fitting 45 and the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 which also have a function of connecting the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 are attached along one side upper surface. A lower support metal fitting 66 is provided. The upper support metal fitting 45 is formed with a support hook hole 47 formed by bending the support protrusion 46 protruding forward from the side of the support protrusion 46 toward the center of the tip, and the support hook 47 is formed. The shaft support pin 504 (see FIG. 71) of the upper shaft support metal fitting 503 of the main body frame 3 to be described later is detachably engaged with the hole 47.

Further, the lower support metal fitting 66 is also formed in a shape protruding forward, and a support protrusion 68 is projected upward at the protruding portion, and the frame support plate 506 (described later) of the main body frame 3 is projected onto the support protrusion 68. The support hole formed in (see FIG. 72) is inserted. Therefore, in order to support the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2, after engaging the support hole formed in the frame support plate 506 of the main body frame 3 with the support protrusion 68 of the lower support metal fitting 66, the main body frame 3 By hooking the shaft support pin 504 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 503 to the support hook hole 47, the shaft can be easily opened and closed.

Further, the upper support metal fitting 45 is attached to the mounting step portion 49 formed in a concave shape on the upper surface and the front surface of the upper frame plate 10 on the shaft support side, and is formed on the upper support metal fitting 45 when the upper support metal fitting 45 is attached. The mounting screws 51 are inserted from above so that the plurality of mounting holes 48 (two in the figure) and the plurality of mounting holes 50 (two in the figure) bored in the mounting step 49 are aligned with each other, and the upper frame is inserted. The upper support metal fitting 45 is firmly fixed to the upper frame plate 10 by fastening to the holding plate 52 pressed from the back surface of the plate 10.

Further, on the outer side of the upper support metal fitting 45, there is a hanging piece portion 53 that abuts on the outside of the side frame plate 12, and a mounting hole is formed in the hanging piece portion 53, and the mounting hole and the mounting hole 31 are formed. The upper support metal fitting 45 and the side frame plate 12 are fixed by fastening with the fastening screw 32, and the upper frame plate 10 and the side frame plate 12 are connected via the upper support metal fitting 45. ..

On the other hand, the lower support metal fitting 66 is fastened with the fastening screw 34 in a state where the mounting hole 33 of the side frame plate 12 and the mounting hole 69 of the vertical contact piece 72 are aligned as described above, and further, the lower support fitting 66 is further supported. By inserting the mounting screw 71 into the mounting hole 70 formed in the middle of the horizontal plane of the metal fitting 66, the metal fitting 66 is fastened to the upper surface of the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 via the decorative cover plate 15.

In the outer frame 2 configured as described above, the connecting member 19 is formed by connecting the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 which are the constituent members by the connecting member 19. Since it is fixed in close contact with the inner surfaces of the plates 12 and 13 and is fixed in a state where the connecting member 19, the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11 are engaged with each other, the assembling strength is high and a sturdy square shape is formed. It can be a framework. In addition to the engagement state between the connecting member 19 and the upper frame plate 10 and the lower frame plate 11, when the connecting member 19 is attached to the side frame plates 12 and 13, the left and right sides of the connecting member 19 are lowered by one step in the groove 29. Since one part of the portion is fitted, the attachment of the connecting member 19 to the side frame plates 12 and 13 becomes strong, which also improves the strength of the rectangular frame and accurately positions the connecting member 19. Can be done.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, when the upper support metal fitting 45 is attached to a predetermined position after connecting the upper frame plate 10, the lower frame plate 11, and the side frame plates 12 and 13 by the connecting member 19. Since there is no member protruding outward from the outer surface (outer peripheral surface) of each of the frame plates 10, 11, 12, and 13, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on a pachinko island platform (not shown), an adjacent device (for example, It can be installed in close contact with the adjacent ball lender). Further, even when the lower support metal fitting 66 is attached, the upper surface of the cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 and the upper surface of the lower support metal fitting 66 are substantially flush with each other.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 14, a lock member 80 is rotatably supported on the back surface of the upper support metal fitting 45 for rotatably supporting the main body frame 3. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 14A, the support projecting piece 46 of the upper support metal fitting 45 has a tip portion formed as an arcuate flat plate and is perpendicular to the outer edge of the support project piece 46. A hanging wall 46a that is bent into a right angle is formed. The hanging wall 46a can improve the strength of the support protruding piece 46 of the upper support metal fitting 45, and also make the lock member 80 described below invisible when viewed from the front to improve the appearance. The lock member 80 is used as a portion where the tip contact portion of the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80, which will be described next, comes into contact with the elastic piece 80c, or is used as a stop portion so that the lock member 80 does not protrude outward from the support protruding piece 46. Further, the support hook hole 47 formed in the support protrusion piece 46 is formed by bending so as to be slightly inclined inward from the side opposite to the side where the hanging wall 46a is not formed and further toward the center of the tip. Has been done. The groove size of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 47 is formed to be slightly larger than the diameter of the shaft support pin 504.

Further, the above-mentioned hanging wall 46a is formed by being bent at a right angle from the front inlet end of the support hook hole 47 along the outer edge of the support protrusion piece 46 and the upper support metal fitting 45, and the support hook hole 47. It is bent inward at the front entrance end of the hook to form a stop hook 47a. Further, a mounting hole 46b is formed substantially in the center of the support protruding piece 46, and the lock member 80 is rotatably supported by the rivet 81 in the mounting hole 46b. The lock member 80 is molded of synthetic resin, and the stopper portion 80a and the operation portion 80b are formed in an L shape, and an arc-shaped elastic piece 80c is integrally extended on the opposite side of the operation portion 80b. It is installed. A mounting hole 80d through which the rivet 81 is inserted is formed in the L-shaped base formed by the stopper portion 80a and the operating portion 80b. When the lock member 80 is attached to the mounting hole 46b by the rivet 81 and rotatably fixed to the back surface of the support projecting piece 46, the tip of the elastic piece 80c abuts as shown in FIG. 14 (B). The portion is in contact with the inner surface of the hanging wall 46a, and the stopper portion 80a closes the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 47. Further, at this time, the tip portion of the stopper portion 80a is not in a state of closing the leading space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 47. That is, in a normal state, a space is formed in the head space portion of the support hook hole 47 into which the shaft support pin 504 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 503 of the main body frame 3 is inserted.

By the way, the shaft support pin 504 is inserted into the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 47, and the tip side of the stopper portion 80a faces the stop hanging portion 47a of the inlet end portion (in this state). In the normal axial support state where there is a slight gap between the tip side of the stopper portion 80a and the stop hanging portion 47a and the stop hanging portion 47a is not in contact with each other), the support hook hole 47 formed by bending. The centers of the shaft support pin 504 located in the tip space portion of the inclined hole portion and the tip surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a are respectively displaced in the oblique direction and face each other. In this normal shaft support state, the shaft support pin 504 that supports the heavy main body frame 3 is in contact with the tip end portion of the support hook hole 47, so that the shaft support pin 504 Since the load on the tip surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a is hardly applied, the load is not applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80. Further, as shown in FIG. 15A, the lock member 80 is formed in an arc shape so that the lock member 80 rotates smoothly when the tip surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a rotates by operating the operation portion 80b. .. In the figure, the arc center of the arc-shaped tip surface 80e is the center of the rivet 81 (the center of rotation of the lock member 80).

Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft support pin 504 comes out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 47 and comes into contact with the arcuate tip surface 80e, the acting force F is applied to the shaft. The component force F1 (in the normal direction of the arc of the arcuate tip surface 80e) acting on the contact portion between the support pin 504 and the arcuate tip surface 80e, and the inclined hole portion of the shaft support pin 504 and the support hook hole 47. When divided into a component force F2 that acts on the contact portion with the inner surface on one side, the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the rivet 81 (the center of rotation of the lock member 80), so that the stopper of the lock member 80 The moment for rotating the tip of the portion 80a in the direction away from the support protruding piece 46 (clockwise in the figure) does not work, and the shaft support pin 504 is inclined between the tip of the stopper portion 80a of the lock member 80 and the support hook hole 47. Holds the state of being sandwiched between the inner surface on one side of the hole. Therefore, even in the normal shaft support state or in the state where the acting force of the shaft support pin 504 is applied to the lock member 80, the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 is not constantly loaded, and the elasticity is integrally formed of the synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the piece 80c, and prevent the shaft support pin 504 from falling out of the support hook hole 47 for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied and the tip of the stopper 80a of the lock member 80 is rotated in a direction (clockwise in the figure) to be separated from the support protrusion 46, one side of the tip of the stopper 80a Does not rotate in the direction of contacting the stop hanging portion 47a and further disengaging, so that the lock member 80 does not protrude to the outside of the support projecting piece 46.

Further, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 15A, the arc center of the arc-shaped tip surface 80e of the stopper portion 80a is the center of the rivet 81 (the center of rotation of the lock member 80), so that the shaft support pin 504 is A rotation moment is not generated in the lock member 80 even if an acting force F in a direction of coming out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 47 is applied. However, as shown in FIG. 15B, a stopper When the radius of curvature of the arcuate tip surface 80f of the portion 80a is further reduced and the shaft support position of the lock member 80 by the rivet 81 is set inside the support protrusion piece 46, the shaft support pin 504 tilts the support hook hole 47. When an acting force F is applied in the direction of coming out along the inclination of the shaped hole and abuts on the arcuate tip surface 80f, the acting force F abuts on the shaft support pin 504 and the arcuate tip surface 80f. The component force F1 acting on the portion (the normal direction of the arc of the arcuate tip surface 80f) and the component force acting on the contact portion between the shaft support pin 504 and the inner surface on one side of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 47. When divided into F2 and F2, a rotational moment acts by the component force F1 to rotate the lock member 80 in the direction of the arrow (clockwise rotation direction) shown in the figure, but even if the lock member 80 rotates, the tip of the stopper portion 80a is one. Since the side only abuts on the stop hanging portion 47a, the lock member 80 does not protrude to the outside of the support projecting piece 46, and no load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80.

That is, the point that can be understood from the embodiments shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B is that the acting force in the direction in which the shaft support pin 504 comes out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 47. When F is applied and comes into contact with the tip surfaces 80e and 80f, a rotational moment that rotates the lock member 80 by the component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the shaft support pin 504 of the acting force F and the tip surfaces 80e and 80f. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 80 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 81) at a position where No load is applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80 at all times, and even if the lock member 80 rotates, only one side of the tip of the stopper portion 80a comes into contact with the stop hanging portion 47a. The member 80 does not protrude to the outside of the support projecting piece 46. Even if the shape of the tip surface of the stopper portion 80a is not arcuate, the tip portion of the lock member 80 is directed toward the outside of the support protruding piece 46 at a position where a rotational moment is not generated by the action of the component force F1 described above. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 80 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 81) at a position where a rotational moment to rotate is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80, and the lock member The applicant has confirmed that the lock member 80 does not protrude to the outside of the support protruding piece 46 because even if the 80 rotates, one side of the tip of the stopper portion 80a only abuts on the stop hanging portion 47a. doing.

The operation of the lock member 80 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIG. Assuming that the main body frame 3 is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, the support protrusion 68 of the lower support metal fitting 66 is formed in a support hole (not shown) formed in the frame support plate 506 (see FIG. 71) of the main body frame 3. Must be inserted. Under such a premise, as shown in FIG. 16A, by pushing the shaft support pin 504 of the upper shaft support metal fitting 503 of the main body frame 3 into contact with the side surface of the stopper portion 80a of the lock member 80, FIG. As shown in 16 (B), since the lock member 80 rotates the elastic piece 80c counterclockwise while deforming it, the shaft support pin 504 can be inserted into the support hook hole 47. Then, when the shaft support pin 504 reaches the head space portion of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 47, the shaft support pin 504 and the front end side surface of the stopper portion 80a do not come into contact with each other as shown in FIG. 16C. Therefore, the lock member 80 is urged by the elastic force of the elastic piece 80c to rotate clockwise, and the stopper portion 80a of the lock member 80 returns to the normal state again to close the inlet portion of the support hook hole 47, and at the same time, at the same time. The tip portion of the stopper portion 80a faces the shaft support pin 504 so that the shaft support pin 504 does not fall out of the support hook hole 47. Then, as shown in FIG. 16D, this state is maintained even when the main body frame 3 is completely closed or during the normal opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3. Next, in order to remove the shaft support pin 504 from the support hook hole 47, as shown in FIG. 16E, a finger is inserted into the back surface of the support protrusion piece 46 and the operation portion 80b of the lock member 80 is turned counterclockwise. By rotating, the lock member 80 rotates against the elastic force of the elastic piece 80c, and the tip portion of the stopper portion 80a is in a state of being retracted from the support hook hole 47. Therefore, the shaft support pin 504 is supported by the support hook. It can be taken out from the hole 47. After that, the main body frame 3 can be removed from the outer frame 2 by lifting the main body frame 3 and disengaging the support hole formed in the frame support plate 506 from the support protrusion 68 of the lower support metal fitting 66. ..

As described above, in the lock member 80 provided on the upper support metal fitting 45 of the outer frame 2 according to the second embodiment, the stopper portion 80a, the operation portion 80b, and the elastic piece 80c are integrally formed of synthetic resin. Therefore, it can be attached to the back surface of the upper support metal fitting 45 extremely easily, and since it has an extremely simple structure, there are few failures and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the shaft support pin 504 comes out along the inclination of the inclined hole portion of the support hook hole 47 and comes into contact with the tip surfaces 80e and 80f, the shaft support pin 504 of the acting force F The locking member 80 is rotated at a position where no rotational moment is generated by the component force F1 acting on the contact portion between the tip surfaces 80e and 80f, or the locking member 80 is rotated toward the outside of the support protruding piece 46 by the tip portion. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 80 (the shaft fixed by the rivet 81) at the position where the rotation moment is generated, no load is always applied to the elastic piece 80c of the lock member 80, and the lock member 80 is integrated with the synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the formed elastic piece 80c, prevent the shaft support pin 504 from falling out of the support hook hole 47 for a long period of time, and prevent the lock member 80 from falling off from the support hook hole 47, and even if the lock member 80 rotates, the stopper portion Since one side of the tip of the 80a only abuts on the stop hanging portion 47a, the lock member 80 does not protrude to the outside of the support protrusion 46.

[1-2. Overall configuration of door frame]
Next, the door frame 5 provided on the front surface side of the main body frame 3 so as to be openable and closable will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 22. FIG. 17 is a front view of the door frame, and FIG. 18 is a rear view of the door frame. Further, FIG. 19 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, and FIG. 20 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the door frame.

As shown in FIGS. 17, 18, 21, and 22, the door frame 5 is a door frame base unit having a game window 101 having an outer shape formed into a vertically long rectangular shape and an inner peripheral shape having a vertically long polygonal shape. 100, a horizontally long top lamp lighting unit 200 attached to the upper part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a dish unit 300 attached to the lower part of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. A glass unit 450 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the game window 101, and a security cover 470 attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear side of the glass unit 450. And have. Although detailed description will be described later, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 is provided with side speaker illumination units 120 on both the left and right sides of the game window 101, and the side speaker illumination unit 120 and the top lamp electric are provided. The outer periphery of the game window 101 is surrounded by the decoration unit 200 and the plate unit 300. Further, the door frame 5 is provided with a handle device 400 for driving a game ball on the left side (open side) of the plate unit 300 when viewed from the front.

[1-2A. Door frame base unit]
Subsequently, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 23 to 31. FIG. 23A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 23B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. FIG. 24 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the left unit of the side speaker illumination unit in the door frame base unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 26 viewed from the rear. FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view of the right unit of the side speaker illumination unit in the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 28 as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view showing the ball feed unit in the door frame base unit in an exploded manner. Further, FIG. 31A is an enlarged perspective view showing a portion of the joint unit in the door frame base unit, and FIG. 31B is an exploded perspective view showing the joint unit in an exploded manner.

As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base main body having a game window 101 having an outer shape formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game window 101 penetrating in the front-rear direction and having an inner circumference formed in a vertically long polygonal shape. The 110, the side speaker lighting unit 120 fixed to the left and right sides of the game window 101 on the front side of the door frame base body 110, and the metal frame-shaped reinforcing sheet metal 140 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110. A horizontally long mounting base 160 fixed to the rear side of the reinforcing sheet metal 140, and a ball feeding unit 170 fixed to the mounting base 160 and sending game balls supplied from the plate unit 300 one by one to the hitting ball launching device 650. It is arranged substantially below the ball feed unit 170 fixed via the reinforcing sheet metal 140 and the mounting base 160 on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, and the rotation operation of the operation handle portion 410 in the handle device 400 is performed by the ball launching device 650. It mainly includes a joint unit 180 that transmits to the door.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 corresponds to the lower left decorative substrate 190 fixed to the lower left side of the game window 101 on the front side of the door frame base main body 110 and the ball removal path 393 of the dish unit 300 in the door frame base main body 110. A ball removal path cover 191 that closes the ball removal path opening 112 formed at the position, a door decoration drive board 192 that is fixed below the game window 101 on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, and a door decoration drive. The door decorative drive board cover 193 that covers the board 192 from the rear, the handle relay terminal plate 194 that is fixed directly above the joint unit 180 on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body under the game window 101. A wiring cover 195 that closes the wiring accommodation groove 110b formed on the rear side of the 110 and capable of accommodating the wiring from the lower left decorative board 190 and the handle relay terminal plate 194 from the rear side, and the left and right upper parts of the game window 101, respectively. A stop lever 196 that is rotatably supported on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110 is provided.

In the door frame base unit 100 of this example, the overall rigidity is increased by fixing a reinforcing sheet metal 140 obtained by assembling a metal sheet metal with rivets or the like to the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. At the same time, it has enough strength to sufficiently support the top lamp lighting unit 200, the plate unit 300, and the like.

Further, a plurality of LEDs 190a are mounted on the front surface of the lower left decorative substrate 190 of the door frame base unit 100, so that the left end portion of the dish unit 300, which will be described later, can be light-emitting and decorated. On the other hand, the door decoration drive board 192 is provided in the illuminated parts and electric parts (LEDs and lamps mounted on each board and the like, the speakers 121 and 391, and the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400) provided in the door frame 5. The wiring from the switch, ball rental unit 301, operation button unit 370, etc.) is integrated and connected, and the wiring from the door decoration drive board 192 is incorporated into the board unit 1100 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. It is connected to the prize ball payout control board 1186 via 1102 or the like and the main control board 4100 (see FIG. 166) of the main control board box 624 attached to the game board 4.

[1-2A-1. Door frame base body]
First, as shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a vertically long frame shape by synthetic resin, penetrates in the front-rear direction, and has a vertically long inner shape and is polygonal. The game window 101 having a shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. The width of the upper side and the left and right side sides of the door frame base body 110 formed by the game window 101 is the upper reinforcing sheet metal 141, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 142, and the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140 described later. The width is substantially the same as the width of the game window 101, and the game window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in the front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 arranged on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be visually recognized from the player side, and a wider game area than the conventional pachinko machine can be easily formed. It has become.

Further, below the game window 101 in the door frame base main body 110, there is a prize ball passage port 111 through which the prize ball communication gutter 343 of the plate unit 300 penetrates above the shaft support side (left side in front view), and a prize ball. A ball removal path opening 112 formed at a position corresponding to the ball removal path 393 in the dish unit 300 below the passage port 111, and a ball for mounting the ball feed unit 170 on the upper part of the open side (right side in front view). The feed opening 113, the lock hole 114 through which the cylinder lock 1010 described later is inserted closer to the open side of the ball feed opening 113, and the cam insertion opening 115 through which the cam 416 of the handle device 400 can be inserted below the ball feed opening 113. And are formed so as to penetrate the door frame base main body 110, respectively.

Further, the door frame base main body 110 has a mounting opening 116 for mounting the mounting elastic piece 473 of the security cover 470 and a mounting opening 116 on each of the left and right sides of the lower end of the game window 101, which will be described in detail later. Speaker openings 117, which are arranged on the outside and allow the rear ends of the left and right lower side speakers 121 of the side speaker lighting unit 120 to be described later to escape, are formed so as to penetrate each of them.

Further, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, a glass unit support step 110a which is recessed substantially along the inner circumference of the game window 101 and the front outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 450 can come into contact with the glass unit, and the game window 101. A wiring accommodating groove 110b formed by being recessed to the front side at a position substantially corresponding to the front surface of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 on the lower side and capable of accommodating wiring, and a cam insertion opening 115 which is recessed toward the front side and a joint unit 180 is attached. It is provided with a joint unit mounting recess 110c for the purpose.

Further, on the rear side of the door frame base main body 110, door frame projecting pieces 110d, 110e are formed so as to project a predetermined amount rearward from the lower side thereof, and these door frame projecting pieces 110d, 110e are the main body frame 3 described later. The door frame 5 is positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3 by being inserted into the engaging grooves 584 and 585 of the door frame 5. The amount of protrusion of the door frame projecting piece 110d to the rear is formed to be larger than the amount of projecting of the door frame projecting piece 110e.

Further, as shown in the figure, the door frame base main body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110h projecting forward for fixing the top lamp illumination unit 200 on the upper front surface thereof, and on the rear surface thereof. , A stop lever mounting portion 110i for rotatably supporting the stop lever 196 is provided. In addition, the door frame base body 110 is formed with a large number of mounting bosses and mounting holes for fixing the side speaker illumination unit 120, the reinforcing sheet metal 140, the mounting base 160, the plate unit 300, and the like at appropriate positions. ing.

[1-2A-2. Side speaker illumination unit]
Subsequently, the side speaker lighting unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100 lights the left and right sides of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame 5 (light emitting decoration), and four arranged at the four corners of the game window 101. The side speaker 121 can emit predetermined music, sound effects, etc. to the player, and the left side speaker lighting unit 120L arranged on the shaft support side (left side in front view) of 101 of the game window. And the right side speaker lighting unit 120R arranged on the open side (right side in the front view) of the game window 101. The side speaker illumination unit 120 includes a vertically long illumination unit 122 and an acoustic unit 130 having side speakers 121 arranged above and below the illumination unit 122 in each of the left and right units, and the left and right units are substantially symmetrical. It is composed.

More specifically, the illumination portion 122 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 includes a vertically long semi-cylindrical and transparent side illumination lens 123 and a side illumination lens 123, as shown in FIGS. 26 to 29. A transparent side illumination reflector 124 arranged on the rear side and forming a column together with the side illumination lens 123, a side illumination base 125 arranged on the rear side of the side illumination reflector 124, and a side illumination base 125. The side decoration substrate 126 fixed to the rear side, and the upper and lower ends of the side illumination lens 123 and the side illumination reflector 124 are formed so as to wrap from the front side, respectively, and are attached to the side illumination base 125 to form the side illumination lens. After the side illuminated flash cover 127 that supports 123 and the side illuminated reflector 124, the translucent flash lens 128 that closes the flash opening 127a of the side illuminated flash cover 127 from the rear side, and the flash lens 128. It is provided with a flash substrate 129 arranged on the side and supported on the front surface of the side illumination base 125.

The illumination unit 122 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 has a plurality of color LEDs 126a capable of emitting light in various colors at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction on the front surface of the side illumination substrate 126, and high brightness above and below the plurality of LEDs 126a. White LED 126b and the above are mounted respectively. Further, openings 124a and 125a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 126a and 126b of the side illumination substrate 126 on the side illumination reflector 124 and the side illumination base 125, respectively, and the side decoration substrate is formed. Light from the LEDs 126a and 126b mounted on the 126 can be emitted forward through the opening 125a of the side illumination base 125 and the opening 124a of the side illumination reflector 124.

Further, in the illumination unit 122, inside the transparent cylinder of the side illumination lens 123 and the side illumination reflector 124, the entire inner circumference of the side illumination lens 123 and a part of the inner circumference of the side illumination reflector 124. The side lens sheet 123a having a substantially U-shaped cross section is arranged in this way. The side lens sheet 123a is formed of a known optical sheet that makes transmitted light or reflected light look like a pearl or a bright color. From the player's point of view, the side lens sheet 123a causes the side illumination lens 123a. And, it is possible to give an appearance as if a fluorescent tube (fluorescent tube) is arranged in a transparent columnar (pipe) formed by the side illuminated reflector 124.

Further, in the illumination unit 122, the side illumination reflector 124 is provided with a dividing wall 124b that divides the plurality of openings 124a formed corresponding to the plurality of LEDs 126a of the side decoration substrate 126 into three groups in the vertical direction. The split wall 124b prevents light from a predetermined LED 126a from entering another group. That is, the dividing wall 124b makes it possible to clearly divide the fluorescent tube formed by the side illumination lens 123 and the side illumination reflector 124 into three upper, middle, and lower parts. Therefore, by appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 126a mounted on the side decorative substrate 126, the fluorescent tube can be made to emit light entirely or partially, or light can be emitted in various colors for each of the upper, middle, and lower parts. Can be done.

Further, the side illumination reflector 124 is formed with a lens recess 124c recessed from the front side at a position corresponding to the upper and lower LEDs 126b on the side decoration substrate 126, and a semicircular sub lens from the front side is formed in the lens recess 124c. 122a (see FIGS. 28 and 29) is to be inserted. The illumination unit 122 of this example is a fluorescent tube formed by the side illumination lens 123 and the side illumination reflector 124 by causing only the LED 126b to emit strong light before the sub lens 122a and the LED 126b emit light. It is possible to produce a light emission effect that makes it light up after only both ends shine, just like a real fluorescent lamp.

Further, the illumination unit 122 is provided with a flashlight 129a (for example, an ultra-bright white LED or the like) capable of emitting strong light on the front surface of the flash substrate 129 supported on the rear side of the side illumination flash cover 127. By emitting the flashlight 129a, the flashlight can be emitted to the player side.

The acoustic unit 130 of the side speaker lighting unit 120 is a substantially disk made of a speaker decoration 131 arranged at the foremost portion and having a substantially circular speaker opening 131a and a punching metal that closes the speaker opening 131a of the speaker decoration 131 from the rear side. A speaker cover 132 having a shape, a decorative spacer 133 arranged behind the speaker cover 132, holding the speaker cover in cooperation with the speaker decoration 131, and having a circular speaker front support port 133a, and a speaker of the decorative spacer 133. It mainly includes a side speaker 121 arranged so as to close the front support port 133a from the rear side, and a back holding member 134 having a speaker fitting port 134a that fits from the rear side on the outer periphery of the side speaker 121. ..

As shown in the figure, the acoustic unit 130 has different shapes of the speaker decoration 131, the decorative spacer 133, and the back pressing member 134 depending on the mounting position. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the acoustic portion 130 on the upper left when viewed from the front has a decorative portion 131b in which the speaker decoration 131 is formed in a cylindrical shape and extends outward from the left side. The decorative spacer 133 has a cylindrical shape that can be inserted into the speaker decoration 131, and the back presser member 134 is formed with a back presser decorative portion 134b that is paired with the decorative portion 131b of the speaker decoration 131. The upper left acoustic portion 130 is further provided with a hinge cover 135 which is arranged above the back presser decorative portion 134b of the back presser member 134 and covers the lower side of the upper shaft support portion 146 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140 below the shaft pin 145. There is. Further, in the acoustic portion 130 at the lower left when viewed from the front, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in a plate shape having the decoration portion 131b, and the spacer decoration portion 133b in which the decoration spacer 133 is paired with the decoration portion 131b of the speaker decoration 131 is provided. It is formed in a plate shape, and the back pressing member 134 is formed in a ring shape.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, in the acoustic unit 130 on the upper right when viewed from the front, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the decorative spacer 133 and the back pressing member 134 are inserted into the speaker decoration 131. It is formed in a possible cylindrical shape. Further, in the acoustic portion 130 at the lower right when viewed from the front, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in an annular shape, and the decorative spacer 133 is formed in a flat plate shape having the spacer decorative portion 133b that abuts on the rear surface of the speaker decoration 131. At the same time, the back pressing member 134 is formed in a ring shape. The lower right acoustic unit 130 further includes a decorative base 136 having a penetrating back presser member fixing port 136a capable of inserting and fixing the back presser member 134 from the front side further to the rear side of the back presser member 134. ..

As shown in the figure, the four side speakers 121 in the side speaker lighting unit 120 of this example are arranged at the four corners of the upper, lower, left, and right sides of the game window 101, and are likely to be relative to the head of the player playing the game. Is also arranged at the top, bottom, left, and right positions, so 2.1ch surround with independent acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, and lower speaker 391 described later) added to each side speaker 121. By sending a signal or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (acoustic effect) than before. The side speaker 121 of this example is mainly in charge of the mid to high range, and the lower speaker 391 is in charge of the low range.

[1-2A-3. Reinforcing sheet metal]
Next, as shown mainly in FIGS. 24 and 25, the reinforcing sheet metal 140 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 attached along the back surface of the upper side of the door frame base body 110 and the door frame base body. The shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 142 attached along the back surface of the shaft support side side portion 110, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 attached along the back surface of the open side side portion of the door frame base main body 110, and the door frame base main body 110. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 144, which is attached along the lower back surface of the game window 101, is fastened to each other with screws or the like to form a square shape.

As shown in FIG. 24, the reinforcing sheet metal 140 has an upper shaft support portion 146 having shaft pins 145 slidably provided on the upper surface of the upper and lower ends of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 142 in the vertical direction, and a lower surface thereof. A lower shaft branch 148 having a shaft pin 147 (see FIG. 18) is integrally formed on the shaft. Then, the upper and lower shaft pins 145 and 147 are pivotally supported by the upper shaft support metal fittings 503 and the lower shaft support metal fittings 509 formed above and below the shaft support side of the main body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is pivotally supported with respect to the main body frame 3. It is provided so that it can be opened and closed.

Further, the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140 has a predetermined width and is formed to have substantially the same length as the width dimension of the door frame base main body 110, and the lower long side edge of the long side edge thereof is formed. It is a lower bent projectile 149 that is bent backward (see FIG. 25), and an upper bent projectile 150 that is bent backward on both sides of the upper long side edge. However, the portion sandwiched between the upper bent projecting pieces 150 on both sides thereof is a vertically bent projecting piece 151 extending in the vertical direction. The amount of protrusion of the lower bent protrusion 149 is not so large, and the lower bent protrusion 149 does not engage with the groove or the recess to form an uneven engagement, but is formed to increase the strength. On the other hand, the protruding amount of the upper bent projecting piece 150 on both sides is slightly larger than the protruding amount of the lower bent projecting piece 149 to prevent the intrusion of illegal tools from below to some extent, but rather, the lower reinforcement in the present embodiment. The most characteristic configuration of the sheet metal 144 is the vertically bent projecting piece 151.

The vertically bent projecting piece 151 is formed in a concave shape so that its upper end edge shape matches the lower end shape of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450 described later, and when the glass unit 450 is fixed to the back surface side of the door frame 5. In addition, the upper end piece of the vertically bent projecting piece 151 engages with the engaging groove 451c formed along the outer periphery of the substantially center in the width direction (front-back direction) of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450. .. The lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 is formed with a prize ball passage port covering portion 152 that protects the outer periphery of the door frame base main body 110 except for the bottom surface of the prize ball passage port 111.

Further, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140 includes an open side outer bent projecting piece 153 bent rearward on both sides of the long side between the upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 and the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144. The open-side inwardly bent projectiles 154 are formed respectively, and the open-side inwardly bent projectiles 154 are formed so as to extend backward longer than the open-side outerly bent projecting pieces 153. Further, the upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 is formed with bent projecting pieces 155, 156 bent rearward on both sides of the long side thereof, respectively. Further, the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 142 is formed with a shaft support side L-shaped bent projecting piece 157 extending rearward at the outer end of the long side thereof. Further, a hook cover 158 that comes into contact with the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000, which will be described later, is attached to the lower rear portion of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143.

[1-2A-4. Mounting stand / ball feed unit]
Next, the mounting base 160 and the ball feed unit 170 in the door frame base unit 100 will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 18, 24, and 25, the mounting base 160 is mounted so as to cover the upper half of the back surface of the plate portion of the door frame base unit 100, and is a transparent synthetic resin like the security cover 470. It is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape with the front open. In order to smoothly guide the ball launched from the launch rail 515 to the game board 4, the mounting base 160 is formed by the rear surface of the mounting base 160 and the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed. It is formed so as to sandwich the 515, and the ball flying guide surface 161 is formed on the rear surface of the mounting base 160. By the way, the mounting table 160 according to the present embodiment has an opening 162 for the prize ball passage port that penetrates the rear protruding portion of the prize ball passage port covering portion 152 formed on the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 at the upper portion on the shaft support side thereof. It is formed, and a ball feed unit mounting recess 163 for mounting the ball feed unit 170 is formed in the lower portion on the open side thereof. The area diagonally from the ball feed unit mounting recess 163 is the ball feed guide surface 161.

Further, in the lower middle part of the mounting base 160, a notch 164 for a lid is formed in which a finger can be inserted when removing the ball removal path cover 191, the door decoration drive board 192 and the door decoration drive board cover 193, which will be described later. At the same time, a vertical wall 165 is formed on a part of the upper side of the mounting base 160. As shown in FIG. 18, the standing wall 165 is for restricting the lower part of the security cover 470 from moving forward in contact with the front surface of the security cover 470 when the security cover 470 is attached.

Further, the mounting base 160 is provided with a security projectile piece 166 that is obliquely projected rearward from below the ball flying guide surface 161 to the opening for the prize ball passage port 162. As described above, the security projectile piece 166 has an inner protrusion on the lower side portion of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 and an inner protrusion between the security space 586 formed in the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 and the security space 586. It constitutes an engaging portion.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30, the ball feed unit 170 is rotatably supported by a box-shaped main body portion 171 fixed to the ball feed unit mounting recess 163 and a support shaft 171a of the main body portion 171. It includes a feed member 172 and a weight 173 that rotates the ball receiving portion of the ball feed member 172 upward and is rotatably supported by the ball feed member 172. The ball feed unit 170 is located at the lower end of the flow end of the third inclined surface 311c of the plate unit 300 by swinging the ball feed member 172 in response to the reciprocating movement difference of the ball hammer 687 of the ball launcher 650 described later. The balls are supplied one by one to the launch position of the launch rail 515 through the hit ball supply port 171b formed in the main body portion 171.

Reference numeral 174 in the drawing is an E-ring, which prevents the ball feed member 172 from coming off from the support shaft 171a of the main body 171 and prevents the weight 173 from coming off from the ball feed member 172. Is.

[1-2A-5. Joint unit]
Subsequently, the joint unit 180 in the door frame base unit 100 will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, the joint unit 180 is a joint with a slide body 182 housed inside the joint unit mounting recess 110c of the door frame base body 110 and slidable in the lateral direction, and a slide body 182 in a state of being housed. It is composed of a cover body 184 that covers the front surface of the unit mounting recess 110c.

The joint unit mounting recess 110c of the door frame base body 110 is formed in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped box with an open front surface, and a cam insertion opening 115 is provided on the rear surface. Further, a pair of mounting holes 110f for fixing the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 are formed at one corner of the joint unit mounting recess 110c located substantially diagonally. Further, on the upper and bottom sides of the inner side surface of the joint unit mounting recess 110c, an arcuate contact convex portion for contacting the outer surface of the upper and lower sides of the slide body 182 and allowing the slide body 182 to move smoothly. 110 g (in FIG. 31 (B), only the contact convex portion 110 g on the lower side is shown, and the contact convex portion 110 g on the upper side is not shown) is projected.

On the other hand, the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180 has a rear surface smaller than the joint unit mounting recess 110c so as to be movable in the space formed by the joint unit mounting recess 110c and the cover body 184 in the left-right direction. It is formed in the shape of an open rectangular parallelepiped box, and on the rear wall, two guide protrusions 182a that protrude backward by a predetermined amount and are arranged side by side in a substantially horizontal direction, and are arranged below the guide protrusion 182a on the right side in rear view. A plate-shaped slide projecting piece 183 projecting rearward and a wiring through tube portion 428 of a handle device 400, which will be described later, are formed between the two guide projections 182a on the left side of the slide projecting piece 183 when viewed from the rear. It is provided with a rectangular tubular member through opening 182b. The slide projecting piece 183 of the slide body 182 has an inclined side 183a in which the traveling direction at the time of sliding (to the right in the rear view) is cut diagonally. Further, on the front wall of the slide body 182, a cam engaging recess 182c in which the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 of the handle device 400 is housed is formed in a U shape by ribs. Then, a part of the vertical portion of the rib forming the cam engaging recess 182c is formed as an arc-shaped rib so as to project into the cam engaging recess 182c, and the portion is in contact with the cam 416. It has become.

Further, the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 is formed in the shape of a rectangular parallelepiped box with an open front surface, and a cylindrical boss-shaped guide protrusion 182a projecting from the front surface of the slide body 182 is inserted into the front surface of the cover body 184. After the two horizontally elongated guide horizontal holes 194a for guiding the movement, the insertion horizontal hole 184b into which the slide projecting piece 183 projecting from the front surface of the slide body 182 is inserted, and the rear grip member 413 of the operation handle portion 410. The wiring opening 184c, which is attached to the end and is inserted from the cam insertion opening 115, faces the rear end of the wiring cylinder portion 428, and the mounting hole 110f of the joint unit mounting recess 110c so as to project outward from the corresponding positions. It is provided with a formed mounting hole 184d. The cover body 184 can be mounted on the joint unit mounting recess 110c by fastening a predetermined screw (not shown) to the mounting hole 110f of the joint unit mounting recess 110c via the mounting hole 184d. ..

In order to assemble the slide body 182 and the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 into the joint unit mounting recess 110c, the slide body 182 is housed in the joint unit mounting recess 110c, and the cover body 184 is covered from the front in that state. When covering, the guide protrusion 182a is inserted into the guide side hole 194a, and the slide protrusion 183 is inserted into the insertion side hole 184b, respectively. Then, after covering, the slide body 182 is housed inside by screwing into the mounting hole 110f via the mounting hole 184d, and the assembly of the joint unit 180 is completed.

[1-2B. Top lamp illumination unit]
Next, the top lamp illumination unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 39. 32 (A) is a front perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit, (B) is a rear perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit, and FIG. 33 is a perspective view showing the top lamp illumination unit from diagonally front and lower. Is. FIG. 34 (A) is an exploded perspective view showing the top lamp illumination unit disassembled for each main configuration from the front, and FIG. 34 (B) is an exploded perspective view showing (A) afterwards. Further, FIG. 35 is an exploded perspective view showing the top lamp reflector unit in the top lamp illumination unit disassembled together with the top lamp base from the front, and FIG. 36 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 35 from the rear. Further, FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view showing the left rotating light in the top lamp lighting unit by disassembling, and FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view showing the right rotating light in the top lamp lighting unit by disassembling. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view showing the central revolving lamp in the top lamp illumination unit in an exploded manner.

As shown in FIG. 33, the top lamp illumination unit 200 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes three rotating lights 244, 264, 284 (so-called Patrite (registered trademark)) arranged in the left-right direction. The sizes of these revolving lamps 244, 264 and 284 are arranged in order from the left side in front view. The top lamp lighting unit 200 is fixed to the horizontally long and box-shaped top lamp base 210 and the front surface of the top lamp base 210, and is fixed to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 with the top lamp base 210 sandwiched between them. Top lamp reflector unit 220, left rotating light unit 240, right rotating light unit 260, and center rotating light unit 280 mounted on the front surface of the top lamp reflector unit 220, left rotating light unit 240, right rotating light unit 260, and It mainly includes rotating light covers 201, 202, 203 that cover the front surface of the central rotating light unit 280 and attached to the top lamp reflector unit 220, and a reflector inner 204 that covers the substantially central lower surface of the top lamp reflector unit (). See FIG. 34).

Further, the top lamp illumination unit 200 includes a top lamp power supply board 205 fixed to the front right side of the top lamp base 210 and two top lamp decoration drive boards 206 fixed to the rear side of the top lamp base 210. Further prepared. The top lamp power supply board 205 includes the boards 224,226,231 and LEDs 244a, 266a, 231a in the top lamp lighting unit 200, the motors 245, 265, 285 and the boards 248 of the revolving light units 240, 260, 280. , 268, 288, 296, and LED 453a of the glass unit 450 described later, for relaying and supplying power from the power supply board 1136 (described later). Further, the top lamp decorative drive substrate 206 emits light from the LED in the top lamp reflector unit 220, the LED in the central revolving light unit 280, and the motors 245, 265, 285 of each revolving light unit 240, 260, 280. The drive is for driving based on a control signal from the peripheral board 4010 (peripheral control board 4140) described later.

[1-2B-1. Top lamp base]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the top lamp base 210 in the top lamp illumination unit 200 has a shape in which the upper surface and the left and right side surfaces are substantially aligned with the upper side and the left and right side sides of the door frame base unit 100. At the same time, the lower surface has a shape substantially along with the game window 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is partitioned in the middle of the front-rear direction. The mounting boss 110h of the door frame base body 110 is inserted from the rear side of the top lamp base 210 at a position along the outer circumference thereof, and the rear end of the mounting boss 221i protruding rearward from the top lamp reflector unit 220 from the front side. A plurality of substantially tubular mounting boss portions 211 having insertion holes through which predetermined screws can be inserted are provided. The tip of the mounting boss 110h of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted into the mounting boss portion 211 from the rear, and the rear end of the mounting boss 221i of the top lamp reflector unit 220 is inserted from the front of the door frame base unit 100. By fastening a predetermined screw from the rear side to the mounting boss 221i of the top lamp reflector unit 220, the top lamp base 210 (top lamp lighting unit 200) can be mounted and fixed to the door frame base unit 100. ing.

Further, the top lamp base 210 is provided with a plurality of fixed boss portions 212 having an insertion hole through which a predetermined screw can pass through and the rear end of the fixed boss 221j projecting rearward from the top lamp reflector unit 220 is fitted. ing. The top lamp base 210 and the top lamp reflector unit 220 can be assembled to each other by fastening a predetermined screw to the fixed boss 221j of the top lamp reflector unit 220 from the rear side via the fixed boss portion 212. It has become.

Further, the top lamp base 210 is provided with a connector opening 213 through which the connection connector 205a of the top lamp power supply board 205 can be inserted near the right end portion when viewed from the front, and the connector 205a is provided through the connector opening 213. Is designed to face from the rear side of the top lamp base 210. Further, board mounting portions 214 are provided on the left and right sides of the rear side of the top lamp base 210, respectively, and the top lamp decorative drive board 206 can be mounted on the board mounting portions 214.

[1-2B-2. Top lamp reflector unit]
Subsequently, the top lamp reflector unit 220 in the top lamp illumination unit 200 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the top lamp reflector unit 220 of the present embodiment includes a box-shaped reflector base 221 in which the top lamp base 210 can be covered from the front and the rear side is open. This reflector base 221 is a cylindrical cylinder in which three revolving lights 244, 264 and 284 are mounted side by side on the front surface, and a large protrusion forward between the central revolving light 284 and the left and right revolving lights 244 and 264. It is partitioned by a portion 221a and an inclined portion 221b that hangs downward from the cylindrical portion 221a and inclines backward as it goes downward. In the reflector base 221, a substantially circular opening is formed in the cylindrical portion 221a, and three rectangular openings arranged in the vertical direction are formed in the inclined portion 221b (see FIG. 33). ). Further, the reflector base 210 is provided with vertically long bulging portions 221e protruding forward at both left and right ends, and a rectangular slit 221f having a vertically long opening is formed on the front surface of the bulging portion 221e. As shown in the figure, the reflector base 211 has a shape in which the mounting positions of the three revolving lights 244, 264 and 284 are recessed rearward due to the two cylindrical portions 221a and the inclined portion 221b and the two bulging portions 221e. It has become.

Further, the reflector base 221 has a gently curved surface shape in which the space between the two cylindrical portions 221a and the inclined portion 221b (the position where the central revolving light 284 is arranged) is recessed rearward, and two. Between the cylindrical portion 221a and the inclined portion 221b, a lens opening 221g that penetrates in a substantially trapezoidal shape in a front view is formed on the left and right sides of the substantially center in the left-right direction. Further, the reflector base 221 is equipped with a revolving light that allows the front end of the revolving light unit bases 241,261,281 of the revolving light units 240, 260, 280 equipped with the revolving lights 244, 264, 284 to pass from the rear side. The mouth 221h is formed. Further, the reflector base 221 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 221i that are fitted with the mounting boss portions 211 of the top lamp base 210 and projecting rearward, and a plurality of mounting bosses 221i that are fitted with the fixed boss portion 212 of the top lamp base 210 and projecting rearward. It is equipped with a fixed boss 221j. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the reflector base 221 is also provided with a mounting boss 221k that can be directly mounted to the door frame base unit 100 without using the top lamp base 210.

By the way, in the top lamp reflector unit 220, in addition to the reflector base 221, a pair of top inner lenses 222 fixed at substantially the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the reflector base 221 and a reflector base 221 on the rear side of the top inner lens 222. A pair of lens sheets 223 arranged at positions corresponding to the lens opening 221 g, a pair of reflector decorative substrates 224 arranged behind the lens sheet 223 and having a plurality of color LEDs 224a mounted on the front surface, and a reflector base 210. A transparent round lens 225 that is inserted into the cylindrical portion 221a from the rear side to close the opening 221c, and the cylindrical portion 221a and the inclined portion 221b of the reflector base 210 sandwiching the round lens 225 and the top inner lens 222. It is provided with a pair of partition decorative substrates 226 that are arranged and have an LED 226a mounted on the front surface.

The top inner lens 222 is made of a transparent resin, and has three parts: a substantially trapezoidal curved surface-shaped curved lens portion 222a that closes the lens opening 221g of the reflector base 221 and an inclined portion 221b of the reflector base 221. It includes a partition lens portion 222b that closes the opening portion 221d, and a round lens support portion 222c that comes into contact with the rear end of the round lens 225. A saw-shaped diffusion lens portion 222d is formed on the upper and lower sides of the curved lens portion 222a, and light can be emitted in a manner different from that of the curved lens portion 222a, and light from the front side even when the light is not emitted. Can be diffusely reflected.

Further, the top inner lens 222 supports a projecting piece 222e projecting from the rear side of the diffusion lens portion 222d to the rear in a plate shape, and a lens sheet 223 sandwiched between the upper and lower projecting pieces and supported on the rear side of the curved lens portion 222a. A support recess 222f is formed. As shown in the figure, in the reflector decorative substrate 224, a plurality of LEDs 224a are arranged in a row at positions corresponding to the protruding pieces 222e of the top inner lens 222, and correspond to the curved surface lens portion 222a of the top inner lens 222. It is also distributed in positions. As a result, the curved lens portion 222a and the diffusion lens portion 222d of the top inner lens 222 can emit light in different modes.

The lens sheet 223 is a known optical sheet that makes the transmitted light from the LED 224a mounted on the reflector decorative substrate 224 and the reflected light from another light source look like a pearl or a bright color. Further, the LED 226a mounted on the partition decorative substrate 226 is an ultra-bright LED, and is capable of emitting a strong flash of light.

Further, the top lamp reflector unit 220 includes a top side lens 227 that closes a vertically long slit 221f formed in the left and right bulging portions 221e of the reflector base 221 and a top side that fixes the upper end of the top side lens 227 from the front side. The lens retainer 228, the lens sheet 229 arranged on the rear side of the top side lens 227 and the reflector base 221 and the top side substrate base 230 holding the lens sheet 229 on the rear side of the reflector base 221. The top side substrate 231 is further provided with a color LED 231a fixed to the top side substrate base 230 and capable of irradiating the front top side lens 227 with light via the lens sheet 229 on the front surface.

The top side lens 221 is formed of a transparent resin in a dogleg shape in a plan view, and locking pieces 227a and 227b are formed at the upper and lower ends, respectively, and the locking pieces 227b at the lower end are used as a reflector base. After locking with the lower end of the slit 221f in 221 and pressing the locking piece 227a at the upper end with the top side lens presser 228, it can be attached to the reflector base 221. Further, the lens sheet 229 arranged on the rear side of the top side lens 221 is formed of the same optical sheet as the above lens sheet 223, and is formed in a curved shape as shown in the figure, and is a reflector base. By attaching it to the 221 lens, it is possible to give an appearance as if a columnar fluorescent tube is arranged on the rear side of the top side lens 227.

Further, as shown in the figure, the top side substrate base 230 is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and the light from the LED 231a of the top side substrate 231 which is fixed to the rear side through the frame is emitted from the lens sheet 229 and the top side. Light can be irradiated to the front surface through the lens 227.

[1-2B-3. Revolving light unit]
Next, three rotating light units 240, 260, 280 in the top lamp lighting unit 200 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 37, the left revolving light unit 240 has a circular opening 241a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 241a is positioned so as to project forward from the revolving light mounting port 221h of the reflector base 221. A rotating light unit base 241 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 and a substantially annular rotation arranged coaxially with the opening 241a of the revolving light unit base 241 and fixed to the upper surface of the revolving light unit base 241. The revolving light base gear 243, which is arranged coaxially with the revolving light base 242 and slidably mounted on the upper surface of the revolving revolving light base 242, and its lower surface so as to hang down from the revolving light base gear 243. The revolving light 244 fixed to the revolving light 244 and the revolving light 245a are arranged on the axis behind the revolving light mounting port 221h of the reflector base 221 substantially parallel to the axis of the revolving light base gear 243, and the revolving light 245a is the upper surface of the revolving light unit base 241. The left rotating light motor 245 fixed to the lower surface of the revolving light unit base 241 so as to project upward from, and the transmission gear 246 fixed to the rotating shaft 245a of the revolving light motor 245 and meshing with the revolving light base gear 243. The rotating part holder that covers the entire rotating light base gear 243 and a part of the transmission gear 246 from above, supports the rotating light base gear 243 in cooperation with the rotating part base 242, and is fixed to the rotating light unit base 241. Left rotating light substrate 248 having a high-brightness color LED (not shown) fixed to the lower surface of the rotating part holder 247 coaxially with the revolving light base gear 243 and capable of emitting light toward the revolving light 244 below. And has.

Further, the left rotating light unit 240 is equipped with a rotating light unit cover 249 that covers the rotating part holder 247 from above, a left rotation position detection sensor 250 that detects the rotation position of the rotation light 244, and a left rotation position detection sensor 250. The counterclockwise rotation position detection board 251 is further provided.

The revolving light unit base 241 of the revolving light unit 240 has a mounting step portion 241b formed on the upper surface thereof along the inner circumference of the opening 241a, and hangs downward at a position rearward from the opening 241a. It is provided with a mounting portion 241c mounted on the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 241d arranged on the rear side of the opening 241a to fix the left revolving light motor 245, and rotates in the mounting step portion 241b from above. The part base 242 is fitted. Further, the rotating portion base 242 has a shaft support port 242a having a small diameter coaxial with the opening 241a of the rotating light unit base 241 and a left rotation position detection at a predetermined position on the upper surface outside the outer circumference of the rotating light base gear 243. A substrate support portion 242b that supports the lower end of the substrate 251 and a wiring locking portion 242c that is arranged behind the substrate support portion 242b and locks the wiring connected to the revolving light substrate 248 and the counterclockwise rotation position detection substrate 251. It has.

Further, the rotary light base gear 243 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft support port 242a of the rotating portion base 242, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft support port 242a of the rotating portion base 242. A cylindrical gear axle that can be inserted inside (not shown), a shaft support hole 243a that has a smaller diameter than the gear axle and penetrates in the vertical direction, and a rotation position detection that protrudes outward in the radial direction from the outer circumference of the lower surface. It is provided with a piece 243b. The outer diameter of the shaft cylinder of the rotary light base gear 243 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support port 242a of the rotating portion base 242, and by being inserted into the shaft support port 242a, the rotary light base gear The 243 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support port 242a. Further, in the revolving light unit 240, the rotating position of the revolving light 244 can be detected by detecting the revolving position detection piece 243b of the revolving light base gear 243 with the left revolving position detection sensor 250. There is.

Further, although not shown, the rotating portion holder 247 has a cylindrical shape that protrudes downward at a position coaxial with the shaft supporting port 242a of the rotating portion base 242 and can be inserted into the shaft supporting hole 243a of the revolving light base gear 243. Holder axle cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of this holder shaft cylinder is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 243a of the revolving light base gear 243, and by inserting the holder shaft cylinder into the shaft support hole 243a of the revolving light base gear 243, the revolving light The base gear 243 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder axle. That is, in the left rotating light unit 240 of this example, the rotating light base is formed by the shaft support port 242a of the rotating part base 242, the gear shaft cylinder and shaft support hole 243a of the rotating light base gear 243, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 247. The gear 243 is rotatably supported. The left rotating light substrate 248 is fixed to the lower end of the holder shaft of the rotating portion holder 247. Further, although not shown, the rotating portion holder 247 is formed with a substrate supporting portion that supports the upper end of the left rotating position detecting substrate 251 at a position corresponding to the substrate supporting portion 242b of the rotating portion base 242 on the lower surface thereof. The left rotation position detection board 251 is narrowly fixed by the rotation unit base 242 and the rotation unit holder 247.

Further, as shown in the figure, the revolving light 244 of the revolving light unit 240 is arranged below the revolving light lens 252 and the transparent disk-shaped revolving light lens 252 arranged under the revolving light base gear 243. It is composed of a reflector 253 fixed to the lower surface of the revolving light base gear 243 and a reflector cover 254 that covers the reflector 253. The reflector 253 of the revolving light 244 is plated with a metallic luster on its surface, and has a disk-shaped base portion 253a, an opening 253b formed in the center of the base portion 253a, and a base portion 253a. It is provided with a curved reflecting portion 253c that hangs downward from the lower surface of the base portion 253a, and a plurality of mounting bosses 253d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 253a and have an upper end that can come into contact with the rotating light base gear 243.

In the revolving light 244, the lower surface of the revolving light lens 252 faces from the opening 253b of the reflector 253, and the revolving light lens 252 is formed with an insertion hole 252a through which the mounting boss 253d of the reflector 253 can be inserted. By inserting the mounting boss 253d into the insertion hole 252a and then fixing the mounting boss 253d to the revolving light base gear 243, the revolving light lens 252 is narrowed between the revolving light base gear 243 and the reflector 253. It is designed to be held and fixed. Further, the reflector cover 254 of the revolving light 244 has a substantially octagonal shape in a plan view, has a box shape with an open upper portion, and has an opening on a side surface of the reflector 253 facing the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 253c. 254a is formed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 38, the right rotating light unit 260 has a circular opening 261a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 261a protrudes forward from the left rotating light mounting port 221h of the reflector base 221. The revolving light unit base 261 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 and the revolving light unit base 261 arranged coaxially with the opening 261a of the revolving light unit base 261 and fixed to the upper surface of the revolving light unit base 261. An annular rotating part base 262, a rotating light base gear 263 arranged coaxially with the rotating part base 262 and slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotating part base 262, and hanging from the revolving light base gear 263. The revolving light 264 fixed to the lower surface of the revolving light 264 and the revolving light unit 265a are arranged on the axis behind the revolving light mounting port 221h of the reflector base 221 substantially parallel to the axis of the revolving light base gear 263. The right rotating light motor 265 fixed to the lower surface of the revolving light unit base 261 so as to project upward from the upper surface of 261 and the transmission gear fixed to the rotating shaft 265a of the right revolving light motor 265 and meshing with the revolving light base gear 263. 266, the entire revolving light base gear 263 and a part of the transmission gear 266 are covered from above, and the revolving light base gear 263 is pivotally supported in cooperation with the revolving part base 262 and fixed to the revolving light unit base 261. Rotating part holder 267 and clockwise rotation with a high-brightness color LED (not shown) that is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating part holder 267 coaxially with the revolving light base gear 263 and can emit light toward the revolving light 264 below. It includes a light board 268 and.

Further, the right rotating light unit 260 is equipped with a rotating light unit cover 269 that covers the rotating part holder 267 from above, a right rotation position detection sensor 270 that detects the rotation position of the rotation light 264, and a right rotation position detection sensor 270. Further includes a right rotation position detection board 271 and the like.

The revolving light unit base 261 of the right revolving light unit 260 has a mounting step portion 261b formed on the upper surface thereof substantially along the inner circumference of the opening 261a, and hangs downward at a position rearward from the opening 261a. It is provided with a mounting portion 261c mounted on the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 261d arranged on the rear side of the opening 261a to fix the right rotating light motor 265, and rotates in the mounting step portion 261b from above. The part base 262 is fitted. Further, the rotating portion base 262 has a shaft support port 262a having a small diameter coaxial with the opening 261a of the rotating light unit base 261 and a right rotation position detection at a predetermined position on the upper surface outside the outer circumference of the rotating light base gear 263. A substrate support portion 262b that supports the lower end of the substrate 271, and a wiring locking portion 262c that is arranged behind the substrate support portion 262b and locks the wiring connected to the right rotating light substrate 268 and the right rotation position detection substrate 271. It has.

Further, the rotary light base gear 263 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft support port 262a of the rotating part base 262, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft support port 262a of the rotating part base 262. A cylindrical gear axle that can be inserted inside (not shown), a shaft support hole 263a that has a smaller diameter than the gear axle and penetrates in the vertical direction, and a rotation position detection that protrudes outward in the radial direction from the outer circumference of the lower surface. It has a piece 263b. The outer diameter of the shaft cylinder of the rotary light base gear 263 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support port 262a of the rotating portion base 262, and by being inserted into the shaft support port 262a, the rotary light base gear The 263 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support port 262a. Further, in the right rotating light unit 260, the rotating position of the rotating light 264 can be detected by detecting the rotating position detection piece 263b of the rotating light base gear 263 with the right rotation position detection sensor 270. There is.

Further, although not shown, the rotating portion holder 267 has a cylindrical shape that protrudes downward at a position coaxial with the shaft supporting port 262a of the rotating portion base 262 and can be inserted into the shaft supporting hole 263a of the revolving light base gear 263. Holder axle cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of this holder shaft cylinder is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 263a of the revolving light base gear 263. By inserting the holder shaft cylinder into the shaft support hole 263a of the revolving light base gear 263, the revolving light The base gear 263 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder axle. That is, in the right rotating light unit 260 of this example, the rotating light base is formed by the shaft support port 262a of the rotating part base 262, the gear shaft cylinder and shaft support hole 263a of the rotating light base gear 263, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 267. The gear 263 is rotatably supported. The right rotating light substrate 268 is fixed to the lower end of the holder barrel of the rotating portion holder 267. Further, although not shown, the rotating portion holder 267 is formed with a substrate supporting portion that supports the upper end of the right rotating position detecting substrate 271 at a position corresponding to the substrate supporting portion 262b of the rotating portion base 262 on the lower surface thereof. The right-handed rotation position detection board 271 is narrowly fixed by the rotating portion base 262 and the rotating portion holder 267.

Further, as shown in the figure, the revolving light 264 of the right revolving light unit 260 is larger than the revolving light 244 of the left revolving light unit 240 as a whole, and has a transparent disk shape arranged under the revolving light base gear 263. It is composed of a revolving light lens 272, a reflector 273 arranged under the revolving light lens 272 and fixed to the lower surface of the revolving light base gear 263, and a reflector cover 274 covering the reflector 273. The reflector 273 of the revolving light 264 is plated with a metallic luster on its surface, and has a disk-shaped base portion 273a, an opening 273b formed in the center of the base portion 273a, and a base portion 273a. It is provided with a curved reflecting portion 273c that hangs downward from the lower surface of the revolving light, and a plurality of mounting bosses 273d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 273a and have an upper end that can come into contact with the revolving light base gear 263.

In the revolving light 264, the lower surface of the revolving light lens 272 faces from the opening 273b of the reflector 273, and the revolving light lens 272 is formed with an insertion hole 272a through which the mounting boss 273d of the reflector 273 can be inserted. By inserting the mounting boss 273d into the insertion hole 272a and then fixing the mounting boss 273d to the revolving light base gear 263, the revolving light lens 272 is narrowed between the revolving light base gear 263 and the reflector 273. It is designed to be held and fixed. Further, the reflector cover 274 of the revolving light 264 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in a plan view, has a box shape with an open upper portion, and has an opening on a side surface of the reflector 273 facing the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 273c. 274a is formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39, the central revolving light unit 280 has a circular opening 281a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 281a is on the front side from the revolving light mounting port 221h at the center in the left-right direction of the reflector base 221. The revolving light unit base 281 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 so as to protrude to the rear, and the revolving light unit base 281 are arranged coaxially with the opening 281a of the revolving light unit base 281 and fixed to the upper surface of the revolving light unit base 281. The rotating part base 282 which is substantially annular, the rotating light base gear 283 which is arranged coaxially with the rotating part base 282 and is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotating part base 282, and hanging from the rotating light base gear 283. The revolving light 284 fixed to the lower surface thereof and the revolving light 285a are arranged on the axis behind the revolving light attachment port 221h of the reflector base 221 substantially parallel to the axis of the revolving light base gear 283. The central revolving light motor 285 fixed to the lower surface of the revolving light unit base 281 so as to project upward from the upper surface of the unit base 281 and the revolving light base gear 283 fixed to the rotating shaft 285a of the central revolving light motor 285 and mesh with each other. The transmission gear 286, the entire revolving light base gear 283 and a part of the revolving light base gear 286 are covered from above, and the revolving light base gear 283 is pivotally supported in cooperation with the revolving part base 282 and fixed to the revolving light unit base 281. It has a rotating part holder 287 and a high-brightness color LED (not shown) that is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating part holder 287 coaxially with the revolving light base gear 283 and can emit light toward the revolving light 284 below. It includes a central revolving light substrate 288.

Further, the central revolving light unit 280 is equipped with a revolving light unit cover 289 that covers the revolving part holder 287 from above, a central revolving position detection sensor 290 that detects the rotational position of the revolving light 284, and a central revolving position detection sensor 290. It also includes a central rotation position detection substrate 291.

The revolving light unit base 281 of the central revolving light unit 280 has a mounting step portion 281b formed on the upper surface thereof substantially along the inner circumference of the opening 281a and hangs downward at a position rearward from the opening 281a. It is provided with a mounting portion 281c mounted on the rear side of the reflector base 211 and a motor fixing portion 281d arranged on the rear side of the opening 281a to fix the central revolving light motor 285, and rotates in the mounting step portion 281b from above. The part base 282 is fitted. Further, the rotating portion base 282 has a shaft support port 282a having a small diameter coaxial with the opening 281a of the revolving light unit base 281 and a central rotating position detected at a predetermined position on the upper surface outside the outer circumference of the revolving light base gear 283. A substrate support portion 282b that supports the lower end of the substrate 291 and a wiring locking portion 282c that locks the wiring that is arranged behind the substrate support portion 282b and is connected to the central rotating light substrate 288 and the central rotation position detection substrate 291. It has.

Further, the rotary light base gear 283 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft support port 282a of the rotating portion base 282, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft support port 282a of the rotating portion base 282. A cylindrical gear axle that can be inserted inside (not shown), a shaft support hole 283a that has a smaller diameter than the gear axle and penetrates in the vertical direction, and a rotation position detection that protrudes outward in the radial direction from the outer circumference of the lower surface. It is equipped with a piece 283b. The outer diameter of the shaft cylinder of the rotary light base gear 283 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support port 282a of the rotating portion base 282, and by being inserted into the shaft support port 282a, the rotary light base gear The 283 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support port 282a. Further, in the central revolving light unit 280, the rotating position of the revolving light 284 can be detected by detecting the revolving position detection piece 283b of the revolving light base gear 283 with the central revolving position detection sensor 290. There is.

Further, although not shown, the rotating portion holder 287 has a cylindrical shape that protrudes downward at a position coaxial with the shaft supporting port 282a of the rotating portion base 282 and can be inserted into the shaft supporting hole 283a of the revolving light base gear 283. Holder axle cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of this holder shaft cylinder is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 283a of the revolving light base gear 283, and by inserting the holder shaft cylinder into the shaft support hole 283a of the revolving light base gear 283, the revolving light The base gear 283 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder axle. That is, in the central rotary light unit 280 of this example, the rotary light base is formed by the shaft support port 282a of the rotary portion base 282, the gear shaft cylinder and shaft support hole 283a of the rotary light base gear 283, and the holder shaft cylinder of the rotary unit holder 287. The gear 283 is rotatably supported. The central rotating light substrate 288 is fixed to the lower end of the holder shaft of the rotating portion holder 287. Further, although not shown, the rotating portion holder 287 is formed with a substrate supporting portion that supports the upper end of the central rotating position detecting substrate 291 at a position corresponding to the substrate supporting portion 282b of the rotating portion base 282 on the lower surface thereof. The central rotation position detection board 291 is narrowly fixed by the rotation portion base 282 and the rotation portion holder 287.

Further, as shown in the figure, the revolving light 294 of the central revolving unit 280 has a size intermediate between the revolving light 244 of the left revolving light unit 240 and the revolving light 264 of the right revolving light unit 260. A transparent disk-shaped revolving light lens 292 arranged under the revolving light base gear 283, a reflector 293 arranged under the revolving light lens 292 and fixed to the lower surface of the revolving light base gear 283, and a reflector 293. It is composed of a reflector cover 294 that covers the above. The reflector 293 of the revolving light 284 is plated with a metallic luster on the surface, and has a disk-shaped base portion 293a, an opening 293b formed in the center of the base portion 293a, and a base portion 293a. It is provided with a curved reflecting portion 293c that hangs downward from the lower surface of the base portion 293c, and a plurality of mounting bosses 293d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 293a and have an upper end that can come into contact with the rotating light base gear 283.

In the revolving light 284, the lower surface of the revolving light lens 292 faces from the opening 293b of the reflector 293, and the revolving light lens 292 is formed with an insertion hole 292a through which the mounting boss 293d of the reflector 293 can be inserted. By inserting the mounting boss 293d into the insertion hole 292a and then fixing the mounting boss 293d to the revolving light base gear 283, the revolving light lens 292 is narrowed between the revolving light base gear 283 and the reflector 293. It is designed to be held and fixed. Further, the reflector cover 294 of the revolving light 284 has a substantially octagonal shape in a plan view, has a box shape with an open upper portion, and has an opening on a side surface of the reflector 293 facing the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 293c. 294a is formed.

By the way, as shown in the figure, the central revolving light unit 280 of the present embodiment has a plurality of formed on three front side surfaces of the revolving light unit cover 289 between the revolving part holder 287 and the revolving light unit cover 289. A cover lens 295 having a plurality of projecting portions 295a inserted into the notch portion 289a from the rear side, and a cover decorative substrate 296 arranged on the rear side of the cover lens 295 and having a plurality of color LEDs 296a mounted on the surface thereof. Further prepared. The lower ends of the cover lens 295 and the cover decorative substrate 296 are supported by the groove-shaped lens support portion 287a and the substrate support portion 287b formed at the front end of the rotating portion holder 287, and are formed on the rotating light unit cover 289. It can be attached by supporting the upper end of each of the groove-shaped lens support portion and the substrate support portion (not shown). In this example, the front end of the revolving light unit cover 289 of the central revolving light unit 280 can be light-emitting decorated by emitting the LED of the cover decoration substrate 296.

[1-2C. Dish unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 40 to 63. 40 is a front perspective view of the plate unit, FIG. 41 is a rear perspective view of the plate unit, and FIG. 42 is a plan view of the plate unit. FIG. 43 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 42. FIG. 44 is a rear view showing the dish unit with the dish back plate removed, and FIG. 45 is a perspective view showing later with the dish back plate of the dish unit and the ball rental unit removed. Further, FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view showing the dish unit disassembled for each main component from the front, and FIG. 47 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 46 from the back. Further, FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view showing the plate unit main body of the plate unit disassembled from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 48 from the back. Further, FIG. 50 is a rear view showing the first ball pulling mechanism in the dish unit, and FIG. 51 is a perspective view showing the second ball pulling mechanism in the dish unit later. Further, FIG. 52 is an exploded perspective view showing the operation button unit of the dish unit in an exploded manner, FIG. 53 is a bottom view of the operation button unit of the dish unit with the operation button unit substrate removed, and FIG. 54 is a bottom view of the dish. It is a bottom perspective view which shows the main button of the operation button unit in a unit from the bottom, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view which shows the main button of the operation button unit in a dish unit by disassembling.

Further, FIG. 56 is a cross-sectional view of the handle device attached to the door frame, FIG. 57 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the operation handle portion constituting the handle device and the joint unit, and FIG. 58 is an operation in the handle device. It is an exploded perspective view of the handle part. Further, FIG. 59 is an operation diagram for explaining the operation of the operation handle portion and the joint unit, FIG. 60 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the handle device and the ball launching device provided on the main body frame, and FIG. 61 is a perspective view. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state which connects the handle device and the hitting ball launching device. Further, FIG. 62 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game ball in the plate unit, and FIG. 62 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the second ball outlet and the flow of the game ball in the plate unit. Is. Further, FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the horizontally long ball inflow port and the storage dish in the dish unit.

The plate unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment can store the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 800 described later, and the stored game balls are sent to the ball feed unit 170 via the ball feed unit 170 to be described later. Can be supplied to. As shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the plate unit 300 covers the plate body 310 having a storage plate 311 whose upper and rear sides are open and capable of storing a predetermined amount of game balls, and the front surface of the plate body 310. A first ball removing mechanism capable of discharging all the game balls stored in the plate unit main body 320, the plate-shaped plate back plate 340 covering the rear surfaces of the plate unit main body 320 and the plate body 310, and the storage plate 311 of the plate body 310. 350, a second ball removing mechanism 360 that can discharge a part of the game balls stored in the storage dish of the dish 310, and a ball lending machine (CR unit) not shown adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. The ball rental unit 301 that operates (referred to as), the operation button unit 370 that is fixed to the upper surface of the plate body 310 and can be operated by the player depending on the game state (game situation), and the plate unit main body 320 under the plate body 310. The lower speaker unit 390 having a lower speaker 391 that is arranged between the plate back plate 340 and the side speaker lighting unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100 and larger than the side speaker 121, and the front view right of the plate unit main body 320. It mainly includes a handle base 303 arranged in the lower corner and a handle device 400 supported by the handle base 303 for driving a game ball. Reference numeral 302 is a wiring cover that covers the electrical wiring connected to the dish illumination substrate 336 in the dish unit main body 320, which will be described later. Further, as shown in the drawing, a lower left decorative substrate 190 that emits and decorates the left end of the plate unit main body 320 is arranged on the left side of the plate back plate 340 when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the ball rental unit 301 in the plate unit 300 is fixed to the upper side of the plate back plate 340 at substantially the center in the left-right direction, and is arranged next to the ball rental button 301a and the ball rental button 301a. It is provided with a loan balance indicator (not shown) arranged between the return button 301b and the ball lending button 301a and the return button 301b to display the remaining number of cash or prepaid cards on the ball lending machine. The ball lending unit 301 inserts cash or a prepaid card into the ball lending machine provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, and then presses the ball lending button 301a to release a predetermined number of game balls to the plate unit 300. You can rent (pay out) into the storage plate 311 of the machine, and when you press the return button 301b, the balance of the cash you put in after subtracting the rest of the lent amount and the prepaid card will be returned. There is.

Further, the main button 371 and the two sub-buttons 372 of the operation button unit 370 of the plate unit 300 are used when a player participates in a game content (game production) performed by a liquid crystal display device 1400 or the like provided on the game board 4. It is something to operate.

[1-2C-1. Plate body]
First, as shown in the figure, the dish body 310 in the dish unit 300 occupies approximately two-thirds of the whole from the left end in a plan view, and has a storage dish 311 having a predetermined depth open upward and rearward, and a storage dish 311 inside the storage dish 311. The second ball outlet 312, which is placed at a predetermined position on the bottom and penetrates in the vertical direction, is placed on the downstream side of the third inclined surface 311c, which is continuous with the storage dish 311 from the right end of the storage dish 312, and the game ball can be distributed. The first ball extraction path 313 (see FIGS. 44 and 47) that can guide the game ball to substantially directly below the second ball extraction port 312, and the right side of the storage plate 311 are opened upward in a substantially rhombic shape for operation. The operation button unit mounting recess 314 to which the button unit 370 can be mounted and the first ball pulling button 351 of the first ball pulling mechanism 350 which opens in a substantially circular shape on the rear side of the operation button unit mounting recess 314 are mounted. It mainly includes a ball pulling button mounting port 315 and a first ball pulling mechanism support portion 316 that is arranged substantially directly below the first ball pulling button mounting port 315 and supports the first ball pulling mechanism 350.

The storage dish 311 in the dish body 310 is arranged in front of the ball inflow port 341 of the dish back plate 340, and has a first inclined surface 311a which is lowered toward the right side and the front side in a plan view and a right end of the first inclined surface 311a. A second inclined surface 311b that is continuous with the rear part of the portion and is lowered toward the right side and the rear side, and a third that is continuous with the right end portion of the second inclined surface 311b and is lowered toward the ball supply port 342 of the back plate 340. A fourth inclined surface 311d that is continuous with the inclined surface 311c and the front portion of the right end portion of the first inclined surface 311a and the front end portion of the second inclined surface 311b and becomes lower toward the right side and the second inclined surface 311b. It is provided with a fifth inclined surface 311e which is continuous with the right end portion of the four inclined surface 311d and becomes lower toward the fourth inclined surface 311d (see FIGS. 42 and 43, etc.).

Further, the storage plate 311 is arranged between the partition wall 311f, which rises upward from the rear end of the fifth inclined surface 311e and the game ball cannot cross the border, and the partition wall 311f and the third inclined surface 311c. It is further provided with a sixth inclined surface 311 g which becomes lower toward the third inclined surface 311c. The second ball outlet 312 is arranged between the first inclined surface 311a and the second inclined surface 311b. Further, the second ball removing port 312 is normally closed by the second ball removing shutter 364 of the second ball removing mechanism 360.

In the storage dish 311 of the present embodiment, as shown in a plan view, the first inclined surface 311a has a quadrangular shape (trapezoidal shape) occupying approximately half the size of the storage dish 311. The second inclined surface 311b has a variable pentagonal shape such that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/4 of the length of the storage dish 311 and the depth in the front-rear direction becomes narrower toward the third inclined surface 311c. The third inclined surface 311c has a horizontally long section shape in which the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, the fourth inclined surface 311d has a rectangular shape (trapezoidal shape) having a length in the left-right direction substantially the same as that of the second inclined surface 311b and shortening toward the second inclined surface 311b. Further, after the rear end of the fifth inclined surface 311e extends from the left end to the right by a predetermined distance substantially parallel to the third inclined surface 311c and then obliquely extends toward the rear third inclined surface 311c. It extends along the third inclined surface 311c across the partition wall 311f, and the front end (right end) extends rearward toward the right end of the rear end as a whole. It is formed in an inverted shape, and the partition wall 311f is formed along the rear end portion of the fifth inclined surface 311e.

Further, as shown in the figure, the storage dish 311 has a left side end portion and a front side end portion of the first inclined surface 311a, a front side end portion of the fourth inclined surface 311d, and a front side end portion (right end portion) of the fifth inclined surface. ) Is provided, and the outer peripheral wall 311h is formed so that the storage dish 311 is recessed downward by a predetermined amount from the upper surface of the dish body 310. Further, the outer peripheral wall 311h of the storage dish 311 is formed in a loose arc shape that moves forward toward the right at the front end portions of the first inclined surface 311a, the fourth inclined surface 311d, and the fifth inclined surface 311e. When the game ball flowing from the ball inflow port 341 onto the first inclined surface 311a comes into contact with the position of the outer peripheral wall 311h facing the ball inflow port 341, it is reflected in the direction of the fifth inclined surface 311e. It is designed to be distributed on the five inclined surfaces 311d. Further, the fifth inclined surface 311e is a gentle slope on which a game ball flowing into the storage plate 311 from the ball inflow inlet 341 can climb a slope, and the direction thereof is after climbing to the right end of the fifth inclined surface 311e. Is changed so that it flows down in the direction of the fourth inclined surface 311d (to the left). That is, in the storage dish 311 of this example, the game ball that has flowed in from the ball inflow port 341 is once diverted to the fifth inclined surface 311e and then flows into the third inclined surface 311c that is the supply path to the ball supply port 342. It has become like.

Further, the sixth inclined surface 311g of the storage plate 311 has a steeper inclination angle than the other inclined surfaces 311a to 311e, and a plurality of game balls can be played on the third inclined surface 311c on the downstream side thereof. It is possible to facilitate the alignment in a row in the left-right direction toward the ball supply port 342. A stainless steel rail body 304 is mounted on the third inclined surface 311c so as to improve the wear resistance of the game balls in circulation and to dissipate static electricity charged on the game balls. It can be removed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 44 and 47, the third inclined surface 311c of the storage dish 311 is formed in a groove shape in which the right end portion thereof sneaks diagonally to the lower right and then hangs downward and the rear side is open. At the same time, it is formed so as to be continuous with the first ball removing path 313, and by being continuous with the first ball removing path 313, a flow path that is folded back in the left-right direction is formed. The boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removing path 313 is closed by the first ball removing slide 356 of the first ball removing mechanism 350, and the first ball removing is closed. The ball supply port 342 of the plate back plate 340 is opened as desired on the slide 356. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down the third inclined surface 311c is blocked from flowing down by the first ball removing slide 356, so that the game ball flows to the ball supply port 342 side.

In addition, in the first ball pulling mechanism support portion 316 of the dish body 310, the first ball is beside the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball pulling path 313 (right side in front view, left side in FIG. 44). The first ball, which will be described later, is on the opposite side of the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball pulling path 313 with the slide groove 316a and the slide groove 316a inserted and arranged so that the pulling slide 356 can slide in the left-right direction. A hook portion 316b for locking the lower end portion of the pull-out spring 357 is formed.

[1-2C-2. Dish unit body]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the dish unit main body 320 in the dish unit 300 constitutes the front surface of the dish unit 300, covers the front surface of the dish body 310 and the lower speaker unit 390, and the upper and rear sides are opened. It is provided with a box-shaped main body portion 321. The main body 321 has a shape in which about 3/4 of the left side bulges forward when viewed from the front, and the lower speaker unit 390 is accommodated inside (rear side) of the bulging portion. It has become. Further, the main body portion 321 has a speaker opening 321a and a speaker opening 321a formed so as to penetrate the position corresponding to the lower speaker 391 of the lower speaker unit 390 on the right side of the center of the front surface of the bulging portion. The dummy opening 321b formed on the left side and the opening 321c for the second ball removing button formed on the left side of the dummy opening 321b are formed so as to penetrate each other. Further, the main body portion 321 has an elliptical handle base mounting port 321d for mounting the handle base 303 in the lower right corner, and a locking opening 321e arranged above the handle base mounting port 321d and facing the cylinder lock 1010 described later. The ward-shaped duct opening 321f that opens on the right side of the portion that bulges forward on the left side of the handle base mounting port d, and the ward-shaped ball discharge port 321g that opens in the lower center in the left-right direction. I have.

Further, in the dish unit main body 320 of the dish unit 300, the front back plate 322 that covers the speaker opening 321a and the dummy opening 321b of the main body 321 from the front side and the speaker opening 322a of the front back plate 322 are passed through the main body 321. A plate-shaped right cover 323 made of punching metal and having four corners cut off, which is arranged on the front surface corresponding to the speaker opening 321a, and a plate-shaped right cover 323 which is arranged approximately in the center of the front surface of the right cover 323 and is smaller than the right cover 323 and has a metallic luster on the surface. Plate-shaped right decoration base 324 that has been plated with, and plate-shaped right decoration 325 that is located approximately in the center of the front of the right decoration base 324 and is smaller than the right decoration base 324, and the main body of the front back plate 322. A plate-shaped left cover 326 made of punching metal and having four corners cut off, which is arranged on the front surface corresponding to the dummy opening 321b of the portion 321 and a surface which is smaller than the left cover 326 and is arranged substantially in the center of the front surface of the left cover 326. A plate-shaped left decorative base 327 that has been plated with metallic luster, a plate-shaped left decorative base 328 that is located approximately in the center of the front of the left decorative base 327 and is smaller than the left decorative base 327, and a main body 321. Mainly includes a speaker opening 321a, a dummy opening 321b, and a frame-shaped front main body 329 that decorates the periphery of the second ball removal button opening 321c. The front back plate 322 of the dish unit main body 320 is formed with a plurality of through holes 322a that penetrate the speaker opening 321a of the main body 321 as desired, and these through holes 322a and the punching holes of the right decorative base 323. The sound from the lower speaker 391 can be satisfactorily transmitted to the outside via (not shown).

Further, the dish unit main body 320 of this example has a main body left decorative base 330 fixed to the left end of the main body 321 on the front side of the lower left decorative substrate 190 and a metallic luster plated on the front surface of the main body left decorative base 330. It further includes a treated main body left decoration 331. The main body left decorative base 330 has translucency, and can be light-emitting decorated by the LED 190a of the lower left decorative substrate 190 arranged on the rear side of the main body left decorative base 330.

Further, the dish unit main body 320 is formed with a plate-shaped duct cover made of punching metal covering the duct opening 321f of the main body 321 and a duct notch 333a so that the duct cover faces from the surface. A main body right decoration 333 that covers the entire right side surface of the portion of the portion 321 that bulges forward and has a metallic luster plating treatment on the surface is further provided.

Further, the dish unit main body 320 has a plurality of horizontally long slits 334a arranged along the upper edge of the main body portion 321 and penetrating in the vertical direction, and the main body upper decoration 334 having a metallic luster plating treatment on the surface thereof. An upper decorative lens 335 having a light guide portion 335a arranged in the main body 321 under the main body upper decoration 334 and inserted into the slit 334a of the main body upper decoration 334, and an upper decorative lens 335 arranged under the upper decorative lens 335. It is provided with a dish lighting substrate 336 on which a plurality of color LEDs 336a are mounted on the upper surface. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 336a of the dish illumination substrate 336, the upper edge of the main body upper decoration 334, that is, the upper edge of the dish unit main body 320 can be light-emitting and decorated via the upper decoration lens 335.

[1-2C-3. Plate back plate]
Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the plate back plate 340 in the plate unit 300 is formed in a horizontally long plate shape as a whole, is arranged in the upper left corner in a front view, and has a horizontally long section shape in the front-rear direction. A ball inflow port 341 penetrating into the ball inflow port 341, a ball supply port 342 arranged at a predetermined distance in the lower right direction from the ball inflow port 341 and penetrating in a ward shape through which a game ball can pass, and a ball inflow port 341 communicating with the rear It mainly has a square tubular prize ball connecting gutter 343 that extends to. As shown in FIG. 43 and the like, the ball inflow port 341 of the plate back plate 340 opens toward the inside of the storage plate 311 of the plate body 310, and the length in the left-right direction is the first inclined surface 311a of the storage plate 311. It is said to be about the same length as the length of. Further, the ball supply port 342 is arranged at the right end of the third inclined surface 331c in the storage dish 311 at a position corresponding to the first ball removing slide 356 of the first ball removing mechanism 350. Further, the prize ball connecting gutter 343 is arranged at a position biased to the left end in front view with respect to the ball inflow port 341, and the length in the left-right direction is about half of the length of the ball inflow port 341. The length is set so that the rear end penetrates the prize ball passage port 111 of the door frame base main body 110 and communicates with the outlet 921 at the lower end (front end) of the front guide passage 920 in the full tank unit 900 described later. ..

Further, the plate back plate 340 is arranged at a position where the front end of the prize ball connecting gutter 343 is reserved by a predetermined amount behind the ball inflow port 341, and is located between the ball inflow port 341 and the prize ball connecting gutter 343. Further, it has a shelf portion 344 extending over the entire length of the ball inflow port 341 in the left-right direction and through which game balls can be distributed. The shelf portion 344 allows the game balls that have been distributed through the prize ball connecting gutter 343 to flow in to the downstream side of the second ball outlet 312 of the storage plate 311.

Further, the back plate 340 corresponds to the ball pulling path 393 of the lower speaker unit 390 described later and penetrates in a substantially L shape, and the ball flow at the upper left of the front view of the ball pulling path opening 345 and the ball pulling path opening 345. A latch opening 346 that is arranged below the inlet 341 (second ball extraction port 312 in the dish body 310) and penetrates into a section shape through which the rear end of the latch unit 366 of the second ball extraction mechanism 360 described later is inserted. , The wiring insertion port 347, which is arranged in the upper right corner of the front view and penetrates into a substantially section shape, and the ball rental unit 301, which is arranged on the upper side of the back plate 340 between the ball inflow port 341 and the wiring insertion port 346, are attached. It is provided with a ball rental unit mounting portion 348 for the purpose.

[1-2C-4. First ball removal mechanism]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 44, 45, 50 and the like, the first ball removing mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 presses the first ball removing button 351 and the first ball removing button 351 operated by the player. The first ball pulling button base 352, which is slidably supported in the vertical direction and is inserted from below into the first ball pulling button mounting port 315 of the dish body 310, and the dish on the upper part of the first ball pulling button base 352 Supported by a first ball pulling button decorative body 353 in which the first ball pulling button 351 is fixed so as to project upward with the body 310 sandwiched between the first ball pulling button decorative body 353 and the first ball pulling button base 352. A rotating shaft 354 supported at the position of the first ball removing mechanism support portion 316 of the dish body 311 on the right side (left side in FIG. 50) of the lower end of the first ball removing button 351 and the rotating shaft. An inverted L-shaped first ball pulling crank 355, which is rotatably supported by 354 and has one end in contact with the lower end of the first ball pulling button 351 and the other end extending downward, and a first ball pulling crank. It is made able to come into contact with the lower end of the other end side of the 355 and is slidably supported by the first ball pulling mechanism support portion 316 of the dish body 311 in substantially the left-right direction, and is supported by the third inclined surface 311c of the dish body 310 and the first It includes a first ball pulling slide 356 capable of closing the boundary portion with the ball pulling path 313, and a first ball pulling spring 357 that urges the first ball pulling crank 355 to rotate in a predetermined direction. ..

The first ball pulling slide 356 of the first ball pulling mechanism 350 can be slid in the left-right direction by being inserted and arranged in the slide groove 316a of the first ball pulling mechanism support portion 316 in the dish body 310. In this state, the first ball removing crank 355 rotates so that the first ball removing crank 355 can be slid in the left-right direction by the lower end on the other end side. By sliding the first ball pulling slide 356 in the left-right direction, the tip portion of the first ball pulling slide 356 can move back and forth in the flow path at the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c of the dish body 310 and the first ball pulling path 313. When the flow path is closed by advancing to the boundary portion, the game ball that has flowed through the third inclined surface 311c can be supplied to the ball supply port 342, and the flow path is retracted from the boundary portion. When opened, the game balls that have circulated on the third inclined surface 311c can be supplied (discharged) to the first ball removing path 313 side.

Further, the first ball pulling crank 355 is locked with the upper end portion of the first ball pulling spring 357 on the side opposite to the one end side that comes into contact with the lower end portion of the first ball pulling button 351 with the rotation shaft 354 interposed therebetween. The hook portion 355a is formed. The upper end of the first ball pulling spring 357 is engaged with the hook portion 355a of the first ball pulling crank 355, and the lower end thereof is engaged with the hook portion 316b of the first ball pulling mechanism support portion 316 of the dish body 310. By stopping, the first ball pulling crank 355 is closed, the position where the first ball pulling slide 356 closes the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball pulling path 313, and the first ball pulling button 351 is the most. It can be urged to rotate in the direction of the raised position.

In this first ball pulling mechanism 350, when the first ball pulling button 351 is pressed by the player, the first ball pulling crank 355 passes through the contact pin 355b that comes into contact with the lower end of the first ball pulling button 351. Rotates in a direction in which one end side moves downward against the urging force of the first ball pulling spring 357, and the other end side moves away from the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball pulling path 313. Move to. Then, the first ball pulling slide 356 moves together with the lower end of the first ball pulling crank 355 in a direction away from the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball pulling path 313, and the tip of the first ball pulling slide 356 Retreats from the flow path of the boundary portion and the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removing path 313 communicate with each other, and the third inclined surface 311c, that is, all the game balls in the storage dish 311 are used as the first ball. It can be discharged to the outside via the punching path 313.

When the pressing of the first ball removing button 351 is released, the first ball removing crank 355 is rotated by the urging force of the first ball removing spring 357, the first ball removing button 351 is raised, and the first ball is raised. The tip of the drawing slide 356 advances into the flow path at the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball pulling path 313, closes the flow path, and is on the third inclined surface 311c (inside the storage pan 311). The game ball can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device 650 via the ball supply port 342.

[1-2C-5. Second ball removal mechanism]
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 51 and the like, the second ball pulling mechanism 360 in the dish unit 300 is a second ball protruding forward from the opening 321c for the second ball pulling button of the main body 321 in the dish unit main body 320. The front and rear of the second ball pulling slide 362 and the second ball pulling slide 362, in which the pulling button 361 and the second ball pulling button 361 are fitted and fixed to the tip and supported so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction by the lower speaker unit 390 described later. The rod-shaped second ball-extracting crank 363, which transmits the movement in the direction and is rotatably supported around the axis extending in the left-right direction by the lower speaker unit 390, and the dish body 310 by the rotation of the second ball-extracting crank 363. A second ball removal shutter 364 that can rotate around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the closed position that closes the second ball extraction port 312 and the open position that opens the second ball extraction port 312, and the second The second ball pulling spring 365 that urges the ball pulling shutter 364 to the closed position where the second ball pulling port 312 is closed, and the second ball pulling shutter 364 that opposes the urging force of the second ball pulling spring 365. It has a latch unit 366 that can be held in a position, an opening 367a that slidably supports the lower surface of the second ball extraction shutter 364 and corresponds to the second ball extraction port 312, and is fixed to the lower side of the dish 310. The second ball pulling base 367 and the rear end of the second ball pulling slide 362 are slidably held and the latch unit 366 is supported, and the second ball is pulled out in cooperation with the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390 described later. A second ball pulling mechanism support 368 (see FIGS. 44 and 47) that rotatably supports the ball pulling crank 363 is provided.

The second ball pulling slide 362 of the second ball pulling mechanism 360 has a transmission groove 362a that is opened upward at the rear end and the lower end of the second ball pulling crank 363 is inserted, and protrudes rearward from the rear end. It is provided with an engaging claw 366a of the latch unit 366 and an engaging protrusion 362b that can be engaged. Further, the second ball removing crank 363 is a rod-shaped member extending substantially in the vertical direction, and the lower end portion thereof is inserted into the transmission groove 362a of the second ball removing slide 362 from above and is substantially in the middle in the vertical direction. The portion is rotatably supported by the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390. Thus, when the second ball removing slide 362 slides in the front-rear direction, the lower end portion of the second ball removing crank 363 moves along with the sliding of the transmission groove 362a, and the second ball removing crank 363 rotates. , The upper end portion of the second ball removing crank 363 moves in the direction opposite to the lower end portion.

Further, as shown in the figure, the second ball removing shutter 364 is arranged above the second ball removing slide 362, and opens the second ball removing port 312 of the dish 310 and the opening 367a of the second ball removing base 367. A semicircular (D-shaped) plate-shaped closing portion 364a that can be closed, and a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod extending from the closing portion 364a in one of the left-right directions (leftward in front view, rightward in FIG. 51). It has 364b and is formed in a substantially P shape as a whole. Further, in the second ball removing shutter 364, the tip of the paddle portion 364b is rotatably supported by the plate body 310 and the second ball removing base 367 around an axis extending in the vertical direction, and the paddle portion 364b is provided. The upper end portion of the second ball removing crank 363 comes into contact with the substantially intermediate portion in the left-right direction on the rear side. Further, the front end portion of the second ball removing spring 365 is locked to the rear base end portion of the paddle portion 364b in the second ball removing shutter 364. Although not shown, the rear end of the second ball pulling spring 365 is locked to a locking boss that hangs downward from the lower surface of the dish 310, and the second ball pulling spring 365 As a result, the closing portion 364a of the second ball removing shutter 364 is urged to be in the closed position (position shown in FIG. 51) for closing the second ball removing port 312.

Further, in the second ball removing base 367 of the second ball removing mechanism 360, the upper end portion of the second ball removing crank 363 can pass between the opening 367a and the position where the second ball removing shutter 364 is pivotally supported. A slit 367b extending in the front-rear direction is provided, and the upper end portion of the second ball pulling crank 363 pivotally supported on the lower side of the second ball pulling base 367 via the slit 367b is the upper surface of the second ball pulling base 367. It is possible to come into contact with the sill portion 364b of the second ball removing shutter 364 arranged in. As shown in the figure, the second ball removing base 367 is formed in a shallow dish shape, and the dish body 310 can form a storage space for accommodating the second ball removing shutter 364. There is. Further, the height of the accommodation space for accommodating the second ball removing shutter 364 is smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball and is lower than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the second ball removing shutter 364 rotates to rotate the second ball removing port 312. Even if is in the open state, the game ball does not enter between the dish body 310 and the second ball removing base 367.

In the second ball removing mechanism 360 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the second ball removing button 361 protruding forward from the front surface of the plate unit main body 320, the second ball removing slide 362 slides rearward and the second ball removing slide 362 is second. Guided by the transmission groove 362a of the two-ball pulling slide 362, the second ball pulling crank 363 rotates so that the lower end portion of the second ball pulling crank 363 moves rearward. Then, when the second ball removing crank 363 rotates, the upper end portion thereof moves forward in the direction opposite to the lower end portion, and the second ball removing shutter 364 comes into contact with the upper end portion of the second ball removing crank 363. However, the closing portion 364a rotates about the tip of the paddle portion 364b so as to move forward against the urging force of the second ball pulling spring 365. When the closing portion 364a moves forward in this way and the opening 367a of the second ball pulling port 312 of the dish body 310 and the second ball pulling base 367 is opened, the second ball pulling port 312 in the storage dish 311 is opened. The game balls stored on the upstream side are discharged to the lower outside of the dish unit 300 through the second ball outlet 312.

The second ball pulling mechanism 360 of this example is provided with a latch unit 366, and the engaging protrusions 362b at the rear end of the second ball pulling slide 362 are paired in the latch unit 366 by pressing the second ball pulling button 361. When they come into contact with each other, the pair of engaging claws 366a close and engage with each other so as to sandwich the engaging protrusion 362b, and the second ball is pulled out against the urging force of the second ball pulling spring 365. The button 361 is pressed, that is, the second ball extraction port 312 can be held in the open (opened) position by the closing portion 364a of the second ball extraction shutter 364. When the second ball pulling button 361 is pressed in this state, the pair of engaging claws 366a of the latch unit 366 is opened, the engagement with the engaging protrusion 362b is released, and the urging force of the second ball pulling spring 365 causes the second ball pulling spring 365 to release the engagement. The closing portion 364a of the second ball removing shutter 364 can return to the position where the second ball removing port 312 is closed.

[1-2C-6. Operation button unit]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 52 to 55, the operation button unit 370 in the dish unit 300 is mounted and fixed from above with respect to the operation button mounting recess 314 of the dish body 310 in the dish unit 300. A pair consisting of an octagonal main button 371 with the four corners cut off in a plan view, and a home base-shaped left sub button 372L and a right sub button 372R arranged symmetrically on both the left and right sides of the main button 371 in a plan view. The operation button unit base 373 and the operation button unit base 373 that hold the sub button 372, the main button 371, and the sub button 372 in a slidable manner in the vertical direction and are inserted into the operation button mounting recess 314 of the dish body 310. A plate-shaped operation button unit decorative member 374 that decorates the upper surface, an operation button unit board 375 that is fixed to the lower side of the operation button unit base 373 and has a plurality of color LEDs 375a that are fixed to the lower side of the operation button unit base 373 to illuminate and decorate the operation button unit 370. It has.

Further, the operation button unit 370 includes a main button sensor 376 that detects the operation of the main button 371, a left sub button sensor 377L that detects the operation of the left sub button 372L, and a right sub that detects the operation of the right sub button 372R. It further includes a button sensor 377R. The main button sensor 376, the left sub button sensor 377L, and the right sub button sensor 377L are photosensors each having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and are fixed at predetermined positions on the operation button unit board 375, respectively. ..

As shown in the figure, the operation button unit base 373 of the operation button unit 370 has a substantially rhombic shape in a plan view, and has a main button accommodating recess 373a capable of accommodating the main button 371 from above, and a main button accommodating portion 373a. A plurality of guide grooves 373b formed on the inner peripheral surface and extending in the vertical direction with the upper side open to guide the main button 371 in the vertical direction, and a substantially circular opening formed on the bottom surface of the main button accommodating recess 373a. A plurality of light guide openings 373d, which are opened along the outer circumference of the main button accommodating recess 373a with a predetermined width and guide the light from the LED 375a of the operation button unit substrate 375 arranged on the lower side to the upper surface side, and a sub. A pair of sub-button accommodating recesses 373e capable of accommodating the button 372 from above, a screw insertion hole 373f formed in the diagonal upper corner of the long axis, and a plate-shaped top plate portion forming the upper surface of the operation button unit base 373. It mainly includes 373 g and a plate-shaped side wall portion 373 h that hangs down from the lower surface along the outer circumference of the top plate portion 373 g so as to surround the outer periphery.

The operation button unit base 373 is formed in a box shape with an open lower surface by a top plate portion 373g and a side wall portion 373h, and a plurality of main button accommodating recesses 373a (main button accommodating recesses 373a) are formed at predetermined positions of the top plate portion 373g. Here, eight) light guide openings 373d, two sub-button accommodating recesses 373e, and two screw insertion holes 373f are opened, respectively. Further, in the operation button unit base 373, the main button accommodating recess 373a is formed to have a thick thickness where the guide groove 373b is not formed, and the strength and rigidity of the inner wall surface and the bottom surface are enhanced. At the same time, each of the light guide openings 373d formed on the outer periphery of the main button accommodating recess 373a is formed in a tubular shape that is long in the vertical direction, and the outer peripheral wall of these tubular light guide openings 373d also forms. The main button accommodating recess 373a is reinforced (see FIG. 53).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, the main button 371 is a cylinder that supports the main button lens 371a that forms the upper surface of the main button 371 and has translucency and the main button lens 371a that is open up and down. A vibrating body holder that wraps the main button base 371b, a vibrating body 371c arranged under the main button base 371b, and the vibrating body 371c and is fixed to the lower side of the main button base 371b via a mounting screw 371d. It is equipped with 371e. Although not shown, the upper end of the main button 371 abuts on the lower side surface of the main button base 371a, and the lower end abuts on the bottom surface of the main button accommodating recess 373a in the operation button unit base 373. It is equipped with a main button spring that urges the 371 to rise.

The main button lens 371a in the main button 371 has an octagonal plan view and is formed in a box shape with an open lower surface, and has a smooth shape on the front surface side, whereas a plurality of small lenses on the back surface side. A portion is formed so that the light from the LED 375a of the operation button unit substrate 375 can be widely diffused so that the entire surface of the main button 371 can be light-emitting and decorated substantially uniformly.

Further, as shown in the figure, the main button base 371b has an octagonal shape similar to that of the main button lens 371 on the upper end side, whereas the lower end side is narrowed downward from the substantially middle portion in the vertical direction. It has a shape, and the lower end extends downward from the opening 373c formed in the bottom surface of the main button accommodating recess 373a in the operation button unit base 373, and is directly above the LED 375a group arranged in the center of the operation button unit board 375. It is designed to be located in. Further, the main button base 371b has a main locking claw 371f extending downward from two opposing sides and a plurality of vertically extending guide protrusions inserted into the guide groove 373b of the operation button unit base 373. With 371 g. The main locking claw 371f of the main button base 371b is locked to the locking portion (not shown) in the main button accommodating recess 373a of the operation button unit base 373, so that the main button 371 becomes the main button spring. It is possible to prevent the main button accommodating recess 373a from coming out due to the urging force of.

Further, the main button base 371b is designed so that the vibrating body 371c can be attached to the inside of one of the main locking claws 371f via the vibrating body holder 371e and the mounting screw 371d, and the portion where the vibrating body 371c is attached. A detection piece 371h (see FIG. 54) detected by the main button sensor 376 is formed inside.

In the main button 371 of this example, when the main button 371 is pushed downward against the urging force of the main button spring, the detection piece 371h of the main button base 371b is placed between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the main button sensor 376. The operation is detected by the main button sensor 376 after entering. Further, when the operation of the main button 371 is detected by the main button sensor 376, the vibrating body 371c is activated, and the operation of the vibrating body 371c causes the main button 371 to vibrate, thereby causing the player to operate. It is possible to recognize that the operation of the main button 371 is being accepted, and it is possible to surprise the player by the vibration of the main button 371. A light-shielding plate 375b is attached to the operation button unit board 375 to prevent the main button sensor 376 from malfunctioning due to the light from the mounted LED 375a.

Further, the sub-button 372 of the operation button unit 370 supports a sub-button lens 372a having a substantially isosceles right-angled triangular shape and translucency in a plan view and a sub-button lens 372a in a plan view on a home base-like upper surface. The sub button base 372b housed in the sub button housing recess 373e in the operation button unit base 373 from above, and the sub button base 372b and the bottom surface of the sub button housing recess 373e are arranged below the sub button lens 372a. It includes a sub-button spring 372c that urges the button base 372b in a rising direction. The sub-button base 372a of the sub-button 372 includes a sub-locking claw 372d that hangs downward from the front and rear of the sub-button spring 372c, and a plate-shaped guide wall portion 372e that hangs downward from the long side of the home base. And a detection piece 372f extending further downward from the lower end of the guide wall portion 372e.

The sub-button 372 has a sub-locking claw 372d that is locked to a locking portion (not shown) in the sub-button accommodating recess 373e of the operation button unit base 373. By locking the 372d to the locking portion, it is possible to prevent the sub button 372 from coming out of the sub button accommodating recess 373e due to the urging force of the sub button spring 372c. Further, when the sub button 372 is pushed downward against the urging force of the sub button spring 372c, the detection piece 372f of the sub button base 372b enters between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the sub button sensor 377. The operation of the sub button 372 is detected by the sub button sensor 377.

Further, as shown in the figure, the operation button unit decorative member 374 of the operation button unit 370 has a substantially rhombic shape in a plan view and is formed in a plate shape, and the main button lens 371a of the main button 371 and the two sub buttons 372. An opening 374a through which the sub-button lens 372a can pass is formed, and a decorative member lens 374b having translucency is provided at a position corresponding to the light guide opening 373d of the operation button unit base 373. .. Further, a mounting hole 374c (not shown) through which a mounting screw (not shown) can be inserted is bored in the diagonally upper corner of the long axis, and is inserted through the mounting hole 374c and the screw insertion hole 373f of the operation button unit base 373. The operation button unit 370 is mounted and fixed to the dish 310 by a predetermined mounting screw. In this example, a screw hiding 378 that hides the two mounting holes 374c is attached to the upper surface of the operation button unit decorative member 374.

In the operation button unit 370 of the present embodiment, as described above, the operation button unit base 373 is formed in a triple tubular shape by the main button accommodating recess 373a, the light guide opening 373d, and the side wall portion 373h. Since the strength and rigidity are increased, the operation button unit 370 is less likely to be damaged even if it is strongly operated by hitting the main button 371 or the like. Further, the operation button unit 370 is mounted and fixed to the operation button mounting recess 314 of the dish body 310 from above, and even if the operation button unit 370 is damaged or malfunctions, it should occur. , The dish body 310 can be easily attached and detached from above and replaced. Further, since the operation button unit 370 is supported (mounted) on the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390 described later via the dish body 310, the impact resistance and the load capacity from the main button 371 and the like are supported. The property is further enhanced, and not only the operation button unit 370 but also the entire dish unit 300 is less likely to be damaged.

[1-2C-7. Lower speaker unit]
Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, the lower speaker unit 390 in the dish unit 300 has a lower speaker 391 having a diameter larger than that of the side speaker 121 of the side speaker lighting unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100 and a lower portion. It mainly includes a box-shaped speaker box 392 that holds the speaker 391 at a position closer to the front right side in the front view and at a position behind the speaker opening 321a of the main body portion 321 of the dish unit main body 320. The lower speaker unit 390 of the present embodiment is a bass reflex type speaker in which the internal space of the speaker box 392 is opened to the outside through the opening 392a, and can emit deeper bass with respect to the speaker diameter of the lower speaker 391. You can do it.

The opening 392a of the speaker box 392 is formed at a desired position in the duct opening 321f of the main body 321 of the dish unit main body 320, and the flow of air entering and exiting the speaker box 392 due to the vibration of the lower speaker 391 is generated. It goes in and out through the duct opening 321f. Further, the flow of air entering and exiting through the duct opening 321f by driving (vibration) of the lower speaker 391 is formed so as to pass through the grip members 421 and 413 of the operation handle portion 410 in the handle device 400, and the operation handle. The air flow (wind) from the lower speaker 391 can be applied to the hand of the player who operates the unit 410, giving the player an unprecedented feel and entertaining. There is. By sending an acoustic signal having a frequency lower than the human audible band to the lower speaker 391, only the wind can be applied to the player from the duct opening 321f, and the combination with the vibrating body 371c of the main button 371 can be applied. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the tactile effect that has not been seen in conventional game machines.

Further, the speaker box 392 is arranged on the rear surface downstream of the first ball pulling path 313 and the second ball pulling port 312 of the dish body 310, and flows through the first ball pulling path 313 and the second ball pulling port 312. It is provided with a ball removal path 393 that guides the game ball that has been played to the lower part of the speaker box 392 substantially in the center in the left-right direction. The ball pulling path 393 is formed in a substantially L shape with the rear open, and the door frame base main body in the door frame base unit 100 is formed through the ball pulling path opening 345 of the back plate 340 in the dish unit 300. The rear side is closed by the ball pulling path cover 191 that closes the ball pulling path opening 111 of 110. Further, the game balls circulated through the ball removal path 393 are discharged downward from the plate unit 300 from the ball discharge port 321 g of the main body portion 321 of the plate unit main body 320.

Further, the speaker box 392 has a second ball pulling slide holding hole 394 for holding the front end of the second ball pulling slide 362 of the second ball pulling mechanism 360 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction on the upper left side when viewed from the front. It is provided with a second ball pulling mechanism support portion 395 which is arranged behind the two ball pulling slide holding hole 394 and supports the second ball pulling mechanism support 368 of the second ball pulling mechanism 360. The second ball pulling mechanism 360 can be supported at a predetermined position by the second ball pulling slide holding hole 394 and the second ball pulling mechanism support portion 395.

[1-2C-8. Handle device]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 56 to 58, the handle device 400 in the dish unit 300 has an operation handle portion 410 provided on the lower front surface on the open side of the door frame 5 and a door frame 5 corresponding to the operation handle portion 410. It is composed of a joint unit 180 that is assembled on the back surface of the door and is linked with a rotary shaft 415 that rotates in response to a rotary operation of the operation handle portion 410 and that changes the rotary motion of the rotary shaft 415 into a slide motion.

First, the operation handle portion 410 is a handle support cylinder portion of a cylindrical handle base 303 that is attached so as to project forward from the handle base attachment port 321d of the main body portion 321 of the dish unit main body 320 of the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5. It is inserted and fixed in 303a. Since the handle support cylinder portion 303a is formed so as to be inclined toward the outside (right side) in a plan view of the pachinko machine 1 from above, the operation handle portion 410 inserted and fixed in the handle support cylinder portion 303a. Also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front vertical plane of the pachinko machine 1) and the door frame. It will be attached and fixed to 5. As described above, by inclining the operation handle portion 410 toward the outside in a plan view, there is an advantage that the player can easily grip the operation handle portion 410, and the rotation operation is easy to perform without any discomfort. Then, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, even if the operation handle portion 410 is tilted and installed, the rotational movement of the rotation shaft 415 of the operation handle portion 410 is smoothly transmitted, and the elastic force of the ball launching device 650 is increased. A structure that can be adjusted is adopted. After inserting the operation handle portion 410 into the handle support cylinder portion 303a, the handle support cylinder portion 303a and the operation handle portion 410 (to be exact, the rear grip member 413) are connected by a screw or the like to form the operation handle portion 410. It cannot be pulled out from the handle support cylinder portion 303a.

Further, as shown in FIG. 58, the operation handle portion 410 is rotatably pivotally supported between the front grip member 412, the rear grip member 413, the front grip member 412, and the rear grip member 413. It is composed of an operating member 414, a linear cylindrical rotating shaft 415 whose one end is fixed to the rotating operating member 414, and a cam 416 fixed to the other end of the rotating shaft 415. In the rear grip member 413, a small diameter portion fitted to the handle support cylinder portion 303a and a large diameter portion in front of the small diameter portion are integrally formed, and a shaft through hole 418 through which the rotating shaft 415 penetrates is formed in the center thereof. It is formed. When the rotating shaft 415 is inserted into the shaft through hole 418, the bearing bush 417 is fitted into the rear end of the shaft through hole 418, and the rotating shaft 415 is inserted through the bearing bush 417. On the other hand, the rotating shaft 415 penetrated through the shaft through hole 418 via the bearing bush 417 penetrates the bearing hole 424 of the fixed bearing member 423 fixed to the front side of the rear grip member 413 and penetrates the rotation operating member 414. It is fitted into the shaft fitting hole 426 formed in the center.

Further, on the front side of the rear grip member 413, protrusions and mounting holes (both not shown) for fixing the touch sensor 420 and the launch stop switch 422 are provided, and the single-shot button 421 is swingably supported. A swing pin (not shown) is formed, and a touch sensor 420, a launch stop switch 422, and a single-shot button 421 are mounted on the protrusions, mounting holes, and swing pin. Then, the wiring through hole 419 having the wiring through hole 419 formed on the side of the shaft through hole 418 of the rear grip member 413 is gathered together with the wiring from the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 in the state where they are attached. It is led to the back surface of the door frame 5 from the portion 428 and the wiring opening 184c (see FIG. 31) and is connected to the handle relay terminal plate 194 (see FIGS. 24 and 25). The wiring from the handle relay terminal plate 194 is attached along the lower reinforcing plate 36 described above, and is electrically connected to the payout control board 1186 described later. Further, an urging spring 425 is provided between the fixed bearing member 423 and the rotation operating member 414 so as to be provided around the rotating shaft 415, and the urging spring 425 is always based on the rotation operating member 414. It is designed to return to the position of. Further, when the switch contact convex portion 427 is projected outside the shaft fitting hole 426 of the rotation operation member 414 and the rotation operation member 414 is in the original position by the urging force of the urging spring 425, the switch contact. When the convex portion 427 contacts the actuator of the launch stop switch 422 to turn off the launch stop switch 422 and the rotation operation member 414 is rotated by the player, the switch contact convex portion 427 becomes the actuator of the launch stop switch 422. Separate and turn on. Further, since the single-shot button 421 can swing while the firing stop switch 422 is ON, the actuator of the firing stop switch 422 can be turned off by pressing the single-shot button 421. ing.

The outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation member 414 is subjected to conductive plating, and the touch sensor 420 detects the contact when the player comes into contact with the rotation operation member 414. Then, when the player rotates the rotation operation member 414 to turn on the launch stop switch 422 and the touch sensor 420 detects contact, the launch motor 695 described later of the ball launching device 650 (see FIG. 91). ) Is driven to rotate.

Further, the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 is formed in a ball shape, and the cam contact of the slide body 182 (see FIGS. 31 and 59) of the joint unit 180 described later according to the rotation of the rotating shaft 415. The portion 182d is pressed and slid in one direction. Then, in the present embodiment, the operation handle portion 410 is tilted in a plan view as described above by the cooperative structure of the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 and the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180. It is possible.

As described above, the operation handle portion 410 is inserted and supported from the front side of the door frame 5 into the handle support cylinder portion 303a of the handle base 303, and the joint unit 180 is attached to the joint unit mounting recess 110c from the back surface side of the door frame 5. As a result, as shown in FIG. 56, the cam 416 fixed to the tip end portion of the rotating shaft 415 is housed in the cam engaging recess 182c of the slide body 182. In this case, since the operation handle portion 410 is attached in an inclined shape in a plan view, the cam 416 is also inclined with respect to the vertical surface of the door frame 5, but the cam engaging recess 182c is predetermined in the front-rear direction. Since it has a space width, the entire inclined cam 416 can be stored in the space of the cam engaging recess 182c. Further, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), the center of rotation of the cam 416 is located on the side of the cam contact portion 182d, and the tip of the magatama-shaped cam 416 is below the cam engaging recess 182c. It is designed to be located in the space.

When the player rotates the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 in the above-mentioned state, the rotation shaft 415 rotates, and the cam 416 rotates accordingly. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 59 (B). The slide body 182 is in one direction (in the case of FIG. 59, the right side in the drawing) due to the contact between the cam contact portion 182d of the cam engagement recess 182c and the outer surface on one side of the cam 416 (the outer surface in front of rotation). Slide to move. That is, the rotational movement of the rotation shaft 415 is converted into the slide movement of the slide body 182. Therefore, the distance S1 between the rotation center of the cam 416 and the end edge of the slide projecting piece 183 of the slide body 182 in the traveling direction in the initial state (before rotation) shown in FIG. 59 (A) is the maximum of the cam 416. Due to the rotation, the distance S2 becomes larger than the distance S1. That is, the slide projecting piece 183 of the slide body 182 slides by the distance of "S2-S1". Then, as shown in FIGS. 57, 60, and 61, the slide movement of the slide projecting piece 183 of the joint unit 180 is transmitted to the slide member 710 of the ball launching device 650, and the urging spring 684 of the ball launching device 650 ( The tension of (see FIG. 91) can be adjusted, and the strength of the urging force of the hitting mallet 687 can be adjusted to obtain the elastic force of the hitting ball desired by the player. The relationship between the handle device 400 and the ball launching device 650 will be described in detail after the description of the ball launching device 650.

The wiring led out from the inside of the operation handle portion 410 through the wiring through hole 419, the wiring through cylinder portion 428, and the wiring opening 184c to the back surface of the door frame 5 is on the shaft support side along the lower side of the back surface of the door frame 5. After that, it is connected to the operation handle terminal 1194 (see FIG. 132) of the payout control board 1186 which is collectively mounted on the board unit 1100 mounted on the back surface side of the main body frame 3. ..

[1-2C-9. Effect of dish unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game ball in the storage dish 311 of the dish unit 300 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 62 and 63. In this example, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, flow into the storage plate 311 from the ball inflow port 341 via the prize ball communication gutter 343 of the full tank unit 900 and the back plate 340. The game ball that has flowed in from the ball inflow port 341 first flows into the first inclined surface 311a. The first inclined surface 311a is formed so that the front side and the right side in the front view are lowered, and the game ball flowing into the first inclined surface 311a from the ball inflow port 341 is along the inclination of the first inclined surface 311a. It comes into contact with a position substantially opposite to the ball inflow port 341 of the outer peripheral wall 311h surrounding the front outer circumference of the storage dish 311. This position of the outer peripheral wall 311h is inclined in a curved shape with respect to the surface of the plate back plate 340 in which the ball inflow port 341 is formed, and the game ball in contact with the outer peripheral wall 311h is to the right in the front view. It is designed to reflect.

Then, the game ball that flows into the storage plate 311 from the ball inflow port 341 and is reflected to the right by the outer peripheral wall 311h enters the fifth inclined surface 311e beyond the fourth inclined surface 311d. The fifth inclined surface 311e has a lower left side in front view, that is, the fourth inclined surface 311d side, and the inclination angle is set to a gentle inclination that allows a game ball entering from the first inclined surface 311a to climb a slope. The game ball that has entered from the first inclined surface 311a beyond the fourth inclined surface 311d is distributed to the upper part of the fifth inclined surface 311e (the right end in the plan view) while climbing the fifth inclined surface 311e. It will be. Further, the fifth inclined surface 311e is partitioned from the front side to the rear side around the right end portion by an outer peripheral wall 311h and a partition wall 311f, and the game ball that has entered the fifth inclined surface 311e is around it. It goes around the inside of the fifth inclined surface 311e so as to substantially follow the outer peripheral wall 311h and the partition wall 311f surrounding the above, and returns to the fourth inclined surface 311d side arranged on the left side of the fifth inclined surface 311e.

The game ball that has entered the fourth inclined surface 311d from the fifth inclined surface 311e circulates to the second inclined surface 311b behind the fourth inclined surface 311d according to the inclination of the fourth inclined surface 311d, and further, the second It enters from the inclined surface 311b to the third inclined surface 311c on the right side, and is supplied to the ball launcher 650 from the ball supply port 342 of the dish back plate 340 arranged at the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c. It has become. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the storage dish 311 from the ball supply port 341 does not directly go from the first inclined surface 311a to the third inclined surface 311c via the second inclined surface 311b, but from the first inclined surface 311a. After entering the fifth inclined surface 311e through the fourth inclined surface 311d, it reaches the third inclined surface 311c through the fourth inclined surface 311e and the second inclined surface 311b, and reaches the ball flow inlet. It is possible to bypass the game ball that has flowed in from 341.

As a result, a plurality of game balls can be stored by effectively using the entire storage plate 311, and the game balls are stored in a state of low storage like a conventional pachinko machine, and the game balls block the ball inflow port 341. Then, the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900 is activated, the payout of the game ball is stopped, or the launching operation of the game ball by the ball launcher 650 is stopped, and the game is interrupted. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

By the way, since many game balls are stored in the storage plate 311 of the plate unit 300 of this example, the ball inflow port 341 is closed by the stored game balls, and the prize ball communication trough 343 and the prize of the plate back plate 340 are awarded. When a game ball stays in the full tank unit 900 arranged between the ball unit 800, the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900 is activated to stop the payout of the game ball from the prize ball unit 800. , The launching operation of the game ball in the ball launching device 650 is stopped, and in particular, when the launching operation of the ball launching device 650 is stopped, the game must be interrupted. When the amount of game balls stored in the plate 311 reaches an appropriate amount, the first ball removal button 351 and the second ball removal button 361 are operated to place the game balls from the storage plate 311 below the plate unit 300 (a container ( For example, it needs to be discharged to a dollar box). In this example, when the full tank switch 916 is activated, the player is informed that the storage plate 311 is full, and then the firing operation of the ball launching device 650 is stopped.

To eject the game ball from the storage plate 311 by operating (pressing) the first ball extraction button 351 arranged on the upper surface of the plate unit 300, the first ball extraction slide 356 of the first ball extraction mechanism 350 is operated. Slides to release the closure between the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removing path 313, causing the game ball of the third inclined surface 311c to flow down to the first ball removing path 313, and the ball. It can be discharged from the ball discharge port 321 g to the lower side of the dish unit 300 via the punching path 393. By operating the first ball removal button 351, the game balls can be pulled out from the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c, which is the lowest position in the storage plate 311. Therefore, all the game balls are discharged from the storage plate 311. You can do it. However, in ball pulling by operating the first ball pulling button 351, there is a problem that it takes time to pull the ball because the game balls are arranged in a row on the third inclined surface 311c.

Then, when the second ball removing button 361 arranged on the left side of the front surface of the dish unit 300 is operated (pressed), the second ball removing shutter 364 of the second ball removing mechanism 360 moves and the second in the storage dish 311. The ball outlet 312 is opened, and the game ball on the upstream side of the second ball outlet 312 in the storage dish 311 passes through the second ball outlet 312, and the dish unit from the ball outlet 321 g via the ball extraction path 393. It can be discharged downward of 300 (see FIG. 62 (B)). As shown in the figure, the second ball outlet 312 has an opening that is several times larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, so that many game balls can be quickly discharged at one time. Therefore, the presence of the two buttons, the first ball removal button 351 and the second ball removal button 361, allows the player to select the length of time required for ball removal. In addition, if a big hit occurs during the game, a large amount of balls will be paid out to the plate unit 300, and if this is left unattended and the game is continued, the full tank switch 916 provided on the upstream side of the plate unit 300 (FIG. There is a risk that the function of (see 111) will be activated and the payout operation will be stopped, or the firing operation will be stopped and the game will not be able to continue even though the hitting operation of the game ball is stopped and the game cannot be continued. In such a case, by operating the second ball pulling button 361, the ball being stored in the dish unit 300 is pulled out, and at the same time, the supply of the ball to the launch position is maintained and the game during the big hit. Can be continued.

Further, in the dish unit 300 of this example, when the second ball removing button 361 is operated, the second ball removing shutter 364 is held in the open position by the latch unit 366 of the second ball removing mechanism 360, and the second ball removing port is opened. The 312 can be left open. In this state, when the game balls on the upstream side of the second ball outlet 312 are discharged and the game balls on the first inclined surface 311a are almost eliminated, the game balls flowing in from the ball inflow port 341 are as described above. , Reflected by the outer peripheral wall 311h and tried to circulate in the direction of the fifth inclined surface 311e, the fourth inclined surface 311d, the fifth inclined surface 311e, and the second inclined surface 311b on the downstream side of the second ball outlet 312. A game ball is supplied on the third inclined surface 311c. Therefore, even if the game ball on the third inclined surface 311c is consumed by the launching operation of the ball launching device 650, as long as the game ball flows into the storage plate 311 from the ball inflow port 341, the second inclined surface 311b, A game ball is supplied to the third inclined surface 311c via the fourth inclined surface 311d and the fifth inclined surface 311e, and if the launching operation of the game ball is stopped and the number of inflowing game balls increases, the second ball Since it will be produced from the outlet 312, even if the second ball outlet 312 is left open, it is possible to always secure a certain amount of game balls in the storage plate 311 and continue the game. ing. That is, even in a state where the payout of the game balls is continuous, such as during the big hit game, the game can be continued without worrying about the amount of the game balls in the storage plate 311.

In the dish unit 300 of this example, as shown in FIG. 63 and the like, the bottom surface of the storage dish 311 of the dish body 310 is the front surface of the first inclined surface 311a, the second inclined surface 311b, and the third inclined surface 311c. The ball inflow port 341 of the dish back plate 340 has a rectangular shape that extends substantially horizontally in the left-right direction, whereas it becomes lower in the visual direction toward the right (ball supply port 342). Therefore, it is probable that a step is formed between the bottom surface of the storage dish 311 and the bottom surface of the ball inflow port 341, and the step becomes larger toward the right side in the front view. ing. The step between the bottom surface of the storage dish 311 and the bottom of the ball inflow port 341 is almost the same at the left end of the ball inflow port 341, and at the right end of the ball inflow port 341 from the outer diameter of the game ball. Is also a slightly higher step. As a result, the game ball that has flowed in in the front-rear direction substantially straight through the prize ball connecting gutter 343 flows into the storage plate 311 mainly through the left side portion of the ball inflow port 341 with few steps toward the center. Therefore, since the step is small, the potential energy (falling energy) of the game ball falling from the ball inflow port 341 to the storage plate 311 is also small, and the load applied to the storage plate 311 is reduced and the storage plate 311 is damaged. Can be prevented.

By the way, when the amount of game balls stored in the storage plate 311 increases and a large number of game balls are also stored on the first inclined surface 311a, the ball inflow port 341 via the prize ball connecting gutter 343 The game balls flowing into the storage plate 311 are shaped like pushing the game balls stored in the storage plate 311 from the side, and the game balls are pushed against each other by the lateral force acting on each game ball. It becomes a state. In this state, when the game ball in the storage dish 311 (third inclined surface 311c) is consumed through the ball supply port 342, the game ball is consumed in the vicinity of the upstream of the third inclined surface 311c (second inclined surface 311b). When the width of the flow path is narrowed, the game balls may be pressed against each other to reduce the fluidity of the game balls and cause ball clogging. However, in this example, as described above, the ball inflow port 341 moves in the left-right direction. Since it has an extended rectangular shape, the game ball from the prize ball connecting gutter 343 can directly flow into the second inclined surface 311b through the shelf portion 344, and the game ball can be supplied to the third inclined surface 311c. (See FIG. 62 (B)).

Further, in the portion on the right side of the center of the ball inflow port 341 in the left-right direction, the lower side of the ball inflow port 341 is higher than the outer diameter of the game ball with respect to the bottom surface of the storage plate 311. The game balls that flow into the storage plate 311 will flow into the upper side of the game balls stored in the storage plate 311, and the game balls will be prevented from pushing each other in the lateral direction to increase the fluidity of the game balls. It is possible to prevent it from lowering, and the game ball flowing in from above promotes the movement of the lower game ball (particularly the game ball in contact with the front surface of the plate back plate 340) in the lateral direction, which naturally occurs. It is possible to eliminate the ball clogging (see FIG. 63).

As described above, in the storage plate 300 of this example, even if the amount of game balls stored in the storage plate 311 is large, the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 800 can be stored on the shelf of the horizontally long ball inflow port 341. Since the game balls stored in the storage plate 311 are allowed to flow to the upper side via the portion 344, it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the game balls from being clogged in the storage plate 311 and store the game balls. It is possible to continue the game without worrying about the game ball in the plate 311 and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

[1-2D. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 450 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66. FIG. 64 is a front perspective view of the glass unit, FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view showing the glass unit disassembled from the front, and FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 65 from the rear. As shown in the figure, the glass unit 450 has an opening larger than that of the game window 101 and closes an annular and vertically long octagonal unit frame 451 molded from synthetic resin and the front and rear ends of the opening of the unit frame 451. It includes a transparent glass plate 452 and a strip-shaped glass decorative substrate 453 arranged between the two glass plates 452 along the inner circumference of the unit frame 451.

The unit frame 451 in the glass unit 450 has a substrate insertion groove 451a whose rear side is opened and a glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted, and a plurality of openings 451b which are opened from the substrate insertion groove 451a toward the inner peripheral side of the unit frame 451. A locking groove 451c formed on the outer periphery of the unit frame 451 substantially in the center in the front-rear direction, a terminal plate support portion 451d protruding from the upper left end to the left in front view, and an outer circumference upward with respect to the center in the vertical direction. It includes a stopper piece 451e that projects from the position in the left-right direction, and a locking projection 451f that projects outward from both ends of the lower side in the left-right direction.

Further, the glass decorative substrate 453 in the glass unit 450 is strip-shaped and has flexibility, and a plurality of color LEDs 453a are located on the surface side (inner surface side of the unit frame 451) at positions corresponding to the openings 451b of the unit frame 451. Is mounted, and when the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted into the substrate insertion groove 451a of the unit frame 451, the LED 453a faces the inner surface side of the unit frame 451 through the opening 451b.

Further, the glass unit 450 has a glass decorative relay terminal plate 454 connected to the glass decorative substrate and supported by the terminal plate support portion 451d of the unit frame 451 and an end portion of the glass decorative substrate 453 fixed to the glass decorative relay terminal plate 454. Further includes a substrate retainer 455 and a terminal plate holder 456 that covers the terminal plate support portion 451d of the unit frame 451 that supports the glass decorative relay terminal plate 454.

In the glass unit 450, glass plates 452 are adhesively fixed to the front and rear of the unit frame 451 in a state where the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted into the substrate insertion groove 451a of the unit frame 451. In this glass unit 450, the engaging groove 451c formed on the lower outer periphery of the unit frame 451 engages with the vertically bent projecting piece 151 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140, and the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 451 and the stopper piece 451e and The locking projection 451f is fitted into the glass unit support step 110a of the door frame base body 110 from the rear side, and is detachably attached to the door frame 5 by the stop lever 196. ..

Further, the glass unit 450 is capable of emitting and decorating between two glass plates 452 by appropriately emitting light from the LED 453a of the glass decorative substrate 453, and has an atmosphere different from that of conventional pachinko machines. It is possible to use a pachinko machine 1 having a game window 101 (with a mood).

[1-2E. Security cover]
Subsequently, the security cover 470 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. The security cover 470 has a security function of covering the lower back surface of the glass unit 450 to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game board 4, and as shown in the figure, the left and right sides are made of transparent synthetic resin. It is formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 450 between the reinforcing sheet metals 142 and 143, and the upper side portion thereof is an arc-shaped contact recess 471 along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 603 of the game board 4. In addition to being formed as, a crime prevention rear projection piece 474 is projected rearward along the contact recess 471. Further, with the security cover 470 attached, a security rear end projecting piece 475 is obliquely formed on the back surface on the shaft support side. On the other hand, on the front surface of the security cover 470, a security front projecting piece 472 is projected along the downward shape of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450 with the security cover 470 attached, and is U-shaped at both lower ends. The mounting elastic piece 473 to be formed is formed so as to project forward.

The security cover 470 configured as described above is detachably attached to the back surface side of the door frame 5 by attaching the attachment elastic piece 473 to the attachment opening 116 formed in the door frame base unit 100. In the attached state, although not shown, the crime prevention front projecting piece 472 faces the rear lower one side of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450. Further, the front end of the crime prevention front projecting piece 472 is in contact with the vertically bent projecting piece 151. Further, the crime prevention rear projection piece 474 and the security rear end projection piece 475 are in a state of protruding rearward, but when the door frame 5 is closed, half of the crime prevention rear projection piece 474 on the shaft support side is The lower side surface of the inner rail 603 fixed to the game board 4 is invaded and faced with each other, but the open side half of the rear projection piece 474 is the rail security formed on the inner rail 603 of the front component 601. It is in a state of being inserted into the groove 607, and the security rear end projecting piece 475 is in a superposed position along the upper surface of the security protrusion 608 formed on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3 (see FIG. 76). ).

Thus, when the security cover 470 is attached and the door frame 5 is closed, the security structure by the door frame projecting piece 110d and the engaging grooves 584,585 described above, and the security projecting piece 166 and the security space 586 described later are provided. In addition to the security structure by the above, even if an attempt is made to invade a fraudulent tool from below the glass unit 450, the fraudulent tool intrudes from the lower front of the security cover 470 due to the overlap of the security front projecting piece 472 and the unit frame 451. The crime prevention rear projection piece 474 and the inner rail 603 constituting the front component 601 are overlapped to prevent the intrusion of unauthorized tools from the lower rear surface of the crime prevention cover 470. In particular, against the intrusion of the illegal tool from diagonally below the shaft support side of the door frame 5, the intrusion of the illegal tool into the outer rail 602 is prevented by the overlapping structure of the security protrusion 608 and the security rear end projecting piece 475. Further, the overlapping structure of the inner rail 603 and the crime prevention post-projection piece 474 makes it possible to prevent the intrusion of the illegal tool into the game area 605 of the game board 4.

Similarly, in addition to the security structure by the double bent projecting pieces 153 and 154 of the opening side reinforcing sheet metal 143, the security structure against the intrusion of illegal tools from diagonally below the opening side of the door frame 5 is added. The uneven engagement between the rail security groove 607 and the security rear projection piece 474 can further prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4. The vertical surface between the security rear projection piece 474 and the security rear end projection piece 475 on the back surface side of the security cover 470 is formed by the outer rail 602 and the inner rail 603 with the door frame 5 closed. Since it covers the lower part of the front surface of the guide passage of the hit ball, it also has a function of preventing the hit ball from colliding with the glass plate 452 of the hit ball that is sent back or forth in the guide passage portion.

[1-3. Body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75. FIG. 67 is a front view of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, FIG. 68 is a rear view of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, and FIG. 69 is a main body frame main body before mounting the parts. It is a side view of 500, FIG. 70 is a perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, and FIG. 71 is a perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached. 72 is a perspective view of a state in which the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached is pivotally supported by the outer frame 2, and FIG. 73 is a rear view of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached. Is a perspective view seen from the back surface of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached, and FIG. 75 is a cross-sectional plan view of the pachinko machine cut along the horizontal line in the middle of the pachinko machine 1 (main control board box 624 part). ..

The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment can be detachably attached to the game board 4 from the front side, and has a ball launching device 650, a prize ball tank 720 for paying out prize balls, a tank rail member 740, and a ball passage unit. The 770, the prize ball unit 800, the full tank unit 900, the locking device 1000 that locks the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 to the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 and the main body frame excluding the game board 4. Various parts such as a board unit 1100 in which various control boards and power supply boards 1136 for controlling electrical parts provided in 3 are collectively provided, a cover body 1250 covering the rear opening 580, and the like are mounted. The main body frame main body 500 is provided.

First, the main body frame main body 500 on which the above-mentioned various parts are mounted and the main body frame 3 on which various parts are mounted will be described. In FIG. 67, an upper shaft support metal fitting 503 and a lower shaft support metal fitting 509 (both refer to FIG. 71) for supporting the main body frame 3 on the outer frame 2 with an opening / closing shaft are attached to the upper and lower sides of the main body frame main body 500. When the upper shaft support bracket 503 and the lower shaft support bracket 509 are attached to the shaft support bracket mounting step portions 501 and 502, the upper side and the side of the main body frame main body 500 are formed. The sides are substantially the same plane as the upper side and the side side of the upper shaft support bracket 503, and the lower side and the side side of the main body frame main body 500 are substantially the same plane as the lower side and the side side of the lower shaft support metal fitting 509 (FIG. 73). Here, the upper shaft support fitting 503 and the lower shaft support fitting 509 will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 and 73. The upper shaft support bracket 503 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and its upper end side protrudes forward, and a shaft support pin 504 is erected and fixed on the upper surface protruding forward thereof, and the shaft support pin 504 is fixed. A door shaft support hole 505 is bored on the side.

On the other hand, the lower shaft support metal fitting 509 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and two support plates 506 and 507 are integrally projected on the lower end side and slightly upper portion thereof. The support plate 506 located below constitutes a frame support plate 506 for supporting the main body frame 3 to the lower support metal fitting 66 of the outer frame 2, and the support plate 507 located above constitutes the door frame 5. It constitutes a door support plate 507 for supporting the lower shaft branch 148 to the main body frame 3. Therefore, a shaft support hole (not shown) for inserting the support protrusion 68 of the lower support metal fitting 66 of the outer frame 2 is formed in the frame support plate 506, and the lower shaft support portion 148 of the door frame 5 is formed in the door support plate 507. A shaft support hole 508 for inserting the protruding shaft pin 147 is bored.

By the way, the main body frame main body 500 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the upper portion thereof becomes a game board installation recess 510 (see FIG. 71) for installing the game board 4. The plate portion 511 is a slightly recessed area below the game board installation recess 510. Further, the front upper side portion and the front open side side portion on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are formed with a predetermined width so as to face the back surface of the door frame 5, and the front upper side portion has a predetermined width. An upper security double groove 581 is formed by protrusions projecting in parallel in the lateral direction, and a side security groove 582 is formed on the outside and inside on the front open side on the right side when viewed from the front. A security recess 583 formed by an inner wall whose rear end is an inclined surface connected to the first side wall 540 is formed, and the front shaft support side side on the left side when viewed from the front is a front upper side or a front open. Unlike the side side portion, it is not formed so as to have a predetermined width facing the back surface of the door frame 5, but the front shaft support side portion of the main body frame main body 500 is forward compared to the front upper side portion and the front open side surface portion. It is a shaft support side portion 587 (see FIG. 110) having a large amount of protrusion.

More specifically, the upper security double groove 581 formed on the upper front side is bent rearward at both long side ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 attached and fixed to the back surface of the upper side of the door frame 5. The bent project pieces 155 and 156 are inserted, respectively. Further, the side security groove 582 and the security recess 583 formed on the front opening side side are folded rearward at both long side ends of the opening side reinforcing sheet metal 143 which is attached and fixed to the back surface of the opening portion of the door frame 5. The open side outer bent projectile piece 153 and the open side inner bent projecting piece 154 to be bent are inserted respectively. Further, the tip of the shaft support side L-shaped bent projecting piece 157 of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 142 which is attached and fixed to the shaft support side back surface of the door frame 5 on the shaft support side portion 587 of the front shaft support side side portion. The parts are in contact with each other.

The structure described above can prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a piano wire or other fraudulent tool through the gap between the contact surfaces of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, and in particular, the open side where fraudulent acts are most likely to occur. It has a structure that can prevent fraudulent activities in the peripheral area and the upper area where fraudulent activities are likely to occur. Of course, the prevention of fraudulent activity due to the contact between the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 142 on the shaft support side and the L-shaped bent projectile piece 157 on the shaft support side also works well, but in many cases, the shaft support side is sturdy. Since the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are connected by the support metal fittings 45 and 66 and the shaft support metal fittings 503 and 509, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is compared with that of the upper side portion and the open side portion. It is difficult to make a gap in the door. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a single security structure is used instead of a double security structure. These points will be described in detail later.

Further, in addition to the above configurations, the front upper side portion, the front open side side portion, and the front shaft support side portion on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are provided on the upper, middle, and lower portions of the front open side side portion. A door hook hole 549 is provided to penetrate the door hook portion 1041 (see FIG. 121) provided in the lock device 1000 to be attached to the open side back surface of the main body frame 3 and to project forward. Further, a board positioning protrusion 576 for engaging with the positioning recess 611 formed in the game board 4 is provided on the inner surface of the front shaft support side side portion. Further, on the inner front surface slightly below the board positioning protrusion 576 on the front shaft support side side, the shaft support side L-shaped bent projectile 157 of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 142 with the door frame 5 closed. Two upper and lower regulation protrusions 577 into which the tip is inserted are projected. The action of the regulation protrusion 577 is as described above. Further, as shown in FIG. 67, a board stopper insertion hole in which the end portion of the game board stopper 614 provided on the game board 4 is engaged above and below the boundary between the flat portion on the open side and the game board installation recess 510. 578 is formed.

Next, the configuration of the plate portion 511 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 72. The upper surface of the plate portion 511 is a game board mounting portion 512 for mounting the game board 4, and when the game board 4 is mounted in the substantially center of the game board mounting portion 512, the game board is mounted. A passage support protrusion 513 that supports the lower surface of the out port 606 (see FIG. 76) formed in 4 is provided so as to project. Further, as shown in FIG. 67, rail mounting bosses 514 are projected from the central portion of the front surface of the plate portion 511 toward the end portion on the open side at predetermined intervals, and the launch rail 515 (on the rail mounting boss 514) ( (See FIG. 71) is fixed with screws. Further, a rail connecting member 516 is projected from the front surface of the plate portion 511 corresponding to the tip position of the launch rail 515, and when the game board 4 is installed in the game board installation recess 510, the inner rail of the game board 4 is installed. It is adjacent to the connecting passage portion 609 (see FIG. 76), which is the downstream end of the 603.

Further, at the lateral position of the rail connecting member 516 (the position opposite to the launch rail 515), the upper end portion of the elliptical game board fixture 519 (see FIG. 71) for fixing the lower portion of the game board 4. A fixture mounting boss 517 for mounting the fixture is projected, and a stopper 518 is projected diagonally downward thereof. That is, the game board fixing tool 519 is rotatably provided around the fixing tool mounting boss 517, and rotates clockwise with the game board 4 mounted on the game board mounting portion 512. The fixture 519 is pressed against the front surface of the game board 4 to fix the game board 4. Further, when removing the game board, it can be easily performed by turning the game board fixture 519 counterclockwise to remove it. In this case, the game board fixture 519 is prevented from being excessively rotated counterclockwise by the stopper 518.

Further, the lower portion of the plate portion 511 on the open side is formed with a rectangular parallelepiped launcher mounting portion 520 that protrudes toward the front side (concave when viewed from the back surface). A ball launching device 650 is fixed to the mounting portion 520 from the back surface of the main body frame main body 500. This point will be described in detail later. A handle connecting window 522 in which a slide member 710 (see FIG. 95) linked with the slide projecting piece 183 of the joint unit 180 described above is housed is formed on the front wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 520 described above. A shaft hole 523 facing the end face of the bearing 689 (see FIG. 91) of the ball hammer 687 is provided at a position adjacent to the handle connecting window 522. Further, a hammer penetrating opening 521 for projecting the hammer 687 of the ball launching device 650 upward is formed in the upper wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 520, and a plate portion 511 diagonally above the mallet penetrating opening 521 is formed. A cylinder lock through hole 526 through which the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 penetrates is provided on the front surface of the lock device 1000.

On the other hand, on the back surface of the plate portion 511, as shown in FIG. 68, a ball ejection discharge passage 524 extending downward from the upper portion on the shaft support side toward the central portion of the plate portion 511 is formed. .. The ball removal discharge passage 524 is for discharging the balls discharged from the ball removal connection passage 880 (see FIG. 71), which will be described later, from below the pachinko machine 1 into the inside of the island. Further, a columnar guide protrusion 525 is projected rearward above the launcher mounting portion 520 described above, and the guide hole 1212 (see FIG. 128) of the substrate unit 1100 described later is provided in the guide protrusion 525. It is plugged in to facilitate mounting of the board unit 1100. Further, mounting holes 527 for mounting the board unit 1100 with screws are formed on the left, right, top and bottom of the plate portion 511, and the mounting pieces 1122 of the board unit 1100 are associated with the mounting holes 527 and fastened with screws. Further, a launcher mounting boss 529 for mounting the ball launching device 650 is projected rearward inside the concave portion of the launcher mounting portion 520, and further, the lowermost end portion on the open side is shown in FIG. 70. As shown, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a guide projecting piece having a tapered tip and a vertically long shape in order to guide the closing operation of the main body frame 3 while contacting the upper surface of the decorative cover plate 15. 528 is projected backward.

In addition to the configuration described above, the plate portion 511 is formed with a ball ejection connection opening 530, which is an opening at the upstream end of the ball ejection discharge passage 524, on the upper surface of the end portion on the shaft support side, as shown in FIG. .. The downstream end of the ball ejection connection passage 880 is connected to the ball ejection connection opening 530. Further, the portion adjacent to the ball ejection connection opening 530 is horizontal so that the full tank unit mounting portion 531 for mounting the full tank unit 900 (see FIG. 71) described in detail later is orthogonal to the plate portion 511. A unit engaging groove 532 that engages with the engaging piece 924 (see FIG. 111) of the full tank unit 900 is formed in the front portion of the full tank unit mounting portion 531. Further, as shown in FIG. 71, on the front surface of the plate portion 511 in front of the full tank unit mounting portion 531 is an outlet for blocking the prize ball discharged from the outlet 921 of the full tank unit 900 when the door frame 5 is opened. A switchgear 579 is provided.

Although the outlet opening / closing device 579 will not be described in detail, when the door frame 5 is closed, the opening / closing plate is lowered by the lever that abuts on the back surface of the door frame 5, but the door plate 5 is opened. Then, the opening / closing plate rises to block the outlet 921 because the contact with the lever is lost. Therefore, even when the door frame 5 is opened, the prize balls stored in the full tank unit 900 do not spill from the outlet 921. Further, as shown in FIG. 71, a fastening hole which is a game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511 and which penetrates in the vertical direction at a position corresponding to the upper part of the launch portion of the launch rail 515. A fastening rail 534 for hooking the fastening band 619 to the front portion of the fastening hole 533 is provided to form the 533. The fastening connecting rod 534 is a mechanism for preventing the game board 4 from being removed from the main body frame 3.

Next, the configuration of the game board installation recess 510 will be described. The game board installation recess 510 is provided around the first side wall 540 that is circulated rearward from the inner side surface on the shaft support side and the above-mentioned upper side portion and the flange surface portion on the open side, and circulates rearward from the first side surface wall 540. The main body frame 3 is formed by the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542 circling rearward from the second side wall 541, and the fourth side wall 543 circling rearward from the third side wall 542. It is formed in a concave shape in which the left and right side sides and the rear part of the upper side are surrounded.

The first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 are formed so that the upper side and the right side (sides on the shaft support side) are extended straight backward with a step when viewed from the back side, whereas the left side (the side on the shaft support side) The side on the open side) is formed in a stepped shape (see FIG. 75) that inclines inward from the first side wall 540 toward the fourth side wall 543. This is the rearmost end portion of the fourth side wall 543 when the main body frame 3 is opened when the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the left side (open side side) is formed straight rearward. May not be able to be opened smoothly because it comes into contact with the inner surface of the side frame plate 13 of the outer frame 2. Therefore, the first side wall surface 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the opening side are inclined inward to open smoothly. It is something that can be done.

At the same time, the lock device 1000 is mounted along the first side wall 540 on the open side, and the lock device 1000 is mounted by using the lock mounting hole 547 (see FIG. 117) provided at the rear end side of the first side wall 540. Therefore, in order to form the lock mounting hole 547, the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the open side are formed in an inclined stepped shape. Further, as for the dimension of the step between the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543, the step between the first side wall 540 and the second side wall 541 needs to be in contact with the periphery of the back surface of the game board 4 described later. Therefore, it is formed with a large step to some extent, but the other steps are extremely small steps. Of course, the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 may be continuously formed without forming a step.

As shown in FIG. 69, the side walls 540 to 543 described above are formed so as to have depth width dimensions d1, d2, d3, and d4, respectively, and in the case of the present embodiment, d1 + d2 + d3 + d4 = about 135 mm. .. In particular, the width dimension d1 of the first side wall 540 corresponds to the thickness of the game board 4, and the game board is in the space formed by the remaining second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall 543. The rear protruding portion of various gaming devices provided in No. 4 is accommodated.

That is, the first side wall 540 constitutes a front side wall having substantially the same depth dimension as the thickness of the game board 4, and the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are in contact with the back surface of the peripheral portion of the game board 4. A rear side wall having a stepped portion in contact and extending rearward from the first side wall 540 substantially parallel to the first side wall 540 and accommodating a rear protrusion of a game device provided on the game board 4. It constitutes. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the amount of protrusion of all the parts of the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 to the rear is fixed to the upper part on the back surface side of the main body frame 3. The prize ball tank 720 is formed so as to be substantially at the same position as the rear wall 722 of the storage portion 728 for storing the balls.

As a result, the size of the space formed by the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall 543 is secured up to the position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, so that, for example, a game Even when a game device such that the liquid crystal display screen occupies substantially the entire area of the board 4 is attached, the rear protruding portion of the game device can be easily stored.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 70, from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543, the left side (open side), the upper side and the right side (shaft support side) of the fourth side wall 543 when viewed from the back side, the open side rear wall 544, The upper rear wall 545 and the shaft support side rear wall 546 as the rear wall are projected inward so as to be parallel to the front surface of the pachinko machine. The front surface of the shaft support side rear wall 546 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 67), and a ball passage unit 770 and a prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, which constitute a ball payout mechanism, are detachably attached to the rear surface thereof. It is supposed to be. Therefore, the inward protrusion width dimension of the shaft support side rear wall 546 is sufficient if there is a width for mounting the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800.

Further, the upper rear surface wall 545 has a flat plate shape on the front surface (see FIG. 67), and a tank rail member 740 described later is attached to the rear surface thereof, so that the lower end side thereof is formed in an inclined shape. Therefore, the inward protrusion width of the upper rear wall 545 is sufficient if the height width dimension of the tank rail member 740 attached in an inclined manner is sufficient. Further, the open-side rear wall 544 has a flat plate-like front surface (see FIG. 67), and a cover body support cylinder portion 575 that pivotally supports the cover body 1250 described later is formed on the rear surface thereof. Therefore, the inward protrusion width dimension of the open side rear wall 544 is sufficient if there is a width dimension that forms the cover body support cylinder portion 575.

As described above, the front surfaces of the open side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the shaft support side rear wall 546 projecting inward from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are formed in a flat plate shape. Since the flat plate-shaped portion corresponds to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, as described above, the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall up to the position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4. Since the size of the space formed by the 543 and the like is secured, for example, even when a game device such that the liquid crystal display screen occupies substantially the entire area of the game board 4 is attached, such a game device The rear protruding part can be easily stored. The inside of the open side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the shaft support side rear wall 546 has a rear opening 580, and the rear opening 580 is closed openly and closably by a cover body 1250 described later. It has become.

Next, a more detailed configuration of the game board installation recess 510 will be described. As described above, the door hook hole 549 through which the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 penetrates is above the flat portion on the open side. There are three locations at the bottom, middle and bottom, and the lock locking holes 548 (see FIG. 68) to which the locking projections 1004 described later of the locking device 1000 are engaged are further above, middle and lower than the hook holes 549 for the upper and lower doors. ) Is formed. Further, the lock device 1000 is mounted along the first side wall 540 on the open side, and a lock mounting hole 547 (see FIG. 68) for mounting the lock device 1000 with screws is provided at the rear end of the first side wall 540. It is formed at the top and middle. The lock device 1000 can be attached with screws not only in the upper part and the middle part, but also in the lock attachment hole 547 formed in the upper vicinity of the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock attachment piece 1008 and the cylinder lock through hole 526 which will be described later. The lower part of the lock device 1000 can also be attached by fastening with a screw in correspondence with the above.

Further, as shown in FIG. 70, on the left and right sides in front of the upper side of the first side wall 540, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed. A guide arc protrusion 552 that abuts is projected, and an escape recess 551 that communicates with the notch 729 of the prize ball tank 720, which will be described later, is formed in the center of the rear end side of the first side wall 540, and the first side wall 540 and the second. A tank mounting groove 550 is formed on a vertical surface connected to the side wall 541. Then, when the mounting collar portion 733 of the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the tank mounting groove 550, as shown in FIG. 74, the notch portion 729 of the prize ball tank 720 communicates with the relief recess 551 and is inside the prize ball tank 720. It functions to prevent ball clogging by depressurizing when the ball pressure of the balls stored in the is increased. Further, when the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rear wall 722 on the back side and the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 when viewed from the front side of the prize ball tank 720 in a plan view substantially coincide with each other (FIG. 4). (See). The guide arc projection 552 described above lifts the main body frame 3 by bringing the upper side of the main body frame 3 into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2, and lifts the main body frame 3 to the lower side of the main body frame 3 and the decorative cover plate. The purpose is to form a gap between the 15 and the 15 and prevent fraudulent acts such as inserting a fraudulent device through the gap.

Further, on the above-mentioned upper rear wall 545, a rail locking groove 553 for mounting the tank rail member 740 is formed along the opening edge of the rear opening 580, and the fourth side wall 543 and the upper rear wall. A rail locking groove 554 is formed at the bent portion of the 545. Then, the tank rail member 740 can be attached to the main body frame 3 by locking the locking projection pieces 749, 750 (see FIG. 99) of the tank rail member 740 to these rail locking grooves 535, 554. Further, a rail hooking elastic piece 555 is formed on the upper part of the upper rear wall 545 corresponding to the downstream side when the tank rail member 740 is attached, and the tank rail member 740 is locked in the rail locking grooves 535 and 554. When the projecting pieces 749 and 750 are locked and the tank rail member 740 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rail hooking elastic piece 555 is placed on the downstream upper end of the tank rail member 740 so that the locked state is not released. It is designed to come into contact from above.

When removing the tank rail member 740, the rail locking elastic piece 555 is pressed backward, and then the tank rail is used to release the locked state between the rail locking grooves 535 and 554 and the locking projecting pieces 749 and 750. The member 740 may be lifted upward. Further, a relief hole 556 is formed on the side of the rail hook elastic piece 555, and a ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 110 and the like) is formed below the rail hook elastic piece 555. The escape hole 556 is bored to allow the end of the shaft pin 748 of the alignment gear 747 provided on the tank rail member 740 to escape, and the ground wire connector 557 is provided inside the tank rail member 740. It is in contact with a metal conductive plate (not shown) to be attached, and is connected to a wiring connected to a grounding connector provided on the power supply board 1136.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 68 and 70, vertical vertical walls 560 are erected on the left and right ends of the shaft support side rear wall 546 on the shaft support side rear wall 546, and a ball passage unit is erected between the vertical walls 560. The 770 and the prize ball unit 800 are attached. Further, the prize ball guide protrusion 561 is bent so as to project from the uppermost stream portion between the left and right standing walls 560 to slightly above the middle stream portion. The prize ball guide protrusion 561 is projected rearward from the rear wall 546 on the shaft support side so that the protrusion height gradually decreases toward the downstream side, and when the ball passage unit 770 described later is attached. , Corresponding to the ball drop passage 772 (see FIG. 104) of the ball passage unit 770, and guides the prize balls in a row. Further, on the left and right sides of the prize ball guide protrusion 561, a passage unit mounting boss 562 for fixing the ball passage unit 770 with screws and a positioning pin 574 for positioning are provided so as to project and a ball break switch described later. A switch-corresponding protrusion 563 facing 778 (see FIG. 104) is projected. The passage unit mounting boss 562 and the positioning pin 574 will be described in detail later.

Further, from the middle stream portion to the downstream portion of the left and right standing walls 560, the engaging projecting piece 565 as a locking portion that engages with the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 (see FIG. 106) as the engaging portion of the prize ball unit 800. , The elastic claw 564 for locking that engages with the button insertion engagement hole 821 (see FIG. 106) of the prize ball unit 800 is formed, and the rotation shaft 808 of the sprocket 807 of the prize ball unit 800 (FIG. 106). An escape hole 566 is formed in which the end portion of (see) is received. Further, a relief opening 572 for the payout motor is formed below the rear wall 546 on the shaft support side so that the payout motor 815 as a drive motor for the prize ball unit 800 faces the relief opening 572 for the payout motor. (See FIG. 71). Then, the prize ball unit 800 locks the lower end of the locking groove 573 formed at the lowermost end of the back surface of the rear wall 546 on the shaft support side, and is rearward on the shaft support side by the engaging projection piece 565 and the elastic claw for locking 564. It can be detachably attached to the face wall 546. This detachable configuration will be described in detail later.

Further, at the end of the rear wall 546 on the shaft support side on the open side, a cover body contact groove 567 into which the open side end of the cover body 1250 enters is formed, and below the cover body contact groove 567. A locking wall 569 is projected from the wall. The cover body contact groove 567 is formed with stop holes 568 corresponding to the stop holes 1253 (see FIGS. 74 and 139) of the cover body 1250, and these stop holes 1253 and 568 are not shown in line with each other. By fastening with screws, the rear opening 580 of the main body frame 3 can be closed and fixed by the cover body 1250. Further, a U-shaped locking protruding hook piece 570 is projected from the locking wall 569, and the locking protruding hook piece 570 is attached to the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed to the main body frame 3. Only the person in charge holding the padlock key can open the cover body 1250 by penetrating the formed through hole 1254 (see FIG. 74) and hooking a lock such as a padlock on the locking protruding hook piece 570. Can be prevented.

The configuration of the main body frame main body 500 including the game board installation recess 510 and the plate portion 511 has been described above, but in addition to the above description, when the door frame 5 is closed at the lowermost end side portion of the plate portion 511. In an engaging groove 584,585 (see FIG. 67) into which the door frame projecting pieces 110d, 110e (see FIG. 25) bent so that the lower side of the door frame base body 110 is bent rearward are formed. There is. The engaging groove 584 is a groove formed below the launcher mounting portion 520 described above, and the engaging groove 585 is a groove formed from one end of the engaging groove 584 toward the shaft support side. The door frame projecting piece 110d corresponding to the engaging groove 585 is projected rearward so as to be larger than the protruding amount of the door frame projecting piece 110e corresponding to the engaging groove 584. However, a door frame projecting piece 110d having a large amount of protrusion is slightly formed in the lower part of the open end. The door frame projecting pieces 110d and 110e and the engaging grooves 584 and 585 form the outer protrusions and engaging portions on the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

As described above, the plate portion 511 is provided with the launch rail 515 and the outlet opening / closing device 579, and the rail connecting member 516 and the launch device mounting portion 520 are formed so as to project, but the launch device mounting portion 520 and the launch rail 515 are formed. The arrangement position of the plate portion 511 is biased toward the open side, and they are formed so as to protrude from the surface of the plate portion 511. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is closed, the region from the substantially central portion to the open side of the plate portion 511 on which the launcher mounting portion 520 and the launching rail 515 are arranged is the back surface of the door frame 5 and the launching device mounting portion. Since the front surface of the 520 and the launch rail 515 are in close contact with each other, an illegal tool such as a piano wire that has successfully slipped through the gap between the door frame projecting piece 110d and the engagement groove 585 is used with the back surface of the door frame 5. It is extremely difficult to better pass between the launcher mounting portion 520 and the front surface of the launch rail 515 to reach the front surface side of the game board 4 or the back surface side of the game board 4.

On the other hand, in the region from the substantially central portion to the shaft support side of the plate portion 511 where the launcher mounting portion 520 and the launch rail 515 are not arranged, the door frame 5 is closed because there is no protruding portion on the surface of the plate portion 511. In, a space 586 is created between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, an illegal tool such as a piano wire that has successfully slipped through the gap between the door frame projecting piece 110d and the engaging groove 584 described above can easily create a space 586 between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. Since it is possible to slip through this space 586, the mounting base 160 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the door frame 5 is provided with the space 586 with the door frame 5 closed so that the illegal tool does not slip upward. A security projectile piece 166 that invades the door is formed. The security projectile piece 166 is formed on the mounting base 160 so as to extend from the substantially middle portion of the plate portion 511 to the shaft support side end portion. Therefore, the space below the launch rail 515 and the outer rail 602 attached to the game board 4 constitutes a security space 586 for receiving the security projectile piece 166 projecting from the mounting base 160. The crime prevention projectile piece 166 and the security space 586 form an inner protrusion and an engaging portion on the lower side portion of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

As described above, the main body frame 3 includes a game board 4, a ball launching device 650, a prize ball tank 720, a tank rail member 740, a ball passage unit 770, a prize ball unit 800, a full tank unit 900, a lock device 1000, and a board unit. The 1100 and the cover body 1250 are attached, and these will be described in order below.

[1-3A. Outline configuration of the game board]
The schematic configuration of the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 89. 76 is a perspective view of the game board 4 as viewed from the front, FIG. 77 is a front view of the game board 4, FIG. 78 is a rear view of the game board 4, and FIG. 79 is a game board 4. 80 is an enlarged perspective view of a removal prevention mechanism portion formed on the game board 4, and FIG. 81 is a main body frame 3 showing a structure on the main body frame side with respect to the removal prevention mechanism of the game board 4. It is a partial perspective view of. Further, FIG. 82 is a cross-sectional view showing a front component, a game panel, and a panel holder of the game board cut in the vertical direction in an assembled state, and FIG. 83 is a cross-sectional view showing the front component mainly constituting the game board. , The game panel, the panel holder, and the like are disassembled and viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 83 viewed diagonally from the rear. Further, FIG. 85 is a perspective view shown diagonally from the rear with the main control board box fixed to the board holder for the board. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 85 diagonally after being disassembled into a board holder, a drawer holder, and a main control board box. Further, FIG. 87 is a schematic view of an exploded perspective view of the function display unit in the game board. Further, FIG. 88 is a schematic view of the function display sticker, and FIG. 89 is a partial view of the function display sticker of the game board viewed through the game window.

As shown in the figure, the game board 4 of the present embodiment has a transparent plate-shaped game panel 600, a panel holder 630 that holds the game panel 600 and has a substantially square outer shape, and a game panel 600 via the panel holder 630. It is composed of a front component 601 attached to the front surface so as to surround the game area 605, and a function display unit 640 (see FIG. 87 and the like) fixed to the rear side of the front component 601. On the surface of the game panel 600, various game devices and a large number of obstacle nails (all not shown) are planted in the game area 605. Then, after the game devices and obstacle nails are provided, the front component 601 is attached to the front surface of the panel holder 630, and the front component 601 is a cavity having a circular inside so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 605. The outer rail is formed in a shape and the outer shape is formed along the outer shape of the panel holder 630, and an arc surface from the middle of the lower side to the diagonally upper side past the center of the upper side is formed as the outer rail 602. The inner rail 603 is formed from the lower position of the abutting portion 620 provided at the end of the 602 to the position where the symmetrical backflow prevention member 604 of the abutting portion 620 on the upper side is provided. The outer rail 602 has a connecting passage portion 609 diagonally formed at its starting end and connected to a rail connecting member 516 provided as an extension of the launch rail 515, and a foul mouth is adjacent to the connecting passage portion 609. 610 is formed. Further, a metal rail is closely attached to the outer rail 602 from the upstream end of the foul opening 610 to the abutment portion 620.

The abutment portion 620 is provided with an elastic body made of rubber or synthetic resin so as to repel the hit ball that has slid on the outer rail 602 vigorously inside the game area 605 when the hit ball collides. The backflow prevention member 604 prevents the hit ball once launched and taken into the inside of the game area 605 from flowing back to the outer rail 602 again. Further, a security protrusion 608 is provided so as to project along a part of the metal rail on one lower side of the outer rail 602. The security protrusion 608 vertically overlaps with the security rear end projecting piece 475 that protrudes from the security cover 470 as described above with the door frame 5 closed, and the shafts of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 This is to prevent the intrusion of unauthorized tools such as piano wire inserted from slightly below the middle of the gap on the support side.

Further, an out port 606 is provided in the lower center of the inner rail 603, and the shot ball is launched to the game area 605 between the inner rail 603 and the outer rail 602 from the out port 606 to the backflow prevention member 604. Although it constitutes a guided passage, the hit ball that flows backward through the outer rail 602 without reaching the game area 605 is taken into the foul opening 610 and guided to the foul ball entrance 923 of the full tank unit 900 described later. It is designed to be discharged to the dish unit 300 again. The game area 605 is an area substantially surrounded by the inner rail 603. Further, a rail security groove 607 is formed in the front component 601 on the way from the out port 606 of the inner rail 603 to the abutment portion 620. The rail security groove 607 is formed in a groove shape so that a part of the security rear projection piece 474 projecting from the security cover 470 intrudes into the security cover 470 with the door frame 5 closed. Due to the uneven engagement between the rail security groove 607 and the security rear projection piece 474, the piano wire or the like that overlaps in the vertical direction and is inserted from slightly below the middle of the gap on the open side of the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is illegal. It finally prevents the invasion of tools.

By the way, on one side of the game board 4, a positioning recess 611 that fits into the board positioning protrusion 576 formed on the main body frame 3 is formed, and on the other side of the game board 4, a board formed on the main body frame 3 is formed. A game board stopper 614 to be inserted into the stopper insertion hole 578 is provided. The end of the game board stopper 614 is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 when it is pushed in and fixed. Therefore, in order to fix the game board 4 to the main body frame 3, the positioning recess 611 is inserted diagonally from the front side of the main body frame 3 so as to fit into the board positioning protrusion 576, and then the game board 4 is inserted. The whole is pushed into the first side wall 540 of the main body frame 3, and the game board stopper 614, which is in a free state in that state, is pushed in and fixed, and its end is inserted into the board stopper insertion hole 578 and fixed. .. After that, the game board fixture 519 is rotated to fix the lower front surface of the game board 4. As a result, the game board 4 can be easily attached to the main body frame 3. To remove the game board 4, the game board 4 may be removed in the reverse order of the above procedure.

Further, the game board 4 in the present embodiment has a configuration that prevents unauthorized removal of the game board 4 from the main body frame 3 extremely easily. That is, as shown in FIGS. 76 and 80, a mounting notch 616 penetrating the front and rear of the game board 4 is formed at the lower end on the opposite side of the passage cutout 613 below the game board 4 (to be exact). A mounting notch 616 is formed in the front component 601), and the fastening bar 617 is horizontally hung and fixed to the lower portion of the mounting notch 616. The fastening bar 617 is formed with a band-shaped fastening portion 618 for hooking the fastening band 619 at substantially the center thereof. On the other hand, as the removal prevention mechanism provided in the main body frame 3, as described above, the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511 below the main body frame 3 and the launch rail 515 is launched. A fastening hole 533 that penetrates in the vertical direction is formed at a position corresponding to the upper part of the portion, and a fastening rail 534 for hooking the fastening band 619 is delivered to the front portion of the fastening hole 533 (FIG. 81). reference).

When the game board 4 configured as described above is stored and arranged in the game board installation recess 510 of the main body frame 3, the fastening bar 617 is placed in contact with the game board mounting portion 512 as shown in FIG. 80. At the same time, the fastening portion 618 and the fastening joint 534 are in the same state. Then, in that state, the tip of a generally commercially available fastening band 619 is inserted into the mounting notch 616 from above the fastening bar 617 with respect to the portion where the fastening portion 618 and the fastening joint 534 coincide with each other. It is inserted into the fastening hole 533 downward and guided forward, and its tip is engaged with the fastener portion of the fastening band 619. Then, an unnecessary tip portion protruding forward from the fastener of the fastening band 619 is cut off. In this way, the game board 4 cannot be removed from the main body frame 3 even if the game board stopper 614 and the game board fixing tool 519 are released from the fixing unless the fastening band 619 is cut. Although the game board 4 can be removed from the main body frame 3 by cutting the fastening band 619, for example, if a different fastening band is fastened by using a fastening band 619 unique to a pachinko parlor, the game can be played. It is easy to understand that some kind of cheating was performed by removing the board 4. With such an extremely simple removal prevention mechanism, it is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of the game board 4 from the main body frame 3.

Further, in the outer shape of the game board 4, notches 612 are formed on the upper left and right sides thereof, and a part of the front guide passage 920 portion of the full tank unit 900, which will be described later, is inserted diagonally below the foul mouth 610. A notch 613 for a passage is formed. Further, on the lower left and right sides of the front component member 601, a certificate stamp attaching portion 615 for attaching a certificate stamp for confirming certification is provided. Further, a function display sticker 649 is attached to the upper side of the lower right certificate stamp attaching portion 615 of the front component 601.

On the other hand, on the back surface of the game board 4, balls that have won various game devices (for example, general winning openings 2004, 2101, starting openings 2001, 2002, large winning openings 2003, etc.) provided in the game area 605 are placed on the downstream side. A liquid crystal control board 4500 that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (see FIG. 151 and the like) as a display device arranged substantially in the center of the game area 605 on the back surface of the back box 621 that can be aligned and guided. A peripheral board box 622 that houses the peripheral control board 4140 is attached.

Further, on the back surface of the game board 4, a board holder 623 is fixed below the back box 621. The board holder 623 for the board has a space portion (this space portion has a width in the front-rear direction relatively wider than the width of the back box 621) so as to collect the winning balls aligned and guided by the back box 621 in front of the board holder 623. (Is formed) is formed, and a drop port 629 (see FIG. 75) is formed on the bottom surface of the space portion. The drop port 629 joins at the rear surface portion of the out port 606 and communicates with the out ball passage 1119 (see FIG. 128) formed in the substrate unit 1100 described later.

Further, the board board holder 623 includes a main control board box 624 that houses a main control board 4100 that controls game operations on the back surface thereof, a payout control board 1186 and a power supply board 1136 provided in the board unit 1100 described later. A relay terminal board 625 for connecting is attached. The relay terminal plate 625 is provided with drawer connectors 626 and 627 that are automatically connected to the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 simply by mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3.

Further, the board board holder 623 is formed with a joint guide projection 628 that projects rearward from between the drawer connectors 626 and 627 so as to penetrate the relay terminal plate 625. The joint guide protrusions 628 are provided on the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 provided on the board unit 1100 side and on the game board 4 side when the game board 4 is mounted on the main body frame 3 as described in detail later. It is inserted into the joint guide hole 1213 formed in the frame board holder 1101 of the board unit 1100 so that the drawer connectors 626 and 627 are naturally connected (see FIG. 128). The connection of these drawer connectors will be described in detail later.

[1-3A-1. Front component, game panel, panel holder, panel back plate]
Subsequently, the holding structure of the game panel 600 in the game board 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. As shown in the figure, the game board 4 of the present embodiment has a plate-shaped game panel 600 made of a transparent synthetic resin having a size corresponding to the game area 605, and a synthetic resin that holds the game panel 600 detachably from the front. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 630 made of, an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603 that are arranged on the front side of the panel holder 630 to form an outer periphery of the game area 605 and guide the game ball in the game area 605. It mainly includes a front component 601 and a plate-shaped panel back plate 635 arranged within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630.

As shown in the figure, the front component 601 is provided with a plurality of positioning bosses 601a and positioning protrusions 601b projecting rearward on the rear surface side. Although the details of the positioning boss 601a and the positioning protrusion 601b will be described later, the positioning boss 601a and the positioning protrusion 601b can be positioned with the panel holder 630, the board board holder 623, and the game panel 600 arranged on the rear side.

The game panel 600 in the game board 4 has a polygonal shape whose outer shape is slightly larger than that of the game area 605, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin. .. The thickness of the game panel 600 is thinner than that of the panel holder 630, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if an obstacle nail (not shown) is planted.

The game panel 600 includes a plurality of fitting holes 600a arranged in the vicinity of the outer circumference and formed of round holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and elongated holes 600b arranged in the vicinity of the lower left outer circumference and penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction. Each is equipped. These fitting holes 600a and elongated holes 600b are arranged outside the game area 605 and are positioned with the panel holder 630. Further, the game panel 600 is provided with stepped engaging step portions 600c having a recessed front side at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side thereof. The engaging step portion 600c has a form in which substantially half of the plate thickness of the game panel 600 is cut out, and is arranged outside the game area 605 like the fitting hole 600a and the elongated hole 600b. This is for engaging and fixing the game panel 600 to the panel holder 630.

Further, the game panel 600 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 600d at predetermined positions. By fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 601b projecting from the rear side of the inner rail 603 to the inner rail fixing hole 600d, the inner rail 603 can be fixed at a predetermined position.

Further, the game panel 600 is formed with a plurality of openings 600e having a predetermined inner shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction so that the center accessory 2300, the attacker unit 2000, and the like are provided (FIGS. 159 and 160). (See), and fixing holes for fixing them are formed at appropriate positions. The openings 600e are shaped so as not to penetrate the outer circumference of the game panel 600 in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the outer circumferences of the game panel 600 are connected to each other. Is designed to suppress the decrease.

The panel holder 630 in the game board 4 has a size that includes the game panel 600 and has a substantially square outer shape, and has a thickness of a member made of wooden plywood (for example, a game board base, etc.) in the game board of a conventional pachinko machine. It is made of a thermoplastic synthetic resin having substantially the same thickness (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 630 has a holding step portion 630a that holds the game panel 600 detachably and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and front and rear having a size substantially equal to that of the game area 605 inside the holding step portion 630a. It is mainly provided with a through port 630b that penetrates in the direction.

The depth from the front surface of the holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630 is substantially the same as the thickness of the game panel 600, and the front surface of the game panel 600 held in the holding step portion 630a is the front surface of the panel holder 630. It is designed to be almost on the same side as. Further, the holding step portion 630a has a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance C (see FIG. 82) is formed on the front inner peripheral surface thereof with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the game panel 600. Due to this clearance C, even if the game panel 600 expands and contracts relatively due to changes in temperature and aging, the expansion and contraction can be absorbed. An elastic member such as rubber may be packed in the clearance C.

Further, the panel holder 630 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 600a and the elongated hole 600b formed in the game panel 600 held by the holding step portion 630a, and is arranged from the front surface to the front of the holding step portion 630a. A plurality of protruding pins 630c that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 600a and the elongated holes 600b of the game panel 600 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 630c into the fitting holes 600a and the elongated holes 600b of the game panel 600, the panel holder 630 and the game panel 600 can be positioned with each other.

Further, the panel holder 630 is provided with an engaging claw 630d and an engaging piece 630e that engage with the engaging step portion 600c at a position corresponding to the engaging step portion 600c of the game panel 600. More specifically, as shown in Exhibit A82 and FIG. 82, the engaging claw 630d is arranged on the upper holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630, and corresponds to the upper engaging step portion 600c in the game panel 600. The holding step portion 630a protrudes forward from the front surface and elastically engages with the engaging step portion 600c. The engaging claw 630d is sized so that its tip does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 630. On the other hand, the engaging piece 630e is arranged in the lower holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630, corresponds to the lower engaging step portion 600c in the game panel 600, and is connected to the front surface of the holding step portion 630a. In a state where the engaging step portion 600c of the panel 600 is formed with a predetermined gap having a size capable of being inserted, a predetermined amount extends toward the upper side (center side) along the front surface of the panel holder 630. By engaging the engaging step portion 600c of the game panel 600 with the engaging claws 630d and the engaging piece 630e, the game panel 600 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 630.

Further, the panel holder 630 is provided with a boss insertion hole 630f that penetrates in the front-rear direction through which the positioning boss 601a provided in the front component member 601 can be inserted, and the boss insertion hole 630f is provided with the positioning boss of the front component member 601. By inserting the 601a, the panel holder 630 and the front component 601 are positioned with each other.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 84, the panel holder 630 has a mounting support portion 630 g recessed in a predetermined amount on the rear surface side so as to leave a lower side and an outer peripheral edge slightly below the center in the vertical direction. Is provided. Due to this mounting support portion 630 g, the rear surface of the panel holder 630 is recessed above the predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, with the outer peripheral portion on the rear surface side protruding rearward, and the amount of the recess is increased. Depth) is a depth (in this example, about 2.5 mm) that can accommodate the flange-shaped fixing portion 621a (see FIG. 155) of the back box 621 of the back unit 2000 that is mounted and fixed to the mounting support portion 630 g. It is said that it is preferably between 1 and 3 mm). By mounting and fixing a predetermined member to the mounting support portion 630g, it is possible to prevent the fixing portion 621a from protruding to the rear side of the panel holder 630, and the panel holder 630, that is, the game board 4 can be mounted on the pachinko machine 1. It can be securely installed and installed in the gaming board installation recess 510.

Further, on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630, a mounting support portion 630 g is formed below the position where the mounting support portion 630 g is formed within a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height, and is recessed toward the front side to accommodate the panel back plate 635. The accommodation recess 630h is further provided with a locking portion 630i which is arranged so as to penetrate in the accommodation recess 630h in the front-rear direction and can lock the locking claw 635c formed on the panel back plate 635. The accommodating recess 630h detachably accommodates the panel back plate 635 by locking the locking claw 635c of the panel back plate 635 to the locking portion 630i, and the rear surface of the accommodated panel back plate 635 is a panel. It is formed so as to be substantially flush with the rear surface of the holder 630.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 84, the panel holder 630 has a plurality of mounting holes 630j arranged in the mounting support portion 630g on the rear surface side and above the accommodating recess 630h and capable of screwing a predetermined screw. They are arranged in a predetermined arrangement. Further, the panel holder 630 is provided with a plurality of positioning holes 630k arranged so as to correspond to the mounting holes 630j. The positioning hole 630k is a positioning protrusion formed on a member to be mounted and fixed using the mounting hole 630j (for example, a positioning protrusion protruding forward from a flange-shaped fixing portion 621a on the front surface of the back box 621 (not shown). Is omitted)) is inserted. In this example, the positioning hole 630k is a stop hole having a substantially rectangular shape (square hole shape) in the rear view.

It should be noted that, with respect to the mounting hole 630j, a mounting hole having a large diameter and a small diameter are mixed, and the mounting hole has an appropriate diameter according to the size and weight of a predetermined member to be mounted and fixed. You may use 630j.

Further, the panel holder 630 is formed with a plurality of lightening portions 630l that open to the rear surface side at least in a predetermined range from the lower end to a predetermined height so that the lightening portion 630l reduces the weight of the panel holder 630. It has become. As shown in FIG. 83, these lightening portions 630l are not formed in the front side of the accommodating recess 630h, that is, in the predetermined range from the lower end of the front surface side of the panel holder 630 to the predetermined height, and are within the range. Since the front surface of the panel holder 630 is a substantially flat surface, the rear surface of the connection passage portion 609 of the front component 601 arranged on the front surface is a substantially flat surface, and the ball launching device 650 The launched game ball is guided smoothly. Further, as shown in the drawing, the panel holder 630 is formed with a lightening portion 630l to form mounting holes 630j and the like in a boss shape, and also supports them and maintains the strength of the panel holder 630. In order to do so, the grid-like ribs are formed.

The panel holder 630 is formed with a positioning portion 630 m corresponding to a positioning means such as an obstacle nail planting device (not shown) and an assembly jig, and holds the game panel 600 in the obstacle nail planting device. It is possible to set it in the state that it is. Further, the lower portion of the panel holder 630 is further provided with an opening 630n communicating with the out port 606 of the front component member 601 and a communication hole 630o communicating with the foul port 610 of the front component member 601.

Next, the panel back plate 635 is arranged so as to cover the lightening portion 630l within a predetermined range from the lower end to the predetermined height on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630, and the rear surfaces are placed in the accommodating recess 630h of the panel holder 630. A plurality of screw holes 635a which can be accommodated so as to be substantially on the same surface and are arranged in a predetermined arrangement on a flat rear surface and can screw a predetermined screw, and a plurality of screw holes 635a arranged so as to correspond to the screw holes 635a. It is provided with a positioning hole 635b, a locking claw 635c that can be locked to the locking portion 630i of the panel holder 630, and a recessed portion 635d for weight loss that is recessed so as not to penetrate from the front surface side.

The screw hole 635a and the positioning hole 635b in the panel back plate 635 have substantially the same configuration as the mounting hole 630j and the positioning hole 630k in the panel holder 630. Further, in the panel back plate 635, similarly to the panel holder 630, the recessed portion 635d forms a boss-shaped portion in which the screw hole 635a, the positioning hole 635b, etc. are formed, and supports them or the panel back plate. In order to maintain the strength of 635, grid-like ribs are formed. Further, the panel back plate 635 is provided with an opening 630n of the panel holder 630, a communication hole 630o, and an opening 635e penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the boss insertion hole 630f.

The panel back plate 635 is integrated with the panel holder 630 by being housed in the storage recess 630h of the panel holder 630 and by locking the locking claw 635c of the panel back plate 635 to the locking portion 630i of the panel holder 630. In that state, the rear surface of the panel back plate 635 is substantially the same as the rear surface of the panel holder 630. By integrating the panel holder 630 and the panel back plate 635 in this way, the mounting holes 630j and screw holes are arranged in a predetermined arrangement on the outer peripheral side of the through hole 630b on the rear surface side of the panel holder 630. Mounting holes made of 635a and the like, and positioning holes 630k and 635b are arranged, and the presence of these mounting holes makes it possible to mount and fix a predetermined member at an arbitrary position.

As described above, according to the holding structure of the game panel 600 in this example, the game panel 600 is fitted and inserted into the holding step portion 630a of the panel holder 630 from the front, and the engaging claw 630d and the engaging piece 630e are inserted. By engaging the engaging step portion 600c, the panel holder 630 can hold the game panel 600, and the front side of the game panel 600 and the panel holder 630 are substantially flush with each other. It is possible to set the game panel 600 in the conventional obstacle nail planting device while holding it in the panel holder 630 without modifying the obstacle nail planting device that is used more, and it is possible to plant obstacle nails. It is possible to suppress the increase in such costs.

Further, since the game board 4 having the game area 605 is divided into the game panel 600, the panel holder 630, and the front component 601 so that the positions of the obstacle nails, winning openings, etc. may be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine 1. The changing game panel 600 can be used as a replacement part, the panel holder 630 and the front component 601 can be used as common parts, the panel holder 630, the front component 601 and the like can be recycled, and the game panel 600 can be used. It is possible to make a pachinko machine 1 equipped with a game board 4 compatible with various models by simply exchanging only the pachinko machine 1.

Further, since the panel holder 630 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 630j in a predetermined arrangement in advance, various types such as a back unit 2000 mounted and fixed to the rear surface side of the panel holder 630 and a board holder 623 for a board are provided according to the model. Even if the mounting and fixing positions of predetermined members are different, by designing the fixing parts of various members to correspond to the positions of the mounting holes 630j, the panel holder 630 is common to all pachinko machines 1 regardless of the model. It can be made into a part.

In the present embodiment, the game board 4 shows a form in which the transparent game panel 600 forming the rear surface of the game area 605 is held by the panel holder 630, but the game panel is similar to the conventional pachinko machine. The 600 may be integrated with the panel holder 630 and may be formed of a wooden plywood such as a veneer plate.

[1-3A-2. Board holder for board]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the board board holder 623 in the game board 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. The board holder 623 for the board is mounted and fixed to the rear side of the panel holder 630. It is inclined so as to be lowered toward, and after receiving the game ball discharged to the rear side of the game panel 600, it can be discharged downward from substantially the center in the left-right direction. A main control board box mounting portion 623a for mounting the main control board box 624 is formed on the rear surface of the board holder 623, and next to the main control board box mounting portion 623a (on the right side when viewed from the rear). A sealed portion 624a provided on the main control board box 624 and a corresponding sealed portion 623b are formed. Further, a drawer holder 636 that supports the relay terminal plate 625 and the drawer connectors 626 and 627 is fixed to the rear surface of the board board holder 623.

The main control board box 624 of this example is supported by the main control board box mounting portion 623a on the rear surface of the board holder 623, and the sealing portion 624a of the main control board box 624 is attached to the main control board box mounting portion 623a. It is designed to be sealed to the side sealed portion 623b. When the main control board box 624 is removed from the board board holder 623 in this state, an opening mark is left on the sealed portion 623b of the main control board box mounting portion 623a, and the main control board box 624 is removed. It is now possible to visually determine whether or not it has been removed illegally.

[1-3A-3. Function display unit]
First, as shown in FIG. 87, the function display unit in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a function display board 640a and a cover member 640b. As shown in the figure, this functional display board 640a includes segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, LEDs 1 to LED12, the segment indicator SEG1 is assigned the first special symbol indicator 641, and the segment SEG2 is assigned the second special. A symbol display 642 is assigned. The segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 are capable of displaying alphanumeric characters and figures, etc., and by displaying these alphanumeric characters and figures, etc. as special symbols, the first start of the attacker unit 2000, which will be described later. When the game ball wins in the mouth 2001 (see FIG. 158), the segment display SEG1 changes and displays a predetermined special symbol, and when the game ball wins in the second starting port 2002 (see FIG. 160), the segment display SEG2 displays. A predetermined special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

Further, the first special symbol storage display 643a is assigned to the LED 1, the first special symbol storage display 643b is assigned to the LED 2, the second special symbol storage display 644a is assigned to the LED 3, and the second special symbol storage is assigned to the LED 4. A display 644b is assigned to each. When the game ball that has won the first starting port 2001 is not used in the variable display of the special symbol, the first special symbol storage display 643 lights up or blinks with the number of the winning game balls as the reserved number. There is. Specifically, when the holding ball (starting memory) is one ball, the first special symbol memory display 643a is turned on and the first special symbol storage display 643b is turned off, and when the holding ball is two balls, the first special is turned on. When the symbol memory display 643 is lit together and the reserved sphere is 3 balls, the first special symbol memory display 643a blinks and the first special symbol memory display 643b is lit, and when the reserved sphere is 4 balls, the first The special symbol memory display 643 flashes together. On the other hand, when the game ball that has won the second start port 2002 is not used in the variable display of the special symbol, the second special symbol storage display 644 is lit or blinks with the number of the winning game balls as the reserved number. It has become. Specifically, when the holding ball (starting memory) is one ball, the second special symbol memory display 644a is turned on and the second special symbol storage display 644b is turned off, and when the holding ball is two balls, the second special is turned on. When the symbol memory display 644 is lit together and the reserved sphere is 3 balls, the second special symbol memory indicator 644a blinks and the second special symbol memory display 644b is lit, and when the reserved sphere is 4 balls, the second The special symbol memory display 644 flashes together.

Further, a normal symbol display 645 is assigned to the LED 5. The LED 5 is an LED that can light red / green / orange, and can also light a combination of these red / green / orange. The LED 5 displays the lit color as a normal symbol, so that when the game ball passes through the gate 2201 of the gate member 2200, which will be described later, the predetermined normal symbol is variably displayed.

Further, a normal symbol memory display 646 is assigned to each of the LEDs 6 to 9. The game ball that has passed through the gate 2201 is not used in the variable display of the normal symbol (when the variable display of the normal symbol is executed by the normal symbol display 645 and when the blade 2337 is opened and closed, the gate 2201 The normal symbol storage display 646 is lit with the number of passed game balls as the reserved number for the game ball that is not immediately used for the variable display of the normal symbol after passing through. Specifically, when the holding ball is one ball, the normal symbol memory lamps 646a are turned on and the normal symbol memory lamps 646b to 646d are turned off, and when the holding ball is two balls, the normal symbol memory lamps 646a and 646b are turned on. When the normal symbol memory lamps 646c and 646d are turned off and the reserved balls are 3 balls, the normal symbol memory lamps 646a to 646c are turned on and the normal symbol memory lamps 646b are turned off. All 646 lights up.

Further, a game status indicator 647 is assigned to the LED 10. The LED 10 is an LED that can light red / green / orange, and can also light a combination of these red / green / orange. By displaying the lit color as a gaming state, the LED 10 notifies that the gaming state has a probability fluctuation or a small hit.

Further, the LEDs 11 and 12 are used to display the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of the big winning opening 2003 when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit (special hit)". A round indicator 648 consisting of one LED is assigned. That is, the round display 648 is a portion in which two LEDs are lit so as to indicate the number of rounds in the jackpot game when the accessory continuous operation device is operated.

In this way, the segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, LEDs1 to LED12 mounted on the function display board 640a include the first special symbol display 641, the second special symbol display 642, and the first special symbol storage indicator 643. The second special symbol memory display 644, the normal symbol display 645, the normal symbol memory display 646, the game status display 647, and the round display 648 are assigned to each of them, and the segment display SEG1, which displays various functions, is assigned. SEG2, LEDs1 to LED12, that is, the first special symbol display 641, the second special symbol display 642, the first special symbol storage display 643, the second special symbol storage display 644, the normal symbol display 645, the normal symbol memory. The display 646, the game status display 647, and the round display 648 are integrated on the function display board 640a. Further, these LEDs 1 to LED may be assigned different functions depending on the specifications of the game machine.

Further, since the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 fluctuately display the jackpot game state as a special symbol, the first special symbol storage display 643, the second special symbol storage display 644, Alphanumeric characters and figures are distinguished from the normal symbol display 645, the normal symbol memory display 646, the game status display 647, and the round display 648, and the segment displays SEG1 and SEG2 different from the LEDs 1 to LED12 assigned to them are used. Etc. are displayed in a variable manner as special symbols.

The sum of the numbers of LEDs 6 to 9 assigned to the normal symbol memory display 646 and the numbers of LEDs 11 and 12 assigned to the round display 648 is a fixed value of 6.

By the way, the function display board 640a is fixed to the cover member 640b with screws (not shown), and the cover member 640b is attached from the back surface of the front component 601 of the game board 4 with screws (not shown). The front component 601 is formed with a segment display opening 601c at a position corresponding to the segments SEG1 and SEG2 of the function display board 640a, so that the contents displayed by these segment display SEG1 and SEG2 can be visually recognized. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 87, the front component 601 is provided with LED insertion holes 601d at positions corresponding to the LEDs 1 to 12 of the function display board 640a, and the cover member 640b is provided with the front component 601. The LEDs 1 to 12 do not interfere with the game board 4 when they are attached to the back surface of the game board 4. These LED insertion holes 601d are formed in a cylindrical shape so that the lighting or blinking light of the LEDs 1 to 12 is not mistaken for the lighting or blinking light of the adjacent LED. The contents displayed by the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 and the contents displayed by the LEDs 1 to LED12 lighting or blinking are printed on the function display sticker 649 described later. The front component 601 is formed with a function display sticker sticking portion 601e for sticking the function display sticker 649. A recess 601f is formed in the function display sticker affixing portion 601e. A tool such as a flat-blade screwdriver is inserted into the recess 601f to make it easier to remove the function display sticker 649 attached. Here, it is conceivable to provide a protrusion on the function display sticker 649 in order to make it easier to peel off the function display sticker 649, but when the door frame 5 is opened and closed from the main body frame 3, the protrusion is pulled for some reason. The function display sticker 649 may be peeled off from the function display sticker sticking portion 601e. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the recess 601f is formed in the function display sticker affixing portion 601e so that the function display sticker 649 does not come off from the function display sticker affixing portion 601e when the door frame 5 is opened and closed from the main body frame 3. ing.

[1-3A-4. Function display sticker]
Next, as shown in FIG. 88, the function display sticker 649 of the game machine 4 is printed on the surface of the game machine 4 by grouping it into groups Grp1 to Grp3 for each function display, and is printed in the non-game area of the game board 4. It is attached to a function display sticker affixing portion 601e formed on a certain front component 601.

As shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp1 is composed of a first special symbol display 641 and a first special symbol storage display 643, and these first special symbol display 641 and first special symbol storage display 641. The 643 is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649 while being surrounded by the visible solid line SL1. The area surrounded by the solid line SL1 is the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol memory so that the display by the first special symbol display 641 and the lighting or blinking by the first special symbol storage display 643 can be visually recognized. The position corresponding to the display 643 is transparent. In the group Grp1, various information regarding the variation display of the special symbol due to the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2001 is displayed. For example, when a start prize is given to the first start port 2001, the first special symbol display 641 fluctuates a predetermined special symbol, or the first special symbol storage display 643 uses the number of winning game balls as a reserved number. It lights up or blinks. In this way, by grouping the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol storage display 643 into one group Grp1, these first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol storage display 643 Can tell the player that indicates various information regarding the variable display of the special symbol due to the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2001. As a result, the player can visually change the group Grp1 printed on the function display sticker 649, which is divided in a state surrounded by the solid line SL1, and the special symbol changes due to the start winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2001. Various information related to the display can be easily confirmed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp2 is composed of the second special symbol display 642 and the second special symbol storage display 644, and these second special symbol display 642 and the second special symbol storage are stored. The display 644 is divided in a state surrounded by a visible solid line SL2 and printed on the function display sticker 649. The area surrounded by the solid line SL2 is the second special symbol display 642 and the second special symbol storage so that the display by the second special symbol display 642 and the lighting or blinking by the second special symbol storage display 644 can be visually recognized. The position corresponding to the display 644 is transparent. In this group Grp2, various information regarding the variation display of the special symbol due to the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2002 is displayed. For example, when a game ball starts and wins a prize at the second starting port 2002, the second special symbol display 642 fluctuates a predetermined special symbol, or displays the number of winning game balls as a reserved number in the second special symbol memory display. The device 644 lights up or blinks. In this way, by grouping the second special symbol display 642 and the second special symbol storage display 644 into one group Grp2, these second special symbol display 642 and the second special symbol storage display 644 Can tell the player that indicates various information regarding the variable display of the special symbol due to the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2002. As a result, the player can visually check the group Grp2 printed on the function display sticker 649, which is divided in a state surrounded by the solid line SL2, to display the variation of the special symbol due to the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2002. You can easily check various information about.

Further, as shown in FIG. 88, the group Grp3 is composed of a normal symbol display 645 and a normal symbol storage display 646, and a solid line SL3 capable of visually recognizing these normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646. It is partitioned in a state surrounded by and printed on the function display sticker 649. In the area surrounded by the solid line SL3, the positions corresponding to the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 are transparent so that the lighting by the normal symbol display 645 and the lighting by the normal symbol storage display 646 can be visually recognized. It has become. As described above, the normal symbol display 645 fluctuates and displays whether or not the blade 2337 is opened or closed as a predetermined normal symbol, and when the blade 2337 changes from the closed state to the open state, the game ball wins a prize at the second starting port 2002. It will be easier. Therefore, the normal symbol display 645 includes a first special symbol display 641, a first special symbol storage display 643, a second special symbol display 642, a second special symbol storage display 644, and a normal symbol storage display. A star is printed so that it can be distinguished from the 646, the game status indicator 647, and the round indicator 648. In this group Grp3, various information about the gate 2201 can also be displayed. For example, when a game ball passes through the gate 2201, the normal symbol display 645 fluctuates to display a predetermined normal symbol, or the normal symbol storage display 646 lights up with the number of passed game balls as the reserved number. In this way, by grouping the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 into one group Grp3, these normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 are various in relation to the variable display of the normal symbol. It is possible to tell the player that the information is shown. As a result, the player can easily confirm various information regarding the variation display of the normal symbol by visually observing the group Grp3 which is divided in a state surrounded by the solid line SL3 and printed on the function display sticker 649.

Further, as shown in FIG. 88, the positions corresponding to the game status display 647 and the round display 648 are surrounded by solid lines SL4 to SL6 in which the game status display 647 and the round display 648 can be visually recognized. It is partitioned and printed. In the area surrounded by the solid lines SL4 to SL6, the positions corresponding to the game status indicator 647 and the round indicator 648 are transparent so that the lighting by the game status indicator 647 and the round indicator 648 can be visually recognized.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the groups Grp1 to Group Grp3 are divided in a state surrounded by the solid lines SL1 to SL6 and printed on the function display sticker 649, and the game status display 647 and the round display are displayed. The positions corresponding to 648 are divided and printed in a state of being surrounded by solid lines SL4 to SL6 that can be visually recognized by the game status indicator 647 and the round indicator 648.

In this way, the function display sticker 649 is collectively mounted on the function display board 640a shown in FIG. 87, and the functions of the segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, LEDs1 to LED12 are grouped into groups Grp1 to Grp3 and the like. The contents are printed and partitioned. In addition, a star mark is printed on the ordinary symbol display 645 and the like, and even if the contents displayed by the segment displays SEG1, SEG2, LEDs1 to LED12 are collectively printed on the function display sticker 649, their meanings are understood. It is easy to understand.

As shown in FIG. 88, the correspondence between such a function and the printed content is printed on the function display sticker 649 as the sticker control number 649a. As shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, the sticker control number 649a is printed at a position that is difficult to see from the game window 101 through the game window 101 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. It is designed not to convey unnecessary information to the player. Further, as shown in FIGS. 88 and 89, the recess 601f provided in the function display sticker affixing portion 601e is also formed at a position that is difficult to see through the game window 101 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3. This makes it difficult for the player to see the recess 601f.

Further, the seal control number 649a is for preventing a worker of a manufacturer who manufactures the pachinko machine 1 from mistakenly attaching a function display sticker having a different specification when assembling the pachinko machine 1. Further, the seal management number 649a is also used for inventory management of the function display seal 649, and modes such as group Grp1 to group Grp3 are managed in association with the seal management number 649a. As a result, when the seal control number 649a is examined, the inventory of the function display seal 649 corresponding to the seal control number 649a can be found.

Here, in recent years, the development period of pachinko machines has become shorter as the life cycle of pachinko machines has been shortened. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for example, a 2-round indicator lamp and a 15-round indicator lamp that light and notify that the number of times (rounds) that the large winning opening 2003 is opened from the closed state is 2 times and 15 times. By using a common function display board 640a, it is possible to respond to changes in the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 due to the addition of a machine or the reduction of the number of starting ports from two to one. .. Since the content printed on the function display sticker is also changed due to such a change in the specifications of the pachinko machine 1, the functions of the segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, LEDs 1 to LED12 and the content printed on the function display sticker are described above. Correspondence relationship is printed on the function display sticker as a sticker management number. As a result, for example, in the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1, before the line operator attaches the function display sticker 649 to the game board 4, it is determined whether or not the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 and the function display sticker 649 correspond to each other. It can be confirmed by visually observing the sticker control number 649a, and it is possible to prevent the function display sticker 649, which does not correspond to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1, from being attached. The function display sticker 649 is a sticker, and there is no work process of applying an adhesive or the like to the back surface of the function display sticker 649, which contributes to the improvement of productivity.

[1-3B. Hit ball launcher]
Next, the hitting ball launching device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 95. 90 is an overall perspective view (A) of the hitting ball launching device 650, and FIG. 90 is a perspective view (B) with the launching motor portion removed. FIG. 91 is an exploded perspective view of the hitting ball launching device 650, FIG. 92. Is a front view (A) showing the relationship between the hitting ball launching device 650 and the launching rail 515, and a perspective view (B) of the launching motor portion. FIG. FIG. 94 is a rear view showing the relationship between the device 650 and the launch rail 515, and FIG. 94 is a rear view showing the relationship between the hit ball launcher 650 and the launch rail 515 in a state where the operation handle portion 410 is being operated. Reference numeral 95 denotes a plan view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C) seen from the front, and an AA sectional view (D) of the front view (B) of the slide member 710 provided in the ball launching device 650. Is.

The hitting ball launching device 650 rotatably supports the hitting mallet 687 on the launching base frame 651, and attaches a launching motor 695 that imparts reciprocating rotation to the hitting mallet 687 to the launching base frame 651, and further mounts the hitting mallet 687. The launch base frame 651 is provided with a slide mallet 677 and a slide member 710 for adjusting the urging force of the urging spring 684 that gives the urging force to return to.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 91, the launch base frame 651 is formed of a synthetic resin into a horizontally long rectangular shape, and a bearing in which the bearing 689 of the ball hammer 687 is fitted in the substantially center thereof. A cylinder 652 is formed, and rubber stopper members 653 and 654 that regulate the launch origin position of the ball hammer 687 are attached and fixed to the upper portion and the side thereof. That is, the rubber stopper members 653 and 654 receive the impact of the hitting mallet 687 when the hitting mallet 687 returns to the firing origin position by the urging force of the urging spring 684. Further, a horizontally elongated narrow groove-shaped slide guide hole 655 is formed above the rear of the launch base frame 651 (opposite the portion corresponding to the lower part of the launch rail 515), and a slide member storage space is formed below the slide guide hole 655. 656 is formed.

The slide guide hole 655 is provided with a guide locking piece 678 projecting from the upper part of the rear end of the slide rod 677, which will be described later, to guide the slide movement of the slide rod 677, and is provided in the slide member storage space 656. , The slide member 710 is housed so as to be movable in the left-right direction. The slide guide of the front portion of the slide rod 677 is provided to the guide bush 681 which is fixed to the guide hole 662 formed in the firing base frame 651 by the set screw 682 in the guide slot 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677. It is done by penetrating. Further, as shown in FIG. 92, a rectangular connecting opening 664 is formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656.

Further, an eaves portion is formed in the front portion of the upper side of the launch base frame 651 with respect to the main body of the launch base frame 651, and an opening 657 for an operating piece is bored in the eaves portion above the bearing cylinder 652. There is. The opening 657 for the operating piece is provided with a weight 173 of a ball feeding member 172 (see FIG. 18) provided facing the ball hitting supply port 171b (see FIG. 18) on the downstream side of the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5. The working piece 658 that comes into contact with the working piece 658 is swingably provided by a stop pin 659 on the mounting portion 660 projecting from the rear upper portion of the opening edge of the working piece opening 657. The working piece 658 is formed in a "rail" shape, the rear end of the upper side thereof is pivotally supported by a stop pin 659, and the base plate rotates integrally with the hammer 687 from the shaft support to the arc portion below. The upper side swings the ball feed member 172 in conjunction with the reciprocating motion of the hitting mallet 687 in contact with the working piece contact portion 693 projecting from the 690, and the ball feeding port is swung by the swinging motion of the ball feed member 172. The hit balls flowing out from 171b are supplied to the launch position of the launch rail 515 one by one.

Further, the launch base frame 651 is provided with motor mounting bosses 661 for fastening the motor cover 694 containing the launch motor 695 at two locations at the rear lower portion and one location at the front upper portion, for a total of three locations. At the same time, a swing piece boss 663 into which a shaft hole 673 at the lower end of the swing piece 672 connected to the slide member 710 is inserted to slide the slide rod 677 behind the lower portion of the slide member storage space 656 is projected. ing.

A metal plate 665 is attached to the launch base frame 651 so as to be substantially in close contact with the launch base frame 651 in order to increase the rigidity of the ball launching device 650. Therefore, the metal plate 665 has through holes 666, 667, 668, 669, which correspond to the bearing cylinder 652, the lower rubber stopper member 653, the slide guide hole 655, the guide bush 681, and the swing piece boss 663, respectively. Along with the formation of 671, a horizontally elongated elliptical through hole 670 through which the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 penetrates is also penetrated. In the metal plate 665 configured as described above, after the slide member 710 is stored in the slide member storage space 656, the respective through holes 666 to 671 form the corresponding members 652,655,655,681,712,663. It is fixed to the launch base frame 651 by being brought into close contact with the launch base frame 651 and screwed so as to penetrate or match.

The tip of the swing piece boss 663 of the launch base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes its head from the through hole 671, but the shaft hole 673 of the swing piece 672 is inserted through the head portion. , The swing piece 672 is pivotally supported so as to swing around the lower end. As shown in FIG. 91, the rocking piece 672 is formed in a vertically elongated rod shape, a shaft hole 673 is formed at the lower end thereof, and a slightly elongated hole shape in which the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 is inserted in the middle thereof. Connection hole 674 is formed. The front surface above the connecting hole 674 serves as an abutting portion 675 that abuts one end (rear end) of the slide rod 677. Then, the swing piece 672 is inserted into the swing piece boss 663, and the connecting hole 674 is inserted into the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 protruding from the through hole 670 to connect the pin 676 with a washer. By anchoring to the convex portion 712, the swing piece 672 is attached to the launch base frame 651. The attached rocking piece 672 swings its upper portion around the lower end as the slide member 710 slides.

Further, a horizontally long rod-shaped slide rod 677 is slidably attached to the upper front surface of the metal plate 665 in the left-right direction. That is, the L-shaped guide locking piece 678 projecting from the rear upper portion of the slide rod 677 is penetratingly engaged with the through hole 668 of the metal plate 665, and the guide elongated hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 is formed. The guide bush 681 having the set screw 682 is passed through and the set screw 682 is fixed to the set hole 662. The slide rod 677 is slidably mounted on the launch base frame 651 via the metal plate 665 by the guide locking piece 678 and the through hole 668, and the guide elongated hole 680 and the guide bush 681. Further, the slide rod 677 is formed with a contacted portion 679 that comes into contact with the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672 described above at one end (rear end) thereof, and one end of the urging spring 684 at the other end (front end). A spring locking portion 683 for hooking the locking ring 685 of the above is projected.

The bearing cylinder 652 of the launch base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 666, and the bearing 689 of the ball hammer 687 is fitted into the bearing cylinder 652 so as not to come off. The lower end of the ball hammer 687 is fixed to the shaft of the bearing 689, and at the same time, the base plate 690 is fixed to the shaft. The base plate 690 is provided with a working piece contact portion 693 that comes into contact with the working piece 658 on the front back surface side thereof, and a spring for hooking the locking ring 686 at the other end of the urging spring 684 on the front front surface thereof. A locking portion 692 is projected, and a motor contact projecting piece 691 that engages and disengages with the motor cam 697 of the firing motor 695 is projected on the rear front surface thereof. A synthetic resin mallet tip 688 is fixed to the upper end of the hitting mallet 687, and the launch position formed by the lower end portion of the launch rail 515 and the launch position stopper 702 fixed above the hammer tip 688. I'm facing to rush into.

On the other hand, the launch motor 695 housed in the motor cover 694 is mounted on the above-mentioned motor mounting boss 661 of the launch base frame 651. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 92 (B), the motor cover 694 has a cylindrical portion formed so as to house the launch motor 695 inside, and a motor mounting boss 661 that is enlarged in front of the cylindrical portion. A mounting portion in which a mounting fixing hole 699 for mounting is formed is integrally formed, and a reverse rotation prevention cam 698 and a motor cam 697 are formed at the tip of the motor shaft 696 of the launch motor 695 housed inside the cylindrical portion. Is fixed.

A large number of reverse teeth are formed on the outer circumference of the reverse rotation prevention cam 698, and the firing motor engages with the stopper piece 700 (see FIG. 93) that is swingably fixed to the stopper piece mounting boss 701. It prevents the 695 from rotating in the opposite direction. This is to prevent a failure that the motor cam 697 rotates in the opposite direction and the motor cam 697 and the motor contact projecting piece 691 mesh with each other so that the ball launching device 650 cannot be driven. Further, the motor cam 697 is formed in a magatama shape, and as the firing motor 695 rotates, the hitting mallet 687 is reciprocated while engaging with the motor contact projecting piece 691. When the motor cover 694 is attached to the motor mounting boss 661, as shown in FIG. 90A, the main configuration of the ball striking device 650 is covered as seen from the rear surface.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 95, the slide member 710 that is stored in the slide member storage space 656 and slides to move is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape with an open rear portion, and an elliptical convex portion 711 protrudes from the front surface thereof. Further, a circular connecting convex portion 712 is projected at a position behind the elliptical convex portion 711. Further, on the upper surface and the lower surface, slide contact protrusions 713 having an arcuate cross section are provided at both ends so as to easily slide in the slide member storage space 656. On the other hand, the space of the slide member 710 formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape is an insertion space 714 into which the slide protrusion 183 of the joint unit 180 provided in the lower part of the back surface of the door frame 5 is inserted.

The insertion space 714 has a first inclined surface 715 formed on the front side of the side wall in the front in the sliding direction, and projects from the inside of the upper surface and the lower surface toward the inside slightly rearward of the first inclined surface 715. A holding piece 716 is formed which is formed and a predetermined distance is formed between the tips of each other. A second inclined surface 717 that inclines in a lateral view toward the back is also formed on the front side of the holding piece 716. Then, in the state where the slide protrusion 183 is inserted into the insertion space 714, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), one end side of the slide protrusion 183 on the inclined side 183a side abuts on the side wall in the front in the slide direction. It is in a state of being inserted between the upper and lower holding pieces 716. A space portion 718 is formed on the side of the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, but the space portion 718 does not particularly perform a function.

Thus, the slide member 710 configured as described above is an ellipse formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656 as shown in FIG. 92 (A) in a state of being stored in the slide member storage space 656. The insertion space 714 is formed so as to face the connecting opening 664 of the shape, and the slide member 710 is in contact with one of the inner walls of the slide member storage space 656 (in FIG. 92 (A), the inner wall of the left space is used. Although it is shown as being in contact with each other, it is in a state of being in contact with the inner wall of the space on the right under normal conditions.)

Therefore, first, the relationship of adjusting the strength of the slide member 710 and the urging spring 684 of the ball striking device 650 will be described. The slide member 710 is located at the initial position inside the slide member storage space 656 (on the right in FIG. When it is in contact with the inner wall of the space), the swing piece 672 connected to the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 is in a substantially vertical state, as shown in FIG. 93. Therefore, the slide rod 677 in contact with the swing piece 672 is also urged in one direction (left side in FIG. 93) by the urging force of the urging spring 684, and is in contact with the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672. The slide rod 677 is in contact with the contacted portion 679. In this state, since the urging spring 684 is not tensioned, even if the hammer 687 reciprocates in accordance with the rotation of the launch motor 695, the return force of the hammer 687 is weak and the hit ball at the launch position is hit. Even if it is issued, it does not reach the game area 605 of the game board 4.

On the other hand, when the slide member 710 moves in the other direction from the initial position inside the slide member storage space 656 (when it moves toward the inner wall of the left space in FIG. 92 (A)), as shown in FIG. 94. Since the swing piece 672 swings and tilts around the shaft hole 673 at the lower end, the slide rod 677 moves in the other direction (right side in FIG. 94) due to the contact between the contact portion 675 and the contacted portion 679. Slide toward. Then, the urging spring 684 locked to the spring locking portion 683 of the slide rod 677 is also in a tensioned and extended state. In this state, since the urging spring 684 is tensioned, the returning force of the hammer 687 becomes stronger when the hammer 687 reciprocates in accordance with the rotation of the launch motor 695, and the hit ball at the launch position is released. It is strongly repelled and reaches the game area 605 of the game board 4. The strength of the elastic force of the hit ball can be adjusted according to the amount of slide of the slide member 710 in the slide member storage space 656.

As described above, the elastic force of the ball striking device 650 can be adjusted by moving the slide member 710, and the movement of the slide member 710 is the rotation of the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400 described above. It is interlocked with the movement of the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180 that moves in response to the rotation operation of the movement operation member 414. This point will be described with reference to FIG. 60 and the like.

As described above, by rotating the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400, the magatama-shaped cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 415 also rotates, so that the slide body of the joint unit 180 The 182 slides in one direction inside the joint unit mounting recess 110c. Therefore, the slide projecting piece 183 projecting from the front surface of the slide body 182 also slides in the same direction. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide projecting piece 183 of the slide body 182 penetrates the connecting opening 664 formed in the launching device mounting portion 520 of the main body frame 5 and inserts the slide member 710. It is designed to be inserted into space 714. In this case, the inserted state is a state in which one end side of the slide projecting piece 183 on the inclined side 183a side is in contact with the side wall in the front in the sliding direction and is inserted between the upper and lower holding pieces 716 as described above. .. Therefore, when the slide projecting piece 183 slides in one direction, the slide member 710 also slides in the same direction. At this time, as described above, the slide rod 677 also slides with the slide movement of the slide member 710, so that the urging force of the urging spring 684 can be adjusted. That is, the elastic force of the hit ball of the hit ball launching device 650 can be adjusted by rotating the rotation operation member 414 of the handle device 400.

By the way, in the present embodiment, since the handle device 400 is provided in the door frame 5 and the ball striking device 650 is provided in the main body frame 3, the slide projecting piece 183 of the handle device 400 is provided every time the door frame 5 is opened and closed. And the slide member 710 of the hitting ball launching device 650 cooperate with or separate from each other. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, by closing the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide projecting piece 183 is automatically inserted into the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, and the handle device 400 The hitting ball launching device 650 is linked, and conversely, by opening the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide projecting piece 183 separates from the insertion space 714 from the handle device 400 and the hitting ball launching device 650. Therefore, it is possible to link and separate the handle device 400 and the ball launching device 650 with the opening and closing of the door frame 5 very easily. In particular, when the slide protrusion 183 is inserted into the insertion space 714, the second inclination of the holding piece 716 projecting into the insertion space 714 even if the position of the slide protrusion 183 is slightly displaced in the vertical direction. The surface 717 allows the slide projecting piece 183 to be smoothly inserted into the sandwiching position.

In some cases, the player stuffs the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 and fixes it at a position where the stuffing is rotated to some extent, but the clerk at the game hall does not know the stuffing and fixes the door frame. 5 may be opened and closed. Even in such a case, when the door frame 5 is opened, there is no problem because the slide protrusion 183 is simply separated from the insertion space 714, but when the door frame 5 is closed, the position of the slide protrusion 183 is not a problem. Is slightly displaced in one direction, but due to the cooperative action of the inclined side 183a of the slide projecting piece 183 and the first inclined surface 715 of the slide member 710, the slide member accompanies the closing operation of the door frame 5. The slide projecting piece 183 and the slide member 710 are finally engaged with each other while moving the 710 in one direction. That is, in the present embodiment, the operation handle device 400 and the hit ball launching device 650 can be linked regardless of the rotation position of the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410. Is.

[1-3 C. Prize ball tank]
Next, the prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank 720. As described above, the prize ball tank 720 is detachably attached to the tank mounting groove 550 (see FIG. 70) formed in the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. The prize ball tank 720 is formed in a rectangular box shape, and when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, a notch 729 is formed in the front wall 721, and the bottom surface thereof is from the upstream side wall 724 to the downstream side wall 723. The storage portion 728 is formed by the first inclined bottom surface 726 inclined toward the surface and the second inclined bottom surface 727 inclined from the front wall 721 toward the discharge port 730 described below.

Further, a discharge port 730 is formed at the lower end of the slope of the second sloped bottom surface 727, and the discharge port 730 projects outward from the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. As described above, the downstream side wall 723 and the rear wall 722 are formed so as to be surrounded by the discharge port protruding wall 725 connecting in a U shape. Further, mounting collars 733 that engage with the tank mounting groove 550 are formed on the outer sides of both ends of the front wall 721 of the prize ball tank 720, and the second body frame 3 is formed on the back surface side of the bottom surface of the prize ball tank 720. A mounting contact piece 731, 732 that mounts and contacts the four side wall 543 is projected, and a ball for attaching a ball leveling member 744 described later to the lower portion of the rear wall 722 on the upstream side of the prize ball tank 720. A break-in mounting shaft 735 is provided so as to project. Further, an overflow prevention member 734 for preventing the ball from jumping is detachably attached to the rear wall 722 and the upstream side wall 724 of the prize ball tank 720 excluding the discharge port 730.

In the prize ball tank 720 configured as described above, the mounting flange portion 733 is attached to the tank mounting groove 550 of the main body frame 3 so as to be inserted from above, and the mounting contact pieces 731 and 732 are attached to the main body frame 3. It is brought into contact with the fourth side wall 543. As a result, the prize ball tank 720 is mounted on the upper part of the main body frame 3 on the back surface side, and in this mounted state, as shown in FIG. 74, it is stored via the notch 729 of the front wall 721. The portion 728 and the relief recess 551 formed on the back surface of the main body frame 3 communicate with each other, and as shown in FIG. 4, the discharge port 730 faces the upstream end of the tank rail member 740 described below. ing. Therefore, in the prize ball tank 720, the width in the front-rear direction of the storage portion 728 (the storage space portion corresponding to the first inclined bottom surface 726 and the second inclined bottom surface 727) for storing the balls is the second side wall 541 of the main body frame 3. -The width of the fourth side wall 543 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same, and the side walls 541 to 543 are placed on the upper part of the side wall 543.

Further, as described above, since the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 of the main body frame 3 are deeply formed so as to cover the rear protruding space of the peripheral portion of the game board 4, the side walls 541 to 541 Although the depth of the storage portion of the prize ball tank 720 placed on the upper part of the 543 is formed shallower than that of the conventional storage tank, the prize ball tank 720 is formed even if the prize balls are stored and the weight increases. Since the entire surface is supported by the side walls 542 to 543 of the main body frame 3, the stored balls can be smoothly guided to the discharge port 730 without the inclined bottom surfaces 726 and 727 being deformed. Further, since the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, the flow of the balls stored in the storage unit 728 can flow outward from the second inclined bottom surface 727. It is configured in. For this reason, compared to the prize ball tank in which an opening is provided in a part of the inclined bottom surface as a discharge port as in the conventional case, a ball breaking protrusion for eliminating ball clogging is formed in the storage portion near the discharge port. It is possible to have a structure in which ball clogging is unlikely to occur.

Then, in the present embodiment, as described above, the prize ball tank 720 storage portion is placed on the upper outside of the rear side wall walls 541 to 543 for accommodating the rear protruding portion of the gaming device, and the prize is awarded. Since the discharge port 730 of the ball tank 720 is provided so as to project outward from the rear wall 722 of the storage portion, the tank rail member 740 is provided outside the storage portion of the prize ball tank 720 (the back when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). Since the tank rail member 740 and the storage portion 728 of the prize ball tank 720 do not overlap in the vertical direction at the side), the rear protruding portion of the gaming device provided on the back surface of the gaming board 4 is stored. The upper side of the rear side wall 541 to 543 can be projected rearward at a position close to the upper side of the main body frame 3, so that even if the rear protruding portion of the gaming device protrudes from the upper side of the gaming board 4. It can be easily stored inside the rear side walls 541 to 543.

Further, regardless of whether or not the storage portion 728 of the prize ball tank 720 is mounted on the upper outer side of the rear side wall 541 to 543 for accommodating the rear protruding portion of the game device, the discharge port 730 is the prize ball tank 720. It has a unique effect not found in the conventional prize ball tank only by the configuration that it is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722. This will be described with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a plan view showing the pressure state of the ball at the discharge port portion of the conventional prize ball tanks (A) and (B) and the prize ball tank (C) according to the present embodiment. In the figure, in the normal state, the balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 are stored and stayed in the storage portion of the prize ball tank 720. In this case, when a part of the inclined bottom surface of the storage portion is opened to form the discharge port 730A as in the conventional prize ball tank, for example, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), the ball breaking protrusion 736A A prize ball tank having a discharge port 730A formed on the opposite side of the ball, or when a discharge port 730B is formed adjacent to a ball breaking protrusion 736B as shown in FIG. 97 (B), the discharge port 730A In the portion of 730B, the pressure of the stored ball and the reaction from the side wall of the prize ball tank based on the pressure always apply the ball pressure to the discharge ports 730A and 730B from all sides.

For this reason, even if the pressures of the balls are balanced by the degree of polymerization of the balls and the balls on the downstream side flow out, a ball biting state may occur at the discharge ports 730A and 730B, resulting in ball clogging. On the other hand, in the prize ball tank 720 according to the present embodiment, the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, and therefore, as shown in FIG. 97 (C). The pressure of the stored sphere in the discharge port 730 portion is a pressure from two directions only the acting force from the storage portion toward the discharge port 730 and the reaction thereof, and the pressure is not received from all directions as in the conventional case. Therefore, even if the ball on the downstream side flows out, the ball biting state at the discharge port 730 portion is unlikely to occur, and an excellent effect that the ball clogging does not occur can be obtained.

[1-3D. Tank rail member]
Subsequently, the tank rail member 740 arranged below the prize ball tank 720 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 98 to 100. FIG. 98 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900 as viewed from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. , A prize ball tank 720, a tank rail member 740, a ball passage unit 770, a prize ball unit 800, and a full tank unit 900, which is a perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. 100 is a tank rail. It is sectional drawing (A) and plan view (B) which show the relationship between the downstream part of the member 740 and the upstream part of a ball passage unit 770.

As described above, the tank rail member 740 is detachably attached to the rail locking grooves 535 and 554 (see FIG. 70) of the upper rear wall 545 of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the tank rail member 740 is provided with a plurality of locking projection pieces 749 to be inserted into the rail locking groove 553 from above on the left and right sides and the lower side of the side surface on the rear surface side, and the upper side of the side surface on the rear surface side. A hook-shaped locking protrusion 750 that is hooked from above to the rail locking groove 554 is provided in the center. The tank rail member 740 is formed in an inclined gutter shape with an open upper surface, the upper surface of the upstream end of the tank rail member 740 faces the discharge port 730 of the prize ball tank 720, and the lower surface of the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 faces the ball passage unit 770 described in detail later. Facing. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the inside of the tank rail member 740 is a passage 742 in which balls are aligned in two rows and flow down by a partition wall 741.

The bottom surface of the passage 742 is notched with a narrow groove, so that a foreign substance that rolls along with the ball in the passage 742 falls downward from the fine groove. Further, a metal plate (not shown) for removing static electricity is attached to the side wall of the passage 742, and the downstream end of the metal plate is connected to the above-mentioned ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 68). ing. Therefore, the static electricity charged on the ball flowing down the tank rail member 740 is grounded to the outside from the metal plate via the ground wire connector 557 and the grounding connector of the power supply board 1136.

Further, an egg-shaped ball smoothing member 744 having a weight slightly downstream of the middle basin of the tank rail member 740 is provided so as to be swingable. The ball leveling member 744 is swingably supported by the ball leveling mounting shaft 735 of the prize ball tank 720 described above, and is directed toward the inside of each of the two rows of passages 742 in the tank rail member 740. When a sphere that hangs down and flows down each passage 742 flows down in a plurality of stages in the vertical direction, it is rectified so that it becomes one stage. Further, the upper surface of the tank rail member 740 on the downstream side of the installation position of the ball leveling member 744 is covered with the ball holding plate 745. The ball holding plate 745 is formed in an inclined arc shape so that a ball that has not been made into one step by the ball leveling member 744 is forcibly made into one step.

Further, at the downstream end of the tank rail member 740, a pair of alignment gears 747 are rotatably supported by shaft pins 748 facing the respective passages 742. The alignment gear 747 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery thereof, and is fixed to the shaft pin 748 so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 747 is deviated by half a pitch. Therefore, when the upper part of the ball flowing down each passage 742 of the tank rail member 740 flows down to the downstream side while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 747, the balls of the two rows of passages 742 are alternately sent one by one. become. In this case, as shown in FIG. 100, the sphere flowing through each passage 742 is guided toward the center along the inclined surface 743 formed in the lower part of the two rows of passages 742 while meshing with the alignment gear 747. During the guidance, the balls from the two rows of passages 742 are alternately dropped in a row at the upper end entrance 773 of the ball drop passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 described below. The upper surface of the alignment gear 747 is covered with an arc-shaped gear cover 746.

[1-3E. Ball passage unit]
Next, the ball passage unit 770 for guiding the balls dropped in a row from the tank rail member 740 to the prize ball unit 800 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 101 to 105. FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the main body frame 3 and the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 102 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. 103 is a perspective view of the ball passage unit 770 as viewed from the back, FIG. 104 is a front view of the ball passage unit 770, and FIG. 105 is a connecting structure of the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800. It is a side view for demonstrating. In addition, in FIGS. 102 and 103, the prize ball unit 800 portion is a drawing of the ball passage portion formed in the unit base body 801 in an easy-to-understand manner by removing the gear cover 866, the aluminum heat radiating plate 841, and the unit sub plate 825. is there. However, gears and the like are shown by alternate long and short dash lines to make it easier to understand the relationship with the ball passage.

In the ball passage unit 770 of this example, the ball drop passage 772 is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 771 bent on the back surface (the surface visible from the back surface is referred to as a front surface) of a substantially rectangular plate material. As shown in FIG. 100A, the ball drop passage 772 communicates with the front-rear bending passage portion 772a whose upstream side bends in the front-rear direction (depth direction when viewed from the back) and the front-rear bending passage portion 772a to the left and right. It is composed of a left-right bending passage portion 772b that bends in a direction (left-right direction when viewed from the back surface) and a vertical passage portion 772c that communicates with the left-right bending passage portion 772b and is substantially vertical.

As shown in FIG. 100A, the front-rear bending passage portion 772a has a main body because the position of the upper end inlet 773 that falls from the tank rail member 740 described above is substantially the center of the two rows of passages 742 as described above. Since the position is separated from the surface of the upper rear wall 545 and the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the frame 3 to the back side, the prize ball guide protrusions projecting from the front-rear bending passage portion 772a and the shaft support side rear wall 546. With 561, the ball drop passage 772 is bent in the front-rear direction so as to be located close to the surface of the rear wall 546 on the shaft support side. Further, as shown in FIG. 104, the left and right bent passage portions 772b have a U-shape that substantially fills the width of the ball passage unit 770 in order to weaken the momentum of the ball that has fallen from the tank rail member 740 to the front and rear bent passage portions 772a. It is formed by bending.

Further, although the vertical passage portion 772c is also formed substantially vertically, it is formed by being slightly curved, and a notch portion 775 is formed in one of the bent passage walls 771 constituting the vertical passage portion 772c, and the notch portion 775 is formed. A ball breakage detection piece 776 whose upper end is pivotally supported by a support shaft 777 is swingably attached to the 775. A ball-cutting switch 778 is attached to the side of the ball-cutting detection piece 776, and the actuator 779 of the ball-cutting switch 778 is in contact with the ball-cutting detection piece 767. A ball-out detection mechanism for detecting ball-out in the vertical passage portion 772c is configured by a ball-out detection piece 776 and a ball-out switch 778.

When a sphere is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the sphere breakage detection piece 767 is pressed by the sphere existing in the vertical passage portion 772c to push the actuator 779 to turn on the sphere break switch 778, but the vertical passage When the ball disappears due to the ball clogging or the ball shortage in the portion 772c, the ball breakage detection piece 776 swings toward the inside of the vertical passage portion 772c, so that the actuator 779 turns off the ball breakage switch 778. When the ball-out switch 778 is turned off, the rotation of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, is stopped and the payout of the prize ball is stopped.

A stopper protrusion 780 is formed at the lower end of the notch 775 to prevent excessive swing of the ball breakage detection piece 776 to the side opposite to the passage, and the ball of the ball passage unit 770. An insertion groove 781 for ball clogging is formed in the vertical passage portion 772c corresponding to the break detection piece 776. When it is difficult for the ball breakage detection piece 776 to swing due to ball jamming or the like, the ball jamming insertion groove 781 is inserted from the rear surface side of the ball passage unit 770 to insert a pin into the ball breakage detection piece 776. It is provided to solve the problem. Further, the other bent passage wall 771 facing the ball breakage detection piece 776 is formed in a slightly bulging shape toward the ball breakage detection piece 776 side. This is because when a ball is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the ball-out detection piece 776 is surely pressed to turn on the ball-out switch 778.

Further, the ball passage unit 770 is formed with a stop hole 782 and a positioning boss 783 at a position avoiding the ball drop passage 772 described above. The positioning boss 783 is engaged with the positioning pin 574 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the stop hole 782 is also a passage unit formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546. It corresponds to the mounting boss 562. Then, in order to mount the ball passage unit 770 on the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 101, the passage unit mounting boss 562 and the stop hole 782 are aligned with each other while engaging the positioning boss 783 with the positioning pin 574. This can be done by screwing the screw 784 from the stop hole 782 in the state. Further, the ball passage unit 770 is formed with a cover body engaging groove 785 that engages with the engaging piece of the cover body 1250 in the middle of one side thereof, and is for connecting to the prize ball unit 800 at the lower part. The connecting lid member 786 is rotatably provided.

As shown in FIG. 103, the connecting lid member 786 is configured by projecting a pair of passage walls 790 projecting in an arc shape on the back surface of a rectangular plate material, and is formed by projecting a pair of passage walls 790, and the lower surface of the ball passage unit 770. A protrusion shaft 789 as a rotating shaft portion protruding from the tip of a support piece 788 extending from both ends of the connecting lid member 786 is fitted to a support protrusion 787 as a shaft support projecting from both left and right ends of the connecting lid member 786. As a result, it is rotatably supported by the shaft. Further, the connecting lid member 786 is extended below the ball passage unit 770 by closing, and the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end of the ball drop passage 772 are in communication with each other (FIG. 105 (B)). It can rotate into a state (shown) and a state in which the passage formed by the passage wall 790 and the downstream end of the ball drop passage 772 do not communicate with each other (state shown in FIG. 105 (A)). A guide protrusion 791 for guiding the support piece 788 of the connecting lid member 786 is projected from the lower end of the rear surface of the ball passage unit 770 when shifting from the open state to the closed state.

Thus, the ball passage unit 770 is fixed to the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the prize ball unit 800 is also mounted to the shaft support side rear wall 546 as described later (FIG. 105). In the state shown in (A)), the connecting lid member 786 is closed and the rear surface is locked by the locking elastic claw 820 provided in the prize ball unit 800, whereby the ball drop passage 772 and the prize ball of the ball passage unit 770 are locked. The bending passage 803 of the unit 800 is communicated with the passage wall 790, and the ball falling through the ball falling passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 can be guided to the bending passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800. The reason why the rotatable connecting lid member 786 is provided on the ball passage unit 770 is that the prize ball unit 800 can be easily attached to and detached from the main body frame 3 as described later, and the detachable connection lid member 786 is provided. This is because the space formed between the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 due to the mounting on the ball does not hinder the smooth fall of the ball.

Further, between the pair of bent passage walls 771 projecting from the ball passage unit 770, the projecting height is projected from the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3 so as to gradually decrease toward the downstream side. By inserting the prize ball guide protrusion 561, the upstream portion of the ball drop passage 772 is rearward so that the upper end entrance 773 of the ball drop passage 772 is located at substantially the lower center of the two rows of passages 742 of the tank rail member 740. It is formed as a front-rear bending passage portion 772a that bends in the front-rear direction when viewed from the entanglement. As a result, in a configuration in which balls flowing down in two rows are alternately sent to the prize ball unit 800 side by a pair of alignment gears 747, the balls are smoothly sent to the prize ball unit 800 one by one through the ball drop passage 772. Can be done. Further, according to this configuration, since it is not necessary to configure the ball drop passage 772 from the assembly of a plurality of members, the number of parts constituting the ball drop passage 772 can be reduced, and the ball drop passage 772 can be assembled. Workability can be improved.

Further, the ball that has fallen from the tank rail member 740 through the front-rear bending passage portion 772a weakens its momentum by passing through the left-right bending passage portion 772b, and then is sent to the prize ball unit 800 through the vertical passage portion 772c. .. Further, the vertical passage portion 772c to which the ball is sent in a state where the momentum is weakened is provided with a ball breakage detection mechanism (ball breakage detection piece 776 and ball breakage switch 778) for detecting the ball breakage. As a result, it is possible to reliably detect that the ball has run out in the ball falling passage 772, in other words, that the ball supplied to the prize ball unit 800 has run out (ball out).

[1-3F. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 800 arranged on the downstream side of the ball passage unit 770 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 109. FIG. 106 is an exploded perspective view of the prize ball unit 800 as viewed from the rear side, FIG. 107 is a rear view for explaining the relationship between the payout motor 815 and the sprocket 807 as a payout member, and FIG. 108 is a rear view. , It is a rear view for demonstrating the passage and the driving relation of the prize ball unit 800, and FIG.

In FIG. 106, the prize ball unit 800 includes a unit base body 801 and a unit base body 801 in which a bending passage 803, a prize ball passage 810, and a ball pulling passage 811 are formed by a pair of bending passage walls 802. Provided in the unit sub plate 825 covering the rear surface, the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit attached to the upper surface (rear surface side) of the unit sub plate 825, and the substantially central surface region (rear surface side region) of the unit sub plate 825. It is composed of a gear group 843, 844, 847 and a gear cover 866 that covers the detection disk 850 (rotation transmission member). Hereinafter, these configurations will be described in sequence.

The unit base body 801 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape (this plate portion may be referred to as a "bottom surface"), and a pair of bending passages projecting toward the plate-shaped unit sub plate 825 side. The bending passage 803 is formed by the wall 802. The bent passage wall 802 projects from the center of the upper part of the unit base body 801 to approximately the middle of the downstream side at intervals slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, but is largely divided into left and right from the middle to the downstream side. From to the downstream end, it also serves as side walls on both ends of the unit base body 801. Further, the portion where the bending passage wall 802 in the middle is largely divided into left and right constitutes a distribution space 805 in which the sprocket 807 as a ball feed rotating body is arranged, and the unit base body 801 is formed from the lower part of the distribution space 805. A passage partition wall 809 is formed so as to form a pair of bent passage walls 802 divided into left and right up to the downstream end of the wall.

That is, two passages are formed from the distribution space 805 to the left and right by the left and right bent passage walls 802 and the passage partition wall 809 from the middle to the downstream side, and one passage constitutes the prize ball passage 810. The other passage constitutes the ball-extracting passage 811. The passage partition wall 809 is also largely divided into left and right, and a motor storage space 814 for accommodating the payout motor 815 is formed inside the divided passage partition wall 809. That is, the payout motor 815 is stored in the motor storage space 814 formed within the depth width dimension of the ball passage at a position avoiding the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball pulling passage 811). It is fixed. The bending passage 803 is formed in a meandering shape to reduce the pressure on the sprocket 807 of the ball parked in the passage 803 and reaches the distribution space 805, but is on the upstream side of the distribution space 805. An elliptical opening 804 is formed on the bottom surface. The opening 804 stores small dust and the like that have entered the bending passage 803, and the dust and the like that have accumulated when the prize ball unit 800 is removed from the main body frame 3 can be taken out.

Further, in the distribution space 805 described above, a sprocket 807 as a payout member having a plurality of (three in the figure) recesses formed in which spheres fit on the outer circumference is rotatably arranged. A bearing cylinder 806 that pivotally supports the other end of the rotating shaft 808 to which the 807 is fixed is formed on the bottom surface of the distribution space 805. Further, the upper end portion of the passage partition wall 809 forming the bottom portion of the distribution space 805 is formed in a concave arc shape along the rotation arc of the sprocket 807, and the upstream portion of the prize ball passage 810 formed on one of them is formed. , The counting switch 812 is detachably attached.

The counting switch 812 is composed of a rectangular parallelepiped magnetic sensor having a circular passage hole through which a sphere passes at the tip portion, and a switch fitting recess 865 matching the shape of the rear end portion is formed by a bent passage wall 802. By doing so, it can be easily attached and detached. The wiring (not shown) from the counting switch 812 is connected to the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit, which will be described later. Further, on the downstream side of the bent passage wall 802 constituting the prize ball passage 810, a locking claw that engages with a locking portion 860 formed in the passage lid plate portion 859 integrally formed with the unit sub plate 825. A plurality of 813s are formed. However, of the plurality of locking claws 813, the locking claw 813 that engages with one of the locking portions 860 at the lower end of the passage lid plate portion 859 is formed on the passage partition wall 809 side.

Further, a circular motor storage space 814 for accommodating the payout motor 815 is formed below the unit base body 801 and between the prize ball passage 810 and the ball ejection passage 811. The motor storage space 814 is formed. The cylindrical body of the payout motor 815 is housed inside the motor. However, the payout motor 815 is fixed to the back surface side of the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 attached below the unit sub plate 825 by a pair of attachment pieces 816 formed on the front surface thereof with screws 817. Then, with the payout motor 815 attached to the aluminum heat dissipation plate 841 of the unit sub plate 825, the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 penetrates the shaft insertion hole 842 bored in the aluminum heat dissipation plate 841 and first. The gear 843 is fixed.

Further, by covering the rear surface side of the unit base body 801 with the unit sub plate 825 and the aluminum heat radiating plate 841, the space in the depth width direction in which the above-mentioned bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, and ball pulling passage 811 are formed. The cylindrical main body portion of the payout motor 815 is also housed and arranged inside. Since the motor storage space 814 for accommodating the payout motor 815 and the distribution space 805 on which the above-mentioned sprocket 807 is arranged are formed in an extremely close positional relationship in the vertical direction, the unit base body 801 is in the vertical direction. The length can be shortened, and as a result, the prize ball unit 800 can be made compact.

Further, the unit base body 801 is provided with a guide projectile 819 that guides the ball pulled out to the back surface side of the prize ball unit 800 at the lowermost end of the ball pulling passage 811, and the guide projectile 819 is provided with the guide projectile 819. The guided ball is guided to the ball-extracting connection passage 880, which will be described later, and is finally discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (a recovery gutter provided below the island stand). Further, a locking elastic claw 820 for locking the connecting lid member 786 of the ball passage unit 770 described above is projected from the upper portion of the unit base body 801 and the prize ball unit 800 is placed on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3. A mounting boss 823 for connecting the button insertion engaging hole 821 and the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 for detachably attaching to the rear wall 546, and the gear cover 866 with the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825 sandwiched between them. Is provided.

A rod-shaped attachment / detachment button 822 provided on one upper side of the unit base body 801 is slidably attached to the button insertion engagement hole 821 in the depth width direction, and as will be described later, the front tip thereof. Corresponds to the locking elastic claw 564 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3. Further, as shown in FIG. 101, the rear end surface of the button insertion engagement hole 821 is concave so that the tip end portion of the locking elastic claw 564 can be inserted. Further, the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 engages with the engaging projecting piece 565 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and presses the prize ball unit 800 against the shaft support side rear wall 546. By pushing it downward, the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and the engaging projecting piece 565 are engaged with each other. Then, in the engaged state, the elastic claw 564 for locking and the button insertion engaging hole 821 are engaged with each other, so that the prize ball unit 800 cannot be moved upward.

The hook-shaped engaging portions 824 are formed on the upper left and right sides of the unit base body 801. Further, the mounting boss 823 for connecting the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 with the unit sub plate 825 sandwiched thereof is projected long toward the rear surface side, and is a through hole formed in the unit sub plate 825. After penetrating 858, it corresponds to the mounting hole 867 of the gear cover 866, and by screwing the screw 868 from the surface of the gear cover 866, the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 are connected with the unit sub plate 825 sandwiched. doing.

Explaining the configuration of the unit sub plate 825 that covers the unit base body 801 described above, the unit sub plate 825 is a composite that covers the bending passage 803 portion, the distribution space 805 portion, and the prize ball passage 810 portion of the unit base body 801. The payout motor 815 is attached to the resin plate material, and the aluminum heat dissipation plate 841 that covers the downstream portion of the ball ejection passage 811 is attached. On the front side (rear surface side) of the synthetic resin plate portion of the unit sub plate 825, a relay board region 826 for attaching the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit is formed at the upper portion, and a plurality of gears 843 and 843 are formed below the relay board region 826. A gear region 840 to which the 844, 847 and the detection disk 850 are attached is formed.

The relay board region 826 is formed in a substantially square shape, and mounting ribs 827 on which the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit is mounted are projected along the square shape, and mounting ribs 827 are projected above and below the vertical side on one side thereof, which will be described later. An engaging groove portion 828 that engages with the engaging projection 836 of the board cover 835 is formed, and a locking claw portion 829 that engages with the locking protrusion 837 of the board cover 835 is formed in the center of the other side vertical side. There is. Further, in the relay board area 826, a button insertion hole 834 into which the attachment / detachment button 822 is inserted and a mounting boss portion 832 for fixing the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit with screws (not shown) are formed. ..

The relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit attached to the relay board area 826 described above includes wiring from the counting switch 812, the payout motor 815, and the rotation angle switch 855 described later, which are provided in the prize ball unit 800, and described later. It relays the wiring from the payout control board 1186 (see FIGS. 71 and 126), and is provided with a plurality of connectors for that purpose, and is provided in the button insertion hole 833 and the mounting boss portion 832 into which the attachment / detachment button 822 is inserted. A corresponding mounting hole 831 is bored. Then, in a state where the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit is mounted on the mounting rib 827 of the relay board area 826, the mounting hole 831 and the mounting boss portion 832 are matched and fastened with a screw (not shown) to win the prize. The relay terminal plate 830 in the ball unit can be fixed to the surface (rear surface) of the unit sub plate 825.

Further, the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit attached as described above is covered with the substrate cover 835. The substrate cover 835 is formed in a box shape having a substantially square front side open, and an engaging protrusion 836 is formed on the upper and lower bases of the vertical side thereof, and a locking protrusion 837 is formed on the substantially central side surface of the vertical side on the other side. ing. Further, a button opening 838 and a connection opening 839 are formed on the square vertical surface of the substrate cover 835. Then, the engaging projection 836 of the substrate cover 835 is inserted into the engaging groove portion 828 of the relay board region 826 to engage the substrate cover 835, and then the locking protrusion 837 and the locking claw portion 829 are engaged with each other. The board cover 835 can cover the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit. On the contrary, when removing it, the locking claw portion 829 is elastically deformed to release the engagement with the locking protrusion 837, and the substrate cover 835 is pulled diagonally toward the front side to pull the engaging projection 836 and the engaging groove portion 828. The engagement with can be disengaged. In the state where the board cover 835 is covered, the head of the detachable button 822 engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821 passes through the button insertion holes 833 and 834 and slightly faces the outside from the button opening 838. There is. Further, the wiring connected to the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit is drawn out from the connection opening 839.

Next, the gears 843, 844, 847 provided in the gear region 840 formed on the unit sub plate 825, and the detection disk 850 will be described. As described above, the tip of the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 penetrates the shaft insertion hole 842 formed in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub plate 825 and projects to the surface (rear surface side) of the unit sub plate 825. The first gear 843 (drive gear) is fixed to the protruding portion. Above the first gear 843, a shaft in which a second gear 844 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the first gear 843 is press-fitted into the back surface (front side) of the gear cover 866 and is bored in the aluminum heat dissipation plate 841. A third gear 847 (rotation transmission gear) that meshes with the second gear 844 is rotatably provided on the shaft 845 whose other end is supported in the hole 846, and above the second gear 844, the unit sub plate 825. A shaft 848 press-fitted into the formed shaft hole 849 is rotatably provided. Further, above the third gear 847, a detection disk 850 having a gear portion 852 (driven gear) that meshes with the third gear 847 is rotatably provided on a rotating shaft 808 that pivotally supports the sprocket 807.

As shown in FIG. 109, the tip end portion of the motor shaft 818 is loosely fitted in the receiving hole formed in the gear cover 866. Further, the rotary shaft 808 is supported by press-fitting one end into a bearing cylinder 806 formed in the unit base body 801 and the other end being supported by a bearing hole formed in the gear cover 866. The sprocket 807 is rotatably supported in the distribution space 805 through the shaft through hole 864 formed slightly below the center of the 840, and the detection disk 850 is formed in the space formed by the unit sub plate 825 and the gear cover 866. Is rotatably supported. However, as shown in FIG. 109, since the rear end portion of the sprocket 807 is engaged with the central front surface portion of the detection disk 850, the sprocket 807 and the detection disk 850 are integrated with the rotation shaft 808 as the center. It is designed to rotate. Therefore, when the payout motor 815 is rotationally driven, the rotation is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 807 via the first gear 843, the second gear 844, the third gear 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850.

The outer circumference of the detection disk 850 is formed to be one size larger than the circle of the gear portion 852, and the outer peripheral portion protruding outward from the gear portion 852 has the same number as the recesses of the sprocket 807 (in the case of drawing). 3) detection notches 851 are formed in. The detection notch 851 is detected by a light emitting / receiving type rotation angle switch 855 (rotation position detecting means) provided on the sensor substrate 854 which is sandwiched and supported by the substrate mounting portion 857 formed on the surface of the unit sub plate 825. Is. The rotation angle switch 855 is for monitoring whether or not the sprocket 807 is rotating normally by detecting the number of detected notches 851 within a predetermined interval time during the payout operation. If an abnormal rotation is detected by the rotation angle switch 855 (mostly in a ball-biting state by the sprocket 807), the sprocket 807 is rotated forward and reverse a predetermined number of times to eliminate the abnormal state (for example, a ball-biting state). Is what you do. The number of balls actually paid out is detected by the counting switch 812 provided in the prize ball passage 810 described above and used for counting. As shown in FIG. 109, the other end of the sensor substrate 854 is also sandwiched between the substrate mounting portions formed on the gear cover 866.

As described above, of the plurality of gears provided in the gear region 840, only the second gear 844 is rotatably provided on the rotary shaft 845 press-fitted to the gear cover 866 side, and the gear cover 866 covering the gear region 840 is provided. Is formed with a mounting hole 867 which is projected from the unit base body 801 and is bored at a position corresponding to the tip of the mounting boss 823 which penetrates the through hole 858 of the unit sub plate 825. Then, the mounting holes 867 and the mounting boss 823 are aligned with each other while meshing the teeth of the second gear 844 provided on the gear cover 866 side with the teeth of the first gear 843 and the third gear 847 provided on the unit sub plate 825 side. By screwing from the rear surface of the gear cover 866 in this state with screws 868, the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 are integrally fixed while sandwiching the unit sub plate 825. Further, on one side surface of the gear cover 866, wiring connected to the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit (for example, wiring connecting the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit and the payout control board 1186 described later) is provided. A wiring processing piece 869 that is hung and tied up is projected.

The configuration of the prize ball unit 800 has been described above. However, when the unit base body 801, the unit sub plate 825, the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit, the board cover 835, and the gear cover 866 are assembled, FIG. As shown, the cylindrical main body portion of the payout motor 815 is housed at a position below the bending passage 803 in which the ball to be paid out is guided. Further, the unit base body 801 has a sprocket 807 arranged in the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball pulling passage 811), and a position avoiding the ball passage and having a depth width dimension of the ball passage. A payout motor 815 housed in a motor storage space 814 formed inside is provided, and the unit sub-plate 825 is provided with a rotation of the motor shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 along the non-blocking surface side thereof to rotate the sprocket 807. A rotation transmission member (first gear 843, second and third gears 844, 847, and gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) is provided to transmit to the shaft 808, and the distribution space 805 of the payout motor 815 and the bending passage 803 is provided. The sprocket 807 as the payout member to be arranged is connected so as to be rotationally driven by a plurality of gears 843, 844, 847, 850 (852) provided in the gear region 840 on the rear surface of the unit sub plate 825. .. That is, the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are housed within the depth width of the ball passages (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball pulling passage 811) formed between the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825. Moreover, the rotation transmission member (first gear 843, second and third gears 844, 847, and gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) that connects the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 is placed on the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub plate 825. Since it is provided along the predetermined width of the above, the prize ball unit 800 can be made thinner than the one in which a part of the payout motor or the sprocket is arranged outside the ball passage.

Further, such a prize ball unit 800 is further thinned by forming the ball passages (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball pulling passage 811) in the prize ball unit 800 in a single passage shape. Is being planned. That is, unlike the conventional one in which the payout motor 815 projects to the front side, the rear surface side, or the side side of the prize ball unit, when it is attached to the rear surface side of the shaft support side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3. Any part of the prize ball unit 800 may have a structure that does not protrude further rearward. In FIG. 109, the front end portion of the payout motor 815 is configured to slightly protrude from the rear surface of the unit base body 801. As shown in FIG. 71, this protruding portion is formed on the shaft support side rear surface wall 546. Since it faces the front part of the main body frame 3 from the lower relief opening 572 for the payout motor, as a result, it protrudes only by the dimension obtained by subtracting the thickness dimension of the rear wall 546 on the shaft support side from the protruding dimension. Therefore, the amount of protrusion toward the front of the rear wall 546 on the shaft support side is small. Further, by adopting such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the game board 4 is provided between the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3 to which the prize ball unit 800 is mounted and the back surface of the game board 4. A large storage space for accommodating the rear protruding portion of the game device can be taken in the depth width direction.

Further, in order to attach the prize ball unit 800 configured as described above to the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 101, a hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and an engaging projecting piece 565 are used. The prize ball unit 800 is pivotally supported so that the lower end of the prize ball unit 800 is hooked on the locking groove 573 and the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and the engaging projecting piece 565 are engaged with each other. Push it down while keeping it in close contact with the side rear wall 546. At this time, since the lower end portion of the prize ball unit 800 and the locking groove 573 are engaged and the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and the engaging projecting piece 565 are engaged, the mounting itself is completed. By moving the prize ball unit 800 upward, the above-mentioned engaging states are easily released. In order to prevent this, the elastic claw 564 for locking engages with the button insertion engaging hole 821. It is designed to do.

That is, the elastic claw 564 for locking and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are engaged with each other to prevent the prize ball unit 800 from moving upward in the mounted state. In this way, after the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the connecting lid member 786 of the ball passage unit 770 is rotated as described above and locked by the locking elastic claw 820, whereby the ball of the ball passage unit 770 falls. The downstream end of the passage 772 and the upstream end of the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800 can be communicated with each other through a passage composed of a pair of passage walls 790. Further, in the state where the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 and the prize ball entrance 927 of the full tank unit 900 described in detail later are connected, and the downstream end of the ball removal passage 811 is the ball removal connection passage. It is connected to the upstream end of the 880.

On the other hand, when removing the prize ball unit 800, the engagement by the locking elastic claw 820 is released, the connecting lid member 786 is rotated toward the front side, and then the detachable button 822 is pressed to press the locking elastic claw 564. Move it to the front side to disengage the elastic claw 564 for locking and the button insertion engagement hole 821, and then pull up the prize ball unit 800 while pressing the detachable button 822 to release the prize ball unit 800. The prize ball unit 800 is pulled out toward the front side by disengaging the engagement between the lower end portion of the above and the locking groove 573 and the engagement between the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and the engaging projection piece 565. It can be easily removed.

[1-3G. Full tank unit]
Subsequently, the full tank unit 900 arranged on the downstream side of the prize ball unit 800 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 110 to 116. FIG. 110 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball unit 800 and the full tank unit 900, FIG. 111 is a perspective view of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 112 is a front view of the full tank unit 900. It is an exploded perspective view, FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back surface of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 114 is a partially broken perspective view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 900 and the foul mouth 610. FIG. 115 is a cross-sectional view cut at a portion of the bottom rocking plate 907 provided in the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 116 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 900 and the foul opening 610.

As described above, the full tank unit 900 is mounted and fixed on the full tank unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. 112, the box main body is formed in a box shape with an open upper surface. It is composed of 901 and a lid 926 that covers the upper surface of the box main body 901. In the box main body 901, the ball flowing in from the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is guided in a zigzag shape inside and is discharged from the outlet 921. Therefore, a side guide passage 902 is formed in the upstream portion thereof to guide the ball flowing in from the prize ball inlet 927 formed in the lid 926 from one end to the other side. At one end of the side guidance passage 902 directly below the prize ball entrance 927, a side guidance receiving portion 903 formed in a concave arc shape for guiding the ball toward the side is provided, and the side guidance passage 902 is provided. A cushioning member 904 is provided on the inner surface of the other end of the 902 to receive the impact of the ball flowing through the side guide passage 902 and guide the ball to the downstream side.

Further, the sphere that collides with the cushioning member 904 provided on the inner surface of the other end of the side guidance passage 902 is guided to flow in the direction opposite to the flow of the sphere in the side guidance passage 902 after changing the direction to the downstream side. The opposite side guidance passage 905 is formed. The ball flowing through the opposite side guidance passage 905 is then guided by the front guidance passage 920 formed toward the front, and the award of the dish unit 300 described above from the outlet 921 formed at the lower end of the flow of the front guidance passage 920. Guided by the ball gutter 343.

By the way, on the bottom surface on the upstream side of the opposite side guidance passage 905, a bottom surface opening 906 that opens over the entire bottom surface is formed, and the bottom surface swing plate 907 swingably closes the bottom surface opening 906. There is. The bottom opening 906 is formed in a substantially square concave shape with an open upper surface, and a pair of shaft support protrusions 911 are provided on the side wall in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front inside. Further, a circular spring mounting recess 912 for positioning the lower end of the spring 913 is formed on the concave bottom surface of the bottom opening 906. On the other hand, the bottom rocking plate 907 that closes the bottom opening 906 is formed in a substantially square shape, and is a semicircular bearing that is pivotally supported by fitting the shaft support protrusion 911 on the downstream side of the back surface when viewed from the front. The portion 908 is formed so as to project.

Further, as shown in FIG. 115, a spring locking projection 910 for locking the upper end of the spring 913 is projected downward from the center of the back surface of the bottom rocking plate 907. Therefore, the bottom rocking plate 907 is always urged in the direction in which the upstream side thereof is swung upward by the urging force of the spring 913. Then, in the spring 913, even when the number of normal prize balls paid out (for example, 15) is placed on the bottom rocking plate 907 at one time, the bottom rocking plate 907 does not swing downward, and the prize ball It is formed of a spring member having a spring coefficient that causes a predetermined number of balls, which is equal to or larger than the number to be paid out, to swing downward when placed on the bottom swing plate 907. Further, the detection projecting piece 909 projects forward toward the upstream side of the bottom rocking plate 907. The detection projecting piece 909 penetrates the communication hole 929 and is located in the switch storage space 914 described below when the bearing portion 908 of the bottom rocking plate 907 is fitted and pivotally supported by the shaft support protrusion 911. It has become.

Further, a switch storage space 914 for storing the full switch 916 is integrally formed on the outside of the side wall at the upstream end of the reverse side guidance passage 905. In order to mount the full switch 916 in the switch storage space 914, a switch mounting portion 918 is formed on the outer surface of the side wall at the upstream end of the opposite side guidance passage 905 at the upper part of the switch storage space 914, and the switch mounting portion 918 is formed. The mounting piece 917 of the switch holder 915 that holds the full switch 916 is fastened to the portion 918 by the screw 919. The full tank switch 916 is configured as a switch including a floodlight and a light receiver, and the detection projection piece 909 swings up and down between the light receiver and the light receiver to detect ON / OFF.

Further, a foul ball passage 922 is formed on one side on the downstream side of the opposite side guidance passage 905. The foul ball passage 922 is formed by bending so that the foul ball entrance 923 on the upstream side communicates with the foul mouth 610 described above and the downstream side thereof communicates with the upstream side of the forward guidance passage 920, as shown in FIG. 114. Has been done. Therefore, the foul ball taken into the foul opening 610 is guided from the foul ball entrance 923 to the forward guidance passage 920 through the bent foul ball passage 922, and further through the exit 921 and the prize ball connecting gutter 343 to the plate unit. Returned to 300.

Further, the box main body 901 is provided with an engaging piece 924 that is engaged with the unit engaging groove 532 formed in the full tank unit mounting portion 531 on both sides of the outlet 921 and one side of the foul ball inlet 923. At the same time, a hook projection 925 that engages with the hook piece 928 formed on the lid body 926 is formed. The hook projection 925 is appropriately formed on the upper left and right rear side walls of the box main body 901.

On the other hand, the lid 926 is formed in a plate shape so as to cover the upper surfaces of the side guide passage 902, the reverse side guide passage 905, the front guide passage 920, and the foul ball passage 922 of the box main body 901, and the side guide passage. A square prize ball entrance 927 is opened at a position corresponding to the upstream end in 902. Further, around the lid body 926, a hook piece 928 for engaging with the hook protrusion 925 of the box main body 901 is projected downward.

In the full tank unit 900 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 110, the balls paid out from the prize ball passage 810 of the prize ball unit 800 are moved from the prize ball entrance 927 to the upstream side of the side guidance passage 902. It enters and is guided sideways by the side guidance receiving portion 903 and collides with the cushioning member 904. The ball that collides with the cushioning member 904 is guided to the forward guide passage 920 by being guided in the opposite side guide passage 905 in the direction opposite to the guide direction of the side guide passage 902 as it is toward the downstream side, and the front guide passage 920 It is led to the plate unit 300 from the exit 921 through the prize ball connecting gutter 343. In addition, the foul ball that entered from the foul ball entrance 923 is also weakened by the bent foul ball passage 922 and joins the front guidance passage 920, and passes through the prize ball communication gutter 343 from the exit 921 of the front guidance passage 920. Guided to the dish unit 300.

Then, in the normal state, when the ball naturally flows in the full tank unit 900, when the ball moves from the side guidance passage 902 to the opposite side guidance passage 905, it falls on the bottom rocking plate 907. Since the elastic force of the spring 913 is strong when the number of prize balls paid out is about the same, the bottom rocking plate 907 does not swing, and as shown by the solid line in FIG. 115, the detection projecting piece 909 is a light emitting / receiving method. It is in a state (OFF) in which the switch does not conduct with the full tank switch 916 between the floodlight and the receiver. On the other hand, when the prize balls are stored in the dish unit 300 and the full tank unit 900 is also filled with balls, the bottom surface sway formed in the entire area on the upstream side of the front guidance passage 920 and the reverse side guidance passage 905. The bottom rocking plate 907 swings downward against the urging force of the spring 913 due to the pressure of the ball stored on the moving plate 907, and the detection projecting piece 909 is thrown as shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. The light-receiving type full-tan switch 916 is disconnected from the projector and the receiver, and the switch is in a conductive state (ON). When the full tank switch 916 is turned on, the rotational drive of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 is stopped (if an ON signal is derived while a predetermined number of prize balls are being paid out, the predetermined number of prize balls is delivered. Is paid out and then stopped).

As described above, in the full tank unit 900, the full tank switch is provided by the bottom rocking plate 907 having a width substantially the same as the width of the bottom surface of the passage where the ball flows down (in the case of the figure, the opposite side guidance passage 905). The 916 was operated, and the bottom rocking plate 907 was urged by an urging member (spring 913) so as to swing the bottom swing plate 907 when a certain amount of balls were placed without swinging due to the normal flow of the balls. Therefore, compared to the conventional case where a ball is placed on the bottom surface of a part of the passage to detect a ball jam, the situation where the ball is not placed in a part of the passage is not detected due to the ball jam. It can be reliably prevented. This makes it possible to reliably detect the fullness of the sphere.

Further, in the full tank unit 900 according to the present embodiment, since the full tank unit 900 is detachably attached to the full tank unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3, the full tank device is formed on the main body frame as in the conventional case. It is not necessary to form a passage for a full tank structure in the main body frame as compared with the one assembled inside the payout passage. Further, by forming the inside of the full tank unit 900 into a zigzag-shaped passage, it is possible to guide the ball to the plate unit 300 while weakening the momentum of the ball paid out from the prize ball passage 810 of the prize ball unit 800. The prize ball won will not jump out of the plate unit 300. Further, in the full tank unit 900 according to the present embodiment, the foul ball passage 922 that guides the foul ball weakens the momentum of the ball and joins in the middle of the front guidance passage 920 that pays out the prize ball. The foul balls can be merged without obstructing the flow of the balls.

[1-4. Locking device]
Next, the lock device 1000 mounted in the vertical direction along the back side end side of the main body frame 3 on the open side will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 to 125. FIG. 117 is a rear perspective view showing the relationship between the lock device 1000 and the main body frame 3, and FIG. 118 is an enlarged side sectional view showing a structure for locking the lock device 1000 to the main body frame 3. FIG. 119. Is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 1 cut in the horizontal direction at a position slightly below the center in the vertical direction, and FIG. 120 shows a detailed relationship between the lock device 1000 and the side walls 540 and 541 of the main body frame 3. It is an enlarged sectional view, FIG. 121 is a side view (A) of the lock device 1000, and a perspective view (B) seen from the front side, and FIG. 122 is a perspective view (A) seen from the back side of the lock device 1000. ), The perspective views (B) and (C) of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame slidably provided inside the U-shaped base 1001 of the lock device 1000, FIG. 123. Is an exploded perspective view of the lock device 1000, FIG. 124 is a front view for explaining the operations of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, and FIG. 125 is a fraud prevention member. It is a front view for demonstrating the operation of 1023, 1032.

The lock device 1000 is attached from substantially the upper end to the lower end of the main body frame 3 along the first side wall 540 on the open side of the main body frame 3, and as shown in FIG. 117, is attached to the outer peripheral side of the main body frame 3. A plurality of (three in the figure) locking holes 548 formed in the middle and near the upper and lower ends between the rising portion of the first side wall 540 and the upper part of the vertical surface of the first side wall 540. The lock mounting hole 547 formed by being cut out in the middle and the lock mounting hole 547 formed near the upper part of the cylinder lock through hole 526 support the U-shaped base 1001 of the locking device 1000 described below. It is fixed. Therefore, the structure of the lock device 1000 will be described in detail below.

As shown in FIGS. 121 to 123, the locking device 1000 is for a U-shaped base 1001 as a lock base formed in a U-shaped cross section and a door frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001. The sliding rod 1040, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame slidably provided in the U-shaped base 1001, and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are U-shaped so as not to be illegally slid. It is composed of fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the lower part of the substrate 1001.

The U-shaped substrate 1001 is formed by bending a metal so as to have a U-shaped cross section and slidably providing a sliding rod 1040 for a door frame and a sliding rod 1050 for a main body frame inside the metal. The width dimension is extremely thin as compared with the conventional locking device that is integrated on a substrate formed into an L-shaped cross section. This is because, as described above, the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is extremely large, and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is increased, so that the side wall 540 and the main body frame 3 Since the dimension between the outer periphery and the outer periphery is extremely small, the width dimension of the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment can be made small so that the lock device 1000 can be mounted on the back side of the main body frame 3. This is because it was improved as. Then, since the U-shaped open side of the U-shaped base 1001 is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, it is used for the door frame provided inside. The sliding rod 1040 and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame have a fraud prevention structure in which the U-shaped base 1001 is completely covered with the exception of the hook portions 1041, 1054 and 1065, respectively.

First, a rectangular hook penetration opening 1002 through which the hook portions 1054, 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is penetrated is opened above and below the closed side opposite to the open side of the U-shaped substrate 1001, and at the closed side. Side surface 1001b (see FIG. 123) that is in close contact with the first side wall 540. A screw fixing portion 1003 is projected in the upper and middle directions in the horizontal direction, and the side surface 1001a that is not in close contact with the first side wall 540 on the open side. Locking protrusions 1004 are formed so as to project from the upper end portion and the intermediate portion (see FIG. 123) and the lower end portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b on the open side.

The screw fixing portion 1003 and the locking protrusion 1004 are for attaching the locking device 1000 to the back surface of the main body frame 3, and the locking protrusion 1004 is inserted into the lock locking hole 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward. (Refer to FIG. 118) Since the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547 match in that state, the lock device 1000 is firmly attached to the main body frame 3 by screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole. Can be fixed. The lock device 1000 is attached by screws not only in the upper and middle screw fixing portions 1003, but also in the upper vicinity of the screw fixing portion 1003 formed in the lock attachment piece 1008 described later and the cylinder lock through hole 526. The lower part of the lock device 1000 can also be attached by fastening the lock attachment hole 547 with a screw (not shown).

Further, at the time of mounting the U-shaped substrate 1001, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle and lower parts of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped substrate 1001 are inserted into the lock locking holes 548 for positioning and locking, and the U-shaped base is U-shaped. The screw fixing portions 1003 formed at two locations on the closed side (rear portion) of the base 1001 and the screw fixing portions 1003 formed on the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are provided in the lock mounting holes 547. Since the structure is fixed with screws, the front part of the lock device 1000 is locked with the locking protrusion 1004 and the lock locking hole 548, and the rear part of the locking device 1000 is fixed with the screw fixing part 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547. Moreover, since the lower portion of the lock device 1000 is fixed by the screw fixing portion 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3 with an extremely simple structure.

In other words, even when the lock device 1000 is integrated on the U-shaped substrate 1001 having an extremely thin width dimension, the lock device 1000 can be mounted on the main body frame 3 by locking and fixing the front portion and the rear portion of the lock device 1000. It can be firmly fixed to the lock. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure (which may be a fixed structure) at the front portion is formed so as to project from the side surface 1001a which does not come into close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped substrate 1001. On the other hand, the screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 constituting the fixed structure of the rear portion are formed so as to project horizontally from the side surface 1001b which is in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped substrate 1001. Therefore, the locking device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to cause rattling, as compared with the case where the locking structure of the front portion is formed on the side surface 1001b which is in close contact with the first side surface wall 540. is there.

Further, insertion holes 1005 are formed in the upper, middle, and lower portions of both side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is provided with the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame. By inserting the rivet 1006 into the insertion hole 1005 and crimping it in the stored state, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame can be slidably attached to the inside of the U-shaped base 1001. it can. That is, one each is formed in the rivet slot 1042 formed at the upper, middle and lower parts of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050. By penetrating the rivet 1006 through the elongated rivet holes 1055 and 1061, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame can be moved upward, and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame can be moved downward. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 122 (B), the rivet 1006 penetrates through the lower end of the rivet slot 1055, 1061 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, and as shown in FIG. 122 (C), for the door frame. The rivet 1006 penetrates through the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 of the sliding rod 1040.

Further, in the lower portion of the U-shaped substrate 1001, an fraud prevention notch 1007 is formed on the closed side surface thereof, and on the front end portion of the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side surface wall 540 of the main body frame 3 on the open side thereof. A lock mounting piece 1008 for mounting the cylinder lock 1010 is projected sideways, and an insertion vertical opening 1020, a spring locking piece 1021, and an escape horizontal hole 1022 are further provided on the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540. Each is formed. The fraud prevention notch 1007 is such that the stopper piece 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023, which will be described later, moves forward and backward. This point will be described in detail later. Further, the lock attachment piece 1008 has the lock device 1000 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3, and the front end of the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001 so as to be located below the lower end side of the game board installation recess 510. The lock mounting piece 1008 is provided with a lock insertion hole 1009 through which the cylinder lock 1010 penetrates, and a mounting hole formed in the lock mounting board 1011 of the cylinder lock 1010. Mounting holes 1014 for mounting the 1013 with the screws 1012 are bored at two upper and lower positions, and further, screw fixing portions 1003 for mounting the lower portion of the locking device 1000 on the back surface of the main body frame 3 are bored.

Further, the insertion vertical opening 1020 is an opening for the first engaging projecting piece 1017 and the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 fixed to the cylinder lock 1010 to enter when the cylinder lock 1010 rotates. The spring locking piece 1021 is for locking the spring 1035 provided on the fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032, and the escape horizontal hole 1022 constitutes an escape hole so as not to interfere with the movement of the connecting pin 1034. Is. This point will be described in detail later.

The cylinder lock 1010 attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 described above will be described. In the cylinder lock 1010, a cylindrical cylinder lock body is fixed in front of the lock attachment substrate 1011 and the lock shaft 1015 of the cylinder lock body is a lock attachment substrate. The engagement cam 1016 is fixed to the rear end of the lock shaft 1015 by a screw 1019, which protrudes from the rear surface of 1011. The engagement cam 1016 is formed in a boomeran shape, and one end of the engagement cam 1016 is a first engagement projecting piece 1017 that engages with the lower engagement hole 1062 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame when rotating, and the other end. The side is a second engaging projecting piece 1018 that engages with the rising engaging hole 1045 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 when rotating. Then, in the cylinder lock 1010 configured as described above, the cylindrical cylinder lock main body portion is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009, and the mounting holes 1013 and the lock mounting piece 1008 are formed at two locations above and below the lock mounting board 1011. The cylinder lock 1010 can be fixed to the U-shaped base 1001 by aligning the mounting holes 1014 with the mounting holes 1014 and screwing them with screws 1012.

Next, the fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 attached to the U-shaped substrate 1001 will be described with reference to FIG. 123. The fraud prevention members 1023 and 1032 are for preventing the cylinder lock 1010 from being illegally lowered by a piano wire, a wire, or the like without rotating the cylinder lock 1010 with a formal key. .. Thus, the fraud prevention member 1023, 1032 has a structure in which the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034. The first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed in a vertically long plate shape that is swingably configured around the swing shaft hole 1025 at the upper end, and the swing shaft hole 1025 is formed inside the U-shaped base 1001 described above. Of the insertion holes 1005 and rivets 1006 for slidably attaching the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050, the lowermost insertion holes 1005 and rivets 1006 are used for attachment.

Further, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is provided with a vertically long protrusion insertion hole 1026 that overlaps with the insertion vertical opening 1020 on the plate-like surface, and the second engagement protrusion 1018 is inserted into the protrusion insertion hole 1026. It has become possible. That is, when the second engaging protrusion 1018 penetrates the protruding piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020, the rising engaging hole 1045 of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame provided inside the U-shaped base 1001. It is designed to engage with the second engaging projectile piece 1018. Further, the outer line diagonally above the opening position of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 is the inclined portion 1024. The inclined portion 1024 abuts on the rear surface side of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, and when the engaging cam 1016 rotates, the first engaging projecting piece 1017 and the inclined portion 1024 The first fraud prevention member 1023 swings around the swing shaft hole 1025 (in the clockwise rotation direction in FIG. 125 (B)).

Further, in the first fraud prevention member 1023, a stopper piece 1027 is projected on the outer line diagonally downward of the projecting piece insertion hole 1026, and a regulating projecting piece 1031 is projected below the stopper piece 1027 to regulate. A pin hole 1029 and a connecting hole 1030 are vertically formed in the front portion of the projecting piece 1031. When the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is locked, the stopper piece 1027 invades and engages with the fraud prevention notch 1007 and the engaging notch 1066 of the main body frame sliding rod 1050, and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 is illegal. It is intended to prevent sliding on. Further, in the regulation projecting piece 1031, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a spring 1035, and when they are connected by the spring 1035, the urging direction of the second fraud prevention member 1032. It regulates the movement to. The guide pin 1028 is fixed to the pin hole 1029, and the guide pin 1028 is inserted into the pin hole 1029 from the back surface side of the first fraud prevention member 1023 in a state where the guide pin 1028 is fixed to the vertical opening 1020. By engaging with the horizontally long opening formed at the lowermost end portion, the first fraud prevention member 1023 is guided along the side surface 1001b of the U-shaped substrate 1001. Further, the connecting hole 1030 is for connecting the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 with the connecting pin 1034.

The second fraud prevention member 1032 connected to the first fraud prevention member 1023 is formed of an inverted "" -shaped plate material, a connecting hole 1033 is formed at one upper end thereof, and a spring engagement is provided at the other end of the upper end. A stop hole 1036 is bored, and a contact portion 1037 is provided at the lower end portion. The connecting hole 1033 is for aligning with the connecting hole 1030 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and connecting with the connecting pin 1034, and the spring locking hole 1036 is a spring locking piece of the U-shaped base 1001 at one end. It locks the other end of the spring 1035 that is locked to 1021. Further, the contact portion 1037 comes into contact with the closing protrusion 41 fixed to the inner lower portion of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 3 is closed. The actions of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 described above will be described in detail later.

Next, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 that are slidably provided inside the U-shaped substrate 1001 will be described. First, the door frame sliding rod 1040 is composed of a vertically long metal plate-shaped member, and the door frame hook portions 1041 are integrally formed at three locations on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the vertical side thereof toward the front. It is projected. The door frame hook portion 1041 protrudes forward from the open side when the door frame hook portion 1041 is stored in the U-shaped base 1001, and when the lock device 1000 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, the main body frame It protrudes forward from the door hook hole 549 (see FIGS. 67 and 68) formed in No. 3 and locks to the hook cover 158 (see FIG. 18) formed on the back surface of the door frame 5. Since the door frame hook portion 1041 has a downward engaging claw shape, the door frame hook portion 1041 and the hook cover 158 are locked by raising the door frame sliding rod 1040. It can be released.

Further, a vertically long rivet slot 1042 through which the rivet 1006 is inserted is formed in the center of the upper, middle and lower side surfaces of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and the uppermost rivet slot of the rivet slot 1042 is formed. A guide protrusion 1043 is projected below the 1042 and at the lowermost end of the door frame sliding rivet 1040. The elongated hole 1042 for the rivet allows the rivet 1006 to be inserted into the insertion hole 1005 of the U-shaped base 1001 to pass through, and the rivet 1006 does not interfere with the ascending operation of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame. It is formed vertically long. Then, in the normal state, the rivet 1006 is in contact with the upper end of the rivet slot 1042 through. Further, the guide protrusion 1043 is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 formed in the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame. And the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are guided to each other's sliding operation.

Further, a spring hook portion 1046 is formed at the upper end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040, one end of the spring 1048 is locked to the spring hook portion 1046, and the other end of the spring 1048 is the main body frame sliding rod 1050. It is locked to the spring hook portion 1057 formed on the upper hook member 1051. As a result, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is urged downward and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is urged to each other in the upward direction. A contact elastic piece 1047 is formed in a convex shape in the middle of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame. The contact elastic piece 1047 is formed in a convex shape by being punched out from one side surface of the door frame sliding rod 1040 by a press, and is in contact with the inner side surface of the U-shaped substrate 1001 for the door frame inside. This is to prevent the sliding rod 1040 from rattling.

Further, a vertically long play hole 1044 and a rising engagement hole 1045 are formed on the side surface of the lower portion of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame. In the play hole 1044, when the first engaging projecting piece 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the tip of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 moves so as not to interfere with the rotation operation. It constitutes a space that can be enjoyed. Further, the ascending engaging hole 1045 is engaged so that when the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is raised by the rotating operation. It is for doing. A relief notch 1049, which is a notch larger in the vertical direction than the fraud prevention notch 1007, is formed behind the lower portion of the vertical side of the door frame sliding rod 1040. The escape cutout portion 1049 is formed so as not to interfere with the stopper piece portion 1027 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 in order to reliably engage the fraud prevention cutout portion 1007 and the engagement cutout portion 1066.

On the other hand, the main body frame sliding rod 1050 includes a metal plate upper hook member 1051, a metal plate lower hook member 1052, and a connecting wire rod 1052 that connects the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052. It is composed of. That is, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is not composed of one vertically elongated plate made of metal as in the conventional case, but the upper hook member 1051 having the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the lower hook member 1052 are made of metal. A plate material made of metal is formed by a press, and the metal upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 are connected by a thin metal connecting wire rod 1053. Therefore, the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 can be efficiently stored in the narrow space of the U-shaped substrate 1001.

By the way, the upper hook member 1051 has a hook portion 1054 projecting rearward from the upper end portion thereof, and a rivet elongated hole 1055 and a projecting piece moving hole 1056 are formed on the plate surface portion thereof, and the front hook portion 1051 is formed. A spring hook portion 1057 and a connecting hole 1058 are formed at the lower end of the vertical side, and a contact portion 1059 is formed on the upper side and the lower side thereof. The hook portion 1054 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 above the U-shaped substrate 1001 and engages with the closing protrusion 38 provided on the inner upper portion of the outer frame 2 on the open side, and the locking claw portion upwards. It is formed.

The rivet slot 1055 corresponds to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the upper part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and in a normal state where the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet slot 1055. , The rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the elongated hole 1055 for rivet. As a result, the upper hook member 1051 can move downward. As described above, the projecting piece moving hole 1056 is inserted with the guide projecting piece 1043 above the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame move each other. It is designed to guide you. As described above, the spring hook portion 1057 is engaged with the other end of the spring 1048. Further, the connecting hole 1058 is inserted by bending the upper end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, when the contact portion 1059 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, it comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 so that the sliding operation of the upper hook member 1051 can be smoothly performed without rattling. It is for making.

On the other hand, the lower hook member 1052 is provided with a hook portion 1065 projecting rearward from the lower end portion thereof, and the elongated hole 1061 for rivets, the descending engagement hole 1062, and the play hole 1063 project from above the plate surface portion. One-sided moving holes 1064 are sequentially formed, and a connecting hole 1060 is formed at the upper end of the vertical side in front of the hole, and an engaging notch 1066 is formed at the lower part of the vertical side behind the connecting hole 1060. A contact portion 1067 is formed. The hook portion 1065 penetrates the hook penetration opening 1002 below the U-shaped substrate 1001 and engages with the closing protrusion 41 provided at the lower part inside the open side of the outer frame 2, and the locking claw portion upwards. It is formed. The rivet slot 1061 corresponds to the rivet slot 1042 formed in the lower part of the door frame sliding rod 1040, and in a normal state in which the rivet 1006 is penetrated through the rivet slot 1061. The rivet 1006 is in a state of penetrating the lowermost end portion of the rivet slot 1061.

As a result, the lower hook member 1052 can move downward. The lower engaging hole 1062 is engaged so that when the first engaging projecting piece 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is lowered by the rotating operation. belongs to. Further, in the play hole 1063, when the second engaging project piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted and rotated, the tip portion of the second engaging project piece 1018 is provided so as not to interfere with the rotation operation. It constitutes a space that can be moved. As described above, the projecting piece moving hole 1064 is inserted with the guide projecting piece 1043 below the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame, and the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are mutually moved. It is designed to guide you. Further, the connecting hole 1060 is inserted by bending the lower end of the connecting wire rod 1053. Further, when the contact portion 1067 is housed in the U-shaped base 1001, it comes into contact with the inner side wall of the U-shaped base 1001 so that the sliding operation of the lower hook member 1052 can be smoothly performed without rattling. It is for.

Although each member constituting the lock device 1000 has been described above, in order to assemble the lock device 1000, the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are connected by the connecting wire rod 1053. Then, in that state, the guide projecting piece 1043 of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame is inserted into the projecting piece moving holes 1056 and 1064 of the upper hook member 1051 and the lower hook member 1052, and the mutual rivet slot 1042 and the rivet length are inserted. The holes 1055 and 1061 are aligned and overlapped, and in the overlapped state, the hook portion 1054 of the upper hook member 1051 and the hook portion 1065 of the lower hook member 1052 are passed through the hook penetration opening 1002 of the U-shaped base 1001. While inserting the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame into the U-shaped space of the U-shaped base 1001. After that, the rivet 1006 is inserted through the insertion hole 1005.

At this time, the rivet 1006 is inserted so as to penetrate the rivet elongated holes 1055, 1061 and 1042. However, when the lowermost rivet 1006 is inserted, it is necessary to insert the rivet 1006 into the swing shaft hole 1025 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and simultaneously attach the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001. Before attaching the first fraud prevention member 1023 to the U-shaped base 1001, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 are connected by a connecting pin 1034, and the guide pin 1028 is shown in the pin hole 1029. It is necessary to fix the guide pin 1028 with a screw that does not, and further insert the guide pin 1028 into the lowermost opening of the insertion vertical opening 1020.

Further, with the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame stored and fixed in the U-shaped base 1001 by the rivet 1006, the spring 1048 is hung between the spring hook portions 1046 and 1057, and the door is opened. The frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame sliding rod 1050 are urged in opposite directions, and the spring 1035 is hung on the spring locking pieces (holes) 1021, 1036 to prevent the second fraud prevention member 1032. Is in contact with the regulation projecting piece 1031. After that, the cylindrical main body portion of the cylinder lock 1010 is inserted into the lock insertion hole 1009 of the lock mounting piece 1008, and the cylinder lock 1010 is fixed to the mounting hole 1014 with a screw 1012. At this time, the tip of the first engaging protrusion 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 is slightly inserted outside the inclined portion 1024 and into the insertion vertical opening 1020, and the second engaging protrusion 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 is inserted. The cylinder lock 1010 is attached to the lock attachment piece 1008 so that the tip portion is slightly inserted into the projecting piece insertion hole 1026 and the insertion vertical opening 1020 of the first fraud prevention member 1023.

In order to attach the lock device 1000 assembled as described above to the back surface of the main body frame 3, as described above, the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 is formed on the main body frame 3. While inserting into the hook hole 549, the locking protrusion 1004 protruding in a hook shape is inserted into the lock locking hole 548 of the main body frame 3 and moved upward, and in that state, the screw fixing portion 1003 protruding in the horizontal direction and the screw fixing By aligning the portion 1003 with the lock mounting hole 547 and screwing a screw (not shown) into the matched hole, the lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3 as shown in FIG. 117. .. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the locking projection 1004 constituting the locking structure of the front portion is formed so as to project from the side surface 1001a which is not in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped substrate 1001, while the rear portion. Since the screw fixing portion 1003 and the screw fixing portion 1003 forming the fixing structure of the above are formed so as to project horizontally from the side surface 1001b in close contact with the first side wall 540 of the U-shaped substrate 1001, the front portion is engaged. Compared with the case where the stop structure is formed on the side surface 1001b that is in close contact with the first side surface wall 540, the lock device 1000 can be fixed to the main body frame 3 so as not to cause rattling.

By the way, the operation of the lock device 1000 attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 and 125. First, the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 3 and the opening / closing operation of the door frame 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 124. In a state where the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 124 (A), the closing protrusions 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 The hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are locked, and the hook portion 1041 for the door frame of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the hook cover 158 of the door frame 5 are locked. There is. In this state, when a key (not shown in the drawing) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the first engaging projection piece 1017 of the engaging cam 1016 rotates in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. 124 (B). , The tip of the first engaging projectile piece 1017 engages with the descending engagement hole 1062 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame, and pushes the lower hook member 1052 downward against the urging force of the spring 1048. The connecting wire rod 1053 and the upper hook member 1051 that are connected are also pushed down and lowered. For this reason, the locking states of the closing protrusions 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 and the hook portions 1054 and 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are released. 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

When the main body frame 3 is closed, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are in a raised state due to the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same raised position as shown in FIG. 124 (A)), but the hook portion 1054 Since the upper side of 1065 is inclined downward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the main body frame 3 against the outer frame 2, the upper side inclined portion of the hook portions 1050, 1065 is the closing protrusions 38, 41. Since it comes into contact with the lower end of the main body frame, the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame descends downward, and finally, the upward claws of the hooks 1054 and 1065 and the closing protrusions 38 and 41 are locked again. The sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame rises and returns to the locked state.

On the other hand, when a key (not shown) is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 and the second engaging projecting piece 1018 of the engaging cam 1016 rotates in the direction of entering the insertion vertical opening 1020, as shown in FIG. (Ii) The tip of the engaging projecting piece 1018 engages with the ascending engaging hole 1045 of the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame, and pushes up and ascending the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame against the urging force of the spring 1048. Therefore, the hook cover 158 of the door frame 5 and the door frame hook portion 1041 of the door frame sliding rod 1040 are released from the locked state. Therefore, the door frame 5 is pulled toward the front side by pulling the door frame 5 toward the front side. It can be opened to the main body frame 3.

When the door frame 5 is closed, the door frame hook portion 1041 is in a lowered state due to the urging force of the spring 1048 (the same lowered position as shown in FIG. 124 (A)), but the door frame is closed. Since the lower side of the hook portion 1041 for door frame is inclined upward toward the outside, by forcibly pressing the door frame 5 against the main body frame 3, the lower side inclined portion of the door frame hook portion 1041 is inclined to the hook cover 158. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame rises upward because it comes into contact with the upper end portion of the door frame, and finally, the downward claw portion of the hook portion 1041 for the door frame and the hook cover 158 are locked again in the door frame. The sliding door 1040 is lowered to return to the locked state. The door frame sliding rod 1040 in the present embodiment is formed to have substantially the same length as the total length of the U-shaped base 1001, and the U-shaped base 1001 is substantially the same as the vertical side surface of the main body frame 3. The door frame hook portion 1041 which is attached over the entire length and is a locking portion with the door frame 5 is formed at three positions of the upper end portion, the central portion, and the lower end portion of the door frame sliding rod 1040. Therefore, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are securely locked in the entire length in the vertical direction, and the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are forcibly opened and a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire is inserted between them. There is also the advantage that it cannot be done.

As described above, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment unlocks the main body frame 3 with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating the key inserted in the cylinder lock 1010 in one direction, and rotates in the other direction. By doing so, the lock of the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3 can be released. In this case, a piano wire or the like may be hooked on the hook portions 1054, 1065 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame to lower the piano wire without inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1010. Is prevented from committing such cheating. The first structure for preventing such fraud is a lock mechanism composed of a first fraud prevention member 1023 and a second fraud prevention member 1032, and the second fraud prevention structure is a U-shaped substrate 1001. The structure is such that the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are housed in the closed space of the above.

First, the operation of the lock mechanism, which is the first fraud prevention structure, will be described with reference to FIG. 125. First, in a state where the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 3 are closed, as shown in FIG. 125 (A), the closing projection 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 are in contact with each other. It is in a state of contact. In this state, the first fraud prevention member 1023 rotates counterclockwise due to the urging force of the spring 1035, the stopper piece 1027 penetrates into the fraud prevention notch 1007, and the stopper piece 1027 is the fraud prevention notch. It is in a state of being engaged with the engagement notch 1066 formed in the lower hook member 1052 of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame at the position corresponding to 1007. Therefore, even if a piano wire or the like is hooked on the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame and an attempt is made to pull it down, the stopper piece 1027 and the engaging notch 1066 are engaged, so that the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is used. It becomes impossible to illegally pull it down (unlock), and it is not possible to perform an illegal act of opening the main body frame 3.

On the other hand, when the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 1010 to normally unlock the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 125 (B), the first engagement protrusion of the engagement cam 1016 is performed by rotating the key. The piece 1017 is rotated so as to enter the insertion vertical opening 1020. When the first engagement protrusion 1017 rotates, the inclined portion 1024 of the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the side surface of the first engagement protrusion 1017 come into contact with each other, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 has a swing shaft hole. The rotation starts in the clockwise direction shown in the figure around 1025, and the stopper piece 1027 also moves so as to retract from the fraud prevention notch 1007. Therefore, the engagement between the stopper piece portion 1027 and the engagement notch portion 1066 is released. At this time, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in a position where the spring 1035 is extended and the contact portion 1037 is retracted. In this state, when the engaging cam 1016 is further rotated to rotate the first engaging projecting piece 1017, the tip of the first engaging projecting piece 1017 engages with the descending engaging hole 1062 of the lower hook member 1052. Since the entire sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame is lowered, the locked state between the hook portions 1054 and 1065 and the closing protrusions 38 and 41 of the outer frame 2 is released, and the main body frame 3 is moved with respect to the outer frame 2. It can be opened.

When the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the second fraud prevention member 1032 is in contact with the regulation projecting piece 1031, so that the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1023 are in contact with each other. The positional relationship with 1032 is substantially the same as the state shown in FIG. 125 (A). When the main body frame 3 is closed in this state, the closing protrusion 41 of the outer frame 2 and the contact portion 1037 of the second fraud prevention member 1032 come into contact with each other from the front, and finally the state shown in FIG. 125 (A) is obtained. .. Therefore, the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 do not get in the way when the main body frame 3 is closed. Further, in the present embodiment, the main body prevents the first fraud prevention member 1023 and the second fraud prevention member 1032 from illegally lowering only the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame. If the frame sliding rod 1050 is opened illegally, the door frame sliding rod 1040 can be easily opened manually after the release, and it is practically difficult to perform fraudulent acts of raising the sliding rod with a piano wire or the like. For this reason, it is devised so that unauthorized operation of the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame cannot be performed.

Further, even with the lock mechanism having the first fraud prevention structure described above, it is not possible to disable the function of the lock mechanism by swinging the first fraud prevention member 1023 with a piano wire or the like. Absent. Therefore, assuming that the lock function of the lock mechanism is disabled by an illegal act, in the present embodiment, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, it is used for the door frame provided inside. Since the sliding rod 1040 and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are housed in the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1054 and 1065, respectively, and are completely covered. Even if a piano wire or the like is inserted to pull down the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame provided inside the closed space of the U-shaped base 1001, the closed space of the illegal tool is provided by the side surfaces 1001a and 1001b of the U-shaped base 1001. The structure is such that fraudulent activities cannot be easily carried out because the invasion of the building is prevented.

As described in detail above, the lock device 1000 according to the present embodiment is used for the door frame inside the U-shaped base 1001 whose width dimension is extremely thin as compared with the lock device in which the width dimension is concentrated on the conventional L-shaped base. The sliding rod 1040 and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are slidably provided, and the mounting position of the cylinder lock 1010 for operating the lock device 1000 on the U-shaped base 1001 is lower than the lower end side of the game board. Therefore, even if the size of the game board 4 in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is made extremely large and the space surrounded by the side walls 540 to 543 of the main body frame 3 is made large, the lock device 1000 can be mounted on the main body frame. It can be firmly attached to the back side of 3. Since the open side having a U-shaped cross section is attached so as to face the back surface of the main body frame 3, when the lock device 1000 is attached to the main body frame 3, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the main body provided inside are attached. Since the frame sliding door 1050 is completely covered with the U-shaped base 1001 except for the hook portions 1041, 1050, and 1065, respectively, the main body provided inside by inserting a piano wire or the like. It is not possible to easily perform fraudulent acts such as pulling down the frame sliding door 1050.

Further, when the lock device 1000 is attached, the locking projections 1004 formed at the upper, middle and lower parts of the open side (front portion) of the U-shaped base 1001 are inserted into the lock locking holes 548 for positioning and locking. The lock device 1000 has a structure in which the screw fixing portions 1003 and the screw fixing portions 1003 formed at the upper, middle, and lower parts of the U-shaped base 1001 on the closed side (rear portion) are fixed to the lock mounting holes 547 with screws. The front part of the lock device 1000 is locked with the locking protrusion 1004 and the lock locking hole 548, and the rear part of the locking device 1000 is fixed with the screw fixing part 1003 and the screw fixing part 1003 and the lock mounting hole 547, so that the structure is extremely simple. The lock device 1000 can be firmly fixed to the main body frame 3.

In the above embodiment, the screw fastening portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 and the screw fastening portion 1003 formed on the lock mounting piece 1008 and the cylinder lock through hole 526 of the main body frame 3 are formed in the vicinity of the upper portion as a structure for screwing the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001. The structure is such that the lock mounting hole 547 is screwed together, but instead of this, the tip of the screw 1012 penetrates the lock mounting piece 1008 by using the screw 1012 that attaches the cylinder lock 1010 to the lock mounting piece 1008. The structure may be such that the lock mounting holes to be screwed are formed above and below the cylinder lock through hole 526. Further, even if the lower portion of the U-shaped base 1001 is not screwed, the lock device 1000 can be attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3 simply by fixing the screwed portion 1003 at the rear portion of the lock device 1000 and the lock mounting hole 547. We have confirmed that it is firmly fixed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are completely covered with the U-shaped substrate 1001 having the left and right side surfaces 1001a and 1001b. The sliding rod 1040 for the door frame and the sliding rod 1050 for the main body frame are slidably attached to the side surface 1001a on the opposite side that does not adhere to the first side wall 540 with a rivet or the like, and the side surface 1001b that adheres to the first side wall 540. For the door frame sliding rod 1040 and the main body frame in the closed space formed by the side surface 1001a and the first side surface wall 540 of the L-shaped substrate (lock substrate). A structure for accommodating the sliding door 1050 may be used. Even in this case, the mounting structure and fraud prevention structure similar to those in the embodiment can be used.

[1-5. Board unit]
Next, the substrate unit 1100 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 126 to 134. FIG. 126 is a perspective view of the substrate unit viewed from the back side, FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit viewed from the rear side, and FIG. 128 is a perspective view of the substrate unit viewed from the front side. 129 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front side of the board unit, FIG. 130 is a front view seen from the front side of the frame board holder which is the main body of the board unit, and FIG. 131 is a frame. FIG. 132 is a rear view of the board unit, FIG. 133 is a rear view of the board unit with the payout control board box and the terminal board box removed, and FIG. 134 is a rear view of the board unit. It is a top view which shows the connection relationship of each board provided in a board unit, FIG. 135 is a schematic view which shows the electrical connection between a board unit and a game board, and FIG. 136 is a payout control board and a board unit. It is a part of the rear view of the pachinko machine showing the wiring and the like, and FIG. 137 is a game board for explaining a cross-sectional portion of the cross-sectional view of FIG. 138 (however, this game board is shown in FIGS. 76 to 80. It is a front view of a game board incorporating a removal prevention mechanism), and FIG. 138 is a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 137.

The substrate unit 1100 is attached to a plurality of holder mounting holes 527 (see FIGS. 68 and 70) formed in the lower portion of the back surface of the main body frame 3, and is synthesized as shown in FIGS. 126 and 127. Various boards of the door relay board 1102, the power supply board box 1103, the terminal board box 1104, the payout control board box 1105, the main drawer relay board 1107, and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are attached to the resin-molded frame board holder 1101. It is composed of. Among the above-mentioned boards, the door relay board 1102, the power supply board box 1103, the terminal board box 1104, and the payout control board box 1105 are overlapped on the rear surface side of the frame board holder 1101 in the front-rear direction and relay the main drawer. The substrate 1107 and the sub drawer relay substrate 1108 are attached to the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. As will be described later, since the power supply board 1136 creates and supplies + 34V, + 18V, and + 9V, it is an extremely high temperature heat source, and the heat generated from the power supply board 1136 rises. Therefore, by mounting the payout control board box 1105 for accommodating the payout control board 1186 on the upper surface of the power supply board box 1103 in an overlapping manner, it is possible to avoid receiving the rising heat. A metal shield heat dissipation plate 1106 is attached to the back surface of the payout control board box 1105 in order to prevent the influence of electromagnetic waves from the power supply board 1136 and the like and to dissipate heat generated from the power supply board 1136. The main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are covered and attached to the board cover 1109. Hereinafter, each member constituting the substrate unit 1100 will be described in detail.

The shield heat radiating plate 1106 in the present embodiment particularly dissipates heat generated from the upper surface of the power supply board box 1103 to the outside (outside air) as shown in FIGS. 127 and 129. The plate surface of the plate 1106 is formed as an uneven surface 1106a. The heat transferred to the payout control board 1186 by the shield heat radiating plate 1106 can be suppressed to a small value. The uneven surface 1106a increases the contact area with the outside (outside air) to enhance the heat dissipation effect. Further, it is desirable that the uneven surface 1106a is formed in a vertical shape or an inclined shape so that heat can be easily dissipated when installed. Of course, even if the uneven surface 1106a is formed on the shield heat radiating plate 1106, the shielding effect against electromagnetic waves is not impaired. The shield heat radiating plate 1106 prevents the influence of electromagnetic waves from the power supply board 1136 and the like. As a result, the influence of noise due to electromagnetic waves can be suppressed, and therefore, malfunction of the payout control board 1186 housed in the payout control board box 1105 due to the influence of noise can be prevented. Further, the shield heat dissipation function of the shield heat dissipation plate 1106 is provided not only between the power supply board box 1103 and the payout control board box 1105, but also when a plurality of other board boxes are overlapped with the frame board holder 1101. Is also achieved by providing the same shield heat radiating plate 1106 as in the present embodiment between the substrate box located below the substrate box and the substrate box located above the substrate box.

First, the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed in a horizontally long shape with a synthetic resin, and as shown in FIGS. 127 and 130, a wiring opening 1124 is formed on one side portion on the rear surface side (right portion in FIG. 130). A relay board portion 1110 for mounting the door relay board 1102 is formed inside the wiring opening 1124. The relay board recess 1110 is formed as a square recess so as to match the outer shape of the substantially square door relay board 1102, and the back surface of the door relay board 1102 is formed on the upper and lower sides of the relay board recess 1110. A contact protrusion 1113 for supporting the door relay board 1113 is projected, and a stop claw 1111 for locking with the surface of one vertical side of the door relay board 1102 is formed in a state where the door relay board 1102 is housed in the recess 1111 for the relay board. ing. Further, above and below the relay board recess 1110 near the outside, mounting bosses 1112 for engaging with the engaging locking holes 1135 formed on one end side of the power supply board box 1103 and fastening with screws (not shown) are provided. It is projected.

Further, on the rear surface side of the frame board holder 1101, two wiring processing pieces 1114 are formed for locking and gathering the wiring passing through the inside closer to the center than the above-mentioned relay board recess 1110. The wiring processing piece 1114 is formed so as to project in an L shape when viewed from the side with respect to the vertical surface, and the wiring is hooked between the vertical surface and the L-shaped projecting piece. ing. Further, the area from the upper portion of the relay board recess 1110 of the frame board holder 1101 to the portion slightly closer to the other end side than the center serves as an area for mounting the power supply board box 1103 (the lower area on the right side described below). A contact protrusion 1115 that comes into contact with the back surface of the power supply board box 1103 is provided on the upper and lower sides thereof. Therefore, when the power supply board box 1103 is mounted in the power supply board box mounting area so as to abut against the contact protrusion 1115, there is a space between the back surface of the power supply board box 1103 and the vertical surface of the frame board holder 1101. Wiring that is formed and connects the substrates to each other is stored in this space, and the two wiring processing pieces 1114 lock and organize the stored wiring.

A large amount of protrusion to the rear is formed from the other end side of the region where the power supply board box 1103 is mounted to the other end side (left side in FIG. 130) of the frame board holder 1101. That is, the frame board holder 1101 is formed in a stepped shape in which the left side is high and the right side is low at a position slightly to the left of the center when viewed from the back, and the low area on the right side is for mounting the power supply board box 1103. (Hereinafter, it may be referred to as "power supply board box mounting area"). An insertion port 1115a into which the insertion protrusions 1134 projecting above and below the other end side of the power supply board box 1103 are inserted is formed on the other end side of the power supply board box mounting region. Therefore, in order to mount the power supply board box 1103, after inserting the insertion protrusion 1134 into the insertion port 1115a, the engagement locking holes 1135 formed above and below one end side of the power supply board box 1103 are provided on the mounting boss 1112 from above. The power supply board box 1103 can be fixed to the frame board holder 1101 by inserting and fixing with a screw (not shown).

Further, on the back side of the frame board holder 1101, the above-mentioned high stepped area is one of the areas for mounting the payout control board box 1105 (hereinafter, may be referred to as “payout control board box mounting area”). A portion is formed of a portion, and a horizontal L-shaped concave wiring routing space 1116 is formed in a part of the high stepped region. A wiring opening 1121 (see FIGS. 129 to 132) is formed on the bottom surface of the wiring routing space 1116, and the wiring is hooked on the two wiring processing pieces 1114 in the power supply board box mounting area. It is pulled out from the wiring routing space 1116 and the wiring opening 1121 to the front side of the frame board holder 1101. Further, on the other end side (left end side in FIG. 127) of the payout control board box mounting area, a locking protrusion 1117 for engaging the engaging elastic piece 1184 of the payout control board box 1105 is formed so as to project. ing.

Next, the configuration of the front side of the frame board holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 128, 129, and 131, the out-ball passage 1119 is inverted at substantially the center of the front side of the frame board holder 1101. It is formed in an L shape. The out ball passage 1119 is upward so as to correspond to the above-mentioned out port 606 (see FIG. 78), the downstream side of the ball ejection discharge passage 524 (see FIG. 68), and the drop port 629 (see FIG. 75). Is widely formed, and the downstream side is narrowly formed so as to discharge spheres in a row. Therefore, when the board unit 1100 is attached to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 71, the wide upstream portion of the out ball passage 1119 is located behind the passage support protrusion 513 that supports the lower surface of the out port 606. ing. Then, the out ball, the winning ball, or the ball pulling ball is discharged from the downstream end of the out ball passage 1119 toward the outside of the pachinko machine (generally, the recovery gutter of the island).

Further, on the front side of the frame board holder 1101 corresponding to the payout control board box mounting area, the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are arranged at predetermined intervals in the lateral direction in the upper area thereof. A drawer mounting area 1120 that is vacant and mounted in parallel is formed. In the drawer mounting area 1120, support holes 1204 and 1205 formed in the relay boards 1107 and 1108 are penetrated, and drawer mounting bosses 1118 for supporting the relay boards 1107 and 1108 are projected and respectively. Joining guide holes 1126 and guide holes 1125 are bored above and below the intermediate positions of the relay boards 1107 and 1108. As shown in FIG. 138, the joint guide holes 1126 include drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 (holder-side connectors) and a game board 4 provided on the board unit 1100 side as a result of the work of mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3. A joint guide protrusion 628 (see FIG. 78) formed on the board holder 623 of the game board 4 is inserted so that the drawer connectors 626 and 627 (game board side connectors) provided on the side are naturally connected. It is a thing. On the other hand, the guide hole 1125 is inserted with a guide protrusion 525 (see FIGS. 68 and 70) projecting from the main body frame 3 when the board unit 1100 is attached to the main body frame 3. The purpose is to perform positioning and facilitate the mounting work. Further, mounting pieces 1122 for mounting the board unit 1100 to the main body frame 3 are projected outward on both the left and right sides and the lower side of the frame board holder 1101, and the mounting pieces 1122 are mounted on the mounting holes 527 of the main body frame 3. The substrate unit 1100 is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 by fastening with a screw (not shown) corresponding to (see FIG. 68). As shown in FIG. 70, the mounting hole portion 527 is formed to have an outer peripheral wall that matches the outer shape of the mounting piece 1122. Further, a wiring hook piece 1123 for locking the wiring is formed so as to project from the outside of the side wall on the other end side (right side in FIG. 128) of the frame board holder 1101.

The configuration of the frame substrate holder 1101 is generally as described above, but the configurations of various substrates attached to the frame substrate holder 1101 having such a configuration will be described. First, the door relay board 1102 mounted on the relay board recess 1110 on the rear surface side of the frame board holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIG. 127, the door relay board 1102 has an internal connection terminal of a multi-pin connector type. A 1130 and a door frame connection terminal 1131 are provided. As shown in FIG. 132, the door frame connection terminal 1131 can be visually recognized from the outside even when all the boards are attached to the frame board holder 1101, and is provided on the door frame 5. Door frame wiring 1212 (see FIG. 134) such as an illuminated component or a speaker composed of lamps and LEDs is connected to the door frame connection terminal 1131 through a wiring opening 1124. Further, the internal connection terminal 1130 is connected to the door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay board 1108 by the internal wiring 1213 (see FIG. 134). However, the internal wiring 1213 is provided inside the frame board holder 1101 so that the above-mentioned wiring processing piece 1114, the wiring routing space 1116, and the wiring opening 1124 are laid.

Further, the power supply board box 1103 attached to the power supply board box mounting area on the rear surface side of the frame board holder 1101 is a cover body that covers the box main body 1132 for fixing the power supply board 1136 (see FIG. 133) and the box main body 1132. It is composed of 1133 and. The box main body 1132 is integrally formed with engaging locking holes 1135 that engage with the mounting boss 1112 at the top and bottom of one end thereof, and insertion protrusions 1134 inserted into the insertion port 1115a are integrally formed above and below the other end portion. Is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 133, the power switch 1137, the power line connector 1138, the CR unit power connector 1139, and the grounding portion of the power supply board 1136 not covered by the cover body 1133 (right side portion and lower left portion in FIG. 133) A connector 1140 and a power supply connector 1141 for a payout control board are provided. The power switch 1137 is a switch for supplying power to all the electric devices of the pachinko machine 1, and is turned on when the pachinko machine 1 is used. Further, the power supply line connector 1138 connects the power supply wiring from the AC 24V (AC24V) power supply wiring supplied to the island, and grounds the noise or the like charged in the pachinko machine 1 to the outside as a frame ground. It is a connector for. The CR unit power connector 1139 is a connector for supplying power to a card-type ball lending device (not shown; generally referred to as a CR unit) adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. Various ground wires for preventing static electricity provided in the pachinko machine 1 are electrically connected to the ground connector 1140, and noise and the like that have entered the pachinko machine 1 are grounded to the outside via the power line connector 1138. It is a connector for Specifically, a ground wire that removes noise and the like from the door frame 5 (reinforcing plates 211 to 214) is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140a as a frame ground, and noise from a ball flowing down the tank rail member 740. The ground wire for removing noise and the like is electrically connected to the grounding connector 1140b as the frame ground FG1, and the grounding wire for removing noise and the like from the prize ball unit 800 is electrically connected to the grounding connector 1140c as the frame ground FG1. , A ground wire that removes noise and the like from the CR unit is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140d as a frame ground. These frame grounds are electrically connected to the frame grounds of the power line connector 1138, and are grounded to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 via the frame grounds. Further, as shown in FIG. 134, the power supply wiring 1214 is connected to the power supply connector 1141 for the payout control board, and the power supply wiring 1214 is connected to the power supply terminal 1192 of the payout control board 1186. Then, the power supply wiring 1214 allows the liquid crystal control board 4500 housed in the peripheral board box 622 and the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 via the payout control board 1186. ) Etc. are supplied with power. The power supply wiring 1214 is guided from the power supply connector 1141 for the payout control board to the wiring routing space 1116, is pulled out rearward from the back surface of the payout control board box 1105, and is connected to the power supply terminal 1192. There is. That is, the power supply wiring 1214 is also laid inside the frame board holder 1101.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 127, the rear surface of the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 is formed in a stepped shape, and the region having a high step is a mounting area 1142 for mounting the terminal board box 1104. The low area is the mounting area 1143 for mounting the payout control board box 1105. The mounting area 1143 together with the above-mentioned payout control board box mounting area of the frame board holder 1101 constitutes a mounting area for mounting the horizontally long payout control board box 1105. An engagement hole 1146 in which the engagement piece 1182 (see FIG. 129) described later of the payout control board box 1105 is engaged and inserted is formed at substantially the center of the step portion.

The cover body 1133 constituting the mounting area 1142 for mounting the terminal board box 1104 has a positioning hole 1145 formed on the back surface side of the terminal board box 1104 and a positioning hole 1145 for positioning or engaging with the engaging piece 1147, respectively. And the mounting engagement hole 1144 is formed. The engaging piece portion 1147 is formed in an L-shaped cross section, while the mounting engaging hole 1144 is formed in a hole shape in which a wide portion and a narrow portion are continuous, so that the engaging piece portion 1147 is mounted. After inserting it into the wide part of the engaging hole 1144, it is slid in one direction (in the case of the figure, toward the center of the frame board holder 1101) to move the L-shaped engaging piece 1147 and the mounting engaging hole. It is adapted to engage with the narrow portion of 1144. A hook piece 1149 is projected from the lower portion of the other side of the terminal board box 1104, and when the terminal board box 1104 is slidably engaged with the cover body 1133, the hook piece 1149 is paid out. It is designed to engage with a part of the box main body 1180. It should be noted that this engagement is in an engaged state in which the terminal board box 1104 is easily disengaged by sliding and moving the terminal board box 1104 in the non-engaging direction with a slight force.

Further, as shown in FIG. 132, the terminal board box 1104 includes an external terminal board 1150a provided with a plurality of external information terminals 1151 and a payout control board terminal 1156, a frequency display terminal 1152, and a power supply ground terminal 1153. Two boards, a CR unit terminal board 1150b provided with a CR unit terminal 1154 and a payout control board terminal 1155, are housed in parallel in the vertical direction. The plurality of external information terminals 1151 provided on the external terminal plate 1150a provide various information signals necessary for managing the pachinko machine 1 such as a jackpot information output signal and a start port winning information output signal to the outside (for example, in a game hall). It is a connector for deriving to a certain management computer (hall computer)), and those information signals are mainly from the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 to the main drawer relay connector 1200 described in detail later. It is transmitted to the payout control board 1186 via the payout control board 1186, and is finally transmitted to each of the plurality of external information terminals 1151 by connecting the external terminal board terminal 1188 provided on the payout control board 1186 and the payout control board terminal 1156. To. The frequency display terminal 1152 of the CR unit terminal plate 1150b is connected to the wiring of the pachinko machine 1, for example, the remaining frequency display of the prepaid card provided in the plate unit 300, the ball rental switch, and the return switch. .. Further, the power supply ground terminal 1153 is composed of two connectors, one connector (left side in FIG. 132) is connected to the wiring from the CR unit power supply connector 1139 of the power supply board 1136, and the other connector is connected to the power supply board 1136. The wiring from the grounding connector 1140 of one of the plurality of grounding connectors 1140 is connected. Further, the CR unit terminal 1154 is connected to the wiring from the CR unit (not shown), and the CR unit terminal board terminal 1189 of the payout control board 1186 and the payout control board terminal 1155 are connected. , The payout control board 1186 and the CR unit will be connected.

As described above, the terminal board box 1104 connects the external terminal board 1150a that derives the game information from the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 to the outside, the payout control board 1186, and the CR unit. Both boards of the CR unit terminal board 1150b to be relayed are housed, and these are conventionally housed in separate board boxes and provided at different positions on the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, but this embodiment In the above, the terminal board box 1104 is put together and mounted on the frame board holder 1101. Therefore, in particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the main control board 4100 and the external terminal board 1150a are not directly connected by wiring, but have a unique configuration in which they are connected via the payout control board 1186.

Next, the payout control board box 1105 that can be mounted over the payout control board box mounting area of the frame board holder 1101 and the mounting area 1143 formed on the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 is mainly shown in FIGS. 127, 129 and FIGS. It will be described with reference to 132. The payout control board box 1105 includes a box main body 1180 in which a horizontally long rectangular payout control board 1186 is fixed by screws or the like (not shown), a cover body 1181 attached to the box main body 1180 and covering the surface of the payout control board 1186. It is composed of. The box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181 are engaged with each other on one side (the right side in FIG. 132), and are caulked and fixed to the other side (the left side in FIG. 132) by a separation cutting portion 1183. As a result, in order to separate the box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181, the separation cutting portion 1183 must be cut before the separation can be performed. However, the caulking fixing in the separation cutting portion 1183 may be performed by caulking any one of a plurality of locations (4 locations indicated by the numbers 1 to 4 in the figure) with a caulking member, for example, separating by inspection or the like. If necessary, it can be done up to 3 times. Of course, in the case of fraudulent separation, the trace of cutting will remain, so it is possible to immediately know whether or not there was fraudulent activity. Further, an engaging piece 1182 inserted into the engaging hole 1146 formed in the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 is formed so as to project from the center of one side short side of the box main body 1180, and is formed at the lower portion of the other side short side. An engaging elastic piece 1184 that elastically engages with the locking protrusion 1117 formed on the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed. Therefore, in order to attach the payout control board box 1105 to the frame board holder 1101, the engaging piece 1182 is inserted into the engaging hole 1146, and then the engaging elastic piece 1184 is engaged with the locking protrusion 1117. Easy to install. When the payout control board box 1105 is mounted over the payout control board box mounting area of the frame board holder 1101 and the mounting area 1143 formed on the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103, the payout control board box 1105 is within the mounting area 1143. The payout control board box 1105 is stored in the box and is fixed so that it cannot be moved in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. On the contrary, when removing it, the engaging elastic piece 1184 is pressed in the direction opposite to the elastic direction to disengage the engaging elastic piece 1184 from the locking protrusion 1117, and the payout control board box 1105 is pulled up. By pulling out the engaging piece 1182 from the engaging hole 1146, the payout control board box 1105 can be removed from the frame board holder 1101.

Further, the payout control board 1186 covered by the box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181 has a door frame opening switch terminal 1185a and a main body frame opening switch terminal 1185b on one side (right side in FIG. 132). , Award ball unit terminal 1187, external terminal board terminal 1188, CR unit terminal board terminal 1189, operation handle terminal 1194, error LED display 4130, error release switch 4131, ball removal switch 4132, etc. A full switch terminal 1190, an inspection output terminal 1191, a power supply terminal 1192, a launch motor terminal 1193, and an internal connection terminal 1195 are provided on the lower side (left side in FIG. 132).

The door frame opening switch terminal 1185a is a connector to which the wiring from the door frame opening switch 4133 for detecting that the door frame 5 has been released from the main body frame 3 is connected. The main body frame release switch terminal 1185b is a connector to which the wiring from the main body frame release switch 4134 that detects that the main body frame 3 has been released from the outer frame 2 is connected. The prize ball unit terminal 1187 is a multi-pin connector to which the wiring from the relay board 480 of the prize ball unit 800 described above is connected. The external terminal board terminal 1188 is a multi-pin connector connected to the payout control board terminal 1156 of the external terminal board 1150a as described above. The CR unit terminal board terminal 1189 is a multi-pin connector connected to the payout control board terminal 1155 of the CR unit terminal board 1150b as described above. The full tank switch terminal 1190 is a connector to which the wiring from the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900 is connected. The error LED display 4130 displays the status of the pachinko machine such as a CR unit connection abnormality. When the error release switch 4131 is operated, guidance on the release method according to the error displayed on the error LED display 4130 flows from the side speaker 121 and the lower speaker 391. When the ball removal switch 4132 is operated, the ball stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740 starts to be discharged (ball removal starts). The inspection output terminal 1191 is a connector for connecting to an inspection device when inspecting the payout control board 1186, and is a terminal for outputting various output signals for inspection. As described above, the power supply terminal 1192 is a connector connected to the payout control board power supply connector 1141 of the power supply board 1136 by the power supply wiring 1214. The launch motor terminal 1193 is a connector to which the wiring from the launch motor 695 of the ball launching device 650 is connected. The operation handle terminal 1194 is a connector to which the wiring from the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 provided inside the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400 is connected. The internal connection terminal 1195 is a connector connected to the payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board 1107 by the signal power supply wiring 1215.

As shown in FIG. 132, resistors R1194a to R1194d are arranged in the vicinity of the left side of the error release switch 4131. These resistors R1194a to R1194d are grounded (GND) when noise or the like from the door frame 5 (reinforcing plates 211 to 214 shown in FIG. 18) invades various detection signals input to the operation handle terminal 1194. Is intended to prevent instability, and a detailed description thereof will be described later.

Next, the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub-drawer relay board 1108 to be mounted on the drawer mounting area 1120 formed on the front surface side of the frame board holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIG. 129, the main drawer relay board 1107 is connected to the main drawer connector 626 (game board side connector: see FIG. 78) provided on the relay terminal plate 625 attached to the back surface side of the game board 4. A main drawer relay connector 1200 (holder-side connector) and a payout control board connector 1201 connected via an internal connection terminal 1195 of the payout control board 1186 and a signal power supply wiring 1215 are provided above and below. Further, the sub-drawer relay board 1108 has a sub-drawer relay connector 1202 connected to a sub-drawer connector 627 (game board-side connector: see FIG. 78) provided on the relay terminal plate 625 attached to the back surface side of the game board 4. (Holder side connector), the internal connection terminal 1130 of the door relay board 1102, and the door frame connector 1203 connected via the internal wiring 1213 are provided at the top and bottom. Further, in the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108, support holes 1204 and 1205 are bored on both left and right sides of each board, and the support holes 1204 and 1205 are projected from the drawer mounting area 1120 to the drawer mounting boss. By inserting it into 1118, the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub-drawer relay board 1108 are positioned and supported in the drawer mounting area 1120, and then covered with the board cover 1109 to be firmly fixed.

By the way, the board cover 1109 includes a main drawer relay connector 1200 and a payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board 1107, and a sub drawer relay connector 1202 and a door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay board 1108. A rectangular connector opening 1206, 1207, 1208, 1209 is opened for projecting to the outside of the board cover 1109, and a pin through which the tip of the drawer mounting boss 1118 is inserted on the back surface side of the board cover 1109. An insertion hole 1210 (see FIG. 127) is formed, and a stop hole 1211 for fixing the board cover 1109 to the frame board holder 1101 with a screw (not shown) is formed at both left and right ends. Therefore, the support holes 1204 and 1205 of the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are inserted into the drawer mounting boss 1118 projecting from the drawer mounting area 1120, and the tip of the drawer mounting boss 1118 is inserted into the pin insertion hole 1210. The main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub-drawer relay board 1108 can be firmly fixed in the drawer mounting area 1120 by covering with the board cover 1109 while inserting the board and fixing the stop hole 1211 with a screw (not shown).

The configuration of the board unit 1100 has been described above, but in the case of the present embodiment, among the various boards required for driving and controlling the pachinko machine 1, the main board is replaced with the change of the game board 4. Door relay board 1102 which is a board other than the control board 4100 and the liquid crystal control board 4500, the power supply board 1136 stored in the power supply board box 1103, the external terminal board 1150 housed in the terminal board box 1104, and the payout control board box 1105. The payout control board 1186 is assembled into a unit by pre-assembling it to the frame board holder 1101, and the board unit 1100 which is assembled and unitized is attached to the lower part of the back side of the main body frame 3, and the main bodies are conventionally separated. The work efficiency can be improved as compared with the various board mounting work mounted on the back side of the frame 3. Further, in this case, since the wiring between the boards unitized in the board unit 1100 can also be stored inside the frame board holder 1101, the wiring connecting the boards is not disturbed and laid in an orderly manner. can do.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main drawer relay board 1107 having the main drawer relay connector 1200 (holder-side connector) and the sub-drawer relay board 1108 having the sub-drawer relay connector 1202 (holder-side connector) on the front surface of the board unit 1100. As shown in FIG. 138, the main drawer connector of the relay terminal plate 625 provided on the back surface side of the game board 4 with the work of mounting the game board 4 on the main body frame 3 from the front side thereof. Since the 626 and the sub drawer connector 627 (game board side connector) are connected to the corresponding main drawer relay connector 1200 and the sub drawer relay connector 1202 (holder side connector), the game board 4 can be mounted and the boards can be connected to each other. Can be done at the same time. Therefore, the replacement work of the game board 4 can be performed efficiently.

Further, in the present embodiment, after the board unit 1100 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, the payout control board box 1105 which requires connection work of wiring with various electric devices provided in the main body frame 3 and an external The terminal board box 1104, which requires connection work with the CR unit and the management computer, is arranged in parallel at the rearmost position of the board unit 1100 where it is easy to see, while the power supply board requires less connection work with the outside. Since the box 1103 and the door relay board 1102 are arranged inside, a plurality of boards can be efficiently overlapped in the front-rear direction, and the size of the board unit 1100 can be designed to the minimum. However, even in the power supply board box 1103 and the door relay board 1102 arranged inside, all the terminal parts connected to the outside can be visually recognized from the outside, so there is a problem that the connection work thereof becomes fumbling. There is no.

[1-5A-1. Electrical connection between the board unit and the game board (connection by drawer connector)]
Next, the electrical connection between the board unit 1100 and the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 135. As described above, the drawer connectors 626 and 627 are provided on the game board 4 side, and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 are provided on the board unit 1100 side. As shown in FIG. 135 (a), the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side can be electrically connected by inserting them into the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side. As shown in FIG. 135 (b), the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side include terminals 626a and 627a, and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side are shown in FIG. 135 (c). As described above, the contacts 1200a and 1202a are provided. When the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side are inserted into the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side, the terminals 626a and 627a push down the contacts 1200a and 1202a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a as shown in FIG. 135 (c). Is displaced. The repulsive force of the contacts 1200a and 1202a generated by this displacement is brought into an electrically conductive state by strongly contacting the terminals 626a and 627a. As a result, the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side are connected to each other by various control boards (for example, by the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 1186). A control signal line for transmitting various control signals is formed. Further, a voltage supply line for supplying various voltages created by the power supply board 1136 is further formed in the drawer connector 626 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connector 1200 on the board unit 1100 side. By detachably attaching the game board 4 to the main body frame 3 in this way, the control signal line and voltage by the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side. The supply line can be connected freely.

The terminals 626a and 627a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a in the present embodiment are bellows type. The pin type may inadvertently touch the pin and bend during work, but the bellows type does not. Further, gold plating having a small friction coefficient is used for plating the terminals 626a and 627a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a. As a result, the slipperiness (good fitting) when the game board 4 is attached / detached is ensured.

Here, when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, if the work is performed with the power switch 1137 shown in FIG. 133 turned on, the contact point between the terminal 626a and the contact 1200a, specifically, the contact point 1200a. Since a large current (inrush current, which will be described later) flows through the contacts for various voltage supply lines, welding will occur. If the game board 4 is forcibly pushed into the main body frame 3 in this welded state to be attached, the contact 1200a may be bent and broken, or when the game board 4 is removed from the main body frame, the contact 1200a is the drawer connector 1200. The drawer connector 1200 cannot be used because it is peeled off and damaged.

Further, when the terminal 626a and the contact 1200a are welded together, various control boards may malfunction or electronic components mounted on the various control boards may be damaged due to the damage of the connector. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a circuit for preventing welding is provided on the main control board 4100, which will be described later. The detailed explanation will be described later.

[1-5A-2. Wiring with the prize ball unit, etc.]
Next, wiring and the like between the payout control board 1186 housed in the payout control board box 1105 and the prize ball unit 800 will be described with reference to FIG. 136. As described above, the relay terminal plate 830 in the prize ball unit includes a counting switch connector 830a, a payout motor connector 830b, a rotation angle switch connector 830c, a ball break switch connector 830d, a ground connector 830e, and a payout control. A board connector 830f is provided.

The wiring from the counting switch 812 is connected to the counting switch connector 830a, the wiring from the payout motor 815 is connected to the payout motor connector 830b, and the wiring from the rotation angle switch 855 is connected to the rotation angle switch connector 830c. The ball break switch connector 830d is connected to the wiring from the ball break switch 778 of the ball passage unit 770, and the ground connector 830e is connected to the ground wire from the payout motor 815. The payout control board connector 830f is connected to the prize ball unit terminal 1187 of the payout control board 1186 by wiring (harness).

With the wiring from the counting switch 812, the wiring from the payout motor 815, the ground wire from the payout motor 815, and the terminal 1187 for the prize ball unit, excluding the wiring from the ball break switch 778 and the wiring from the rotation angle switch 855. The harness is tied up by a wiring processing piece 869.

As described above, the balls supplied from the island are stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740, taken into the ball passage unit 770, and guided to the prize ball unit 800. When the spheres rub against each other and become charged, they electrostatically discharge and generate noise. Therefore, the prize ball unit 800 is easily affected by noise and is in an environment.

As described above, the sensor substrate 854 of the prize ball unit 800 is provided with the rotation angle switch 855, and the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 855 is easily affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the ball. Further, the harness for connecting the payout control connector 480f and the prize ball unit terminal 1187, that is, the harness for connecting the prize ball unit 800 and the payout control board 1186 is also affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the ball. Cheap.

[1-6. Cover body]
Next, the cover body 1250 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5, 70, 74 and the like. The cover body 1250 covers the rear opening 580 of the main body frame 3, and is inserted from above into the cover body support cylinder portion 575 formed on one side of the back surface of the main body frame 3 at three locations above, middle, and lower on one side thereof. The shaft support pin 1251 is formed, and an engaging piece 1252 that engages with the cover body engaging groove 785 formed in the ball passage unit 770 is formed at substantially the center of the other side. Then, by inserting the shaft support pin 1251 of the cover body 1250 into the cover body support cylinder portion 575, the cover body 1250 is pivotally supported on the main body frame 3 so that the engaging piece 1252 can be inserted into the cover body engaging groove 785. By locking, the cover body 1250 can be closed to the main body frame 3, and the back surfaces of various parts provided on the game board 4 can be protected. When opening the cover, the engagement piece 1252 and the cover body engagement groove 785 may be disengaged.

Further, in the cover body 1250 in the illustrated case, stop holes 1253 are formed above and below the engaging piece 1252 on the open side, and a locking protruding hook piece 570 projecting from the locking wall 569 of the main body frame 3 is provided. A through hole 1254 to be penetrated is formed, and although not shown in more detail, an opening 1255 for connection operation, a standing wall, an abutting protrusion, and a reinforcing rib are formed as in the cover body 1270 according to the second embodiment described below. Has been done. The connection operation opening 1255, the vertical wall, the contact protrusion, and the reinforcing rib are provided at the same positions as the connection operation opening 1303, the vertical wall 1304, the contact protrusion 1305, and the reinforcing rib of the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment. It has the same function. Then, with the cover body 1250 closed, the stop hole 1253 of the cover body 1250 and the stop hole 568 on the main body frame 3 side are aligned and fastened with a screw (not shown), so that the cover body 1250 causes the main body frame 3 to be fixed. The rear opening 580 can be closed and fixed. Then, since the locking protruding hook piece 570 penetrates the through hole 1254 of the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed with respect to the main body frame 3, for example, a lock such as a padlock is locked with the locking protruding hook piece 570. By hooking on the padlock, only the person in charge with the padlock key can open the cover body 1250.

[1-6A. Other embodiments of the cover body]
As is clear from FIG. 5, the cover body 1250 shown in FIGS. 5 and 74 (hereinafter, referred to as “cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment”) is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the game board 4. Although it is formed so as to cover the back surface of the game board 4 excluding the main control board box 624, it may be a cover body that covers the entire back surface of the game board 4 including the main control board box 624. A pachinko machine to which such a cover body 1300 (hereinafter, referred to as “cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment”) is attached will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 to 150. FIG. 139 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine to which the cover body according to the second embodiment is attached and viewed from the back in a state where the cover body is opened, and FIG. 140 is a perspective view in which the cover body according to the second embodiment is attached. FIG. 141 is a side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 141 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine to which the cover body according to the second embodiment is attached and viewed from the open side of the cover body, and FIG. 142 is a perspective view of the second embodiment. FIG. 143 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine to which the cover body according to the second embodiment is attached and viewed from the shaft support side of the cover body, and FIG. 143 is a rear view of the pachinko machine to which the cover body according to the second embodiment is attached. 144 is a rear view of the pachinko machine in a state where the cover body according to the second embodiment is removed, and FIG. 145 is a perspective view of a payout control board box that overlaps and contacts the lower side portion of the cover body according to the second embodiment. 146 is a perspective view seen from the inside of the cover body according to the second embodiment, and FIG. 147 is a back surface for explaining the operation of the cylinder lock provided on the cover body according to the second embodiment. FIG. 148 is a sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 143, FIG. 149 is a sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 143, and FIG. 150 is a sectional view taken along the line CC of FIG. 143. In addition, in FIGS. 139 to 150, the same reference numerals are given to the configurations having the same functions as the configurations displayed in the drawings before that.

As shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, the outer frame 2A of the pachinko machine 1 to which the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is attached is the outer frame 2A according to the second embodiment described above, and is attached to the door frame 5. The shape of the plate unit 300 provided is also slightly different. Further, the structure of the main body frame 3 also includes a stop hole 568, which will be described later, formed on the open end side of the rear wall 546 on the shaft support side, a point of the locking wall 569 having the locking hole 569a and the guide hole 569b (see FIG. 144), and The difference is that the positions of the notches 221 of the third side wall 542 and the fourth side wall 543 constituting the rear side wall extend downward (see FIG. 140), and the payout control board box 1105 The configuration also differs only in that the contact low step surface 1181a is formed on the cover body 1181 (see FIG. 145). However, the main control board box 624 displayed in FIGS. 139 and 144 is attached to the board board holder 623 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the game board 4 in the same manner as in the embodiment shown in FIG. 78. In 139 and FIG. 144, the illustration of the game board 4 is omitted.

Therefore, first, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 146. The cover body 1300 is formed of synthetic resin in a dish shape in which the side walls around a slightly elongated rectangular shape are raised (a large number of air holes are formed in the side wall portion and the upper half of the rectangular plate portion). A plurality of (4 in the case of the drawing) shaft support pins 1301 that are inserted into the cover body support cylinder portion 575 formed in the main body frame 3 and are pivotally supported are integrally formed on the side wall on one side of the vertical side. An engaging piece 1302 that engages with the cover body engaging groove 785 formed in the ball passage unit 770 is integrally formed slightly above the side wall on the other side of the vertical side. The shaft support pin 1301 and the engaging piece 1302 form the cover body 1300 by inserting the shaft support pin 1301 of the cover body 1300 into the cover body support cylinder portion 575, similarly to the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment. The cover body 1300 can be closed to the main body frame 3 by pivotally supporting the frame 3 so as to be openable and closable and locking the engaging piece 1302 to the cover body engaging groove 785, which is provided on the game board 4. It is possible to protect the back surface of various parts including the main control board box 624. The difference between the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment and the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment is that the cover body 1300 is not only provided to be openable and closable, but cannot be opened illegally in the closed state. A test terminal for connecting the RAM clear switch 624a provided on the main control board box 624 to the outside and the inspection device because the cylinder lock 1309 is provided on the main control board box 1309 and the back surface of the main control board box 624 is covered. It hits the surface of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 with the connection operation opening 1303 provided at the position corresponding to 624b and 624c and the tip end side of the side wall of the lower side of the cover body 1300 closed. It is a point of contact. Therefore, the characteristic configuration of the cover body 1300 according to these second embodiments will be described below.

First, the connection operation opening 1303 will be described. The connection operation opening 1303 is formed in a rectangular shape on the upper part of the contact lower side wall 1306 on the lower side of the cover body 1300, and its size is as shown in FIG. 143. The RAM clear switch 624a provided on the main control board box 624 so as to be exposed to the outside and the test terminals 624b and 624c to which the inspection equipment is connected are provided in a size facing each other. Further, inside the connection operation opening 1303, a vertical wall 1304 and a contact projection 1305 that abut on the outer peripheral surface of the main control board box 624 in a closed state are provided so as to project. The vertical wall 1304 is formed relatively high along the left and right opening edges of the connection operation opening 1303, and the abutting projection 1305 projects relatively low along the one-side opening edge from the upper opening edge of the connection operation opening 1303. As shown in FIGS. 148 and 149, the vertical wall 1304 and the contact protrusion 1305 are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the main control board box 624 (the surface of the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624). In order to prevent a gap from being formed between the main control board box 624 and the main control board box 624, an unauthorized tool is inserted through the connection operation opening 1303 to prevent an unauthorized act.

Next, the contact lower side wall surface 1306 formed on the lower side of the cover body 1300 will be described. When the cover body 1300 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the contact lower side wall surface 1306 is shown in FIGS. 149 and 150. As described above, the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 attached to the frame board holder 1101 is brought into contact with the upper side portion. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 145, the upper side of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 mounted on the frame board holder 1101 of the pachinko machine 1 to which the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is attached is attached. The contact low step surface 1181a, which is formed lower than the surface, is formed. As shown in FIG. 144, the payout control board box 1105 attached to the frame board holder 1101 is formed on the payout control board box mounting area of the frame board holder 1101 and the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103. In the state of being mounted over the mounting area 1143, the payout control board box 1105 is housed in the mounting area 1143 and is fixed so as not to move in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. Therefore, the contact low step surface 1181a, which is a part of the upper surface of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105, is contact-covered by the contact lower side wall surface 1306 of the cover body 1300, so that the cover body 1300 is not opened. As long as the payout control board box 1105 cannot be removed from the frame board holder 1101.

Next, the configuration related to the cylinder lock 1309 will be described. In FIG. 146, an elliptical lock hole 1308 for penetrating the cylinder lock 1309 is provided on the lower side of the cover body 1300. A screw portion 1310 having an elliptical cross section of the cylinder lock 1309 is penetrated through the lock hole 1308, and a nut 1312 is screwed into the threaded portion 1310 from the inside to fix the cylinder lock 1309 to the lock hole 1308. Further, in the cylinder lock 1309, a lock shaft 1311 is projected from the center of the screw portion 1310 toward the inside of the cover body 1300, and the lock shaft 1311 is formed in the lower portion of the elliptical locking piece 1313. The locking piece 1313 is fixed to the rear end of the cylinder lock 1309 by penetrating it through the hole 1314 and tightening it with a nut 1315. With this configuration, the lock piece 1313 can be rotated within a range of 90 degrees by inserting a key (possessed by the manager of the amusement park, etc.) into the cylinder lock 1309 and rotating it. There is. Further, at the lower part of the lock hole 1308, a guide protrusion 1316 for guiding the opening / closing when the cover body 1300 is closed is projected inward. Further, a screw fixing hole 1307 is formed above and below the engagement piece 1302 on the open side of the cover body 1300 for screwing screws.

On the other hand, a stop hole 568, a lock hole 569a, and a guide hole 569b are formed on the main body frame 3 side so as to correspond to the screw fixing hole 1307, the locking piece 1313, and the guide protrusion 1316 described above. Explaining this configuration with reference to FIG. 144, the cover body contact groove 567 is formed on the shaft support side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3 as described above, and the cover body contact groove is formed. Stop holes 568 corresponding to the screw fixing holes 1307 are formed in the upper and lower parts of 567 (upper and lower sides of the cover body engaging groove 785 of the ball passage unit 770). Further, as shown in FIG. 147, a locking wall 569 extends in the direction of the vertical center line of the main body frame 3 in the lower portion of the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the locking wall 569 is extended. Locking holes 569a and guide holes 569b are provided above and below the above. The locking hole 569a is formed in an elliptical shape so that the locking piece 1313 penetrates through the locking hole 569a, and the locking wall 569 around the front surface side of the locking hole 569a is provided with a reinforcing rib.

Then, by rotating the cover body 1300 from the open state to the closed state, the lock piece 1313 of the cylinder lock 1309 is locked while the guide protrusion 1316 is inserted into the guide hole 569b as shown in FIG. 147 (A). It is in a state of penetrating the hole 569a. By inserting the key into the cylinder lock 1309 and rotating it in that state, the lock piece 1313 is rotated 90 degrees as shown in FIG. 147 (B), and one end of the lock piece 1313 is with the front side of the lock wall 569. Engage. Therefore, the cover body 1300 is locked to the main body frame 3. Further, since the cover body 1300 is locked by the cylinder lock 1309 at the lower portion of the cover body 1300, the screwed holes that match in the closed state in order to fix the upper portion of the cover body 1300 to the main body frame 3 By screwing a screw (not shown) into the 1307 and the stop hole 568, the upper portion of the cover body 1300 is also fixed to the main body frame 3. A cylinder lock may also be provided above the cover body 1300, and the cover body 1300 may be locked to the main body frame 3 by the cylinder locks at the top and bottom.

Further, as shown in FIG. 140, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment is in a closed state, and the back side thereof is the rearmost end portion of the prize ball tank 720 (in the case of the present embodiment, after the discharge port 730). The surface wall) and the rear end wall of the tank rail member 740 are the same vertical surface when viewed from the side. For this reason, when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 1, there is no unevenness from the upper part to the lower part on the back side, and the shape is extremely neat. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is transported, the overall thickness is uniform. Since it is easy to grasp, it is easy to load and stack, and even when actually installing it on the island stand of the amusement park, it protrudes to the back of the opponent's pachinko machine on the back of the pachinko machine 1 installed in the back row. It can be installed extremely smoothly without worrying about the wiring to be used. In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 using the cover body 1250 according to the first embodiment also has the same effect as shown in FIG.

In the second embodiment described above, the reason why the cover body 1300 is closed by both the upper screw and the lower cylinder lock 1309 is that the cover body 1300 is the first embodiment. Since the covering area is larger in the vertical direction than the cover body 1250, if the closed state is held only at the center of the cover body 1300, the upper and lower parts may be deformed by heat, so that the upper and lower parts are closed. It is configured to hold. The second reason is that, as described above, the contact lower side wall surface 1306 of the cover body 1300 is brought into contact with the upper side portion of the payout control board box 1105, so that the lower side portion of the cover body 1300 cannot be pried open. In addition, it is necessary to firmly maintain the closed state of the lower portion of the cover body 1300, and as a result, the upper portion of the cover body 1300 must also be closed. Then, for this second reason, a locking device such as a cylinder lock 1309 (not limited to the cylinder lock, but a locking device that can be unlocked only by the manager of the amusement park) may be used in order to maintain the closed state of the lower side portion. ) Is desirable.

The cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment has been described above, but the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment has a lower side portion of the cover body 1300 when the cover body 1300 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Since the contact lower side wall 1306 is designed to contact and cover the upper side portion of the cover body 1181 of the payout control board box 1105 attached to the frame board holder 1101, the payout control is performed unless the cover body 1300 is opened. The board box 1105 cannot be removed from the frame board holder 1101. Since the cover body 1300 is locked by the cylinder lock 1309, not only fraudulent acts against the main control board box 624 covered with the cover body 1300 but also fraudulent acts against the payout control board box 1105 not covered with the cover body 1300 are prevented. be able to. Further, even when the cover body 1300 is closed and the cylinder lock 1309 is locked, since the connection operation opening 1303 is opened in the cover body 1300, the test terminals 624b and 624c for testing are inspected. The RAM clear switch 624a can be operated when a device is connected or when the software or the like runs out of control and recovers. A vertical wall 1304 and an abutting protrusion 1305 are formed inside the connection operation opening 1303 so that no gap is formed between the connection operation opening 1303 and the main control board box 624. A piano wire or the like can be inserted to prevent fraudulent acts on the back surface of the game board 4.

Further, the cover body 1300 according to the second embodiment has the same vertical surface as the rear end portion of the prize ball tank 720 and the rear end wall of the tank rail member 740 when viewed from the side in the closed state. Therefore, when viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 1, there is no unevenness from the upper part to the lower part on the back side, and the shape is extremely neat, and the overall thickness when transporting the pachinko machine 1 is increased. Since it is uniform and easy to grasp, it is easy to load and stack, and even when actually installing it on the island stand of the amusement park, on the back of the pachinko machine 1 installed in the back row, the back of the opponent's pachinko machine. It can be installed extremely smoothly without worrying about the wiring that protrudes from the machine.

[2. Detailed configuration of the game board]
Subsequently, the configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 151 to 156. FIG. 151 is a front view of the game board, FIG. 152 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from diagonally right front, FIG. 153 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from diagonally left front, and FIG. 154 is a perspective view. It is a perspective view of the game board viewed diagonally from the left rear side, FIG. 155 is a perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main component and viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. It is a perspective view seen from.

As shown in the figure, the game board 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603, and has a frame-shaped front component 601 that partitions the outer periphery of the game area 605 into which the game ball is driven. And the game panel 600 arranged so as to close the game area 605 on the rear side of the front component 601 and the function display arranged on the lower side of the front component 601 on the outside of the game area 605 and on the right side of the out port 606. The unit 640, the attacker unit 2000 arranged on the upper side of the out port 606 at the substantially center in the left-right direction in the game area 605 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 600, and the attacker unit 2000 on the left side of the attacker unit 2000 along the outer circumference of the game area 605. A side decorative member 2100 arranged and supported on the front surface of the game panel 600, and gates (gate member 2200, special drawing gate 2500) arranged on the right side area in the game area 605 and supported on the front surface of the game panel 600. A frame-shaped center accessory 2300 arranged in a substantially central portion of the game area 605 and supported by the game panel 600, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 600, and a game panel 600 behind the back unit 3000. It mainly includes a liquid crystal display device 1400 as an effect display means that is visibly attached to the player side through the frame of the center accessory 2300 and can display a predetermined effect image. Hereinafter, the configuration of each device mounted on the game panel 600 will be described in detail. The center accessory 2300 can also be called a frame-shaped decorative body.

[2-1. Attacker unit]
First, the attacker unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158. FIG. 157 is a perspective view of each device mounted on the game panel disassembled for each member and viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 158 is a perspective view of the attacker unit viewed diagonally from the front. The attacker unit 2000 of this example is inserted from the front side into the opening 600e formed at the lower center in the left-right direction of the game panel 600, and then fixed to the front surface of the game panel 600. The attacker unit 2000 has a plurality of entrances (winning openings) in which a game ball driven into the game area 605 can be accepted. Specifically, the first starting port 2001 arranged substantially in the center in the left-right direction, the rectangular large winning opening 2003 arranged on the right side of the first starting port 2001 and greatly extending in the left-right direction, and the large winning opening 2003. It is provided with three general winning openings 2004, which are arranged on the right side of the above and on the left side of the first starting port 2001, respectively.

The upper side of the first starting port 2001 is open so that game balls can always be accepted (winning). The large winning opening 2003 can be opened and closed by a horizontally long rectangular opening and closing member 2006 whose opening can be closed. The lower side of the opening / closing member 2006 is rotatably supported by the shaft, and when the large winning opening 2003 is closed to make the game ball unacceptable in a substantially vertical state, the upper side is rotated so as to be inclined forward ( (State shown in FIG. 158), the large winning opening 2003 is opened so that the game ball can be accepted. The opening / closing member 2006 is in a state in which the large winning opening 2003 is closed in the normal gaming state, and the game ball is received (starting winning) in the first starting port 2001 and the second starting port 2002 described later. It is opened and closed by driving the attacker solenoid 2016 (see FIG. 220) according to the result of the special lottery (big hit lottery) to be performed (when the result of the special lottery is "big hit" or "small hit"). However, as will be described later, when the result of the special lottery is "big hit (special hit)", the opening / closing member 2006 according to this embodiment goes to the special figure gate 2500 (specific entrance) after the condition device is activated. It is possible to open and close by driving the attacker solenoid 2016 on condition that the game ball is accepted. Further, as shown in the figure, the general winning opening 2004 is opened upward so that the game ball can always be accepted (winning).

[2-2. Side decoration member]
The side decorative member 2100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 and 159. FIG. 159 is a perspective view of the side decorative member viewed diagonally from the front. The side decorative member 2100 is inserted from the front side with respect to the opening 600e formed on the left side of the opening 600e into which the attacker unit 2000 is inserted and fixed at the lower part of the game panel 600 on the left side from the center in the left-right direction. It is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 600. Further, on the front side (player side) of the side decorative member 2100, a decorative portion 2103 having a light transmitting (semi-transparent) window portion is provided, and a light emitting decorative substrate (not shown) arranged behind the decorative portion 2103. ) Can be used for light emission decoration.

[2-3. Gate]
As shown in FIG. 157, of the gates (gate member 2200, special drawing gate 2500), the gate member 2200 is formed on the right side of the center of the game panel 600 in the left-right direction and slightly above the center in the up-down direction. The opening 600e is inserted from the front side and then fixed to the front surface of the game panel 600. The gate member 2200 has a gate 2201 having a width through which only one game ball can pass, and a game ball that has passed through the gate 2201 can be detected by a gate sensor 2202 arranged in the gate 2201. It has become like.

Similarly, regarding the special figure gate 2500, in the front surface of the game panel 600, the opening 600e formed in the game area on the right side of the game area on the left side and the game area on the right side of the center accessory 2300. On the other hand, it is fixed by being inserted from the front side. Similarly, the special figure gate 2500 has a gate 2501 having a width through which only one game ball can pass, and the game has passed through the gate 2501 by the special figure gate sensor 2502 arranged in the gate 2501. It is possible to detect a sphere.

However, in this embodiment, in the vicinity of the special figure gate 2500, the gate 2501 is reached so that almost all the game balls flowing down the game area on the right side of the center accessory 2300 are accepted by the special figure gate 2500. A plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) and a guiding member such as a guiding wall 603a (see FIG. 151) are provided. As a result, the game ball flowing down the game area on the right side passes through the special figure gate 2500 with a higher probability (probability of exceeding at least 50%) than the probability of passing through the gate member 2200. As will be described later, the special figure gate 2500 according to this embodiment delays the timing at which the accessory continuous operation device operates (with respect to the end timing of the first closing control period) when the jackpot is won. It is prepared so that the pachinko machine 1 has a function capable of allowing the pachinko machine 1.

[2-4. Center role]
Next, the configuration of the center accessory 2300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 157 and 160 to 182. FIG. 160 is a perspective view of the center accessory viewed diagonally from the front, FIG. 161 is a perspective view of the center accessory disassembled for each main member and viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 162 is a perspective view of the center accessory. FIG. 163 is a perspective view of the frame member of the object viewed diagonally from the front, FIG. 163 is a perspective view of the base plate of the center accessory viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 164 is a start port unit of the center accessory. Is a perspective view seen from diagonally front, FIG. 165 is a perspective view of the starting port unit disassembled and viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 166 is a perspective view of the starting port unit disassembled and viewed diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view as seen, and FIG. 167 is a perspective view of a main part of the drive mechanism unit viewed diagonally from the rear.

Further, FIG. 168 is a perspective view of the sub liquid crystal unit viewed diagonally from the front, FIG. 169 is a side view of the mounted state of the sub liquid crystal unit viewed from the right side, and FIG. 170 is a disassembled sub liquid crystal unit. It is a perspective view seen diagonally from the front, FIG. 171 is a front view showing a state in which the front of the sub liquid crystal unit is shielded by the first accessory unit and the second accessory unit, and FIG. 172 is a front view showing the sub liquid crystal unit. It is a front view which shows the state which the front of is open.

Further, FIG. 173 is a perspective view of the first accessory unit viewed diagonally from the front, FIG. 174 is a perspective view of the first accessory unit disassembled and viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 175 is a perspective view of the first accessory unit. It is a perspective view of the right movable part unit of the one role unit disassembled and viewed diagonally from the front, FIG. 176 is a perspective view of the second role unit viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 177 is a second role. It is the perspective view which disassembled the object unit and looked at diagonally from the front, FIG. 178 is the right side view which shows the movable part unit of the 2nd role unit, and FIG. FIG. 180 is a perspective view of the movable part of the second accessory unit disassembled and viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 181 is a perspective view of the drive unit viewed diagonally from the rear. FIG. 182 is a right side view showing the operation of the movable unit with respect to the sub liquid crystal unit.

As shown in FIG. 157, the center accessory 2300 is inserted from the front side into the opening 600e formed large so as to penetrate substantially the center of the game panel 600, and is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 600. As shown in the figure, the size occupies most of the game area 605 and is formed in a frame shape. The above-mentioned gate member 2200, special figure gate 2500, and the like are arranged between the outer peripheral surface on the right side of the center accessory 2300 and the outer circumference of the game area 605.

As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161 of the center accessory 2300, the frame-shaped decorative frame unit 2310, the starting port unit 2330 having the second starting port 2002 arranged at the lower right of the frame-shaped decorative frame unit 2310, and the decorative frame unit 2310. A frame shape having a sub liquid crystal unit 2350 mounted on the upper part of the back surface and visible through the opening window 2310a, and a left movable unit 2378 and a right movable unit 2379 arranged behind the decorative frame unit 2310 and visible through the opening window 2310a. 1370 of the first accessory unit, a transparent protective plate 2360 that closes the back side of the first accessory unit 2370, and a display of the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 in cooperation with the left movable part unit 2378 and the right movable part unit 2379. It is configured to include a second accessory unit 2400 capable of shielding the screen.

As shown in FIG. 162, the decorative frame unit 2310 includes a frame-shaped base plate 2311 and a plurality of decorative members 2309 arranged on the front surface or the back side of the base plate 2311. As shown in FIG. 163, the base plate 2311 has a substantially annular shape, and a game ball that has entered the inside of the base plate 2311 through a warp passage described later is rolled to the left and right on the lower inner peripheral surface. A lower rolling surface 2311a that can be moved is formed. Further, on the lower side of the lower rolling surface 2311a, a game ball that has entered the chance opening 2372a (see FIG. 173) formed in the lower part of the first accessory unit 2370 is placed in the gaming area 605 below the center accessory 2300. The chance outlet 2311b is provided so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. Further, a pedestal portion 2311c for mounting the starting port unit 2330 is provided at the lower right of the base plate 2311 so as to project diagonally downward to the right, and a starting port unit 2330 is provided in a portion above the center of the pedestal portion 2311c. A passage 2311d for guiding the winning game ball to the rear of the second starting port 2002 is formed so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction. Further, an arc-shaped upper base plate 2322 (see FIG. 162) is provided above the base plate 2311 so as to project toward the upper left.

As shown in FIG. 162, the decorative member 2309 arranged on the base plate 2311 has a central front decoration 2312 arranged on the upper front surface of the base plate 2311 and a lower portion of the lower rolling surface 2311a (the back side of the base plate 2311). The shelf back left decoration 2313 and the shelf back right decoration 2314 arranged in, the blue left blue decoration 2315 arranged in the left front of the base plate 2311, the upper left covering decoration 2316 arranged above it, and the warp described later. Warp passage decoration 2317 arranged on the lower front side of the passage, shelf right decoration 2318 arranged on the lower right front of the base plate 2311, upper right decoration 2319 arranged on the upper right front of the base plate 2311, and shelf right decoration. It is configured to include the upper right blue decoration 2320 arranged on the upper side of the 2318, and the decorative members other than the shelf back left decoration 2313 and the shelf back right decoration 2314 project toward the player side from the front surface of the game panel 600. It is provided. That is, it is configured so that the game ball does not enter the decorative frame unit 2310 from a portion other than the warp passage. In addition, on the right side surface of the upper right blue decoration 2320, a second out port 606a is provided in which a game ball that rolls in the game area 605 on the right side of the center accessory 2300 can enter. The game ball that has entered the mouth 606a is discharged from the game area 605, similarly to the out port 606 provided at the lower end of the game area 605. Further, on the upper side of the warp passage decoration 2317, a warp entrance 2321 through which a game ball rolling in the game area 605 on the left side of the center accessory 2300 can enter is arranged, and the game ball entered from the left side can be inserted. It is configured to guide backwards.

Further, in the decorative frame unit 2310, a plurality of lenses 2323 arranged in an arc shape, a left LED substrate 2324 arranged behind the lenses 2323 and radiating light, and an upper right An LED substrate 2325 and an upper LED substrate 2326 are provided. Further, on the rear side of the upper right LED board 2325, a relay board 2327 that relays drive signals to these light emitting boards is arranged. In addition, a reflector 2328, a diffusion sheet 2329, and the like are also provided so that light is radiated from the entire decorative member 2309.

Next, the starting port unit 2330 will be described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 164 and 165, the start port unit 2330 is mounted on the pedestal portion 2311c of the base plate 2311 (see FIG. 163) and includes a front decoration 2331 having a second start port 2002 opened on the right side. ing. The second starting port 2002 can be opened and closed by one blade 2337, and when the blade 2337 stands up substantially vertically, the blade 2337 makes the game ball unacceptable to the second starting port 2002. When the blade 2337 is expanded to the right (clockwise) (see FIG. 164), the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2002. That is, the second starting port 2002 is a variable winning port that can be opened and closed by the blade 2337. A feather decoration 2338 is provided on the front surface of the blade 2337.

Further, a decorative base 2332 is provided on the rear side of the front decoration 2331. The decorative base 2332 is provided with a light-transmitting red lens 2334, a base diffusion sheet 2335, and a lens diffusion sheet 2336, and the light radiated from the LED substrate 2333 arranged on the rear side is transmitted to the front decoration 2331. By irradiating, the front decoration 2331 is made to emit light. On the rear side of the LED substrate 2333, a drive mechanism unit 2339 for guiding the game ball that has entered the second out port 606a (see FIG. 160) and driving the blades 2337 is provided with the pedestal portion 2311c interposed therebetween. ing. As shown in FIG. 166, the drive mechanism unit 2339 includes an out ball passage base 2340 that forms a passage 2340a for a game ball that has entered the second out port 606a, and an out ball passage cover 2341 that closes the front surface of the passage 2340a. And have. Further, on the rear side of the out-ball passage base 2340, a start port solenoid 2344 attached by a solenoid base 2342 and a solenoid sheet metal 2343, and a transmission unit 2345 that transmits the operation of the start port solenoid 2344 to the blades 2337 are provided. There is. As shown in FIG. 167, the transmission unit 2345 is a link connected to the plunger 2344a of the start port solenoid 2344 and connected to the crank 2345a whose one end side is rotatably supported and the other end side of the crank 2345a. It is configured to include a 2345b and a blade shaft 2345c that is rotatably supported and a rotational force is applied by a link 2345b, and rotates the blade 2337 attached to the tip of the blade shaft 2345c within a predetermined range. It is possible to make it. As shown in FIG. 166, the rear side and the lower side of the transmission portion 2345 are covered with the back cover 2346, and the left side of the starting port solenoid 2344 is covered with the lower decoration 2348.

A substrate cover 2347a is vertically installed on the lower front surface of the drive mechanism unit 2339, and a relay substrate 2347b is arranged on the back surface of the substrate cover 2347a. Further, a second start port sensor 2349 is arranged in front of the out ball passage base 2340, and it is possible to detect a game ball that has won a prize in the second start port 2002.

Next, the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 will be described in detail. As shown in FIGS. 168 to 170, the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 is a liquid crystal composed of a rectangular frame-shaped frame portion 2351a and a support rod portion 2351b extending in the left-right direction from the upper end thereof and attached to the upper back surface of the base plate 2311. A holder 2351, a substantially rectangular parallelepiped liquid crystal body 2352 housed in the frame part 2351a from the rear side and visible through an opening window 2351c, and a liquid crystal cover 2353 arranged on the back surface of the frame part 2351a to support the back side of the liquid crystal body 2352. And a liquid crystal fastener 2354 that supports the lower part of the liquid crystal main body 2352. Further, a decoration 2355 is provided on the lower front portion of the liquid crystal holder 2351, and a relay board 2356 for relaying a drive signal to the liquid crystal main body 2352 is provided on the back surface of the liquid crystal cover 2353. As shown in FIG. 169, the sub-liquid crystal unit 2350 is arranged so as to be inclined so that the display screen (sub-liquid crystal screen PNS) of the liquid crystal main body 2352 faces diagonally downward (player side).

As shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, the sub liquid crystal screen PNS of the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 is movable of the left movable unit 2378 and the right movable unit 2379 of the first accessory unit 2370 and the second accessory unit 2400. It is shielded by the unit 2401. That is, as shown in FIG. 171, when the left movable unit 2378, the right movable unit 2379, and the movable unit 2401 are assembled in front of the sub liquid crystal unit 2350, the sub liquid crystal screen PNS is shielded and the player side. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 172, in a state where the left movable unit unit 2378, the right movable unit 2379, and the movable unit 2401 are separated from each other, the front of the sub liquid crystal screen PNS is opened and the game is played. It is visible from the person's side. Next, these first accessory unit 2370 and second accessory unit 2400 will be described in detail.

As shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, the first accessory unit 2370 includes a frame-shaped rear cover 2371 made of a transparent synthetic resin member, and a shelf arranged at a lower portion is provided on the front surface of the rear cover 2371. The upper 2372, the warp aisle 2374 arranged diagonally to the left of the upper shelf 2372, the left decoration 2375 arranged above the warp aisle 2374, and the right decoration 2376 arranged diagonally to the right of the upper shelf 2372. It is provided. Here, the upper shelf 2372 has an upper rolling surface 2372b capable of rolling a game ball that has entered the inside of the first accessory unit 2370 through the warp passage 2374 in the left-right direction, and an upper rolling surface. A substantially arc-shaped middle-stage rolling surface 2372c, which is located on the front side of 2372b and is one step lower, is formed. That is, the upper shelf 2372 forms a so-called stage. The middle stage rolling surface 2372c is higher than the lower stage rolling surface 2311a of the base plate 2311 (see FIG. 163) arranged on the front side thereof, and rolls on the upper stage rolling surface 2372b or the middle stage rolling surface 2372c. It is possible to allow the game ball to flow down to the lower rolling surface 2311a. Further, a chance opening 2372a through which a game ball can enter is provided on the wall portion on the back side of the interrupted rolling surface 2372c, and the game ball entering the chance opening 2372a is a chance exit 2311b of the base plate 2311. It is supposed to be released from. Further, on the back surface side of the shelf upper stage 2372, an LED substrate 2373 that irradiates light toward the shelf upper stage 2372 is arranged, and the shelf upper stage 2372 can be light-emitting and decorated. The warp passage 2374 communicates with the warp entrance 2321 (see FIG. 161), and is configured to feed the game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2321 from the left end side of the upper rolling surface 2372b.

Further, on the upper part of the rear cover 2371, a substantially arcuate tubular guide portion 2371a projecting forward is formed so as to face each other to the left and right, and the pair of guide portions 2371a forms a left movable portion unit 2378 and a right movable portion unit. The 2379s are supported so as to slide in an arc shape along the inner peripheral edge of the rear cover 2371, respectively. Further, a flat plate-shaped protective plate portion 2371b is formed on the upper portion of the rear cover 2371, and the liquid crystal main body 2352 is protected by covering the sub liquid crystal screen PNS from the front.

As shown in FIG. 175, the right movable unit 2379 arranged on the upper right side of the rear cover 2371 is provided with a front decoration 2384 having a pointed tip toward the center side of the rear cover 2371 and a rear side of the front decoration 2384. The back cover 2387, the lens 2385 and the diffusion sheet 2386 housed inside the back cover 2387, the lower member 2389 arranged under the back cover 2387, and the LED attached to the back surface of the back cover 2387. It is configured to include a substrate 2390. That is, the back cover 2387 is provided with a plurality of openings (not shown), and the light radiated from the LED substrate 2390 irradiates the front decoration 2384 through the diffusion sheet 2386 and the lens 2385, thereby irradiating the front decoration 2384. It is possible to decorate with light emission. Further, an arc-shaped rack 2387a is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the back cover 2387, and a shaft portion 2387b protruding in the front-rear direction is formed inside the rack 2387a. In particular, the rear extending portion of the shaft portion 2387b is fitted into the guide portion 2371a formed on the upper portion of the rear cover 2371 (see FIG. 174), and the movement in the front-rear direction is restricted by the push 2388. That is, the right movable portion unit 2379 is supported so that the shaft portion 2387b of the back cover 2387 slides along the inner peripheral surface of the guide portion 2371a so as to move in an arc shape. The left movable unit 2378 has a symmetrical shape with the right movable unit 2379, but since the configuration is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

Further, as shown in FIG. 174, outside the guide portion 2371a in the rear cover 2371, the left movable portion unit 2378 and the right movable portion unit 2379 are meshed with the rack 2387a and rotatably supported with the axial direction in the front-rear direction. The gears 2381 are provided, and each of these gears 2381 is connected to a motor 2380 fixed to the upper back surface of the rear cover 2371. That is, when the motor 2380 is operated, power is transmitted to the rack 2387a of the back cover 2387 via the gear 2381, and the left movable unit 2378 and the right movable unit 2379 can be individually moved. The front decoration 2384 in the left movable unit 2378 and the right movable unit 2379 has a downward slope on the inner side surface, and when moved to the shielding position (upper stop position), the sub liquid crystal in the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. The area around the lower corner of the screen PNS is shielded (see FIG. 171). In addition, the upper part of these inner side surfaces protrudes inward and has a "dogleg" shape when viewed from the front.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the second accessory unit 2400 has an appearance position (indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 182) in front of the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 (see FIG. 182) and the sub liquid crystal unit. A movable unit 2401 rotatably supported between the retracted position above 2350 (shown by a solid line in FIG. 182) and a movable unit that accommodates the drive mechanism of the movable unit 2401 and moves to the retracted position. A motor cover 2402 capable of accommodating the latter half of the unit 2401, a drive unit 2403 that is a drive mechanism of the movable unit 2401, and a relay board that is arranged behind the motor cover 2402 and relays a drive signal to the drive unit 2403. It is configured to include 2404.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the movable unit 2401 has a flat shape as a whole, and has a front decoration 2406 having a decorative surface 2406a on the front surface (which is the upper surface in the retracted position). The decorative frame 2407 in which the fitting recess 2407a for the front decoration 2406 is formed on the front surface and the substrate cover 2410 arranged on the rear side (lower side in the retracted position) of the decorative frame 2407 are provided with the decorative frame 2407. Between the substrate cover 2410, there are an LED substrate 2409 that irradiates light toward the decorative frame 2407 and a reflector 2408 that limits the radiation direction of the light so that the light radiated from the LED substrate 2409 does not leak from the surroundings. It is provided.

Further, a pair of arms 2411 are arranged on the back surface 2410a of the substrate cover 2410. As shown in FIG. 178, these arms 2411 have a mounting portion 2411a attached to the upper end portion (rear end portion in the retracted position) of the back surface 2410a and a first arm portion extending perpendicular to the back surface 2410a. 2411b, the second arm 2411c which is continuous with the first arm 2411b and bends with respect to the first arm 2411b to form a "dogleg" shape, and the inside from the tip (lower end) of the second arm 2411c. It is configured to include a rotating shaft portion 2411d protruding toward the direction. A through hole penetrating in the left-right direction is provided at the center of the rotation shaft portion 2411d, and a pin 2420 (see FIG. 180) of the drive portion 2403, which will be described later, is inserted. Further, an engaging shaft 2411e protruding outward is formed at the boundary portion (that is, the bent portion) between the first arm portion 2411b and the second arm portion 2411c, and the second arm portion 2411c has a length penetrating in the left-right direction. The hole 2411f is formed along the second arm portion 2411c.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 180 and 181 of the drive unit 2403, the motor holder 2415, the motor 2416 attached to the motor holder 2415, and the gear 2418 connected to the rotating shaft of the motor 2416 via the shaft unit 2417. A pin 2419 fitted into a through hole 2418a provided at a position eccentric from the center of the gear 2418, and a long pin 2420 arranged through a tubular portion 2415a provided at the bottom of the motor holder 2415. It is configured with. Here, the pin 2419 is inserted into the elongated hole 2411f of the arm 2411, and the pin 2420 is provided on both side surfaces of the motor cover 2402 (FIG. 177) through the rotation shaft portion 2411d and the push 2421 of the arm 2411. It is inserted into the hole 2402a from the inside. As a result, when the motor 2416 operates, the gear 2418 rotates, and the arm 2411 (the entire movable unit 2401 including the arm 2411) rotates about the pin 2420 by the pin 2419 provided eccentrically to the gear 2418. It has become like. The engaging shaft 2411e formed on the arm 2411 is inside the arc-shaped elongated holes 2402b (arc-shaped elongated holes centered on the hole 2402a) provided on both side surfaces of the motor cover 2402 (FIG. 177). The arm 2411 is smoothly rotated by the arm 2411, and the rotation range of the arm 2411 is restricted. The gear 2418 is provided with a projecting piece 2418b that projects outward, and the movable portion unit 2401 is at the appearance position (origin position) by detecting the position of the projecting piece 2418b by the photo sensor 2422. It is possible to grasp.

By the way, as a general pachinko machine equipped with a movable decorative body, the movable decorative body is arranged behind the game panel, and the appearance position that can be visually recognized through the opening window of the center frame and the outside of the opening window of the center frame ( For example, it has been conventionally known that the movable decorative body is moved up and down between the retracted position which is shielded by the game panel and becomes invisible. However, according to this, it is necessary to secure a large space in the game panel on the outside of the center frame for shielding or retracting the movable decorative body, and by extension, the opening of the game panel and the center frame fitted therein. The size becomes relatively small, and it becomes difficult to visually recognize various effects through, for example, the opening window of the center frame.

On the other hand, in the second accessory unit 2400 of this example, the movable portion unit 2401 is formed in a flat shape, and the arm 2411 extends from the back surface 2410a of the movable portion unit 2401, and the end portion of the arm 2411 is extended. It is configured to move (that is, rotate) along an arc about the rotation shaft portion 2411d formed on the side. Therefore, even if the size of the movable part unit 2401 is relatively large, when it is moved to the retracted position (see the solid line in FIG. 182), the movable part unit 2401 becomes long in the front-rear direction and is a relatively thin surface. The lower surface (tip surface) portion of the unit unit 2401 faces the game panel 600. Therefore, the area required to shield the movable unit 2401 can be significantly reduced.

Further, when the movable unit 2401 moves from the appearance position (see the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 182) to the retracted position, the decorative surface 2406a is changed from the front facing state to the upward facing state, that is, the movable part unit 2401 It changes from the suspended state to lying down. Therefore, the viewing angle of the player with respect to the decorative surface 2406a (that is, the angle at which the decorative surface 2406a is viewed) gradually changes, and it is possible to enhance the visual interest.

Further, the pair of arms 2411 extending from the back surface 2410a of the movable unit 2401 are located on the rear end side of the movable unit 2401 when the movable unit 2401 is in the retracted position, and are located on the rear end side of the movable unit 2401 when the movable unit 2401 is in the retracted position. Since it is located at the end on the moving direction side (retracted position side), the arm 2411 is shielded by the movable part unit 2401 and becomes difficult to see from the player side while the movable part unit 2401 is rotating, and eventually the arm 2411 is exposed. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance due to this.

Further, the shape of the decorative surface 2406a of the movable unit 2401 is a curved shape along the movement locus of the movable unit 2401. Therefore, the movement (rotation) of the movable portion unit 2401 becomes a movement that matches the shape of the decorative surface 2406a, and the rotation operation of the movable portion unit 2401 does not arouse unnaturalness.

By the way, in the case where the movable unit 2401 is arranged in the horizontal state in the retracted position, the back surface 2410a of the movable unit 2401 and the arm 2411 extending from the back surface 2410a may be visible from the player side. According to the above, there is a risk of spoiling the appearance of the movable unit 2401 in the retracted position. On the other hand, according to this example, since the movable portion unit 2401 is arranged so as to be inclined so that the decorative surface 2406a can be seen at the retracted position, the back surface 2410a and the arm 2411 of the movable portion unit 2401 may be difficult to see. It is possible. In particular, since the decorative surface 2406a of the movable unit unit 2401 is formed in a curved surface shape, the shape and pattern of the decorative surface 2406a can be visually recognized relatively clearly even in an inclined state, and the decorative effect can be maintained. Is.

Further, since the sub liquid crystal screen PNS faces diagonally downward, when the movable unit 2401 is moved to the appearance position, the decorative surface 2406a of the movable unit 2401 can also be directed diagonally downward in accordance with the sub liquid crystal screen PNS. This makes it possible (see the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 182), and thus it is possible to increase the rotation range of the movable unit 2401 between the retracted position and the appearance position. That is, the movement of the movable unit 2401 becomes large, and it is possible to increase the impact when moving the movable unit 2401.

Further, the rotation shaft portion 2411d of the arm 2411 is arranged behind the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. Therefore, the movable unit 2401 can be brought closer to the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 regardless of whether the movable unit 2401 is in the appearance position or the retracted position. Therefore, it becomes easier to secure the space required for arranging the movable unit 2401, and the sense of unity between the movable unit 2401 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 is further enhanced.

Further, the arm 2411 has a substantially "dogleg" shape, and the first arm portion 2411b extending substantially vertically from the back surface 2410a of the movable portion unit 2401 and the first arm portion 2411b bent with respect to the first arm portion 2411b. Since it is configured to include the two arm portions 2411c, it is possible to avoid the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 and dispose of it. That is, it is possible to rotate the movable unit 2401 without interfering with the sub liquid crystal unit 2350.

Further, since the sub liquid crystal screen PNS is shielded by the cooperation of the movable part unit 2401, the left movable part unit 2378, and the right movable part unit 2379, even if the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 is relatively large, it is surely shielded. Becomes possible. In particular, when the front surface of the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 is opened, the movable unit 2401 and the left movable unit 2378 and the right movable unit 2379 move in different directions, so that they are formed in front of the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. It is possible to evoke an image in which one shielded wall is dispersed, and it is possible to further enhance the visual fun.

In particular, the movable part unit 2401 has a front-view pentagonal shape with the left and right side surfaces protruding outward, and at the appearance position, the protruding portion is a “ku” in the left movable part unit 2378 and the right movable part unit 2379. It is joined so as to be fitted to the side surface of the character shape (see FIG. 171). Therefore, it is possible to evoke an image in which the movable portion unit 2401, the left movable portion unit 2378, and the right movable portion unit 2379 are integrally formed. Therefore, when the front of the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 is opened, the player can be surprised by the unexpected operation that these plurality of members are dispersed, and the impact can be further enhanced.

Next, the configuration of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 183 to 219. FIG. 183 is a perspective view of the back unit viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 184 is a perspective view of the back unit viewed diagonally from the front. Further, FIG. 185 is a perspective view of the shutter-type accessory of the back unit viewed diagonally from the front, FIG. 186 is a perspective view of the shutter-type accessory disassembled and viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 187 is a perspective view. FIG. 188 is a perspective view of the left inner shutter of the shutter-type accessory disassembled and viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 188 is a perspective view of the left inner shutter viewed diagonally from the rear, and an enlarged view of a main part thereof. FIG. , A perspective view of the decorative plate of the left inner shutter viewed diagonally from the front, and an enlarged view of the main part thereof. FIG. 190 is a perspective view of the right inner shutter of the shutter type accessory viewed diagonally from the front, FIG. 191. Is a perspective view of the left outer shutter of the shutter type accessory disassembled and viewed diagonally from the front, FIG. 192 is a perspective view of the right outer shutter of the shutter type accessory viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 193 is a perspective view. It is a perspective view of the drive unit of the shutter type accessory disassembled and viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 194 is a perspective view of the shutter type accessory when each shutter is opened and viewed diagonally from the front.

Further, FIG. 195 is a perspective view of the lower accessory unit viewed diagonally from the front, FIG. 196 is a perspective view of the lower accessory unit disassembled and viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 197 is a lower view. FIG. 198 is a perspective view of the lower drive unit of the side accessory unit disassembled and viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 198 is a perspective view of the distribution effect device of the lower drive unit disassembled and viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 199 is a perspective view of the distribution portion of the distribution effect device disassembled and viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 200 is a perspective view of the swing drive unit of the distribution effect device viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 201 is a perspective view of the swing drive unit viewed diagonally from the rear, FIG. 202 is a perspective view of the lower drive unit unit when the elevating mechanism is disassembled and viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 203 is a perspective view of the elevating mechanism. FIG. 204 is a front view of the lower drive unit unit showing a state in which a game ball is supplied to the distribution effect device, and FIG. 205 is a front view of the distribution effect device. FIG. 206 is a front view of the lower drive unit unit showing a raised state, FIG. 206 is a front view of the lower drive unit showing a state in which the distribution unit of the distribution effect device is tilted to the left, and FIG. 207 is a front view of the lower drive unit. , Is a front view of the lower drive unit unit showing a state in which the distribution unit of the distribution effect device is tilted to the right, and FIG. 208 is a perspective view of the game medium supply mechanism of the lower accessory unit as viewed diagonally from the front. 209 is a perspective view of the game medium supply mechanism disassembled and viewed diagonally from the front, FIG. 210 is a perspective view of the game medium supply mechanism disassembled and viewed diagonally from the rear, and FIG. 211 is a perspective view. , FIG. 212 is a perspective view of the passage forming unit of the lower accessory unit viewed diagonally from the front, FIG. 212 is a perspective view of the passage forming unit viewed diagonally from the rear, and FIG. 213 is a return passage of the passage forming unit. FIG. 214 is a perspective view showing the operation, and FIG. 214 is a perspective view showing the operation of the passage forming unit by the discharge passage.

Further, FIG. 215 is a perspective view of another configuration of the back box unit viewed diagonally from the front, FIG. 216 is a perspective view of the other configuration viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 217 is a horizontal view. FIG. 218 is a perspective view of the decorative unit disassembled and viewed diagonally from the front, FIG. 218 is a perspective view of the movable decorative portion of the horizontal decoration unit disassembled and viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 219 is a disassembled horizontal base member. It is a perspective view seen diagonally from the front.

As shown in FIGS. 183 and 184, the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 600, and mainly supports the liquid crystal display device 1400 at a position separated from the game panel 600 to the rear side by a predetermined distance. In the back box 3001 and the back box 3001, a shutter-type accessory 3002 arranged in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400, a lower accessory unit 3003 arranged in the front lower side of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and a liquid crystal display. It is configured to include a horizontal decoration unit 3004 arranged on the front left side and the front right side of the device 1400.

As shown in FIG. 184, the back box 3001 is formed in a box shape with the front side open, and is provided with a plurality of flange-shaped fixing portions 3001a protruding outward at the front end, via the fixing portions 3001a. It is fixed to the rear side of the game panel 600. Further, the back box 3001 has a rectangular opening 3001c formed substantially in the center of the rear wall 3001b, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 supported on the rear side can be visually recognized through the opening 3001c. .. Further, the back box 3001 is formed with a shutter-type accessory 3002, a lower accessory unit 3003, and an attachment portion for attaching and fixing each substrate and the like at appropriate positions.

The shutter type accessory 3002 will be described in detail. The shutter-type accessory 3002 is a sliding door-shaped accessory arranged in front of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the front of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is closed (see FIG. 183) and open (see FIG. 194). It is possible to switch.

As shown in FIGS. 185 and 186, the shutter type accessory 3002 includes four shutters, that is, a left inner shutter 3010, a right inner shutter 3030, a left outer shutter 3050, and a right outer shutter 3070, and above these shutters. A drive unit 3090 for individually moving each shutter and a lower support unit 3110 for slidably supporting each shutter are provided.

As shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, the left inner shutter 3010 is a decorative plate 3011 having a substantially rectangular front view made of a transparent synthetic resin member, and an upper electric plate separately arranged above and below the decorative plate 3011. It includes a decorative body 3012 and a lower illuminated body 3013.

By the way, as described above, if the left inner shutter 3010, which is a shielding member, is composed of a transparent decorative plate 3011 and an illumination body 3012, 3013 arranged on the front surface or the back surface thereof, a liquid crystal display is performed by the shielding member. Even when the front of the device 1400 is shielded, the illumination body 301, 3013 and the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be visually recognized by overlapping in the front-rear direction, and a three-dimensional and realistic effect can be enjoyed. Becomes possible. However, when the transparent decorative plate 3011 is used as the shielding member, it is difficult to separately provide the upper illumination body 3012 and the lower illumination body 3013. This is because an electric wire for electrically connecting the upper illumination body 3012 and the lower illumination body 3013 is required, but when a light-transmitting decorative plate 3011 is used, the electric wire is decorated. This is because even when wiring is performed on the back side of the plate 3011, the electric wire can be visually recognized from the player side through the decorative plate 3011, which may impair the appearance.

On the other hand, in this example, a strip-shaped flat cable 3014 (see the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 189) is used as the electric wire, and the flat cable 3014 is wired along the left side surface of the decorative plate 3011. Therefore, the thick portion (that is, the side surface) of the flat cable 3014 faces the player, and the thick portion overlaps with the left edge of the decorative plate 3011, so that it is extremely inconspicuous from the player's side. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the appearance due to the electric wire. In particular, the width of the flat cable 3014 is shorter than the thickness of the decorative plate 3011 (that is, the width of the side surface) so that the end portion of the flat cable 3014 in the width direction does not protrude forward from the front surface of the decorative plate 3011. It has become.

Further, the upper lighting body 3012 and the lower lighting body 3013 are arranged so as to be in contact with the left edge portion of the decorative plate 3011, whereby the flat cable 3014 wired along the left side surface is connected to the decorative plate. It is possible to connect to the upper illumination body 3012 and the lower illumination body 3013 without passing through the front surface or the back surface of the 3011.

Further, the upper lighting body 3012 and the lower lighting body 3013 include an upper LED substrate 3015 and a lower LED substrate 3016 arranged on the back surface of the decorative plate 3011, and the upper LED substrate 3015 and the lower LED substrate 3016 Are connected by a flat cable 3014. In particular, the flat cable 3014 is connected to the back surface of the upper LED substrate 3015 and the lower LED substrate 3016 (see FIG. 188). Thereby, no matter which part of the upper LED board 3015 and the lower LED board 3016 is connected to the flat cable 3014, it is possible to shield the flat cable 3014 at the connecting part. A diffused reflection surface 3018a is formed on the decorative plate 3011 in front of the upper LED substrate 3015 and the lower LED substrate 3016, and the light radiated from the upper LED substrate 3015 and the lower LED substrate 3016 is diffused to omit the surface. It is possible to make the light emitting decoration uniform. Further, according to this, the appearances of the upper LED substrate 3015 and the lower LED substrate 3016 are also unclear, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the light emitting decoration.

Further, as shown in FIG. 188, a recess 3017 for accommodating the upper LED substrate 3015 and the lower LED substrate 3016 is formed on the back surface of the decorative plate 3011, and light is radiated from the inside of the decorative plate 3011. It has become like. That is, it is possible to make the decorative plate 3011 itself appear to be shining. Further, on the surface of the decorative plate 3011 corresponding to the upper LED substrate 3015 and the lower LED substrate 3016, a ridge portion 3018 protruding toward the player side is formed, and an upper frame shape surrounding the ridge portion 3018 is formed. A decorative body 3019 and a lower frame-shaped decorative body 3020 are provided. Therefore, even when the decorative plate 3011 is relatively thin, it is possible to form a recess 3017 for accommodating the upper LED substrate 3015 and the lower LED substrate 3016 on the back surface side, and the upper frame-shaped decoration. The body 3019 and the lower frame-shaped decorative body 3020 make it possible to emphasize the light emitting portion and enhance the effect of the light emitting effect.

By the way, when the flat cable 3014 is wired along the left side surface of the decorative plate 3011, the flat cable 3014 extends from the left side surface toward the upper illumination body 3012 and the lower illumination body 3013 (bending portion). Since the orientation of the surface changes in, the flat cable 3014 is in a twisted state. Therefore, the flat cable 3014 may be conspicuous in the twisted portion. On the other hand, in this example, as shown in FIG. 188, the ends of the upper frame-shaped decorative body 3019 and the lower frame-shaped decorative body 3020 project outward from the left side surface of the decorative plate 3011, and the protruding portions thereof. The twisted portion of the flat cable 3014 is shielded by.

By the way, when the flat cable 3014 is separated from the left side surface of the decorative plate 3011, the flat cable 3014 may be in a floating state and may be conspicuous. On the other hand, in this example, as shown in FIG. 189, a groove forming portion 3021 for holding the flat cable 3014 is formed on the left side surface of the decorative plate 3011. The groove forming portion 3021 is integrally formed with the decorative plate 3011, and by forming a groove-shaped gap S with the side surface of the decorative plate 3011, it is flat only by inserting the flat cable 3014 into the gap S. It is possible to hold the cable 3014. By the way, when the configuration in which the flat cable 3014 is inserted into the gap S formed by the groove forming portion 3021 is adopted, it is necessary to pull out the end side portion of the flat cable 3014 from the inside of the gap S to the outside. If the flat cable 3014 is pulled out toward the front or the rear of the 3011, the flat cable 3014 is twisted at that portion, and a relatively large gap S is required to accommodate the flat cable 3014. However, if the width of the gap S becomes large, it becomes difficult to stably hold the flat cable 3014, and the appearance of the flat cable 3014 may become conspicuous. On the other hand, in this example, since the outlets 3021a of the flat cable 3014 are formed at both ends of the groove, the flat cable 3014 can be pulled out straight, and the width of the gap S is adjusted to the thickness of the flat cable 3014. It is possible to set it to the minimum size. Further, the front side of the gap S into which the flat cable 3014 is inserted is open and the back side is closed. Therefore, the flat cable 3014 can be inserted into the gap S from the front, and when the flat cable 3014 is wired after the decorative plate 3011 is assembled, the wiring work can be performed from the front. Further, the back surface side of the gap S is closed, and the flat cable 3014 can be wired at the correct position simply by pushing the flat cable 3014.

Further, as shown in FIG. 187, a rack 3023 is arranged on the upper side of the decorative plate 3011 via an upper holder 3022 with the longitudinal direction as the left-right horizontal direction. Further, on the back surface of the upper holder 3022, a cable retainer 3024 for supporting a cable (not shown) for supplying electricity to the upper illumination body 3012 from above the left inner shutter 3010 is provided. The upper illumination body 3012 is formed so as to be in contact with the upper end of the decorative plate 3011, so that the cable connected to the upper illumination body 3012 from the outside is not visible from the player side. Further, a pair of lower rollers 3026 are rotatably provided in the lower part of the decorative plate 3011 via the lower holder 3025 with the axial direction as the vertical direction.

On the other hand, the right inner shutter 3030 is arranged on the right side of the left inner shutter 3010, and the side surface can be abutted against the left inner shutter 3010. The configuration of the right inner shutter 3030 is the same as that of the left inner shutter 3010, and as shown in FIG. 190, the transparent decorative plate 3031 and the upper illumination body separately arranged above and below the decorative plate 3031. The 3032 and the lower illumination body 3033 are provided with a flat cable 3034 for electrically connecting the upper illumination body 3032 and the lower illumination body 3033. Further, the upper illumination body 3032 and the lower illumination body 3033 include an upper LED substrate and a lower LED substrate (neither of which is shown) arranged on the back surface of the decorative plate 3011. Further, a ridge portion 3038 having a diffused reflection surface 3038a is formed on the upper LED substrate and the decorative plate 3031 in front of the lower LED substrate, and the upper frame-shaped decorative body 3039 and the lower frame surrounding the ridge portion 3038 are formed. A shape decoration body 3040 is provided. The upper lighting body 3032 and the lower lighting body 3033 are provided on the decorative plate 3011 of the left inner shutter 3010 when the left inner shutter 3010 and the right inner shutter 3030 are butted against each other. And the lower illumination body 3013 are configured to form a series of patterns, respectively.

Further, on the upper side of the right inner shutter 3030, a rack 3043 is arranged via an upper holder 3042 with the longitudinal direction as the left-right horizontal direction. Further, on the back surface of the upper holder 3042, a cable retainer (not shown) for supporting a cable (not shown) for supplying electricity to the upper illumination body 3032 from above the left inner shutter 3040 is provided. .. Further, a pair of lower rollers 3046 are rotatably provided at the lower portion of the decorative plate 3031 via the lower holder 3045.

The decorative plate 3031 of the right inner shutter 3030 is also formed with a groove forming portion 3041 for holding the flat cable 3034 in the same manner as the decorative plate 3011 of the left inner shutter 3010, but the decorative plate 3031 has a decorative plate. It is formed on the right side surface, which is the side surface opposite to 3011. That is, in the decorative plate 3031 arranged on the right side, the flat cable 3034 is wired along the right side surface, and in the decorative plate 3011 arranged on the left side, the flat cable 3014 is wired along the left side surface. Therefore, even if the left and right decorative plates 3011, 3031 are butted against each other, it is possible to prevent the flat cables 3014 and 3034 from being sandwiched between the pair of decorative plates 3011, 3031, and eventually the flat cables 3014 and 3034 are damaged. It is possible to prevent it.

On the other hand, the left outer shutter 3050 is arranged on the left side of the left inner shutter 3010 and is provided so as to be retractable with respect to the left inner shutter 3010. The configuration of the left outer shutter 3050 is similar to that of the left inner shutter 3010, except that there is only one illumination body, and along with this, the electric wire corresponding to the flat cable 3014 and the groove forming portion 3021 The configuration corresponding to is no longer necessary. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 191, it includes a transparent decorative plate 3051 and a zigzag-shaped illuminated body 3052 provided on the decorative plate 3051. The illumination body 3052 is composed of an LED substrate 3055 housed in a recess 3057 on the back surface side of the decoration plate 3051, a ridge portion 3058 protruding from the surface of the decoration plate 3051, and a frame-shaped decoration body 3059 provided around the protrusion 3058. It is configured. Further, on the upper side of the decorative plate 3051, an upper front cover 3061 and an upper holder 3062, and a rack 3063 extending in the left-right horizontal direction are provided. A cable (not shown) for supplying power from above the left outer shutter 3050 is connected to the LED board 3055, and the cable is supported by a cable retainer 3064 attached to the front surface of the upper front cover 3061. ing. Further, a pair of lower rollers 3066 are provided below the decorative plate 3051 via the lower holder 3065.

By the way, when the left inner shutter 3010 and the left outer shutter 3050 are in the closed position, the decorative plate 3051 forms a continuous partition surface with respect to the decorative plate 3011 of the left inner shutter 3010, and the end portion of the decorative plate 3051 is formed. , The flat cable 3014 is arranged so as to overlap in front of the side surface portion (groove forming portion 3021) of the decorative plate 3011 to which the flat cable 3014 is wired. Therefore, the flat cable 3014 can be shielded by the decorative plate 3051. Since the decorative plate 3051 is also transparent, the flat cable 3014 can be visually recognized through the decorative plate 3051. However, the appearance of the flat cable 3014 becomes unclear through the decorative plate 3051, and the flat cable 3014 becomes more conspicuous. It is possible to prevent it.

On the other hand, the right outer shutter 3070 is arranged on the right side of the right inner shutter 3030 and is provided so as to be retractable with respect to the right inner shutter 3030. The configuration of the right outer shutter 3070 is the same as that of the left outer shutter 3050, and has a line-symmetrical shape. That is, as shown in FIG. 192, the transparent decorative plate 3071 and the zigzag-shaped illuminated body 3072 provided on the decorative plate 3071 are provided, and the illuminated body 3072 is a recess on the back surface side of the decorative plate 3071 (not shown). It is composed of an LED substrate (not shown) housed in (not shown), a ridge portion 3078 protruding from the surface of the decorative plate 3071, and a frame-shaped decorative body 3079 provided around the ridge portion 3078. Further, on the upper side of the decorative plate 3071, an upper front cover 3081 and an upper holder 3082, and a rack 3083 extending in the left-right horizontal direction are provided. Further, a cable retainer 3084 for supporting the cable connected to the LED substrate is provided on the front surface of the upper front cover 3061. Further, a pair of lower rollers 3086 are provided below the decorative plate 3071 via the lower holder 3085.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 186 and 193, the drive unit 3090 is configured to individually drive the left inner shutter 3010, the right inner shutter 3030, the left outer shutter 3050, and the right outer shutter 3070. More specifically, the racks 3023, 3043, which are provided above the shutters 3010, 3030, 3050, 3070 (hereinafter referred to as "each shutter 3010, etc.") by the guide lower portion 3091 and the guide upper portion 3092, which are stacked vertically. The 3063, 3083 are slidably supported in the left-right direction, and a mechanism for linearly moving the respective racks 3023, 3043, 3063, 3083 left and right is arranged on the upper side of the guide upper portion 3092. Specifically, on the left side of the upper surface of the guide upper portion 3092, there are a box-shaped left motor base 3093, a left inner motor 3094 attached to the left motor base 3093 to apply power to the left inner shutter 3010, and a left motor base 3093. A left outer motor 3095, which is attached and applies power to the left outer shutter 3050, is arranged. Further, a gear 3096 is connected to the left inner motor 3094 and the left outer motor 3095 so that the rotational force is transmitted to the pinion 3097 meshed with the rack 3023 of the left inner shutter 3010 and the rack 3063 of the left outer shutter 3050. It has become. The pinion 3097 penetrates the guide upper part 3092 and the guide lower part 3091 and meshes with the racks 3023 and 3063. Further, the open side surface of the left side motor base 3093 is closed by the lid body 3098.

On the upper right side of the upper surface of the guide 3092, there are two right motor bases 3099, a right inner motor 3100 attached to the right motor base 3099 to give power to the right inner shutter 3030, and a right outer shutter 3070 attached to the right motor base 3099. A right outer motor 3101 that gives power to the motor 3101 is arranged. Further, a gear 3102 is connected to the right inner motor 3100 and the right outer motor 3101 so that the rotational force is transmitted to the pinion 3103 meshed with the rack 3043 of the right inner shutter 3030 and the rack 3083 of the right outer shutter 3070. It has become. Further, the open side surface of the right motor base 3099 is closed by the lid 3104.

Further, four photosensors 3105 for detecting an open state (origin position) of each shutter 3010 or the like are provided near the four corners of the guide upper portion 3092.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 186, the lower support portion 3110 that supports the lower portion of each shutter 3010 or the like includes the middle support portion 3111, the left front support portion 3112 arranged on the front left side of the middle support portion 3111, and the middle support portion 3112. It is composed of a right front support portion 3113 arranged on the front right side of the portion 3111 and a rear support portion 3114 arranged on the rear surface of the middle support portion 3111. The lower roller 3066 of the left outer shutter 3050 is inserted between the left front support portion 3112 and the middle support portion 3111, and the lower roller 3086 of the right outer shutter 3070 is inserted between the right front support portion 3113 and the middle support portion 3111. Is inserted, and the left outer shutter 3050 and the right outer shutter 3070 are slidably supported between the closed position (see FIG. 185) and the open position (see FIG. 194). Further, the lower roller 3026 of the left inner shutter 3010 and the lower roller 3046 of the right inner shutter 3030 are inserted between the rear support portion 3114 and the middle support portion 3111, and the left inner shutter 3010 is inserted. The right inner shutter 3030 is slidably supported between a closed position (see FIG. 185) in which the shutters are butted against each other and an open position (see FIG. 194) separated from each other.

In this way, each shutter 3010 or the like moves in the left-right direction between the open position and the closed position and is configured in a sliding door shape. Therefore, in the closed position, the liquid crystal display device 1400 behind the shutter 3011 or the like is passed through the decorative plate 3011 or the like. In the open position, the liquid crystal display device 1400 can be visually recognized without going through the decorative plate 3011 or the like. Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the operation of each shutter 3010 and the like, and to greatly enhance the effect of the effect. In particular, at the closed position, the plurality of illuminated bodies and the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400d can be visually recognized in an overlapping manner, and it is possible to perform a three-dimensional and highly realistic effect.

Next, the lower accessory unit 3003 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 183, the lower accessory unit 3003 is arranged below the front side of the shutter-type accessory 3002, and performs a distribution effect using a game ball in an effect area partitioned from the game area 605. It is possible. As shown in FIGS. 195 and 196, the lower accessory unit 3003 includes a lower drive unit 3120 that performs a distribution effect of the game ball, and a guide member 3131 of the lower drive unit 3120 that stores the game ball. The game medium supply mechanism 3121, which supplies the game balls to (described later), and the passage forming unit 3122, which forms a passage or the like for collecting the game balls flowing out from the lower drive unit 3120 and returning the game balls to the game medium supply mechanism 3121, It can be roughly divided.

First, as shown in FIG. 197, the lower drive unit 3120 supports the distribution effect device 3125 for distributing the supplied game balls in the left-right direction and the distribution effect device 3125 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. The distribution effect device 3125 is composed of an elevating mechanism 3126 that raises and lowers the distribution effect device 3125 between the upper stop position (also referred to as an application position) and the lower stop position (also referred to as a standby position). As shown in FIG. 198, the distribution effect device 3125 swings the distribution unit 3130 and the distribution unit 3130 that swing in the left-right direction about the pin 3138 (see FIG. 199) provided in the central portion. It is configured to include a swing drive unit 3145 for guiding the game balls distributed together with the player. Note that FIG. 198 shows a state in which the decorative portion 3146 arranged on the front surface of the swing drive portion 3145 is removed for convenience of explanation.

As shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the distribution portion 3130 includes a pseudo shelf portion 3132 having a guide member 3131 at the upper portion and a decorative member arranged on the front surface of the pseudo shelf portion 3132 and below the guide member 3131. The upper decorative portion 3133 and the lower decorative portion 3137 which is a decorative member arranged under the upper decorative portion 3133 are provided. An arcuate rolling surface 3131a capable of rolling the game ball in the left-right direction is formed on the upper surface of the guiding member 3131, and when the distribution portion 3130 is tilted toward either the left or right, it rolls. It is possible to let the game ball flow down along the surface 3131a. A decorative frame 3136 of the upper decorative portion 3133 is arranged on the front surface of the guiding member 3131 so that the game ball does not deviate forward from the rolling surface 3131a. Further, the lower portion of the pseudo shelf portion 3132 has a shape in which the central portion in the left-right direction protrudes downward, and a cylindrical action portion 3132a penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at the lower end portion thereof, and a pin is formed. 3139 is inserted. Further, a tubular shaft portion 3132b protruding in the front-rear direction is formed at a position above the action portion 3132a at the center in the left-right direction of the pseudo shelf portion 3132, and a swing drive portion 3145 (FIG. 200) is formed via a pin 3138. (See) is connected to the central axis 3151a. That is, the pseudo shelf portion 3132 is supported so as to be swingable around the shaft portion 3132b, and by applying a force to the acting portion 3132a, the pseudo shelf portion 3132 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise. There is. Further, a plurality of bushes 3140 and bush retainers 3141 are provided on the back surface of the pseudo shelf portion 3132, and arc-shaped guide portions 3151b formed on both left and right sides of the rear plate 3151 of the base member 3150 (see FIG. 200). By being fitted into, the pseudo shelf portion 3132 can be smoothly swung, and the swing range (rotation angle) can be limited.

The upper decorative portion 3133 includes a front decoration 3135 in the shape of decorative characters and a decorative frame 3136 provided on the back side thereof, and an LED substrate and a lens (both are shown) that irradiate light toward the front decoration 3135 inside the front decoration 3135. Not) is housed. Further, the lower decorative portion 3137 has a shape that imitates the appearance of the character.

As shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, the swing drive unit 3145 includes a base member 3150, a left rack 3160 arranged on the left side of the base member 3150, and a right rack 3161 arranged on the right side of the base member 3150. The left relay board 3163 and the right relay board 3164 arranged in the lower part of the back surface of the base member 3150, and the light toward the guide member 3131 of the pseudo shelf portion 3132 arranged slightly above the lower part of the front surface of the base member 3150. The left LED substrate 3165 and the right LED substrate 3166 are provided. Further, in the base member 3150, the above-mentioned central shaft 3151a is formed so as to project forward at the central position of the rear plate 3151, and a pair of guide portions 3151b face each other on the circumference centered on the central shaft 3151a. Is formed. Further, a plurality of wall portions 3152 are projected forward on the lateral side of the guide portion 3151b, and these wall portions 3152 form a first transport passage 3153 on the left end side of the rear plate 3151. A second transport passage 3154 is formed on the right end side of the rear plate 3151. In the first transport passage 3153, a first inflow port 3153a that opens toward the right side (inside) is formed at the upper end portion, and the lower end portion of the first transport passage 3153 is bent at a substantially right angle to the right side (inside). It has a shape. Most of the front surface of the first transport passage 3153 is closed by the decorative portion 3146 (see FIG. 198), and only the lower end portion is open. That is, the first outlet 3153b is formed at the lower end portion, and the game ball that has entered the first inlet 3153a and is guided by the first transport passage 3153 flows forward from the first outlet 3153b. The first inflow port 3153a is formed at a height that communicates with the left end of the guide member 3131 of the pseudo shelf portion 3132 when the pseudo shelf portion 3132 described above rotates in the counterclockwise direction.

Further, the second transport passage 3154 is a substantially linear passage formed in the vertical direction, and a second inflow port 3154a, which opens toward the left side (inside), is formed at the upper end portion and at the lower end portion. Is formed with a second outlet 3154b that opens forward. The front portion of the second transport passage 3154 is also closed by the decorative portion 3146 (see FIG. 198). That is, the game ball that has entered the second inflow port 3154a and is guided by the second transport passage 3154 flows forward from the second inflow outlet 3154b. The second inflow port 3154a is formed at a height that communicates with the right end of the guide member 3131 of the pseudo shelf portion 3132 when the pseudo shelf portion 3132 rotates clockwise. Further, the second outlet 3154b is formed at a position higher than the first outlet 3153b of the first transport passage 3153.

Further, in the lower part of the base member 3150, a swing mechanism 3170 for applying a rotational force to the operating portion 3132a of the pseudo shelf portion 3132 (see FIG. 199) is provided. The swing mechanism 3170 includes a motor 3171 arranged at the lower part of the back surface of the rear plate 3151 and rotating the axial direction of the rotation shaft in the front-rear direction, a rotation shaft of the motor 3171, and a pin 3139 mounted on the pseudo shelf portion 3132 (see FIG. ) Is provided, and the rotation direction of the pseudo shelf portion 3132 can be switched by changing the rotation direction of the motor 3171. A flexible retainer 3174 for supporting the wiring is provided on the lower front surface of the base member 3150. Here, it can be said that the swing mechanism 3170 is a driving means for operating the pseudo shelf portion 3132.

On the other hand, the elevating mechanism 3126 includes a motor base 3127 as shown in FIGS. 202 and 203. The motor base 3127 has a substantially flat rear plate 3127a, a left sliding portion 3127b formed on the left side thereof and slidably supporting the left rack 3160 of the swing driving portion 3145 (see FIG. 197), and a rear plate 3127a. The right sliding portion 3127c formed on the right side of the swing drive unit 3145 to slidably support the right rack 3161, the left motor accommodating portion 3127d formed on the left side of the left sliding portion 3127b, and the right sliding portion. It includes a right-side motor accommodating portion 3127e formed on the right side of 3127c. Further, a left relay board 3128a and a right relay board 3128b are arranged on the back surface of the rear plate 3127a, and the left motor 3176 housed in the left motor housing section 3127d and the right motor housed in the right motor housing section 3127e. The drive signal to 3177 is relayed. The left motor housing portion 3127d is covered by the left motor cover 3176b, and the right motor housing portion 3127e is covered by the right motor cover 3177b. Further, a gear 3176a is connected to the left motor 3176, and the gear 3176a is disposed so as to project into the left sliding portion 3127b and is meshed with the left rack 3160 in the swing drive portion 3145. Similarly, a gear (not shown) is also connected to the right motor 3177, and this gear is arranged so as to project into the right sliding portion 3127c and is meshed with the right rack 3161 in the swing drive portion 3145. ing. Therefore, when the left motor 3176 and the right motor 3177 are rotated at the same time, power is transmitted via the gear 3176a to cause the left rack 3160 and the right rack 3161 to move straight in the vertical direction, that is, the distribution effect device 3125 is straightened. It can be raised and lowered.

Further, on the upper side of the left sliding portion 3127b of the motor base 3127, the game ball supplied from the game medium supply mechanism 3121 (see FIG. A guide passage portion 3178 for guiding to the passage 3155) is provided. The front surfaces of the left sliding portion 3127b, the right sliding portion 3127c, and the guide passage portion 3178 are closed by the guide cover 3179.

With this configuration, when the distribution effect is performed by the distribution effect device 3125, the player can easily visually recognize the distribution effect from the lower stop position (see FIG. 204), which is difficult for the player to see. The distribution effect device 3125 can be raised to the upper stop position (see FIG. 205), and the game ball K can be distributed in the left-right direction at the upper stop position. That is, as shown in FIG. 206, when the distribution unit 3130 is rotated counterclockwise, the game ball K is rolled to the left by the guiding member 3131, and it is possible to enter the first inflow port 3153a. Become. The game ball K that has entered the first inflow port 3153a flows out from the first outflow port 3153b at the lower end thereof through the first transport passage 3153. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 207, when the distribution unit 3130 is rotated clockwise, the game ball is rolled to the right by the guiding member 3131 and can enter the second inflow port 3154a. .. The game ball K that has entered the second inflow port 3154a is discharged from the second outflow port 3154b at the lower end thereof through the second transport passage 3154. The game ball that has flowed out from the first outlet 3153b or the second outlet 3154b is returned to the game medium supply mechanism 3121 by the return passage 3211a (see FIG. 213), and details regarding this will be described later.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 208 to 210, the game medium supply mechanism 3121 stores a predetermined number of game balls and supplies the game balls to the guide member 3131 of the distribution effect device 3125 at the time of the distribution effect. A flat box-shaped base body 3180 composed of a base upper portion 3181 and a base lower portion 3182, a tubular guide portion 3183 as a substantially cylindrical passage forming member for guiding a game ball upward, and a tubular shape. It is configured to include a screw 3190 arranged in the guide portion 3183 to raise the game ball, and a drive mechanism 3199 to rotate the screw 3190 in the vertical direction. The tubular guide portion 3183 is erected on the upper portion 3181 of the base, and is formed by a front wall forming portion 3184 having a substantially semicircular cross section and a rear wall forming portion 3186 having a substantially semicircular cross section arranged on the rear side thereof. It is configured. An inflow port 3187 that opens rearward is formed in the lower part of the rear wall forming portion 3186, and the game ball is guided in a tubular shape through the lower passage portion 3197 that communicates with the return passage 3211a (see FIG. 213). It is designed to enter the part 3183. Further, a discharge port 3185 that opens forward is formed in the upper part of the front wall forming portion 3184, and the game ball conveyed by the screw 3190 is discharged from the discharge port 3185. The game ball released from the discharge port 3185 is sent to the guide passage portion 3178 (see FIG. 202) via the upper passage portion 3195. Further, passage sensors 3196 and 3198 for detecting the passage of the game ball are provided in the upper passage portion 3195 and the lower passage portion 3197, respectively.

The screw 3190 is arranged above the shaft portion 3191 which is columnar and has a large diameter engaging portion 3191a formed at the lower end, a spiral portion 3192 formed spirally around the shaft portion 3191, and the shaft portion 3191. It is composed of a rotating plate 3193 provided, and is erected in a state where the engaging portion 3191a is inserted into the opening 3181a of the base upper portion 3181. The notch 3193a formed in the rotating plate 3193 is for detecting the rotational position of the screw 3190.

The drive mechanism 3199 includes a motor 3200 mounted on the upper portion 3181 of the base, a motor gear 3201 arranged inside the base body 3180 and connected to a rotating shaft of the motor 3200, and an intermediate gear 3202 meshed with the motor gear 3201. , And a connecting gear 3203 having a protrusion 3203a that meshes with the intermediate gear 3202 and engages with the engaging portion 3191a of the screw 3190. The protrusion 3203a and the engaging portion 3191a are connected by the connecting pin 3204 in a fitted state.

As a result, the rotation of the motor 3200 is transmitted to the screw 3190 via the motor gear 3201, the intermediate gear 3202, and the connecting gear 3203 to rotate the screw 3190 in a certain direction, that is, the game ball flowing into the inflow port 3187. It is possible to carry it toward the discharge port 3185.

By the way, in the case where the distribution effect device 3125 is raised to the upper stop position and then the distribution effect is performed as described above, the game ball is moved upward in order to supply the game ball to the guidance member 3131 of the distribution effect device 3125. It must be lifted to a height corresponding to the stop position, and the height of the game medium supply mechanism 3121, that is, the size in the vertical direction becomes large, which may make it difficult to secure the arrangement space. Although it is conceivable to reduce the size by raising the position of the bottom of the game medium supply mechanism 3121, a return passage 3211a is communicated with the inflow port 3187 near the bottom of the game medium supply mechanism 3121 to connect the game ball. Since it is necessary to let the game medium supply mechanism flow down to the portion, the bottom portion of the game medium supply mechanism 3121 must be positioned downward to some extent, and it is difficult to reduce the size by the above configuration.

On the other hand, according to the configuration of this example, the game ball is placed on the guide member 3131 before the distribution effect device 3125 starts to rise (that is, in a state where the distribution effect device 3125 is stopped at the lower stop position (see FIG. 204)). It is supposed to be supplied. Therefore, the height at which the game ball is lifted can be made relatively low, and the game medium supply mechanism 3121 can be miniaturized. Further, even if the game ball is supplied on the guide member 3131, the rolling of the game ball on the guide member 3131 is restricted until the distribution effect device 3125 reaches the upper stop position. This makes it possible to prevent the game balls from being distributed before reaching the upper stop position, that is, before the distribution effect device 3125 becomes visible to the player.

In particular, in this example, the rolling surface 3131a of the guiding member 3131 is formed in a substantially arc shape, and the guiding member 3131 is held in a substantially horizontal state until it reaches the upper stop position. Therefore, when the game ball is supplied to the rolling surface 3131a of the guiding member 3131, the game ball is guided to the central portion in the left-right direction, which is the lowest position in the rolling surface 3131a, and stays at that position. become. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the game ball from deviating from the rolling surface 3131a, that is, the game ball is distributed while the distribution effect device 3125 is ascending.

Further, in this example, since the game ball is fed to the guide member 3131 from the left end side, the supply position of the game ball is lower than that of the guide member 3131 fed from above, and the height of the game medium supply mechanism 3121 is increased. Is even lower. By providing the guiding member 3131 with a rolling surface 3131a having a substantially arc shape, even when the game ball is sent from the end side of the guiding member 3131, the game ball can be guided to the central position of the guiding member 3131 and braked. It is possible.

Further, the game ball released from the game medium supply mechanism 3121 is guided to the end side of the guide member 3131 through the game ball guide passage 3155 (see FIG. 200). Since the game ball guide passage 3155 moves up and down integrally with the distribution effect device 3125, the game ball can be smoothly fed even if the stop position of the distribution effect device 3125 is slightly displaced. It becomes. For example, even if the distribution effect device 3125 starts to rise before the game ball is sent to the guide member 3131 of the distribution effect device 3125, if the game ball is supplied to the game ball guide passage 3155, then. , Can be fed onto the guiding member 3131.

Further, the guide member 3131 of the distribution effect device 3125 is arranged so as to be located behind the rolling surface (so-called stage) of the shelf upper stage 2372 in the first accessory unit 2370 (see FIG. 174) at the lower stop position. Has been done. Therefore, it is possible to evoke the image that the guiding member 3131 is a part of the stage, and it is possible to increase the impact on the stage. A transparent protective plate 2360 (see FIG. 161) is provided between the shelf upper stage 2372 and the guide member 3131, and the game area 605 in which the shelf upper stage 2372 is arranged and the effect in which the guide member 3131 is arranged. It is surely divided from the area so that the game ball does not jump into the production area.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 211 and 212, the passage forming unit 3122 includes a cover member 3210 that covers the front of the lower drive unit 3120 (see FIG. 196) and a return passage arranged on the upper back surface of the cover member 3210. It is configured to include a forming member 3211. As shown in FIGS. 212 and 213, the return passage forming member 3211 is provided with a return passage 3211a inside, and the game balls distributed by the distribution effect device 3125 are directed toward the inflow port 3187 of the game medium supply mechanism 3121. It is possible to let it flow down. Specifically, the return passage forming member 3211 is formed with a linear portion 3212 arranged diagonally, and a left-side projecting portion 3215 and a right-side projecting portion 3216 projecting upward from the linear portion 3212. The left protruding portion 3215 is provided with a first series of passages 3215a that communicate with the first outlet 3153b of the first transport passage 3153 when the distribution effect device 3125 is moved to the upper stop position, and the right protruding portion 3216 is provided with a first series of passages 3215a. When the distribution effect device 3125 moves to the upper stop position, a second communication port 3216a that communicates with the second outlet 3154b of the second transport passage 3154 is provided. That is, the game balls distributed to the first inflow port 3153a and the second inflow port 3154a are sent to the common return passage 3211a.

In this way, by combining the game medium supply mechanism 3121 that supplies the game ball to the distribution effect device 3125 and the return passage 3211a that returns the game ball distributed by the distribution effect device 3125 to the game medium supply mechanism 3121. , The circulation path J of the game ball is configured, which makes it possible to repeatedly perform the distribution effect while circulating the game ball. However, in the case where the distribution effect is repeatedly performed using the game ball enclosed in the circulation path J, if the surface of the game ball becomes dirty or the surface of the game ball rusts due to use, , The appearance of the game ball may be deteriorated, and the effect of the effect may be impaired. In particular, since the effect performed by the distribution effect device 3125 draws attention to the behavior of the game ball, the dirt and rust become conspicuous, which is a factor that reduces the visual interest. Further, since the work of enclosing the game balls is performed at the time of manufacturing the game machine, the game balls roll in the circulation path J during transportation after shipment, and the game balls collide with each other or the members in the circulation path J. A relatively loud noise may be generated by the collision with.

On the other hand, in this example, the game ball used in the game area 605 is taken in, and the game ball is replenished to the circulation path J. Specifically, the game ball winning the second starting port 2002 is sent to the supply port 3213, which is the upstream end of the return passage 3211a, via the supply passage 3220. Since the second starting port 2002 is arranged at a position higher than the upstream end of the return passage 3211a, the game ball winning the second starting port 2002 can naturally flow down toward the return passage 3211a. It is possible. In this way, since the game ball winning the second starting port 2002 is replenished to the circulation path J by the supply passage 3220, it is not necessary to pre-enclose the game ball in the circulation path J, and a collision sound is generated during transportation. It is possible to prevent damage due to collision. In particular, since the second starting port 2002 is sent to the return passage 3211a through the supply passage 3220 and is supplied to the game medium supply mechanism 3121 using the return passage 3211a, the second starting port 2002 is arranged at a position away from the game medium supply mechanism 3121. Despite this, the length of the supply passage 3220 can be made relatively short, and the overall configuration can be simplified.

By the way, in the case where the game balls winning in the second starting port 2002 are sent to the return passage 3211a through the supply passage 3220, the number of game balls in the circulation path J each time the game balls win in the second starting port 2002. However, since there is a limit to the number of game balls that can be stored in the game medium supply mechanism 3121, if the number is exceeded, the game balls will be stored in the return passage 3211a, and the game balls will be stored. It becomes difficult to circulate. In addition, a mechanism for distributing the game ball winning in the second starting port 2002 to the return passage 3211a and the discharge passage (not shown) is further provided, and the game ball is sent to the return passage 3211a side only when it is necessary to replenish the game ball. However, according to this, a passage switching mechanism for switching between the return passage 3211a and the discharge passage is required separately, which is not preferable because the overall configuration becomes complicated and the size increases.

On the other hand, in this example, an overflow mechanism is provided between the game medium supply mechanism 3121 and the return passage 3211a. Specifically, a lower passage portion 3197 (see FIG. 213) is arranged between the inflow port 3187 of the game medium supply mechanism 3121 and the return passage 3211a, and the bottom surface of the lower passage portion 3197 is rearward. Along with a downward slope, a discharge port 3197a is provided on the front side. That is, when the number of game balls stored near the inflow port 3187 of the game medium supply mechanism 3121 is within the allowable number, the game balls that have entered the lower passage portion 3197 follow the inclination of the bottom surface of the lower passage portion 3197. It is sent to the inflow port 3187 side, but when the number of stored game balls exceeds the allowable number, it overflows from the discharge port 3197a on the front surface of the lower passage portion 3197 and is discharged. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a large number of game balls from being stored in the return passage 3211a, and the second starting port 2002 and the return passage 3211a can be directly communicated with each other by the supply passage 3220 without providing a passage switching mechanism or the like. It will be possible. The game ball released from the discharge port 3197a rolls to the out ball passage 1119, and is outside the pachinko machine 1 (generally, an island recovery gutter) from the downstream end of the out ball passage 1119, that is, from below the rear surface of the game machine. ) Is discharged. That is, the supply passage 3220 and the game medium supply mechanism 3121 including the circulation path J prevent the game ball received in the second starting port 2002 from being discharged from the out ball passage 1119 as the game ball discharge mechanism. It can be said that it is a game ball storage mechanism that stores a number of game balls.

Further, in this example, the game balls in the circulation path J are discharged at a predetermined timing. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 212 and 214, a discharge passage 3218 is provided in the lower part of the back surface of the cover member 3210, and the communication port 3219 of the discharge passage 3218 is located at the lower stop position of the distribution effect device 3125. It is configured to communicate with the first outlet 3153b of the first transport passage 3153 when it moves to. Further, when the distribution effect device 3125 is in the lower stop position, the game medium supply mechanism 3121 is controlled at a predetermined timing (for example, immediately after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1), and the guidance member 3131 of the distribution effect device 3125 is controlled. It is designed to supply game balls on top. In particular, at this time, as shown in FIG. 214, the distribution unit 3130 of the distribution effect device 3125 is rotated counterclockwise so that the game ball enters the first inflow port 3153a. As a result, by supplying the game ball to the distribution effect device 3125 at the lower stop position, the game ball in the circulation path J can be discharged from the pachinko machine 1. In this way, since the passages (return passage 3211a and discharge passage 3218) communicating with the first outlet 3153b are switched according to the height of the distribution effect device 3125, a complicated configuration for switching each passage becomes unnecessary. It is possible to reduce the size as a whole. In particular, when the game ball is discharged, the game ball on the guiding member 3131 is guided toward the first inflow port 3153a, so that the discharge path of the game ball is specified and the discharge passage for the second transport passage 3154 is unnecessary. Become. Therefore, the discharge mechanism can be miniaturized and simplified. The game ball discharged from the discharge passage 3218 rolls to the out ball passage 1119, and is outside the pachinko machine 1 (generally, an island recovery gutter) from the downstream end of the out ball passage 1119, that is, from below the rear surface of the game machine. ) Is discharged.

Next, the horizontal decoration unit 3004 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 215 and 216, the horizontal decoration units 3004 are arranged on the left side and the right side of the back box 3001, respectively, and are provided with light emitting decoration and a part thereof is movable. Explaining in detail with reference to FIGS. 217 and 218, the horizontal decoration unit 3004 includes a decoration base 3250, a movable decoration portion 3251 arranged on the rear side thereof, and an upper illumination decoration arranged on the upper side and the lower side of the movable decoration part 3251. It is configured to include a portion 3253 and a lower illumination portion 3254. The decorative base 3250 is provided with illumination support portions 3250a and 3250b that support the upper illumination portion 3253 and the lower illumination portion 3254 at the top and bottom, and a notch 3250c is formed between these illumination support portions 3250a and 3250b. ing. The upper illuminated portion 3253 and the lower illuminated portion 3254 have a lens and an LED substrate (neither of which is shown) inside, and can be decorated by light emission.

On the other hand, the movable decorative portion 3251 includes a back base 3256, a solenoid 3257 arranged on the back base 3256, and a link 3260 which is rotatably supported with the axial direction in the vertical direction and is driven by a plunger 3258 of the solenoid 3257. , It is rotatably supported by a projecting piece 3256a of the back base 3256 and includes a pin 3259 and an inner decoration 3261 connected to a link 3260 via a shaft portion 3262. Further, a middle lens 3265 and an LED substrate 3266 are arranged inside the middle decoration 3261, and a red lens 3263 and a blue lens 3264 are provided through the side surface of the middle decoration 3261. That is, by operating the solenoid 3257, the middle decoration 3261 can be rotated via the link 3260, and the front surface of the middle decoration 3261 (the lighting state of the middle lens 3265) can be visually recognized and the middle decoration. It is possible to switch the side surface of the decoration 3261 (the lighting state of the red lens 3263 and the blue lens 3264) to a visible state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 215, a pair of horizontal base members 3240 are arranged on the rear side of the horizontal decoration unit 3004. As shown in FIG. 219, the horizontal base member 3240 arranged on the right side of the back box 3001 has a cover member 3270 and a game ball arranged on the lower right side of the cover member 3270 and winning a prize in the second starting port 2002 in the return passage 3211a. The supply passage 3220, the upper right LED substrate 3273 and the upper decoration 3276 arranged on the upper part of the cover member 3270, the large right LED substrate 3274 arranged on the front center part of the cover member 3270, and the small lower right LED. It is configured to include a substrate 3275. Further, a magnetic sensor 3277 for detecting an illegal act using a magnet or the like is embedded in the cover member 3270.

Further, as shown in FIG. 216, on the rear side of the back box 3001, a left relay board 3241 and a right relay board 3242 for relaying a drive signal to the horizontal base member 3240, and a liquid crystal guide 3243 for supporting the liquid crystal display device 1400. A lamp drive board 3245 for driving the LEDs mounted on each decorative board, a panel relay board 3247 for relaying a signal to the game panel 600, and a resistance board 3248 are attached. The lamp drive substrate 3245 is provided in a state of being housed in the substrate case 3246.

[3. Main board / peripheral board]
Subsequently, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 220. FIG. 220 is a block diagram of a main board and a peripheral board. As shown in the figure, the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a group of the main substrate 4000 and a group of peripheral substrates 4010, and various controls are shared by these two groups. The group of the main board 4000 includes a main control board 4100 that controls the game operation (progress of the game) and a payout control board 1186 that controls the payout of the game ball and the like. Further, the group of peripheral boards 4010 includes a peripheral control board 4140 that controls various effects during a game based on commands from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display device 1400 and a sub liquid crystal based on commands from the peripheral control board 4140. It includes a liquid crystal control board 4500 that controls the display of the effect image on the unit 2350.

[3-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 220, the main control board 4100 that controls the progress of the game includes a main control MPU 4100a as a microprocessor, a main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), and the above-mentioned. It includes a RAM clear switch 624a. The main control MPU4100a has a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a RAM for temporarily storing data, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system) and preventing fraud. It also has built-in functions for doing so.

The main control MPU4100a includes a first start port sensor 2011 that detects a game ball received in the first start port 2001, a second start port sensor 2349 that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2002, and a part thereof. The detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2014 is input via the main control I / O port 4100b, or to the gate sensor 2202, the special figure gate sensor 2502, the general winning opening sensor 2014, the count sensor 2013, and the back unit 3000. The detection signal from the attached magnetic sensor 3277 is input via the panel relay board 3247 attached to the game board 4 and the main control I / O port 4100b.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs drive signals to the start port solenoid 2344, the attacker solenoid 2016, and the grand prize opening solenoid 2315 via the main control I / O port 4100b and the panel relay board 3247. The first special symbol display 641, the second special symbol display 642, the first special symbol storage display 643, and the first through the main control I / O port 4100b, the panel relay board 3247, and the function display board 640a. (Ii) A drive signal is output to the special symbol storage display 644, the normal symbol display 645, the normal symbol storage display 646, the game status display 647, the round display 648, and the hold status display unit 3152 of the center accessory 2300. ..

In this way, when the main control MPU4100a executes the control program stored in the ROM based on such a detection signal, a drive signal is appropriately sent to various actuators such as the start port solenoid 2344 and the attacker solenoid 2016. It will be output, and as a result, various games performed by the pachinko machine 1 will proceed according to a predetermined procedure.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to the game (game information), various commands related to payout, etc. to the payout control board 1186 via the above-mentioned main drawer relay board 1107, or a pachinko machine from the payout control board 1186. Various commands and the like related to the state of 1 are received via the main drawer relay board 1107. Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 4140 of the peripheral board 4010 described later via the main control I / O port 4100b ( The boards of the main control board 4100 and the peripheral control board 4140 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown). The main control MPU 4100a will be described in detail later, but when it receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 1186, it formats these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control board 4140.

Although a detailed description thereof will be described later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 4100 from the power supply board 1136. The power supply board 1136 includes an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source that supplies power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. With this capacitor, the main control MPU4100a can store various information in its built-in RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. The stored various information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 624a of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 624a is also output to the payout control board 1186 via the main drawer relay board 1107.

Further, the main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 1136, and when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is output as a power failure warning. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, and is also transmitted to the payout control board 1186 and the like via a harness (not shown).

[3-2. Payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 220, the payout control board 1186 that controls the payout of the game ball includes the payout control unit 4110 that performs various controls related to the payout, the launch control unit 4120 that controls the launch of the launch motor 695 described above, and the above The error LED display 4130, the error release switch 4131, and the ball removal switch 4132 are provided.

As shown in FIG. 220, the payout control unit 4110 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 1186 includes a payout control MPU4110a as a microprocessor, a payout control I / O port 4110b as an I / O device, and a payout control. An external watchdog timer 4110c (hereinafter referred to as "external WDT4110c") that monitors whether or not the MPU 4110a is operating normally, a payout motor drive circuit 4110d that outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 815 described above, and It is configured with. The payout control MPU4110a has a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and also has a built-in function for preventing fraud.

The payout control MPU4110a will be described in detail later, but can receive various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to payout, and operate the RAM clear switch 624a from the main control board 4100. In addition to the signal (detection signal) being input, the detection signal from the full tank switch 916 is input, and the detection signals from the ball out switch 778, the counting switch 812 and the rotation angle switch 855 are relay terminals in the prize ball unit. It is input via the board 830.

When the payout control MPU4110a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100, the payout control MPU4110a outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4110d to the payout motor 815 based on the received various commands related to payout, or a ball removal switch. When the 4132 is operated, the payout motor drive circuit 4110d is used to discharge (pull out) the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740, which are described above based on this operation signal (detection signal). When a drive signal is output from the payout motor 815 or a ball lending request signal from a CR unit (ball lending machine) (not shown) is input via the CR unit terminal plate 1150b, the ball lending request signal is used for payout. When a drive signal is output from the motor drive circuit 4110d to the payout motor 815 or a detection signal from the full tank switch 916 is input, a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 4110d to the payout motor 815 is output based on this detection signal. It stops and the payout motor 815 is stopped.

Further, the payout control MPU4110a displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display 4130, transmits various commands indicating the status to the main control board 4100, or receives a detection signal from the counting switch 812. , Based on this detection signal, the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal plate 1150a. The external terminal plate 1150a is a portion that is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall), whereby the hall computer can use the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 or the pachinko machine. It becomes possible to grasp the game information of 1 and monitor the game of the player.

According to such a payout control MPU4110a, a drive signal is output to the payout motor 815 as described above by executing the control program stored in the ROM based on various commands related to the payout from the main control board 4100. As a result, the number of prize balls indicated by the above-mentioned command related to the received payout will be paid out.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 220, the launch control unit 4120 that controls the launch of the launch motor 695 on the payout control board 1186 includes an input circuit 4120a into which various signals are input and a transmission circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals. 4120b, a launch control circuit 4120c that outputs a reference pulse that determines the rotation speed of the launch motor 695 based on this clock signal, and a drive signal that outputs a drive signal to the launch motor 695 based on the reference pulse from the launch control circuit 4120c. It is configured to include a launch motor drive circuit 4120d. The launch control circuit 4120c controls the rotation speed of the launch motor 695 so that about 99.95 game balls are launched toward the game area 605 per minute based on the clock signal from the transmission circuit 4120b. .. That is, the movement of the above-mentioned hitting mallet 687 is controlled.

As described above, the handle device 460 (operation handle portion 410) has a touch sensor 420 and a launch stop switch 422 built-in, and when the rotation operation member 464 of the operation handle portion 410 is touched, the touch sensor is built. It is detected by 420, and when the single-shot button 421 is operated, it is detected by the firing stop switch 422. These detection signals will be described in detail later, but are input to the input circuit 4120a via the handle relay terminal plate 194 described above. Further, when the CR unit is electrically connected to the CR unit terminal plate 1150b, the CR connection signal is input to the input circuit 4120a via the CR unit terminal plate 1150b.

Various voltages are supplied to the payout control board 1186 from the power supply board 1136 in the same manner as in the main control board 4100. The power supply board 1136 includes a capacitor that supplies power to the payout control board 1186 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU4110a can store various payout information related to payout in its built-in RAM even when the power supply is cut off. The stored payout information is erased (cleared) from the built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 624a of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 220, the peripheral control board 4140 that performs the effect control on the peripheral board 4010 performs high-quality sound performance with the peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, the peripheral control ROM 4140b that stores various processing programs and various commands. It is configured to include a sound source IC 4140c and a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c is stored. The peripheral control MPU4140a has a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like.

The peripheral control MPU4140a has various input / output ports such as a parallel input / output port, a serial input / output port, and a watch dock timer (WDT), and when various commands are received from the main control board 4100, it is based on these various commands. , A lighting signal or a blinking signal is output to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 5. A lighting / blinking command on the door frame side is output to the lamp drive board 3167, or each light emitting decorative board 3606 provided in the game board 4 is output. A game board side lighting / blinking command that outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal to the LED of is output to the lamp drive board 3167, or a left rotating light motor 245 and a right rotating light of the top lamp lighting unit 200 provided in the door frame 5. A door frame side motor drive command that outputs a rotation drive signal to the motor 265 and the central rotary light motor 285 is output to the motor drive board 3013a, and the left and right drive motors 3042, drive motor 3061, and drive provided in the game board 4 are provided. A control signal (sound command) indicating sound information extracted from the sound ROM 4140d or output to the motor drive board 3013a to output a rotation drive signal to the drive motor 3108, the drive motor 3112, and the drive motor 3200. Is output to the sound source IC 4140c, or a display command indicating a screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 is output to the liquid crystal control board 4500.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the liquid crystal control board 4500 is performed by the serial input / output port. BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, initial data, door frame side lighting / blinking command, game board side lighting / blinking command, door frame side motor drive command, game board side motor drive command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the lamp drive board 3167 or the motor drive board 3013a. , It is performed by a plurality of serial input / output ports different from the display command, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

The lamp drive board 3167 sends a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command to the decorative boards 126, 190, 206, 224 provided on the door frame 5 via the sub drawer relay board 1108. , 225, 296, etc., or received a lighting signal or blinking signal based on the lighting / blinking command on the game board side, each light emitting decorative board 3606 provided on the game board 4, or the glass unit 450 of the door frame 5. Is output to the LED 453a of the glass decorative substrate 453 in the above. On the other hand, the motor drive board 3013a sends a rotation drive signal based on the received door frame side motor drive command via the sub drawer relay board 1108 to the left rotation light motor 245 and the right rotation light motor 265 provided on the door frame 5. , And various motors 2380, 2416, 3094, 3095, 3100, 3101, 3171, which are provided in the game board 4 with rotation drive signals based on the game board side motor drive command output or received to the central revolving light motor 285. It outputs to 3176, 3177, 3200.

Further, the peripheral control MPU4140a is a position detection sensor (photo) that detects the movable positions of the first accessory unit 2370, the second accessory unit 2400, the shutter type accessory 3002, and the lower accessory unit 3003 of the game board 4, respectively. The detection signals from the sensors 2382, 2422, 3105, etc.) are input via the motor drive substrate 3013a, respectively, and the original position is grasped based on these detection signals. Further, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the detection signals from the left rotation position detection sensor 250, the right rotation position detection sensor 270, and the center rotation position detection sensor 290 that detect the rotation positions of the rotation lamps 244, 264, 284 of the door frame 5 respectively. , The sub-drawer relay board 108 and the motor drive board 3013a are input respectively, and the rotation positions of the rotating lights 224, 264 and 284 are grasped based on these detection signals. Further, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control board 4500 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal control board 4500, or the operation button unit 370 provided in the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 is provided. Operation detection signals from the main button sensor 376 and the sub button sensor 378 that detect the operation of the main button 371 and the sub button 372 are input via the sub drawer relay board 1108 and the lamp drive board 3167. The main button 371 is provided with a vibrating body 371c, and a drive signal is sent from the peripheral control MPU 4140a to the vibrating body 371c via the sub drawer relay board 1108 and the lamp drive board 3167. There is.

The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the sound command output from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and via the lamp drive board 3167 and the sub drawer relay board 1108, the side speaker 121 and the lower speaker 391 of the door frame 5 Controls the flow of music and sound effects that match various effects.

The peripheral control board 4140 also includes an external watchdog timer (external WDT) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU 4140a uses the built-in watchdog timer (built-in WDT) and the external WDT together to perform peripheral control. It is diagnosing whether the system of MPU4140a is out of control.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 4140 according to this embodiment includes a real-time clock control unit 4190 (hereinafter, also referred to as an RTC control unit 4190). FIG. 221A is a diagram for explaining a real-time clock function among the functions of the peripheral control board 4140, and some configurations are omitted for convenience of explanation. FIG. 221 (b) is a diagram for explaining the backup power supply function of the RAM among the functions of the peripheral control board 4140, and some configurations are omitted for convenience of explanation. ..

<Real-time clock function>
As shown in FIG. 221 (a), the peripheral control MPU 4140a on the peripheral control board 4140 includes a built-in real-time clock 4140aa (hereinafter, built-in RTC4140aa). The built-in RTC 4140aa may be included in the timer function for measuring the time such as the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation display pattern in the peripheral control board 4140 of the present embodiment described later.

The RTC control unit 4190 includes a real-time clock 4192 (hereinafter referred to as RTC4192), a battery 4194, and a RAM 4196. The RTC4192 is composed of circuits such as a register circuit, a clock input circuit, a clock output circuit, an interrupt output circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a control circuit. The RTC4192 can output the current calendar information and time information. Calendar information includes information about the date, such as "year", "month", "day", "day of the week". The time information includes information about the time, for example, information such as "hour", "minute", and "second". The RAM 4196 stores information necessary for the operation of the RTC 4192. The battery 4194 is connected to the RTC 4192 and the RAM 4196 and functions as a backup power source for these. As the battery 4194, a primary battery such as a button battery or a rechargeable secondary battery may be used, or a large-capacity capacitor or the like may be used.

The pachinko machine 1 includes a power supply board (not shown) for supplying electric power to each board such as the main board 4000 and the peripheral control board 4140, which will be described later. When the power supply board is turned on, power is supplied to each board, and when the power supply board is turned off, power supply to each board is stopped.

The RTC4192 operates by receiving power supplied from the power supply board when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (when the power supply board is turned on). On the other hand, the RTC4192 cannot receive power from the power supply board when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off (when the power supply board is turned off), but the power is turned off by receiving the power supply from the battery 4194. It is possible to continue operation at times.

The built-in RTC4140aa is a part that manages information related to the current date and time, and can output the current calendar information and time information. Since the built-in RTC4140aa is a part that operates by receiving power supply from the power supply board 851, when the pachinko game machine 1 is turned off (when the power supply from the power supply board 851 is stopped), the current calendar information and time Information is lost. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU4140a receives calendar information and time information from the RTC4192 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started (when the power is turned on) or when a failure occurs in the power supply board (for example, when a momentary power failure occurs). And set it in the built-in RTC4140aa. Hereinafter, when the peripheral control MPU4140a uses the calendar information and the time information, the calendar information and the time information of the built-in RTC4140aa are used instead of using the calendar information and the time information of the RTC4192.

If the peripheral control MPU4140a cannot acquire the calendar information and the time information from the RTC4192, the peripheral control MPU4140a determines that the RTC4192 is malfunctioning and performs error processing. As the error processing, a predetermined initial value may be set as the calendar information and the time information to perform the operation. The initial value may be, for example, "12:00 on Saturday, January 1, 2011".

Here, a "special date and time (for example, a date and time after a predetermined period has elapsed from the delivery date)" is set in advance on the peripheral control board 4140 (for example, the RAM of the peripheral control RAM 4140a described later). Peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control board 4140) may perform "special processing" when it is at the "special date and time". However, even if the current time corresponds to the above "special date and time", if the RTC4192 malfunctions and the above error processing is performed, the calendar information and the time information are reset to the above initial values. "Special processing" may not be performed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the peripheral control board 4140), the clerk of the game store (pachinko hall, game center, etc.) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed may switch the above "special date and time" to a suitable date and time. It may have a function that enables it.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the RTC control unit 4190 operates even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off. By doing so, the calendar information and the time information output by the RTC control unit 4190 can be made accurate. Further, even if the built-in RTC4140aa loses the calendar information and the time information when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, the calendar information and the time information output from the RTC control unit 4190 are newly set when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. The calendar. In this way, the peripheral control MPU4140a can perform control based on accurate calendar information and time information without inquiring RTC4192 each time.

In the present embodiment, the RTC control unit 4190 is provided on the peripheral control board 4140, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the RTC control unit 4190 is provided on another board (for example, a lamp drive board 3167). May be good. Further, the RTC control unit 4190 may have a GPS update unit that periodically acquires the current calendar information and time information from GPS satellites in order to make the current calendar information and time information accurate information. ..

<RAM backup power supply function>
As shown in FIG. 221B, the backup power supply function of the RAM (peripheral control RAM) will be described using the peripheral control MPU4140a. In the peripheral control MPU4140a of FIG. 221B, configurations other than the functional blocks described below are omitted. As shown in FIG. 221 (b), the peripheral control board 4140 includes a capacitor BC2, a diode SD0, and a RAM (peripheral control RAM) as a storage means, in addition to a CPU (peripheral control CPU) as a calculation means. I have.

The RAM (peripheral control RAM) is a memory for storing information to be retained without being lost even when the pachinko machine 1 (power supply board) is turned off. The anode terminal side of the diode SD0 is connected to the + 5.25V creation circuit of the power supply board, and a voltage of +5.25V can be applied. Further, the cathode terminal side of the diode SD0 is connected to the RAM and the capacitor BC2.

The capacitor BC2 is an electric double layer capacitor and functions as a backup power source for a RAM (peripheral control RAM). The negative terminal of the capacitor BC2 is grounded to the ground, while the positive terminal is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0. The power from the +5.25V creation circuit is supplied to the RAM (peripheral control RAM) and also to the capacitor BC2. As a result, the capacitor BC2 is charged. Therefore, when the power from the +5.25V creation circuit is no longer supplied to the peripheral control board 4140, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC2 is supplied to the RAM (peripheral control RAM), and the RAM (peripheral control RAM) is stored. The contents are retained. In this case, the diode SD0 can prevent the electric charge from being supplied from the capacitor BC2 to the power supply board side.

The CPU (peripheral control CPU) appropriately stores the information that the pachinko machine 1 (power supply board) wants to keep without disappearing even when the power is turned off, so that the pachinko machine 1 is turned off. When the power is turned on again, continuous control is possible by using the information stored in the RAM (peripheral control RAM) before the power is turned off.

In the present embodiment, the diode SD0, the capacitor BC2, and the RAM (peripheral control RAM) are provided on the peripheral control board 4140, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the diode SD0, the capacitor BC2, and the RAM (peripheral control RAM) may be provided on the liquid crystal control board 4150. Good. Further, the RAM (peripheral control RAM) may be shared by the peripheral control board 4140 and the liquid crystal control board 4150.

[3-4. LCD control board]
Next, as shown in the figure, the liquid crystal control board 4500 that controls the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 on the peripheral board 4010 has a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, various processing programs, various commands, and various data. The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b that stores the above, the VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 4150c that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 described above, and various screens displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. It includes a character ROM 4150d for storing data and a character RAM 4150e for transferring and copying various data stored in the character ROM 4150d.

This liquid crystal control MPU 4150a has a built-in parallel input / output port, serial input / output port, etc., and when the above-mentioned display command is received from the peripheral control board 4140, the detailed description thereof will be described later, but it is based on the received display command. The VDP4150c is controlled to control the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, as described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control board 4140.

The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b has a plurality of schedule data corresponding to display commands, non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to display commands, and the like, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. I remember. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order in time series when transferring various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area described later in the character RAM 4150e. .. The non-resident area transfer data defines the order in which various data are transferred in advance from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e for the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 according to the progress of the schedule data. There is.

When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives a display command from the peripheral control board 4140, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the schedule data corresponding to the display command, extracts the screen data at the beginning of the extracted schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, and outputs the schedule data to the VDP 4150c. .. Then, the liquid crystal control MPU4150a extracts the screen data following the first screen data and outputs it to the VDP4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the head screen data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs the screen data to the VDP 4150c.

When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU4150a is input, the VDP4150c extracts sprite data described later from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. Drawing data is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. The VDP4150c employs a line buffer method. In this "line buffer method", the drawing data for one line that draws the left and right directions of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored. This is a method of outputting to the liquid crystal display device 1400.

The character ROM 4150d stores an extremely large amount of sprite data, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. It becomes. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded in the bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state. Here, the "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit united on the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the sub liquid crystal unit 2350. For example, when displaying various people on the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the sub liquid crystal unit 2350, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the sub liquid crystal unit 2350, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are set on the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the sub liquid crystal unit 2350 by setting the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "the order of superimposing sprites"). Is displayed. The sprite is composed of a plurality of rectangular areas having 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, it can be expressed using a total of 6 characters arranged in, for example, 2 horizontal × 3 vertical. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The liquid crystal display device 1400 has 800 pixels in the left-right direction and 600 pixels (SVGA) in the vertical direction, and displays each pixel in one direction along the pixels in order from the left to the right of the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is driven by a main scan that sets a state and a sub scan that repeats the main scan in a direction intersecting one direction thereof. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control board 4500 is input to the liquid crystal display device 1400, the liquid crystal drive circuit 1315b is based on the drawing data for one line, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 is used as the main scan. From left to right, the data is output to each line of pixels. When the output for one line is completed, the process shifts to the line immediately below as a sub scan, and when the drawing data for the next line is input in the same manner, the liquid crystal display is displayed as the main scan based on the drawing data for the next line. The data is sequentially output to one line of pixels from the left to the right of the device 1400.

Further, the liquid crystal display device 1400 has a built-in backlight (cold cathode tube) that is lit by the inverter board 3017a.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the lower accessory unit 3003, the game ball is supplied onto the guiding member 3131 before the distribution effect device 3125 starts to rise. Therefore, the height at which the game ball is lifted can be made relatively low, and the game medium supply mechanism 3121 can be miniaturized. Further, even if the game ball is supplied on the guiding member 3131, the rolling of the game ball on the guiding member 3131 is restricted until the distribution effect device 3125 reaches the upper stop position, so that the game ball is moved to the upper stop position. It is possible to prevent the game balls from being distributed before reaching, that is, before the distribution effect device 3125 becomes visible to the player.

In particular, since the rolling surface 3131a of the guiding member 3131 is formed in a substantially arc shape and the guiding member 3131 is held in a substantially horizontal state until it reaches the upper stop position, the guiding member 3131 rolls. When the game ball is supplied to the moving surface 3131a, the game ball can be guided to the central portion in the left-right direction, which is the lowest position in the rolling surface 3131a, and can be stopped at that position. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the game ball from deviating from the rolling surface 3131a, that is, the game ball is distributed while the distribution effect device 3125 is ascending.

Further, since the game ball is sent to the guide member 3131 from the end side, the supply position of the game ball is lower than that of the guide member 3131 sent from above, and the height of the game medium supply mechanism 3121 is further lowered. can do. By providing the guiding member 3131 with a rolling surface 3131a having a substantially arc shape, even when the game ball is sent from the end side of the guiding member 3131, the game ball can be guided to the central position of the guiding member 3131 and braked. it can.

Further, the game ball released from the game medium supply mechanism 3121 is guided to the end side of the guide member 3131 through the game ball guide passage 3155, and the game ball guide passage 3155 is the distribution effect device 3125. Since they move integrally, the game ball can be smoothly fed even if the stop position of the distribution effect device 3125 is slightly displaced.

Further, since the upper decorative portion 3133 and the lower decorative portion 3137 are provided on the front surface of the distribution effect device 3125, the design of the distribution effect device 3125 can be enhanced. In particular, since the upper decorative portion 3133 and the lower decorative portion 3137 that are hidden and invisible appear at the time of the distribution effect, it is possible to enhance the visual fun and the expectation for the distribution effect.

Further, since the guidance member 3131 of the distribution effect device 3125 is arranged behind the stage (shelf upper stage 2372) at the lower stop position and is visible, the image is that the guidance member 3131 is a part of the stage. Can be aroused, and the impact on the stage can be increased.

Further, the base member 3150 that swingably supports the pseudo shelf portion 3132 including the guide member 3131 is provided with a left side rack 3160 and a right side rack 3161 on both left and right sides, and the left side motors are provided in the respective racks 3160 and 3161. Since the gear 3176a to which the rotational force is applied is meshed by the 3176 and the right side motor 3177, when the pair of motors 3176 and 3177 are driven, a force for moving the racks 3160 and 3161 in the vertical direction acts and the pseudo shelf portion 3132 Can be raised and lowered together with the base member 3150. By arranging the elevating means on both the left and right sides of the distribution effect device 3125 in this way, the distribution effect device 3125 can be smoothly moved, and a space for moving (for example, swinging) the pseudo shelf portion 3132 is possible. It becomes possible to secure.

Further, in the game medium supply mechanism 3121, by rotating the screw 3190 in a certain direction, the game ball that has entered from the lower side (inflow port 3187) of the tubular guide portion 3183 is raised by the screw 3190, and the tubular guide It can be discharged from the upper side (discharge port 3185) of the part 3183. Since the game ball is conveyed by the screw 3190 in this way, the game ball can be lifted with a relatively simple configuration, and the game can be played at a predetermined position in the tubular guide portion 3183 even when power is not supplied to the game machine. The sphere can be stored.

Although the preferred embodiments have been described above, various improvements and design changes can be made to the embodiments.

For example, in the above embodiment, the game ball is distributed to the first inflow port 3153a and the second inflow port 3154a, but it may be distributed to more inflow ports.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the distribution effect device 3125 is raised from the lower stop position to the upper stop position, the guidance member 3131 is maintained in a horizontal state to regulate the rolling of the game ball. , The rolling may be regulated by repeatedly swinging the guiding member 3131 within a predetermined rotation range in small steps.

[3-5. Control processing on the main control board]
Next, an example of the control process executed on the main control board 4100 (particularly the main control MPU 4100a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 to 234. FIG. 222 is a flowchart showing an example of main processing in the main control board. FIG. 223 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when a power failure occurs. FIG. 224 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing. FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing an example of the special control process. FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing the starting opening winning process. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process. FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing an example of processing during fluctuation.

Further, FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game start process. FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game start process. FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game process. FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game process. The timer interrupt process is executed at a predetermined timing (every 4 ms in this embodiment) by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100. FIG. 234 is an explanatory diagram showing a table configuration in the special symbol random number storage means.

[About main processing]
In the main process, as shown in FIG. 222, when the supply of electric power to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the main control MPU4100a executes the power-on process (step S1). In this power-on processing, it is determined whether the backup data stored in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU4100a) is normal (whether it is the set value at the time of power failure), and if it is normal. For example, according to the backup data stored in the RAM, the process of returning to the state at the time of power failure (processing at the time of power recovery) is executed, and if the backup data is abnormal, the RAM is cleared and the device settings around the CPU (normal initial settings). , Setting the interruption timing, etc.).

If the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped during the game, the current game state is stored in the RAM as backup data. If the RAM clear switch 624a instructing the clearing of the backup data stored in the RAM in the power-on processing is on, the RAM is cleared and the normal initial setting is performed. Further, in the power-on processing, if the backup data is not saved in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a), the RAM is cleared and the normal initial setting is performed.

Further, in the power-on processing, a process of setting the peripheral control board 4140 to a power-on command indicating that the main control board 4100 has been started is also executed when the normal initial setting is executed. The power-on command notifies the peripheral control board 4140 that the main control board 4100 has started. Even when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is stopped (when the power is turned off) when the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed is closed, the backup data is stored in the RAM and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is again stored. When the supply is started, the power-on processing is executed.

When the power-on processing is completed, the main control MPU4100a starts a loop processing for repeatedly executing each processing for the game. At the start of this loop processing, the main control MPU4100a first determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been detected (step S2). In this embodiment, the power supply voltage used in the pachinko machine 1 is generated by the power supply board. That is, since the plurality of types of devices mounted on the pachinko machine 1 operate at different power supply voltages, the power supply voltage supplied to the pachinko machine 1 from the external power supply is converted into a predetermined power supply voltage by the power supply board, and then each of them is used. Supplying equipment. Then, when a power failure occurs and the power supply voltage supplied from the external power supply to the power supply board becomes equal to or lower than a predetermined power supply voltage, a power failure warning signal indicating that the power supply voltage supply from the power supply board to the main control board 4100 is stopped is output. Will be sent. Then, when the power failure warning signal is detected by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 in step S2, the power failure occurrence processing is executed (step S4).

In this power failure processing, when the power supply voltage (24V in this embodiment) supplied to the power supply board after a power failure is restored (hereinafter referred to as power recovery), the operation of the gaming machine is in the state before the power failure. This is a process of storing the state at the time of power failure in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) as backup data in order to start from. The details of the processing will be described later, but in this embodiment, as shown in the figure, the processing when a power failure occurs is not an interrupt processing but a branch processing executed immediately after the start of the loop according to the presence or absence of detection of a power failure warning signal. It is incorporated in the main process (main control process).

By the way, when the power failure warning signal is not detected in step S2, that is, when the power from the external power source is normally supplied, the random number update process 2 for updating various random numbers used in the game is performed (step). S3). The random number updated in the random number update process 2 will be described later.

[Processing when power is cut off]
Next, as shown in FIG. 223, the power outage occurrence process is a process executed when a power failure warning signal is detected in the main process. The main control MPU4100a first sets the interrupt prohibition setting so that the interrupt process is not executed (step S4a). Then, the checksum of the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is calculated and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM (step S4b). This checksum is used to check whether the contents of the RAM before the power failure are retained at the time of power recovery.

Subsequently, the main control MPU4100a sets a default value indicating that the power failure occurrence processing has been performed in the backup flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM (step S4c). After completing the above processing, the main control MPU4100a prohibits access to the RAM (step S4d), enters an infinite loop, and prepares for stopping the power supply. In this process, if the power supply voltage becomes unstable due to a very short power outage or the like (hereinafter referred to as "infinite power failure"), the process when a power failure occurs is actually started. Since the power supply voltage is not stopped, there is a possibility that the above process cannot recover from the infinite loop. In order to avoid such an adverse effect, the main control MPU 4100a of this embodiment is provided with a watchdog timer, and is configured to be reset if the watchdog timer is not updated for a predetermined time. The watchdog timer is updated periodically while the processing is normally performed, but the processing starts when a power failure occurs and the update is not performed. As a result, even if the process when the power is cut off occurs due to the momentary power failure and the infinite loop is entered, the reset is performed after a predetermined period of time elapses, and the main control MPU 4100a is started in the same process as when the power is turned on.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, in the timer interrupt process, the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms by the main control MPU 4100a mounted on the main control board 4100 during the execution of the main process. As shown in FIG. 224, the timer interrupt process is mainly executed. The control MPU4100a executes the processing of steps S11 to S18 after executing the register save processing (step S10). In the switch input process of step S11, a process of monitoring the detection signal of the above-mentioned switch (gate switch, start port sensor, count sensor, general winning switch, etc.) is executed. In the random number update process 1 of step S12, a process of updating various random numbers used in the game is executed. In this embodiment, the random number updated by the random number update process 1 and the random number updated by the random number update process 2 described above are different. The random number will be described later, but the random number updated in the random number update process 2 may also be updated in the random number update process 1. In the payout operation process of step S13, a payout command for instructing the payout of the game ball is set on the payout control board 4110 based on the signal detected in the switch input process (step S11).

Further, in the normal control process of step S14, the normal symbol is changed based on the progress state of the game, and the normal electric accessory (that is, the blade 2337 that opens and closes the second starting port 2002 by the starting port solenoid 2344) is controlled. , The process of changing the open / closed state of the second starting port 2002 is executed. In the special control process of step S15, the first special symbol (first identification symbol) and the second special symbol (second identification symbol) are variablely displayed on the special symbol indicators 641 and 642 based on the progress state of the game. A special electric accessory (that is, an opening / closing member 2006 that opens / closes the large winning opening 2003 by the attacker solenoid 2016) is controlled, and a process of changing the opening / closing state of the large winning opening 2003 is executed.

In the output data setting process of the following step S16, a process of outputting a state signal indicating the game state to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a management computer, etc.) and a drive signal being output to a special figure start storage display (not shown) Execute processing, etc. In the command transmission process in step S17, a process of transmitting an effect command to the peripheral control board 4140 is executed. Further, in the command transmission process, a process of transmitting the power-on command set in the power-on process (step S1) to the peripheral control board 4140 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started is also performed. When the processing of steps S11 to S17 is executed, the register restoration processing (step S18) is executed, and the processing ends.

Here, various random numbers updated by the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 in the above-mentioned random number update process 1 (step S12) and random number update process 2 (step S3) will be described. In this embodiment, as various random numbers used in the game, a random number for big hit determination used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state (also called a big hit determination or a big hit lottery), and a big hit game state in the big hit determination are used. Random numbers for jackpot symbols used to determine the stop symbol of the special symbol (the symbol associated with the type of jackpot (probability variation jackpot, number of rounds, etc.)) when it is determined to generate, in the jackpot lottery Reach judgment random number used for judgment (reach judgment) as to whether or not to perform high expectation production such as reach production when it is judged that it is neither a big hit nor a small hit (loss), special symbol display 641, The fluctuation display pattern random number (random number for fluctuation time) used to determine the fluctuation display pattern (variation time, etc.) of the special symbol displayed on 642, and the blade 2337 that opens and closes the second starting port 2002 are controlled to be open. There are random numbers for normal hit judgment, etc. used for judgment of whether or not to do (normal lottery hit judgment).

Further, as will be described later, the random number for determining the jackpot according to this embodiment is also used for determining whether or not the specific condition performed when it is determined that the jackpot has been lost is satisfied. Will be done. In addition, the random number for the jackpot symbol is the type of jackpot that is performed when it is determined that the jackpot has been won (whether or not to activate the probability fluctuation function or the time saving function, and the jackpot in the jackpot game (special bonus game). It is also used for the judgment regarding the type of jackpot for which the opening mode of 2003 is determined.

Of these random numbers, in the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number related to the occurrence of the big hit game state, the big hit symbol random number, and the normal symbol hit determination random number related to whether or not the blade 2337 is controlled to the open state Make an update. That is, the random numbers used for the occurrence of the jackpot game state and the determination as to whether or not the blade 2337 is controlled to the open state are updated every 4 ms as a predetermined timing. By doing so, the probability of each random number in a predetermined period (probability of determining that a jackpot gaming state is generated, probability of determining that the blade 2337 is controlled in the open state) can be made constant, and the player can be made constant. Can be prevented from becoming a disadvantageous state. On the other hand, in the random number update process 2, the big hit game state is generated, the reach determination random number not related to the normal lottery, the variable display pattern random number, and the like are updated.

[About special control processing]
Next, the special control process will be described with reference to FIG. 225. FIG. 225 is a flowchart showing an example of the special control process.

In this special control process, first, the first and second starting port winning processes (step S110) are performed. In the first and second starting port winning processes, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 2001 and the second starting port 2002. Then, after the first and second start port winning processes (step S110) are performed, the process according to the state of the process flag is selectively selected from the plurality of processes (steps S120 to S230) shown in the figure. Will be done.

More specifically, when the first and second start opening winning processes (step S110) are completed, it is first determined whether or not the processing flag is 0 (step S120), and if the processing flag is 0 (step S120). YES) in step S120) and the fluctuation start process (step S130) are executed. In this fluctuation start processing (step S130), the processing flag is updated to "1" after the setting for starting the fluctuation display of the special symbol is made based on the result of the big hit lottery.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 0 (NO in step S120), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 1 (step S140). As a result, if the processing flag is 1 (YES in step S140), the variation pattern setting process (step S150) is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern (first special symbol display 641 or second special symbol display) of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642. After the variation time from the start of the variation display of the special symbol (identification symbol) to the stop display in any of 642 is determined), the processing flag is updated to "2".

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 1 (NO in step S140), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 2 (step S170). As a result, if the processing flag is 2 (YES in step S170), the variable processing (step S180) is executed. In this variable processing, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S150) is monitored by a timer, and based on the time-out, the special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 is special. Stop the variable display of the symbol. After that, when it is determined in the fluctuation start process (step S130) that the big hit has been won, the process selection flag is updated to "3". On the other hand, the processing selection flag is updated to "4" when it is determined that a specific condition is satisfied (a small hit is won) even though the big hit is lost. However, when the big hit is lost and the specific condition is not satisfied (pure loss), the processing selection flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt processing, the fluctuation start processing (step S130) is restarted.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 2 (NO in step S170), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 3 (step S190). As a result, if the processing flag is 3 (YES in step S190), the jackpot game start processing (step S200) is executed. In this jackpot game start process, the type of jackpot is determined, and after the opening mode (number of rounds, opening time, winning limit number of game balls, etc.) in the jackpot 2003 according to the type is set, the processing flag is set. Updated to "5". On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 in step S190 (NO in step S190), the process proceeds to step S210.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 3 (NO in step S190), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 4 (step S210). As a result, if the processing flag is 4 (YES in step S210), the small hit game start processing (step S220) is executed. In this small hit game start process, after the opening mode (opening number of times and opening time for controlling the opening operation of the opening / closing member 2006) in the large winning opening 2003 according to the small hit is set, the processing flag is set to "6". Is updated to.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 4 (NO in step S210), it is determined whether or not the processing flag is 5 (step S230). As a result, if the processing flag is 5 (YES in step S230), the jackpot game processing (step S240) is executed. In this big hit game process, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2006 is controlled based on the opening mode in the big winning opening 2003 set in the big hit game start process (step S200). Further, when the big hit game is completed, the processing flag is updated to "0" after the determination as to whether or not to activate the probability fluctuation function or the time saving function is performed. That is, in this case, in the next interrupt processing, the fluctuation start processing (step S130) is restarted.

On the other hand, if the processing flag is not 5 (NO in step S230), the processing flag is assumed to be 6, and the small hit game processing (step S250) is executed. In this small hit game process (step S250), the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2006 is controlled based on the opening mode in the large winning opening 2003 set in the small hit game start process (step S220). Further, when the small hit game process is completed, the processing flag is updated to "0", that is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the variation start process (step S130) is restarted.

As described above, when any of the processes of step S130, step S150, step S180, step S200, step S220, step S240, and step S250 is selectively executed based on the state of the process flag, the special control process is performed. Is terminated.

[About the first and second start entrance winning process]
Next, the first and second starting port winning processes (processes in step S110) will be described with reference to FIG. 226. FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing an example of the first and second starting port winning processes.

In the first and second starting port winning processes (step S110), the processing related to determining whether or not a game ball has been won in the first starting port 2001 or the second starting port 2002 and the winning process are largely performed. On the condition that it is determined that there was a problem, the process for updating the pending state of the corresponding special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is performed.

Therefore, the main control MPU4100a first determines whether or not the detection signal is output from the second start port sensor 2349. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the second starting port sensor 2349, it is determined that the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 2002 (YES in step S201), and then The process of step S202 is performed. In the process of step S202, various random numbers for the second big hit lottery (random numbers for big hit determination, random numbers for big hit symbols, etc.) are acquired, and the second hold provided in the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU4100a). Judgment is made as to whether or not the value of the number counter is less than 4, which is the upper limit value. As a result, if the second hold count counter is less than 4, the second start hold storage process (step S203) and the hold history update process (step S204) are sequentially performed.

That is, in this case, the main control MPU4100a first, as the second start hold storage process (step S203), various data (random numbers for jackpot determination, for jackpot symbols) acquired by winning a game ball in the second start port 2002. Random numbers, etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with the types of special symbols and the order of holding. Next, as the hold history update process (step S204), 1 is added to the counter value of the second hold number counter provided in the RAM.

In the process of step 203, a winning notification command indicating that the game ball has won the second starting port 2002 (more accurately, the type of special symbol, the holding order, etc.) is set, and thus The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the above-mentioned command transmission process (step S17). In such a configuration, through the control by the peripheral control board 4140, when the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the like displays the hold display on the second start port 2002 side, it can be quickly updated.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S201 that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2349 is not output, or in the process of step S202, the value of the second hold count counter becomes the upper limit value. When it is determined that the value is 4, then, as the process of step S205, it is determined whether or not the detection signal is output from the first start port sensor 2011. As a result, when it is determined that the detection signal is output from the first starting port sensor 2011, it is determined that the game ball has won the first starting port 2001 (YES in step S205), and then The process of step S206 is performed. In the process of step S206, various random numbers for the first big hit lottery (random numbers for big hit determination, random numbers for big hit symbols, etc.) are acquired, and the value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM of the main control MPU 4100a is the upper limit. Judgment is made as to whether or not the value is less than 4. As a result, if the first hold count counter is less than 4, the first start hold storage process (step S207) and the hold history update process (step S208) are sequentially performed.

That is, in this case, the main control MPU4100a first, as the first start hold storage process (step S207), various data (random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for jackpot symbol) acquired by winning a prize in the first start port 2001. Etc.) are stored in a predetermined storage area (RAM) while being associated with the type of special symbol and the holding order. Next, as the hold history update process (step S208), 1 is added to the counter value of the first hold number counter provided in the RAM.

In the process of step 207 as well, a winning notification command indicating that the game ball has won the first starting port 2001 (more accurately, the type of special symbol, the holding order, etc.) is set, and thus The set winning notification command may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 in the above-mentioned command transmission process (step S17). In such a configuration, through control by the peripheral control board 4140, it is possible to quickly update the case where the liquid crystal display device 1400 or the like displays the hold display on the first start port 2001 side.

On the other hand, in the process of step S205, when it is determined that the game ball has not won the first starting port 2001, or in the process of step S206, the counter value of the first hold number counter becomes the upper limit value. When it is determined that the number has reached 4, the first and second starting port winning processes are terminated at this point.

In this embodiment, after the winning process for the second starting port 2002 (steps S201 to S204) is executed, the winning process for the first starting port 2001 (steps S205 to step S208) is executed. There is. However, instead of this, there may be a mode in which the winning process for the first starting port 2001 is executed and then the winning process for the second starting port 2002 is executed.

Further, the main control MPU 4100a may execute advance determination processing based on various acquired random numbers, and further transmit a command indicating the result of advance determination processing to the peripheral control board 4140 as a winning notification command. The advance determination process is performed prior to the lottery using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 (for example, the big hit lottery, the probability variation lottery, the small hit lottery, and the determination of the variable display pattern described later), and the lottery result is determined in advance. It is a process to judge. The advance determination process is performed using the random numbers stored in steps S203 and S207 and the advance determination table. The advance determination table is the same table as the table used for the lottery using the random number. In the advance judgment process, the random number is compared with the advance judgment table, and the lottery result when the lottery is performed using the random number (big hit or small hit, type of big hit, variable display pattern, etc.) ) Is determined (the determination made prior to the lottery in this way is also called "look-ahead determination"). The peripheral control board 4140 may realize an effect reflecting the received prize notification command (preceding determination result) before the lottery using the random number is performed (such an effect is "look-ahead". Also called "directing").

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the content of the preceding determination table is the same as the content of the table used for the lottery. However, at least a part of the contents of the prior determination table may be different from the contents of the table used for the lottery.

Further, the main control MPU4100a transmits a winning notification command indicating the result of the advance determination process only when the gaming state satisfies the specific condition, and when the specific condition is not satisfied, the advance determination process is performed. You may send a winning notification command that does not represent the result. For example, when the variable display due to the winning of the first starting port 2001 is not started immediately after winning and is held, the main control MPU4100a issues a winning notification command indicating the result of the advance determination processing regarding the winning. You may send it. Here, in the jackpot game state and the time-saving game state, the main control MPU4100a does not send a prize notification command indicating the result of the advance determination process, but transmits a prize notification command that does not indicate the result of the advance determination process. You may. Specific conditions for the second start port 2002 may be similar.

[About fluctuation start processing]
Next, the fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 227. FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation start processing.

In the fluctuation start processing (step S130) executed when the processing flag is “0”, the main control MPU4100a first sets the values of the two hold count counters corresponding to the special symbol indicators 641 and 642 (first start storage). It is determined whether or not both the number and the second start storage number) are “0” (step S301). Here, the values in the two hold number counters corresponding to the special symbol indicators 641 and 642 are the storage areas related to the first start storage and the second start storage (random number storage means 4515, 4532 for special symbols (see FIG. 234). )) Indicates the number of random number values stored in each. Therefore, if the values of the hold count counters are all "0" in step S301, it is determined that neither the start conditions for the first jackpot lottery and the second jackpot lottery are satisfied, and then the step is followed. As the process of S318, the variation start process ends when the process flag is updated to "1".

On the other hand, if neither the first start memory number nor the second start memory number is "0" (NO in step S301), the special symbol is used to update the order of executing the jackpot lottery that is in the pending state. The shift processing in the random number storage means 4515 and 4532 is performed (steps S302 to S310).

Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 234 (a), the first special symbol random number storage means 4515 is provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 4515a to storage area [4] 4515d). These storage areas are associated with the values of the first start storage numbers (“1” to “4”), respectively. Further, as shown in FIG. 234 (b), the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 is also provided with four storage areas (storage area [1] 4532a to storage area [4] 4532d). These storage areas are associated with the values of the second start storage numbers (“1” to “4”), respectively. In each storage area 4515a to 4515d and 4532a to 4532d, a big hit judgment random number storage area 4580 in which a big hit judgment random number is stored, a big hit symbol random number, a reach judgment random number, a variation display pattern random number, and the like are stored. A random number storage area 4581 for a jackpot symbol is provided.

That is, the main control MPU4100a appropriately manipulates the random numbers stored in the storage means 4515 and 4532 as shift processing (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area when the special symbol fluctuates. However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the case where the big hit is won in the lottery process on the first special symbol side and the case where the big hit is won in the lottery process on the second special symbol side. Although there is no difference in the expected value of the profit (the number of prize balls that can be obtained, etc.) given to the player, in the lottery process on the first special symbol side, the hit (small hit) does not involve the operation of the condition device. While there are cases where a prize is won, in the lottery process on the second special symbol side, the probability of winning a small hit is "0%", so that only the lottery process on the second special symbol side is executed. As long as it is done, the small hit game state is not generated.

In this regard, in the shift processing (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area, the execution of the lottery of the first special symbol is always postponed, and the hit (small hit) without the operation of the condition device is not won. (2) The random numbers stored in the storage means 4515 and 4532 are manipulated so that all the lottery based on the winning of the starting port 2002 (the lottery of the second special symbol) is digested first. As a result, until the number of holdings for the lottery on the second special symbol side is interrupted and becomes "0", only the games (lottery on the second special symbol side) without being won in the above small hits are sequentially performed. Will be able to. Further, as will be described later, in the gaming state in which the so-called time saving function is activated, the lottery (variation) is performed so that the holding state of the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol, which is the side to be digested first, is not interrupted. Since control is performed to increase the frequency of changing the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2002, which is the execution trigger of the above, only the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side is continuously executed. This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a small hit.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 227 and 234, in the shift processing (steps S302 to S310) in the random number storage area, first, as the processing of step S302, the second special symbol that is preferentially digested. Whether or not the value of the hold number counter (second start storage number) corresponding to the display 642 is "0", that is, the random number is stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532. Determine if it is not. As a result, when it is determined that the random number is stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532 (NO in step S302), the second from the storage area [1] 4532a. A random number related to the special symbol is read out and acquired (step S303). That is, as will be described later, the random numbers read in this way (random numbers for jackpot determination, random numbers for jackpot symbol, random numbers for reach determination, random number of variation display pattern) are not only processed for the lottery of jackpot, but also the variation pattern (variation) of the special symbol. A game to the second start port 2002 by being subjected to a process for setting the time, a stop display mode, etc.), a process for setting the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing member 2006, a process for setting the gaming state, and the like. The second starting game can be advanced with the winning of the ball.

Next, the main control MPU4100a has each storage area (storage area [2] 4532b to storage area] of the nth (n is a natural number of 2 or more) in order to update the digestion order related to the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side. [4] Various random numbers stored in 4532d) are shifted to the n-1st storage area (storage area [1] 4532a to storage area [3] 4532c), respectively (step S304). As a result, at least the storage area [4] 4532d becomes empty, and new start information (holding) for the second special symbol can be stored in the storage area [4] 4532d.

After that, the main control MPU4100a sets the special symbol variation flag to "1" so that the game on the second special symbol side (second start game) is in progress (step S305). ). Further, in order to update the number of holdings related to the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side, the holding number counter corresponding to the second special symbol is subtracted by "1" (step S306). At this time, the drive control for lighting the lamp 644 so that the number of holds for the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side updated in this way is reflected in the lighting mode of the second special symbol storage display 644. Is done. The special symbol variation flag set to "1" in this way is reset after the variation start processing is completed, for example, when the processing flag is updated to "0".

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 227 and 234, when it is determined in the process of step S302 that no random number is stored in the storage area [1] 4532a of the second special symbol random number storage means 4532. (YES in step S302), a random number related to the first special symbol is read out from the storage area [1] 4515a of the first special symbol random number storage means 4515, and this is acquired (step S307). That is, as will be described later, the random numbers read in this way are processed not only for the lottery for big hits, but also for the setting of the variation pattern of the special symbol, the processing for setting the opening / closing mode of the opening / closing member 2006, and the setting of the gaming state. The first starting game can be advanced with the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 2001 by being subjected to the processing related to the above.

Next, the main control MPU4100a has each storage area (storage area [2] 4515b to storage area] of the nth (n is a natural number of 2 or more) in order to update the digestion order related to the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side. [4] Various random numbers stored in 4515d) are shifted to the n-1st storage area (storage area [1] 4515a to storage area [3] 4515c), respectively (step S308). As a result, at least the storage area [4] 4515d becomes empty, and new start information (holding) for the first special symbol can be stored in the storage area [4] 4515d.

After that, the main control MPU4100a sets the special symbol variation flag to "2" so that the game on the first special symbol side (first starting game) is in progress (step S309). ). Further, in order to update the number of holdings related to the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side, the holding number counter corresponding to the first special symbol is subtracted by "1" (step S310). At this time, the drive control for lighting the lamp 643 is reflected in the lighting mode of the first special symbol storage display 643 so that the number of holds for the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side updated in this way is reflected in the lighting mode of the first special symbol storage display 643. Is done. Similarly, the special symbol variation flag set to "2" is reset after the variation start processing is completed, for example, when the processing flag is updated to "0".

After that, it is determined whether or not the probability fluctuation function is operating, that is, whether or not the probability fluctuation state is high (step S312), and if it is not in the probability fluctuation state (NO in step S312), when the probability fluctuation is not activated. Select the jackpot determination table, that is, the table in which the probability of becoming a jackpot is set low, while in the case of the probability fluctuation state (YES in step S312), the table at the time of the probability fluctuation operation, that is, the probability of becoming a jackpot is Select a table with a high setting. In this example, the probability of a big hit is set to 1/400 when the probability fluctuation is not activated (that is, normal time), and the probability of a big hit is 10 when the probability fluctuation is activated (that is, when the probability is high). It is set to / 400.

After any table is selected in the process of step S313 or step S314, the big hit determination random number related to any special symbol acquired in the process of step S303 or step S307 based on the table is a big hit. It is determined whether or not the random number (big hit value) corresponds to (step S315 (big hit lottery)). Then, if it is a jackpot value (YES in step S315), the type of jackpot is determined based on the random number for the jackpot symbol related to any of the special symbols also acquired in the process of step S303 or step S307. (Step S316). After that, the flag corresponding to the type of jackpot is set to the ON state (set) (step S317), and the process proceeds to step S318.

On the other hand, if the acquired random number is a loss that is not a big hit value (NO in step S315), it is determined whether or not the random number is a random number (small hit value) corresponding to a small hit (step S319). Then, if it is a small hit value (YES in step S319), the small hit flag is set to "ON" (step S320) assuming that a predetermined specific condition is satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S318. However, if it is not a small hit value (NO in step S319), it is assumed that the predetermined specific condition is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S318 without going through step S320. In step S318, the processing flag is updated to "1", and the fluctuation start processing is terminated. In this example, the probability of a small hit is set to 3/400 regardless of the gaming state.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regardless of whether the lottery is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the random number for the jackpot symbol is a random number generated in a random number range of 0 to 99, for example. Numerical values are prepared, and in the process of step S303 or step S307, one of these random number values is acquired as the value of the random number for the jackpot symbol. Then, the acquired random number value is subjected to the process of determining the type of jackpot in the process of step S316. For example, if the random number value is 0 to 52, it is determined as jackpot A. If it is 53 to 57, it is determined as a jackpot B, if it is 58 to 63, it is determined as a jackpot C, if it is 64 to 81, it is determined as a jackpot D, and if it is 82 to 99, it is determined as a jackpot E. ..

According to such a determination method, as shown in FIG. 236, the probability that the type of big hit (hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device) is determined as "big hit A" is "53%", and the type of big hit The probability that is determined to be "big hit B" is "5%", the probability that the jackpot type is determined to be "big hit C" is "6%", and the jackpot types are "big hit D" and "big hit". The probability of being determined as "E" is "18%" respectively.

Here, when "big hit A" is won, the probability fluctuation function and the time saving function (open) are performed after the big hit game corresponding to the winning of the big hit A is performed regardless of the game state at the time of the corresponding selection. It is controlled to a probabilistic external advantageous gaming state in which both of the extension function) are activated. In the big hit game corresponding to the winning of the big hit A, the opening and closing of the opening / closing member 2006 is performed as a long opening hit game in which the opening / closing member 2006 is repeated many times (16 times in this embodiment) in a long-time opening / closing pattern. The long-time opening / closing pattern means that a predetermined long time (for example, 26 seconds to 33 seconds) elapses after the opening / closing member 2006 is changed from the closed state to the open state, or a predetermined large number (for example, 10 pieces). This is a pattern in which the opening / closing member 2006 is returned to the closed state when any of the conditions that the game ball of No. 1 wins the grand prize opening 2003 is satisfied. In this long-time opening / closing pattern, the time during which the opening / closing member 2006 is opened is longer than the time during which the opening / closing member 2006 is opened in the short-time opening / closing pattern described later. That is, in the game per long opening, a large number of prize balls (about 1750 in the present embodiment) can be substantially acquired by the player as a privilege.

On the other hand, even when the "big hit B" is won, the probability fluctuation function and the time saving function (the probability fluctuation function and the time saving function are performed after the big hit game according to the winning of the big hit B is performed regardless of the game state at the time of the corresponding selection. It is controlled to a probabilistic external advantageous gaming state in which both of the opening extension function) are activated. However, in the big hit game according to the winning of the big hit B, the opening and closing of the opening / closing member 2006 is performed as a medium opening hit game in which the opening / closing member 2006 is repeated several times (9 times in this embodiment) in a long-time opening / closing pattern. .. That is, in the game per medium opening, a medium amount of prize balls (about 1000 in the present embodiment) can be substantially acquired by the player as a privilege.

On the other hand, when "Big hit C" is won, the big hit game corresponding to the winning of the big hit C is performed only when the game state at the time of the corresponding selection is "external advantageous game state in which the time saving function is activated". After that, it is controlled to a probabilistic external advantageous gaming state in which both the probability fluctuation function and the time saving function (opening extension function) are activated. However, if the game state at the time of the corresponding selection is not the "external advantageous game state in which the time saving function is activated", the probability fluctuation function and the time saving function (opening extension) are performed after the big hit game corresponding to the winning of the big hit C is performed. Of the functions), it is controlled to a high probability gaming state (probability variation external disadvantageous gaming state) in which only the probability fluctuation function is activated. In the big hit game according to the winning of the big hit C, the opening and closing of the opening / closing member 2006 is performed as the above-mentioned medium opening hit game in which the opening / closing of the opening / closing member 2006 is repeated several times (9 times in this embodiment) in a long-time opening / closing pattern.

On the other hand, when "Big hit D" is won, the probability fluctuation function and the time saving function (open) are performed after the big hit game according to the winning of the big hit D is performed regardless of the game state at the time of the corresponding selection. Of the extension function), it is controlled to a high probability gaming state (probability variation external disadvantageous gaming state) in which only the probability fluctuation function is activated. In the big hit game according to the winning of the big hit D, the opening and closing of the opening / closing member 2006 is performed as the above-mentioned medium opening hit game in which the opening / closing of the opening / closing member 2006 is repeated several times (9 times in this embodiment) in a long-time opening / closing pattern.

On the other hand, when the "big hit E" is won, the probability fluctuation function and the time saving function (opening extension) are performed after the big hit game corresponding to the winning of the big hit E is performed regardless of the game state at the time of the corresponding selection. It is controlled to a normal gaming state (usually an external disadvantageous gaming state) in which none of the functions) is activated. In the big hit game according to the winning of the big hit E, the opening and closing of the opening / closing member 2006 is performed as the above-mentioned medium opening hit game in which the opening / closing member 2006 is repeated a medium number of times (9 times in this embodiment) in a long-time opening / closing pattern.

By the way, when a small hit (a hit without the operation of the condition device) is won against such a big hit A to E (a hit with the operation of the condition device), the opening / closing member 2006 is opened / closed for a short time. Only a small number of times (in this embodiment, two times) a small opening hit game (small hit game) is performed in the pattern, and the same game as before the small opening hit game (small hit game) is performed. The game state does not differ from the latter. The small time opening / closing pattern is a game in which a predetermined small time (for example, 3 seconds to 6 seconds) elapses or a predetermined small number (for example, 2 pieces) is played after the opening / closing member 2006 is changed from the closed state to the open state. This is a pattern in which the opening / closing member 2006 is returned to the closed state when any of the conditions for winning the prize is satisfied in the large winning opening 2003. That is, in the small opening game (small hit game), since only a small amount of prize balls (about 40 to 50 in this embodiment) can be substantially acquired by the player as a privilege, the opening / closing member 2006 operates. However, it can be said that care must be taken in handling (positioning) in the game design in that the game interest may decline.

As described above, in the pachinko machine according to this embodiment, "big hit A" to "big hit E" are prepared as the types of hits (big hits) accompanied by the operation of the condition device. Therefore, to further elaborate the process of step S317, when the type of jackpot is "big hit A", the jackpot flag A is set to the ON state (set), and when it is "big hit B", the jackpot flag B is set to the ON state (set). ), Set the jackpot flag C to the ON state (set) when it is "Big hit C", set the jackpot flag D to the ON state (set) when it is "Big hit D", and set the jackpot flag E to the ON state (set) when it is "Big hit E". It will be in the ON state (set).

[About fluctuation pattern setting process]
Next, the variation pattern setting process in which the variation pattern of the special symbol is set based on the result of the big hit lottery (step S315) will be described. FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process.

As shown in FIG. 228, in the variation pattern setting process (step S150) executed when the process flag is “1”, the main control MPU4100a first sets the jackpot flag to “ON” as the process of step S401. Judge whether or not. As a result, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is "ON" (YES in step S401), the jackpot fluctuation pattern table setting process described later is performed so that the fluctuation pattern when the jackpot is won is set. (Step S402).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S401 that the big hit flag is not "ON", then, as the process of step S403, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is "ON". As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is "ON" (YES in step S403), it is considered that a specific condition is satisfied although it is a loss, and the small hit is won. In order to set the fluctuation pattern at the time, the small hit fluctuation pattern table setting process described later is performed (step S404).

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S403 that the small hit flag is not "ON", the next step S405 is a high expectation effect (for example, reach effect) in which the expectation of winning the big hit is high. Determine if or not to do. In the process of step S405, for example, it is determined that the high expectation effect is performed when the reach determination random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 227) is a predetermined hit value, and the acquired reach is obtained. When the judgment random number is not a predetermined hit value, it is judged that the high expectation effect is not performed. Then, as a result, when it is determined that the high expectation effect should be performed (YES in step S405), the high expectation loss fluctuation pattern table setting process described later is performed so that the variation pattern when the high expectation effect is performed is set. (Step S406).

Regarding the number of predetermined hit values prepared for the reach determination random number, the normal external disadvantageous gaming state (both the probability change function and the time saving function are not activated) and the normal external advantageous gaming state (only the time saving function is activated). , The probabilistic external disadvantageous gaming state (only the probabilistic variation function is activated) and the probabilistic external advantageous gaming state (both the probabilistic variation function and the time saving function are activated) may be different for each gaming state. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the probability that it is determined that the high expectation effect should be performed based on the reach determination random number being a predetermined hit value is usually in the external disadvantageous gaming state. Although it is "1/12", in the normal external advantageous gaming state and the probabilistic external advantageous gaming state, the degree of expectation at the time of reach is further increased (or efficient hold digestion is performed). , It may be judged that the high expectation production should be performed with a lower probability. On the contrary, in the probabilistic external disadvantageous game state, it is judged that the high-probability production should be performed with a higher probability so that the possibility of a big hit can be made more frequently recognized. May be good.

On the other hand, in the process of step S405, if it is determined that the high expectation effect with high expectation of winning the big hit should not be performed (NO in step S405), the loss fluctuation pattern when the high expectation effect is not performed In order to set (normal loss fluctuation pattern), the low expectation loss fluctuation pattern table setting process is performed (step S407).

Here, the table set in the low-expected loss fluctuation pattern table setting process is prepared in a form of being associated with each of a plurality of gaming states. For example, in the normal gaming state, the number of holds is a predetermined value. When the above is the case, the shortening fluctuation is performed.

However, in the game state in which the time saving function is activated, the fluctuation time is set so that the number of holdings for the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side, in which the probability of winning a small hit is "0", is not interrupted. It is set. More specifically, when the number of holdings on the second special symbol side is less than or equal to a predetermined value, the shortening variation is not adopted even though the game state in which the time saving function is activated, and the shortening variation is adopted in the normal gaming state. Only the fluctuation time having a length equal to or longer than the fluctuation time when not played (the fluctuation time longer than the shortened fluctuation in the normal gaming state) is selected. In addition, regarding the fluctuation time on the first special symbol side, the shortened fluctuation is not adopted regardless of the number of holdings, and only the fluctuation time having a length equal to or longer than the fluctuation time when the shortened fluctuation is not adopted in the normal gaming state. Is now selected. As a result, when the game is in a gaming state in which the time saving function is activated, the hold on the first special symbol side where the small hit can be won is suppressed, and as a result, the small hit is applied to the pachinko machine 1. It will be possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that it is installed.

Then, as will be described later, as shown in FIG. 228, when the selection table related to the fluctuation pattern is set in any of the processes of step S402, step S404, step S406, and step S407, the main control MPU 4100a Next, as the process of step S410, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the set selection table. Next, as the process of step S411, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol thus determined is set as an effect command, and the winning information is based on the state of the big hit flag (step S317) and the small hit flag (step S320). Set a command (a command that indicates the winning type including the winning and small hits).

Further, the value of the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is set to ON (step S413). When this special symbol LED operation flag is set to ON, the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol is based on the value of the special symbol fluctuation flag set in the process of step S305 or step S309. The variable display related to the lighting patterns of the plurality of LEDs as the display 642 is started. After that, the processing flag is updated to "2" (step S414), and the variation pattern setting process is completed.

By the way, the fluctuation pattern set in the fluctuation pattern setting process is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 224 as an effect command set in the process of step S411. .. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the result of the big hit lottery is shown based on the fluctuation pattern indicated by the effect command and the information indicated by the winning information command through the control described later by the peripheral control board 4140 side. The display effect will be performed as follows.

However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (small hit) without the operation of the condition device, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is set as described above. Without ending within the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern, the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 extends to the period after the fluctuation display related to the lighting patterns of a plurality of LEDs is stopped ( After extending the effect time), it can be executed so as to indicate that the hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device has been rejected (extended effect pattern in FIG. 245 (b)). That is, in this case, after the special symbol is stopped, when the small opening hit game is executed, the display effect that incites the acquisition of the prize ball does not appear, and the next is relatively early after it is shown that the big hit is lost. It becomes possible to shift to fluctuation (holding digestion of a special symbol), and it becomes possible to preferably avoid extension during which there is a possibility that some expectation may be given as an effect until the opening / closing member 2006 operates. ..

Further, as will be described later, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is special in contrast to the above-mentioned display effect (extended loss effect) at the time of a small hit, which indicates that the big hit is lost after the special symbol is stopped. There is also a display effect (extended jackpot effect) that indicates that the jackpot was won after the symbol has stopped. That is, when the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not terminated within the fluctuation time of the above-set fluctuation pattern, and the first special After extending to the period after the stop of the fluctuation display related to the lighting patterns of multiple LEDs as the symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642, the hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device is won. It can be executed so as to indicate that (extended effect pattern of FIG. 245 (b)).

That is, in this case, the above-mentioned display effect at the time of a small hit is positioned as a mere loss effect (highly expected loss fluctuation pattern) that appears at the time of a big hit loss. As a result, it becomes difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a hit (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and by extension, the opening / closing member 2006 operates according to the winning of the small hit. It becomes possible to suppress the decrease of.

However, as the function display unit 640 of the pachinko machine 1, instead of the form (7-segment LED) shown in FIG. 87, the form shown in FIG. 235 (eight LED groups not forming a specific symbol) is adopted. You may do so. In this example, the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 composed of 7-segment LEDs are each composed of eight LED groups. Further, the first special symbol storage display 643 and the second special symbol storage display 644 are each composed of four LED groups, and the ordinary symbol storage display 646 is composed of two LEDs.

In addition to being able to exert the same effects as described above with this function display unit 640, the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 are composed of eight LED groups that do not form any symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to remember the special symbol displayed to the player as compared with the case of using the 7-segment LED which has the meaning of the numerical symbol. Therefore, since it is difficult to understand the content displayed by the function display unit 640, it is possible to prevent the display of the function display unit 640 from becoming anxious and difficult to concentrate on the game during the game, and the movement of the game ball, It is possible to make the game more enjoyable by devoting itself to movable production and production images.

When the function display unit 640 shown in FIG. 235 is adopted, the lighting mode of the plurality of LEDs (special symbols) at the time of winning the small hit (when the special symbol is stopped) is the plurality of LEDs at the time of winning the big hit. It is desirable to control the lighting mode of the (special symbol) so that it appears as a mode similar to each other, such as whether or not one LED is lit depending on the lighting mode (when the special symbol is stopped). That is, in this case, when the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is extended to the period after the stop of the special symbol, it is immediately (at least after the extension of the effect) which result is obtained even if the same symbol (plurality of LEDs) is viewed. It becomes difficult to grasp (until a short time elapses until the winning is clearly stated). Therefore, it becomes possible to concentrate on the extended display effect (extended effect), and the interest in the special symbol (plurality of LEDs) is diminished, so that the period is extended to the period after the special symbol is stopped. It becomes possible for the player to make it difficult for the player to recognize even the displayed display effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 1 from being presumed to have a small hit due to the peculiarity when the extended effect appears, and by extension, depending on the winning of the small hit. It becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the gaming interest due to the operation of the opening / closing member 2006.

[About fluctuation pattern determination processing at the time of big hit]
Next, the fluctuation pattern determination process at the time of a big hit will be described with reference to FIG. 237. FIG. 237 is a list diagram showing an example of a large hit fluctuation pattern table T1 in a normal time, a small hit fluctuation pattern table T2 in a normal time, and a highly expected loss fluctuation pattern table T3 in a normal time. In addition, ○ in the winning column of FIG. 237 means a big hit, △ means the establishment of a specific condition at the time of loss (small hit), and × means the failure of the specific condition at the time of loss (pure loss). means.

As described above, if it is determined in the process of step S401 (see FIG. 228) that the jackpot flag is ON, the main control MPU4100a is elected as a jackpot as the process of step S402 (see FIG. 228). The jackpot fluctuation pattern table setting process is performed so that the fluctuation pattern at that time is set.

In this jackpot fluctuation pattern table setting process, first, the normal external disadvantageous game state (probability change function and time saving function are not activated), the normal external advantageous game state (only the time saving function is activated), and the probability change external disadvantageous game state (probability change function only). It is determined whether the game state is in the probabilistic external advantageous game state (probability change function and time saving function are both activated). That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a different jackpot fluctuation pattern table (not shown) is prepared for each gaming state, and usually the external disadvantageous gaming state (probability change function and time saving function are not provided). When it is determined that the game is in operation), the normal jackpot variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 237 is selected regardless of the type of jackpot.

Then, as described above, when the jackpot variation pattern table T1 at the normal time is selected, the main control MPU4100a is acquired by the process of step S303 (see FIG. 227) while referring to the selected table T1. Fluctuation display pattern The fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random numbers (step S410). Here, the stop (lighting) mode of the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 (LED) is also determined.

Here, assuming that, for example, a value from "0" to "99" can be acquired as a random number of the variation display pattern of the special symbol, these values from "0" to "99" are used in the normal jackpot variation pattern table T1. Of these, 9 specific values are assigned to variation number 1 (variation time Ta1) (selection rate at the time of jackpot 9%), and 20 specific values are assigned to variation number 5 (variation time Tb1). (Selection rate at the time of big hit 20%), 30 specific values are assigned to variation number 9 (variation time Tc1) (selection rate at the time of big hit 30%), and 40 specific values are assigned. It is assigned to the variation number 12 (variation time Td1) (selection rate at the time of big hit 40%), and one specific value is assigned to the variation number 15 (variation time Te) (selection rate 1 at the time of big hit). %). In this way, except for the variable number 15 for which the jackpot is confirmed, the number of specific values (big hit values) to be allocated tends to increase as the variable number increases.

As will be described later, when the variation number 1 (variation time Ta1) is selected, it is shown that the jackpot was won with the effect content "a (or a')" appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the variation number 5 (variation time Tb1) is selected, the liquid crystal display device 1400 has won the big hit with the effect content "b (or b')" appearing. Is performed, and when the variation number 9 (variation time Tc1) is selected, a big hit is won while the effect content "c (or c')" appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the display effect indicating that the display is performed and the variation number 12 (variation time Td1) is selected, a big hit is made when the effect content "d (or d')" appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. A display effect indicating that the winner was won was performed, and when the variation number 15 (variation time Te1) was selected, the jackpot was won with the effect content "e" appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. Is displayed. By the way, the production content a, the production content a', the production content b, the production content b', the production content c, the production content c', the production content d, the production content d', and the production content e are all on the liquid crystal display device 1400. The types of display effects that appear (for example, the types of reach effects and the types of story effects) are different.

Further, as will be described later, as for the length of the fluctuation time, the fluctuation time Tb1 is longer than the fluctuation time Ta1, the fluctuation time Tc1 is longer than the fluctuation time Tb1, and the fluctuation time Tc1 is longer than the fluctuation time Tc1. Also, the fluctuation time Td1 is longer, and the fluctuation time Te is longer than the fluctuation time Td1.

Then, as described above, in the jackpot variation pattern table T1 at the normal time, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 227). , The effect command associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, the command "01H" if the variation number is 1) and the winning information command (the winning type including the winning and the small hit). The commands shown) and are set respectively (step S411). Further, the value of the fluctuation time associated with the determined fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation time Ta1 if the fluctuation number is 1) is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is turned ON. It is set (step S413), and the processing flag is updated to "2" (step S414).

On the other hand, in performing the jackpot variation pattern table setting process, when it is determined that the gaming state is different from the normal external disadvantageous gaming state, the jackpot variation pattern table associated with the determined gaming state is selected. Then, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the selected table, and various commands corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern are set, but this description will be omitted.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the normal external disadvantageous gaming state, which of the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side and the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side won the big hit? Regardless of, it was decided to select the jackpot fluctuation pattern table T1 at the normal time, but when the lottery (variation) on the first special symbol side is performed and when the lottery (variation) on the second special symbol side is performed. By selecting a jackpot variation pattern table having different contents, a display effect having different contents may appear.

Further, when it is determined that the player is in a normal external disadvantageous game state (both the probability change function and the time saving function are not activated), the normal jackpot variation pattern table T1 shown in FIG. 237 is selected regardless of the jackpot type. However, one of the normal jackpot fluctuation pattern tables prepared for each jackpot type may be selectively used based on the state of the jackpot flag according to the jackpot type.

That is, in this case, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern can be made different according to the type of jackpot, and when a specific fluctuation pattern appears, the probability of being a jackpot of a specific type is increased. Will be. In addition, even if the fluctuation time is the same, the fluctuation number (effect command) can be changed according to the type of jackpot. In this case, the fluctuation pattern as well as the fluctuation pattern can be changed simply by checking the production command. , You will be able to grasp the type of jackpot. Therefore, if the peripheral control board 4140 side compares the effect command with the winning information command to judge the appropriateness, the reliability of communication with the main control board 4100 is improved. You will be able to do it.

[About fluctuation pattern determination processing at the time of small hit]
Next, the fluctuation pattern determination process at the time of a small hit will be described with reference to FIG. 237.

As described above, if it is determined that the small hit flag is ON in the process of step S403 (see FIG. 228), the main control MPU4100a will perform the small hit as the process of step S404 (see FIG. 228). The small hit variation pattern table setting process is performed so that the variation pattern at the time of winning is set.

In this small hit variation pattern table setting process, first, the normal external disadvantageous game state (probability change function and time saving function are not activated), the normal external advantageous game state (only the time saving function is activated), and the probability change external disadvantageous game state (probability change function). It is determined whether the game state is in the probabilistic external advantageous gaming state (probability change function and time saving function are both activated). That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a different small hit variation pattern table (not shown) is prepared for each gaming state, and usually, both the external disadvantageous gaming state (probability variation function and time saving function) are provided. When it is determined that the slingshot is inactive), the small hit variation pattern table T2 at the normal time shown in FIG. 237 is selected.

Then, as described above, when the small hit variation pattern table T2 at the normal time is selected, the main control MPU4100a is acquired by the process of step S303 (see FIG. 227) while referring to the selected table T2. The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number (step S410). Here, the stop (lighting) mode of the first special symbol display 1185 or the second special symbol display 1186 (LED) is also determined.

Here, assuming that a value from "0" to "99" can be acquired as a random number of the variation display pattern of the special symbol, in the normal small hit variation pattern table T2, these "0" to "99" are obtained. Of the values, 35 specific values are assigned to fluctuation number 2 (variation time Ta2) (selection rate at the time of small hit is 35%), and 30 specific values are fluctuation number 6 (variation time Tb2). (Selection rate at the time of small hit 30%), 30 specific values are assigned to fluctuation number 10 (variation time Tc2) (selection rate at the time of small hit 20%), 5 A specific value is assigned to the variation number 13 (variation time Td2) (selection rate at the time of small hit 5%). In this way, as the variable number increases, the number of specific values (small hit values) allocated tends to decrease.

As will be described later, when the variation number 2 (variation time Ta2) is selected, the result of the big hit lottery is shown under the effect content "a (or a')" appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the effect is performed and the variation number 6 (variation time Tb2) is selected, the display showing the result of the big hit lottery while the effect content "b (or b')" appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the effect is performed and the variation number 10 (variation time Tc2) is selected, the display showing the result of the big hit lottery while the effect content "c (or c')" appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the effect is performed and the variation number 13 (variation time Td2) is selected, the display showing the result of the big hit lottery while the effect content "d (or d')" appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400. The production is done. By the way, as such a display effect showing the result of the big hit lottery, for example, a display effect showing that the big hit has been lost or a game state in which the prize ball can be obtained by the operation of the opening / closing member 2006 is shifted. A display effect that indicates that the game is to be performed (a display effect that appears even when a big hit is won) is appropriately adopted.

Further, as will be described later, as the length of the fluctuation time, the fluctuation time Ta2 is set as a time (same or approximate time) that matches the fluctuation time Ta1 with reference to the fluctuation time Ta1. When the time Ta1 (variation number 1) or the fluctuation time Ta2 (variation number 2) is selected, any result can be obtained as a big hit lottery under the effect content "a (or a')". A pair of productions about what was done appears. Further, the fluctuation time Tb2 is set as a time (same or approximate time) having a length based on the fluctuation time Tb1 as a reference, and the fluctuation time Tb1 (variation number 5) and the fluctuation time Tb2 (variation). When the number 6) is selected, a pair of effects as to what kind of result was obtained as a big hit lottery appears under the effect content "b (or b')". Further, the fluctuation time Tc2 is set as a length of time (same or approximate time) based on the fluctuation time Tc1, and the fluctuation time Tc1 (variation number 9) and the fluctuation time Tc2 (variation). When the number 10) is selected, a pair of effects as to what kind of result was obtained as a big hit lottery appears under the effect content "c (or c')". Further, the fluctuation time Td2 is set as a time (same or approximate time) having a length based on the fluctuation time Td1 as a reference, and the fluctuation time Td1 (variation number 12) and the fluctuation time Td2 (variation). When the number 13) is selected, the effect content "d (or d')" appears, and a pair of effects as to what kind of result was obtained as a big hit lottery appears.

Then, as described above, in the small hit variation pattern table T2 at the normal time, the variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the variation display pattern random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 227). And the effect command associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, command "02H" for variation number 2) and the winning information command (winning type including winning and small hits). (Command indicating) and are set respectively (step S411). Further, the value of the fluctuation time associated with the determined fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation time Ta2 in the case of the fluctuation number 2) is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is turned ON. It is set (step S413), and the processing flag is updated to "2" (step S414).

On the other hand, in performing the small hit variation pattern table setting process, when it is determined that the gaming state is different from the normal external disadvantageous gaming state, the small hit variation pattern table associated with the determined gaming state Is selected, a fluctuation pattern is determined based on the selected table, and various commands are set according to the determined fluctuation pattern, but this description will be omitted. However, if a small hit is won in a gaming state in which the time saving function is activated (external advantageous gaming state), a single fluctuation pattern is determined, and display processing (for example, pure loss) is performed without inciting expectations. It is desirable to perform the same display processing as the low-expectation effect at the time.

[About the fluctuation pattern determination process during high-expected production]
Next, the fluctuation pattern determination process at the time of high expectation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 237.

As described above, if it is determined that the high expectation effect should be performed in the process of step S405 (see FIG. 228), the main control MPU4100a has high expectations as the process of step S406 (see FIG. 228). In order to set the fluctuation pattern when performing the production, the high-expected loss fluctuation pattern table setting process is performed (step S406).

Even in this highly expected loss fluctuation pattern table setting process, first, the normal external disadvantageous game state (probability change function and time saving function are not activated), the normal external advantageous game state (only the time saving function is activated), and the probability change external disadvantageous game state (probability change external disadvantage game state). It is determined whether the gaming state is in the probabilistic variation function (only the probabilistic variation function is activated) or the probabilistic variation external advantageous gaming state (the probabilistic variation function and the time saving function are both activated). That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a different high-expected loss fluctuation pattern table (not shown) is prepared for each gaming state, and usually an external disadvantageous gaming state (probability variation function and time saving function) is available. When it is determined that the slingshot is inactive), the high-expected loss fluctuation pattern table T3 at the normal time shown in FIG. 237 is selected.

Then, as described above, when the high-expected loss fluctuation pattern table T3 in the normal state is selected, the main control MPU4100a refers to the selected table T3 in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 227). The variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the acquired variation display pattern random number (step S410). Here, the stop (lighting) mode of the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 (LED) is also determined.

Here, assuming that a value from "0" to "99" can be acquired as a random number of the fluctuation display pattern of the special symbol, in the high-expected loss fluctuation pattern table T3 at the normal time, these "0" to "99" Of the values of, 40 specific values are assigned to variation number 3 (variation time Ta3) (selectivity at the time of high expectation loss 40%), and 17 specific values are variation number 4 (variation time). It is assigned to Ta4) (selection rate 17% at the time of high expectation loss), and 25 specific values are assigned to fluctuation number 7 (variation time Tb3) (selection rate 25% at the time of high expectation loss). , 13 specific values are assigned to variation number 8 (variation time Tb4) (selectivity 13% at the time of high expectation loss), and 3 specific values are assigned to variation number 11 (variation time Tc3). (Selection rate at the time of high expectation loss 3%), two specific values are assigned to the variation number 14 (variation time Td3) (selection rate at the time of high expectation loss 2%). In this way, as the variable number increases, the number of specific values (outliers) allocated tends to decrease.

As will be described later, when the variation number 3 (fluctuation time Ta3) is selected, the liquid crystal display device 1400 is rejected as a big hit when the effect content "a, no development (or a')" appears. When the display effect indicating that the effect was performed and the variation number 4 (variation time Ta4) was selected, the liquid crystal display device 1400 was rejected as a big hit with the effect content "a, with development" appearing. Is displayed, or a display effect indicating that the jackpot has been lost is performed when the effect content "c'" appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the variation number 7 (variation time Tb3) is selected. When this is done, a display effect indicating that the jackpot was rejected is performed under the effect content "b, no development (or b')" on the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the variation number 8 (variation). When the time Tb4) is selected, the display effect indicating that the jackpot was rejected under the appearance of the effect content "b, with development" on the liquid crystal display device 1400, or the effect content "b" on the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the display effect indicating that the jackpot was lost is performed with the appearance of "d'" and the variation number 11 (variation time Tc3) is selected, the effect content "c (or)" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. , C') ”appears, a display effect indicating that the jackpot was lost is performed, and when the variation number 14 (variation time Td3) is selected, the effect content“ d ”is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. (Or, d') ”appears, and a display effect is performed to indicate that the jackpot was lost. By the way, as will be described later, when the fluctuation numbers 4 and 8 are used, they appear as a loss effect pattern with different effect contents depending on the control mode on the peripheral control board 4140 side. Since the variation number of the jackpot effect pattern that is a pair of variation numbers 4 and 8 is changed between the variation numbers 1 and 5 and the variation numbers 9 and 12, the control mode on the peripheral control board 4140 side is set. It will be possible to make the production patterns with different jackpot expectations appear accordingly.

Further, as will be described later, as the length of the fluctuation time, the fluctuation time Ta3 is set as a time (same or approximate time) of a length that matches the fluctuation time Ta1 with reference to the fluctuation time Ta1. When the time Ta1 (variation number 1), the fluctuation time Ta2 (variation number 2), and the fluctuation time Ta3 (variation number 3) are selected, any of the jackpot lottery is performed under the effect content "a". A pair of renditions about whether the results were obtained appears. However, when the fluctuation time Ta1 (variation number 1) or the fluctuation time Ta2 (variation number 2) is selected, the effect content "a" is set to the opening period before the opening / closing member 2006 opens / closes the grand prize opening 2003. Since such an effect may be extended, a variation time Ta4 (variation number 4) longer than the variation time Ta3 (variation number 3) is prepared as a paired loss effect pattern when such an extension effect is performed. ing. Further, the fluctuation time Ta4 (variation number 4) is also set as a time (same or approximate time) having a length (same or approximate time) based on the fluctuation time Tc3 (variation number 11). Depending on the control on the control board 4140 side, it can also be used as an effect pattern of the fluctuation time Tc3 (variation number 11). As a result, as described above, the variation number of the jackpot effect pattern, which is a pair of the variation number 4 of the loss effect pattern, is changed between the variation number 1 and the variation number 9.

Further, the fluctuation time Tb3 is set as a time (same or approximate time) having a length based on the fluctuation time Tb1 as a reference, and the fluctuation time Tb1 (variation number 5) and the fluctuation time Tb2 (variation number 5). When the variation number 6) and the variation time Tb3 (variation number 7) are selected, the effect content "b" appears, and a pair of effects as to what kind of result was obtained as a big hit lottery appears. However, when the fluctuation time Tb1 (variation number 5) or the fluctuation time Tb2 (variation number 6) is selected, the effect content "b" is set to the opening period before the opening / closing member 2006 opens / closes the grand prize opening 2003. Since such an effect may be extended, a variation time Tb4 (variation number 8) longer than the variation time Tb3 (variation number 7) is prepared as a paired loss effect pattern when such an extension effect is performed. ing. Further, the fluctuation time Tb4 (variation number 8) is also set as a time (same or approximate time) of a length (same or approximate time) based on the fluctuation time Td3 (variation number 14). Depending on the control on the control board 4140 side, it can also be used as an effect pattern of the fluctuation time Td3 (variation number 14). As a result, as described above, the variation number of the jackpot effect pattern, which is a pair of the variation number 8 of the loss effect pattern, is changed between the variation number 5 and the variation number 12.

Then, as described above, in the highly expected loss fluctuation pattern table T3 at the normal time, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the fluctuation display pattern random number acquired in the process of step S303 (see FIG. 227). Then, the effect command associated with the determined variation pattern (for example, the command "03H" if the variation number is 3) and the winning information command (winning including winning and small hits) (Command indicating the seed) and each are set (step S411). Furthermore, the value of the fluctuation time associated with the determined fluctuation pattern (for example, the fluctuation time Ta3 if the fluctuation number is 3) is set in the timer (step S412), and the special figure LED operation flag is turned ON. It is set (step S413), and the processing flag is updated to "2" (step S414).

On the other hand, in performing the jackpot variation pattern table setting process, when it is determined that the gaming state is different from the normal external disadvantageous gaming state, the highly expected variation pattern table associated with the determined gaming state is displayed. It will be selected, the fluctuation pattern will be determined based on the selected table, and various commands will be set according to the determined fluctuation pattern, but this description will be omitted.

According to the jackpot fluctuation pattern table T1 at the normal time, the small hit fluctuation pattern table T2 at the normal time, and the high expected loss fluctuation pattern table T3 at the normal time, the jackpot expectation degree is higher than the display effect a and the display effect b. Is higher, the display effect c is higher than the display effect b, the display effect d is higher than the display effect c, and the display effect e is higher than the display effect d. In particular, since the display effect e can appear only when the big hit is won, it is confirmed that the big hit is won when the effect e appears.

[Processing during fluctuation]
Next, the variable processing (step S180) executed when the processing flag is “2” will be described. FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing an example of processing during fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 229, in the changing process (step S180), the main control MPU4100a first sets the variable time in the timer in the process of step S412 (see FIG. 228) as the process of step S501. Determines if the time is up. If the fluctuation time set in the timer has not timed up (NO in step S501), the processing during fluctuation ends.

If the fluctuation time set in the timer is timed up (YES in step S501), the special figure LED operation flag set to ON in the process of step S413 is set to OFF (step S502). When this special symbol LED operation flag is set to OFF, the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol is based on the value of the special symbol fluctuation flag set in the process of step S305 or step S309. The variation display (variation of the special symbol) related to the lighting patterns of the plurality of LEDs as the display 642 is terminated. Further, in order to end the display effect of the big hit lottery on the liquid crystal display device 1400, a confirmation stop command indicating that the effect result of the display effect should be confirmed and displayed on the peripheral control board 4140. Is set (step S503). The fixed stop command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 224. As a result, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the effect result in the display effect is confirmed and displayed through the control described later by the peripheral control board 4140 side. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, depending on the control mode on the peripheral control board 4140, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not terminated even though the confirmation stop command is received, and the subsequent opening period is continued. As described above, the display effect may be controlled so as to be extended.

Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S504). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in step S504), the processing flag is updated to "3" assuming that the special symbol is in the processing stage where the fluctuation is stopped so as to indicate that the jackpot has been won (step S505). , Ends the processing during the change.

On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not ON but the big hit is lost (NO in step S504), then, as the process of step S506, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is ON. If the small hit flag is ON (YES in step S506), the processing flag is updated to "4" assuming that the special symbol is in the processing stage where the fluctuation is stopped so as to indicate that the small hit has been won (step). S507), the processing during the change is terminated.

On the other hand, when the small hit flag is not ON and is a pure loss (a loss that does not satisfy a specific condition) (NO in step S506), it is special so that it is shown that both the big hit and the small hit have been rejected. Assuming that the symbol is in the processing stage where the fluctuation is stopped, the processing flag is updated to "0" (step S508), and the processing during the fluctuation is terminated. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, the next variation related to the special symbol is performed on condition that the interrupt is held and digested in the process of step S130.

[About jackpot game start processing]
Next, the jackpot game start process (step S200) executed when the process flag is “3” will be described. FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game start process.

As shown in FIG. 230, in the jackpot game start process (step S200), the main control MPU4100a first operates the condition device as the process of step S601. Next, as the process of step S2602, a function (probability fluctuation function) for increasing the winning probability of a hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device is in operation (probability fluctuation function) as compared with the case of the normal external disadvantageous gaming state or the normal external advantageous gaming state. It is judged whether or not it is in the probability fluctuation state). As a result, when it is determined that the probabilistic external disadvantageous gaming state or the probabilistic external advantageous gaming state is in the game state and the probability variation function is operating (YES in step S602), the probability variation function The operation is stopped (step S603).

Next, as the process of step S604, with the operation of the probability fluctuation function stopped in this way, a function (time saving function) that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 2002 is operating (time saving game state). Judge whether or not. If it is not determined in the process of step S602 that the probability variation function is operating, the process proceeds to step S604 without executing the process of step S603. As a result, when it is determined that the time saving function is in operation in either the normal external advantageous gaming state or the probabilistic external advantageous gaming state (YES in step S604), the time saving function is activated. Stop (step S605).

Then, in order to perform the big hit game with both the probability fluctuation function and the time saving function stopped in this way, as a process of step S606, the big winning opening 2003 is repeatedly opened in the big hit game. The maximum number of times (16 times or 9 times in this embodiment), the maximum number of game balls that can be entered into the big winning opening 2003 in each round game (predetermined large number), and each round The opening mode in the big hit game is set, such as the opening / closing operation time limit of the opening / closing member 2006 in the game (a predetermined long time of the long-time opening / closing pattern). That is, in the process of step S606, first, the type of jackpot is determined based on the jackpot flag set in the process of step S317 (see FIG. 227). Then, the information related to the "opening mode in the big hit game" prepared in association with each type of big hit (big hit A to big hit E) determined in this way is obtained from the ROM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). It is read and the read information is set. As a result, the big hit game can be executed with the above-mentioned opening mode according to the type of big hit (big hit A to big hit E). If it is not determined in the process of step S604 that the time saving function is operating, the process of step S606 is performed without executing the process of step S605.

After that, prior to the big hit game, the interval production before the big hit game is performed (for example, the opening production such as "Congratulations" and the challenge bonus production such as "Chance to win the ball!") Are executed. As possible, an interval effect command at the time of a big hit is set, which indicates the time from when the special symbol is stopped until the special bonus game (big hit game) is started (step S607). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the big hit is won, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is extended to the period after the stop of the special symbol (as described above). Since (extended effect) can be executed, the interval effect command set in this way is also prepared based on this. That is, in relation to the time required for the extended effect that appears even when the small hit is won, only the interval effect command indicating a specific fixed time (for example, 8 seconds) is set regardless of the type of the big hit. Then, the interval effect command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 224, so that at a specific fixed time (for example, 8 seconds) indicated by the command. Is to selectively perform either the interval effect as described above or the extension effect as described above on the liquid crystal display device 1400 through the control described later by the peripheral control board 4140 side.

Next, the interval effect timer (for example, 8 seconds) associated with the interval effect command set in the process of step S607 is set (step S608), and the process flag is updated to "5" (step S609). , Ends the jackpot game start process.

[About small hit game start processing]
Next, the small hit game start process (step S220) executed when the process flag is “4” will be described. FIG. 231 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game start process.

As shown in FIG. 231, in the small hit game start process (step S220), the main control MPU4100a first performs the small open hit game (small hit game), so that the small hit game is performed as the process of step S701. The number of times the large winning opening 2003 is repeatedly opened in the game (twice in this embodiment), the maximum number of game balls that can be entered into the large winning opening 2003 at the time of opening (a predetermined small number), and the like. , The opening mode in the small opening hit game (small hit game) such as the opening / closing operation time limit (small time opening / closing pattern) of the opening / closing member 2006 at the time of opening is set.

After that, prior to the small opening hit game (small hit game), the interval production before the small game is performed (for example, a challenge bonus production such as "chance to win a ball!") Can be executed. An interval effect command at the time of a small hit is set, which indicates the time from when the special symbol is stopped until the small bonus game (small hit game) is started (step S702). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a small hit is won, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is extended to the period after the stop of the special symbol (as described above). Since the extension effect of) can be executed, the interval effect command set in this way is also prepared based on this. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in relation to the time required for the extension effect that appears even when the big hit is won, a specific fixed time (for example, a random number for the big hit symbol) at the time of the small hit is won. Only the interval production command that indicates 8 seconds) is set. By setting such a time when the extension effect appears, it is possible to suppress the presumption of the existence of a small hit, and by extension, the opening / closing member 2006 operates according to the winning of the small hit, which reduces the interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

Next, the interval effect timer (for example, 8 seconds) associated with the interval effect command set in the process of step S702 is set (step S703), and the process flag is updated to "6" (step S704). , Ends the small hit game start process.

As will be described later, the interval effect command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 224, whereby in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the peripheral control board 4140 side. Through the control described later by the above, the interval effect is performed for the time indicated by the interval effect command.

[About jackpot game processing]
Next, the jackpot game process (step S240) executed when the process flag is “5” will be described. FIG. 232 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot game process.

As shown in FIG. 232, in the jackpot game process (step S240), the main control MPU4100a first sets a flag during the jackpot game indicating that the jackpot game has already been performed as the process of step S801. Judge whether or not it is in the ON state (set).

Here, the jackpot gaming flag is operated to the OFF state when the processing status is immediately after the transition to the jackpot game processing (step S240). Therefore, when the processing status is immediately after shifting to the jackpot game processing (step S240), it is determined that the jackpot gaming flag is not in the ON state (set) (NO in step S801), and then the processing in step S802. I do.

In the process of this step S802, whether or not the above-mentioned interval effect (opening effect of big hit confirmation, challenge bonus effect of opening confirmation of big winning opening 2003 (execution confirmation of bonus game), or extension effect) is completed, that is, the above. It is determined whether or not the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) set in the process of step S607 (see FIG. 230) has timed up. The interval production timer (8 seconds in this case) has not timed up, and the above-mentioned interval production (opening production of big hit confirmation, challenge bonus production of opening confirmation of big winning opening 2003, or extension production) is still being executed. In the case (NO in step S802), the jackpot game process is temporarily terminated, and the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) waits until the time is up through the processes of steps S801 and S802 (interruption process is repeated). It will be.

However, in the main control MPU4100a according to this embodiment, even if the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) is timed up as a result of such processing (YES in step S802), only this is a big hit. Whether or not the game ball has passed through the special figure gate 2500 (specific entrance) after the interval production timer (8 seconds in this case) is timed up so that the game will not start A determination is made (step S803). As a result, when it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the special figure gate 2500, the jackpot game process is temporarily terminated, and the process in step S803 waits until it is determined that the game ball has passed through the special figure gate 2500. By doing so (repeating the interrupt process), the opening / closing means 2006 is operated until the game ball is accepted by the special figure gate 2500 after the time (8 seconds in this case) predetermined by the interval effect timer is up. It is designed to be extended and maintained in the closed state without being caused.

According to the extension control over the closing control period of the big winning opening 2003, the closing control period (opening / closing member 2006) from the stop of the special symbol to the start of the big hit game based on the winning of the big hit. Of the period during which the special symbol is maintained and controlled in the closed state), the time from when the special symbol is stopped until the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) is timed up is set in advance after the special symbol is stopped and displayed. When the "first closing control period having a given length" is set (step S802), after the lapse of the first closing control period, the "second closing control period having an indefinite length" is set. "Closed control period" will appear further (step S803). Therefore, it becomes possible to realize a novel effect that mutually utilizes the attribute as the closed control period having a predetermined length and the attribute as the closed control period having an indefinite length. ..

More specifically, the first closed control period (8 seconds in this case) is used as, for example, as the addition time with the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol set above, and this addition time is used. As one unit, it is possible to realize an effect using attributes as a closed control period having a predetermined length, such as extending the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 to the variable display of a special symbol. become able to. As will be described later, in this embodiment, the display effect related to the big hit lottery may be executed with the effect content for the time obtained by adding the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the first closing control period. There is. On the other hand, for the second closing control period (here, the time until the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500), for example, a feature-length movie until the opening / closing member 2006 operates using the same period is shown. It becomes possible to realize an effect using the attribute as a closed control period having an indefinite length, such as flowing by the liquid crystal display device 1400. That is, for the second closing control period (here, the time until the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500), the player can appropriately end the synchronization period, so that a feature-length movie or the like can be used. Even when the redundant production of the above is realized, the range of the production can be expanded without causing adverse effects such as deterioration of the game entertainment due to the extension of the production.

Then, as a result of performing such processing, when it is determined in the processing of step S803 that the game ball has passed through the special figure gate 2500, the accessory continuous operating device is activated to cause a big hit (operation of the condition device). The state shifts to a state in which the operation (big hit game) of the opening / closing member 2006 according to the winning of the accompanying hit) is possible. That is, in this case, the main control MPU4100a first sets the jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game is started as the process of step S804, and the jackpot game indicating that the jackpot game has already been performed. The middle flag is operated (set) in the ON state, and then the process proceeds to step S805.

That is, as will be described later, the jackpot start command set in this way is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 224, whereby in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the peripheral control board 4140 Through the control described later by the side, the display effect during the jackpot game will be performed. Further, by operating (setting) the big hit game flag to the ON state, when the big hit game process (step S240) is started by the interrupt control from the next time onward, such steps S801 to S804 The process of step S805 below is performed to perform the process related to the execution of the jackpot game without performing the process of.

In the process of step S805, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening 2003 is open. If it is open (YES in step S805), then as the process of step S806, the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the large winning opening 2003 is set in the process of step S606 (see FIG. 230). It is determined whether or not the set opening / closing operation time limit (predetermined long time or predetermined intermediate time) has been reached. As a result, when it is determined that the opening / closing operation time limit has elapsed (YES in step S806), the opening / closing member 2006 is closed to close the winning opening 2003 (step S808).

However, even if it is determined in the process of step S806 that the set opening / closing operation time limit has not yet elapsed (NO in step S806), the same applies after the large winning opening 2003 is opened. When the number of game balls entered in the grand prize opening 2003 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number (for example, 10) set in the process of step S606 (YES in step S807), step S808 is described. And close the big prize opening 2003. On the other hand, if the opening / closing operation time limit set above has not yet passed (NO in step S806) and the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening 2003 has not yet reached the upper limit. (NO in step S807), the big hit game process is finished while keeping the big winning opening 2003 in the open state.

On the other hand, in the process of step S805, when it is determined that the big winning opening 2003 is not open, the number of times the big winning opening 2003 is opened by the opening / closing member 2006 (the number of round games) is set to the above step S606 (FIG. 230). It is determined whether or not the maximum number of times (16 times or 9 times) set in the process of (see) has been reached (step S809). If it has not reached (NO in step S809), the opening / closing member 2006 is operated to open the big winning opening 2003 (step S810), and the big hit game process is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of step S809, when it is determined that the round game has already been performed the maximum number of times, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is stopped, so that a big hit (a hit accompanied by the operation of the condition device). The operation (big hit game) of the opening / closing member 2006 according to the winning of the game will be disabled. That is, in this case, the main control MPU 4100a executes the processes of steps S811 to S817, for example, in the process of step S317 (see FIG. 227), in addition to the jackpot flag, the RAM of the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a). Based on the winning type of the jackpot that was the trigger for executing the jackpot game stored in, the game state after the jackpot game is set, and then the jackpot game process is terminated. The winning species here is related to whether or not the winning species activates the probability fluctuation function and the time saving function. For example, when the jackpot that triggered the execution of the jackpot game is jackpot C. Will differ in the content of the information regarding whether or not the time saving function is activated according to the game state when it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit.

That is, first, the jackpot flag and the jackpot game in-game flag are each operated in the OFF state (step S811), and the winning species of the jackpot that triggered the execution of the jackpot game is determined (step S812, step S814). Here, in the process of step S812, it is determined whether or not the winning species (big hits A to D) activate the probability variation function. As a result, when it is determined that the winning species does not activate the probability variation function, the process proceeds to the process of step S814 without operating the probability variation function. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S812 that the winning species activates the probability variation function, the probability variation function is activated (step S813), and then the process proceeds to the process of step S814. To do.

Further, in the process of step S814, it is determined whether or not the winning type (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C won in the time saving game state) is the one that activates the time saving function. As a result, when it is determined that the winning species does not activate the time saving function, the operation of the condition device is stopped without operating the time saving function (step S816), and when the processing flag is set to "0" ( Step S817), the jackpot game process is completed. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S814 that the species is the winning species that activates the time saving function, the time saving function is activated (step S815), and then the operation of the condition device is stopped (step S816). ), When the processing flag is set to "0" (step S817), the jackpot game processing is terminated.

According to such a big hit game start process, the big winning opening 2003 is opened according to the type of big hit (step S806) until it is determined that the round game has reached the maximum number of times in the process of step 807. , Step S807, and step S809), and the prize balls according to the type of big hit can be obtained by the player.

[About small hit game processing]
Next, the small hit game process (step S250) executed when the process flag is “6” will be described. FIG. 233 is a flowchart showing an example of the small hit game process.

As shown in FIG. 233, also in the small hit game process (step S250), the main control MPU4100a first indicates that the small hit game has already been performed as the process of step S901. It is determined whether or not the in-game flag is in the ON state (set).

Here, the small hit game in progress flag is operated to the OFF state when the processing status is immediately after shifting to the small hit game process (step S250). Therefore, when the processing status is immediately after shifting to the small hit game process (step S250), it is determined that the small hit game in-progress flag is not in the ON state (set) (NO in step S901), and then step S902. Is processed.

In the process of step S902, whether or not the above-mentioned interval effect (challenge bonus effect or extension effect) is completed, that is, the interval effect timer set in the process of step 703 (see FIG. 231) is set in advance. It is judged whether or not the time (8 seconds in this case) is up. If the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) has not timed up and the above-mentioned interval effect (challenge bonus effect or extension effect) is still being executed (NO in step S902), the small hit game The process is temporarily completed, and the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) waits until the time is up through the processes of steps S901 and S902.

However, in the small hit game process (step S250) according to this embodiment, unlike the big hit game process (step 240), as a result of such processing, the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) is timed up. In the case (YES in step S902), the small hit game is started only by this, and then, as the process of step S903, the small hit start command indicating to start the small hit game is set and the small hit is started. The small hit game in-game flag, which indicates that the game is already being played, is operated (set) to the ON state. That is, in this case, as long as the player confirms that the above-mentioned second closing control period does not appear (there is no extension control from the first closing control period having a certain length), the conditional device After completely removing the expectation that a bonus game may be performed according to the hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of (not a notification by a production with a lot of false information, but a control related to the progress of the game) It is possible to play the game (after removing the feeling of expectation depending on the presence or absence).

Further, as will be described later, the small hit start command set in the process of step S903 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140 by the command transmission process (step S17) shown in FIG. 224, whereby the liquid crystal display device 1400 In the above-mentioned small hit game, the display effect during the small hit game is performed through the control described later by the peripheral control board 4140 side. Further, by operating (setting) the small hit game in-progress flag to the ON state, when the small hit game process (step S250) is started in the next and subsequent interrupt processes, such step S901 -The process of step S904 for performing the process related to the execution of the small hit game is performed without performing the process of step S903.

In the process of step S904, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening 2003 is open. If it is open (YES in step S904), then as the process of step S905, the opening time (elapsed time after opening) of the large winning opening 2003 is set in the process of step S701 (see FIG. 231). It is determined whether or not the set opening / closing operation time limit (predetermined small time of the small time opening / closing pattern) has been reached. As a result, when it is determined that the opening / closing operation time limit has elapsed (YES in step S905), the opening / closing member 2006 is closed to close the grand prize opening 2003 (step S907).

However, even if it is determined in the process of step S905 that the set opening / closing operation time limit has not yet elapsed (NO in step S905), the same applies after the large winning opening 2003 is opened. When the number of game balls entered in the grand prize opening 2003 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number (for example, two) set in the process of step S701 (YES in step S905), the step S901 is described. The process shifts to S907 and the grand prize opening 2003 is closed. On the other hand, if the opening / closing operation time limit set above has not yet passed (NO in step S905) and the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening 2003 has not yet reached the upper limit. (NO in step S905), the small hit game process is completed while the large winning opening 2003 is maintained in the open state.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S904 that the large winning opening 2003 is not open, the number of times the large winning opening 2003 is opened by the opening / closing member 2006 is determined by the process of step S701 (see FIG. 231). It is determined whether or not the set maximum number of times (twice) has been reached (step S908). If it has not reached (NO in step S908), the opening / closing member 2006 is operated to open the big winning opening 2003 (step S909), and the small hit game process is completed.

On the other hand, in the process of step S908, when it is determined that the opening / closing member 2006 has already opened the large winning opening 2003 for the maximum number of times, the small hit flag and the small hit in-game flag are turned off. The state is operated (step S910), and when the processing flag is set to "0" (step S911), the small hit game processing is terminated.

According to such a small hit game process, the large prize opening 2003 responds to the big hit until it is determined in the process of step 906 that the opening of the large prize opening 2003 by the opening / closing member 2006 has reached the maximum number of times. Although it is an open mode in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter the large winning opening 2003 as compared with the open mode, the prize balls corresponding to the open mode can be obtained by the player. Become.

[3-6. Control processing in the peripheral control unit]
Next, the processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 4140a mounted on the peripheral control board 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 238 to 244. FIG. 238 is a flowchart showing an example of sub-main processing, and FIG. 239 is a flowchart showing an example of 16 ms steady-state processing. FIG. 240 is a flowchart showing an example of the command analysis process (step S1100). FIG. 241 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process (step S1200). FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation start processing (step S1210). FIG. 243 is a flowchart showing an example of the stop symbol determination process (step S1225a) in the first effect mode, and FIG. 244 shows an example of the stop symbol determination process (step S1225b) in the second effect mode. It is a flowchart.

[Sub-main processing]
In the sub-main process, as shown in FIG. 238, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU4140a performs the initial setting process (step S1001). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the peripheral control RAM 4140e mounted on the peripheral control board 4140 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S1001) is completed, the loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag T is set is started (step S1002).

Here, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment executes a 2 ms steady process as an interrupt process every time 2 ms elapses. That is, in this 2 ms steady processing, the counter value of the 16 ms progress monitoring counter is counted up (“1” is added to the counter value). Then, as a result of repeating the count-up every time 2 ms elapses, when the counter value becomes 8 (when 16 ms elapses), the 16 ms elapse flag T is set and the 16 ms elapse monitoring is performed. The counter value of the counter is reset.

In this regard, in the process of step 1002, the 16 ms elapsed flag T is monitored until it is set in the 2 ms steady-state process described above (loop process). As a result, when it is determined that the 16 ms elapsed flag is set (Yes in step 1002), after resetting the 16 ms elapsed flag (step S1003), the 16 ms steady processing described later is performed (step S1004). The 16 ms steady-state process is performed every 16 ms.

In this 16 ms steady processing, the liquid crystal display device 1400, the LED of each decorative board provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4, the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3 are used based on various effect commands received from the main control board 4100. The process of controlling the speaker is executed. When the 16 ms steady-state process is completed, the process returns to the process of step S1002, and the 16 ms progress flag T is monitored again until the 2 ms steady-state process is set (loop process).

[About 16 ms steady processing]
As shown in FIG. 239, in the 16 ms steady-state process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first analyzes (command analysis process) various effect commands received from the main control board 4100 as the process of step S1100. Next, based on the above-analyzed effect command, control (effect control process) related to the effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is executed (step S1200). More specifically, the setting of the advance notice effect that can appear on the effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1400, the determination of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol that can appear on the effect display of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the like are performed.

Next, the peripheral control MPU4140a executes a sound control process related to the sound output of the speaker in order to generate a sound effect (for example, BGM) that promotes the effect effect (step S1300). Further, the light emitting decoration control process related to the light emitting decoration by each decorative substrate provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 is executed (step S1400).

After that, the commands set in each of the above processes S1200 to S1400 (in addition to the display commands described later, sound output commands, light emitting decoration commands, etc.) are transmitted to the lamp drive board 3167 and the liquid crystal control board 4500. Information output processing is performed (step S1500). As a result, the effect corresponding to the set command is performed through the liquid crystal display device 1400, the speakers 121 and 391, the door frame 5 and the decorative boards provided on the game board 4.

After this information output process (step S1500) is performed, when the random number update process in which the random numbers used for various settings are updated in the effect control process (step S1200) is executed (step S1600), the 16 ms steady state is executed. End the process.

The processing of steps S1100 to S1600 (16ms steady-state processing) is set as a processing amount to be completed within 16ms, but if 16ms of time has elapsed from the start of the 16ms steady-state processing, the step is taken. Even if the execution up to the processing of S1600 has not been completed, the processing in progress at that time is continued as it is without returning to the processing of step S1100 (from the command analysis processing). Will be processed up to. That is, when 16 ms elapses during the execution of the 16 ms steady state process, only the 16 ms progress flag is set, and when it is determined in step S1002 that the 16 ms progress flag is set after the end of the 16 ms steady state process, the 16 ms steady state process is performed. To start.

Further, the peripheral control MPU4140a according to this embodiment is configured to execute a random number update process (step S1600) in 16 ms steady processing to update various random numbers, but the timing for updating various random numbers. Is not limited to this. For example, various random numbers may be updated in either or both of the loop processing and the 16ms steady processing in the sub-main processing.

[About command analysis processing]
Next, the command analysis process (process of step S1100) will be described with reference to FIG. 240.

As shown in FIG. 240, in the command analysis process, the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4140a) first receives an effect command from the main control board 4100 as a process of step S1101 to receive the peripheral control board 4140. It is determined whether or not it is stored in the storage area (RAM) (step S1101).

That is, when the peripheral control board 4140 according to this embodiment receives an effect command from the main control board 4100, it interrupts other processing such as 16 ms steady processing to generate a command reception interrupt process, and this command reception interrupt process is generated. In the interrupt process, the effect command from the main control board 4100 is stored in the reception command storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140. The received command storage area is provided with a plurality of areas corresponding to the order of receiving the effect commands from the main control board 4100, and in the command reception interrupt process, the effect commands are associated with the order of reception. In the form of a command, each of these multiple areas is stored separately.

In this regard, in the process of step S1101, the contents of the reception command storage area are confirmed, and if the production command is stored, the production command having the earliest reception order from the main control board 4100 is read from the reception command storage area. (Step S1102).

Next, whether or not the read effect command is a pattern command (command indicating a variation pattern) among the effect commands set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S411 (see FIG. 228). Is determined (step S1103). As a result, when it is determined that the command is the same effect (YES in step S1103), the variation pattern command is stored in the variation display pattern storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140, and the variation pattern reception flag is set. At the time of setting (step S1104), the command analysis process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the read effect command is not a pattern command (command shown in FIG. 237) (NO in step S1103), the read effect command is processed in step S411 (see FIG. 228). It is determined whether or not it is a winning information command (a winning information command indicating the winning type including a winning or a small hit) among the production commands set on the main control board 4100 side ( Step S1105). As a result, when it is determined that the effect command is the same (YES in step S1105), when the winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140 (step S1106), the said Terminate command analysis processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the read production command is not a winning information command (NO in step S1105), a flag corresponding to the production command received in the corresponding storage area (RAM) of the peripheral control board 4140 is set. At the time of setting (step S1107), the command analysis process is terminated. Examples of such an effect command include a fixed stop command set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S503 (see FIG. 229), step S606 (see FIG. 230), and step S702. The interval effect command set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of (see FIG. 231) and the big hit start set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S803 (see FIG. 232). There is a command, a small hit start command set on the main control board 4100 side in the process of step S903 (see FIG. 233), and the like.

[About production control processing]
Next, the effect control process (process of step S1200) will be described with reference to FIG. 241.

As shown in FIG. 241, this effect control process includes the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210), the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220), and the jackpot based on the value of the process selection flag indicating the progress state of the game. Either the display process (step S1230) or the small hit display process (step S1240) is selectively performed.

That is, as will be described later, in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is “0”, the variation pattern reception flag that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 240) is set. On the condition that the display is performed, the process for starting the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400, including the variable display of the decorative pattern, is performed. For example, a display effect pattern (such as a stop symbol of a decorative symbol or the presence or absence of the above-mentioned extension effect) is determined based on a pattern command or a winning information command, and the display effect pattern is determined according to the determined display effect pattern (for the liquid crystal control board 4150). In addition to setting display commands, it also performs processing such as setting related to advance notice production.

Further, the decorative symbol variation process (step S1220) executed when the process selection flag is "1" basically corresponds to a fixed stop command that can be operated in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. 240). On condition that the flag is set, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is to be completed, including the variable display of the decorative symbol, so that the result of the big hit lottery is shown (for the liquid crystal control board 4150). Set the display command, and so on. At the end of the process, the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command is reset.

Further, in the jackpot display process (step S1230) executed when the process selection flag is "2", a flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the time of the jackpot that can be operated in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. A display indicating on the liquid crystal display device 1400 that the big winning opening 2003 will be opened or a display during the big hit game state (for example, a round display, etc.) on condition that the flag corresponding to the big hit start command is set. Control each of them. Further, at the end of the process, the flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the time of big hit and the flag corresponding to the big hit start command are reset.

Further, in the small hit display process (step S1240) executed when the process selection flag is "3", the flag corresponding to the small hit interval effect command that can be operated in the process of step S1107 (see FIG. 240). On the condition that the flag corresponding to the small hit start command is set, the liquid crystal display device 1400 indicates that the large winning opening 2003 will be opened, and the effect display during the small hit game state is displayed. Control each. Further, at the end of the process, the flag corresponding to the interval effect command at the time of small hit and the flag corresponding to the small hit start command are reset.

However, as described above, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, the display effect at the time of a big hit or a small hit in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not terminated within the fluctuation time indicated by the received pattern command. , The display after the extension is extended to the period (interval period) after the stop of the fluctuation display related to the lighting patterns of the plurality of LEDs as the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642. In the production, there are cases where the result of the big hit lottery can be shown.

That is, in this case, as will be described later, in the decorative symbol variation start processing (step S1210), the time required for the extension effect in the interval period, which is longer than the variation time indicated by the pattern command received from the main control board 4100, is also included. The display effect pattern is determined, and the display command (for the liquid crystal control board 4150) corresponding to the determined display effect pattern is set. Further, in the decorative symbol variation processing (step S1220), even though the flag corresponding to the confirmation stop command is set, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not completed, and an intermediate effect stage appears. Based on this, the process is terminated.

Then, in the big hit display process (step S1230) or the small hit display process (step S1240), the display effect extended in this way is indicated by the display command set in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210). The processing to be continuously performed will be performed according to the contents to be performed. Therefore, in the processing at the time of this extension, even if the flag corresponding to the interval effect command is set, the effect control according to the command (display control indicating that the grand prize opening 2003 is opened, etc.) Do not do.

As described above, the command set in the process of steps S121 to 1230 in the effect control process is transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 4150 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. 240. As a result, the display effect of the content (display effect pattern, etc.) indicated by the above command appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 through the control by the liquid crystal control board 4150 side.

[About decorative pattern change start processing]
Next, the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) executed when the process selection flag is “0” will be described. FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing an example of the decorative symbol variation start processing.

As shown in FIG. 242, in the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210), the peripheral control MPU4140a first, as the process of step S1221, the variation pattern that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 240). It is determined whether or not the reception flag is in the ON state (set). That is, in the process of step 1221, the variation pattern is described in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 240) based on the fact that the predetermined start condition (YES in step S301) is satisfied on the main control board 4100 side. It waits for the reception flag to be operated in the ON state.

Then, until the variation pattern reception flag is operated to the ON state, the peripheral control MPU4140a controls the demo effect and the effect mode by the following steps S1232 to S1237.

That is, first, it is determined whether or not the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in the state of executing the demo effect (step S1232), and when it is determined that the state is not the same, the display effect such as the previous symbol change is completed. After that, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed (step S1236). As a result, when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the liquid crystal display device 1400 sets a display command (for the liquid crystal control board 4150) to start the demonstration effect. Then, the display command set in this way is transmitted to the liquid crystal control board 4150 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. 240, and the demonstration effect is produced on the liquid crystal display device 1400 through the control by the liquid crystal control board 4150 side. Will be executed.

If it is not determined in the process of step S1236 that the predetermined time has elapsed, the decorative symbol variation start process is temporarily terminated and the variation pattern reception flag is set (YES in step S1221) or the predetermined time. Will wait until either condition (YES in step S1236) is satisfied.

Further, as a result of performing such processing (step S1236, step S1237), if it is determined in the processing of step S1232 that the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in the state of executing the demo effect (step S1232). YES), it is determined whether or not the player is allowed to operate the effect mode (step S1233).

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the result of the big hit lottery is a hit without the operation of the condition device (small hit) or a hit with the operation of the condition device (big hit), the liquid crystal is displayed. The display effect on the display device 1400 is a plurality of display effects as the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 without ending within the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern set on the main control board 4100 side. A display effect pattern (extension) that can show a display effect as to whether or not a hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device has been won after extending the period after the stop of the variable display related to the LED lighting pattern. A first effect mode in which the effect pattern) can be selected and a second effect mode in which the challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected are prepared.

Here, an outline of an extension effect pattern that can be selected when in the first effect mode and a challenge bonus effect pattern that can be selected in the second effect mode will be described. FIG. 245 (a) is a diagram for explaining an extension effect pattern at the time of a big hit, and FIG. 245 (b) is a diagram for explaining an extension effect pattern at the time of a small hit, FIG. 245 (c). Is a diagram for explaining a challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a big hit, and FIG. 245 (d) is a diagram for explaining a challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a small hit.

[Extended production pattern at the time of big hit]
In the first effect mode, if the result is that the operation of the opening / closing member 2006 provides an opportunity to obtain a prize ball (bonus game), the effect is extended to the period after the special symbol has stopped changing. A display effect pattern (extension effect pattern) at the time of extension with contents can be selected.

For example, as shown in FIG. 245 (a), when the display effect pattern at the time of extension (extension effect pattern) is selected based on the fact that the jackpot is won, the peripheral control MPU4140a first changes the special symbol. The display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is started so as to coincide with the start (based on the fact that the variation pattern reception flag is set). However, after that, even if the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command (at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol) and the flag corresponding to the interval effect command (entering the opening period) are set, the display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 Regarding the production, this will be continued without ending.

That is, as described above, in the main control MPU4100a according to this embodiment, the closing control period from the stop of the special symbol to the start of the jackpot game based on the winning of the jackpot is determined.
-The time from when the special symbol is stopped until the time (8 seconds in this case) predetermined by the interval effect timer is up (the first closing control period having a predetermined length), and -The time (having an indefinite length) from when the time (8 seconds in this case) predetermined by the interval effect timer is reached until the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500 (see FIG. 151). 2 closed control period)
It is controlled as.

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, when the display effect pattern (extension effect pattern) at the time of extension is selected based on the fact that the jackpot is won, as shown in FIG. 245 (a). In addition, for the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the time from the stop of the special symbol to the time-up of the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) (the first closing control period having a certain length) In the form of extension, the display effect related to the big hit lottery is performed. It should be noted that such a display effect can be realized, for example, as an effect in which a specific character is challenging a battle with an enemy character.

Then, when the first closing control period having a certain length elapses and the second closing control period having an indefinite length is controlled, the effect content appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400. Is switched to a winning explicit effect in which winning information about whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a winning (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device is clearly shown. Here, the winning effect is to be performed as a jackpot effect that clearly indicates that the result of the jackpot lottery is a hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device. For example, a specific character is an enemy character. It can be realized as a production in which the appearance of winning the battle is projected. Further, considering that one display effect pattern is composed of a display effect related to the big hit lottery and a winning explicit effect in which the effect result appears, the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit according to this embodiment is It can be said that this is an effect pattern in which the effect content is extended to within the second closed control period having an indefinite length after the first closing control period ends after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. ..

After that, on the condition that the second closing control period having an indefinite length is still continued, the game ball is launched relatively strongly as an effect within the second closing control period. , Control so that the opening effect before the big hit game appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 by performing a right-handed game in which the game ball flows down to the game area 605 on the right side of the center accessory 2300 to prompt the start of the big hit game. To do. As a result, when a right-handed game is performed by the player, the game ball driven into the game area 605 on the right side of the center accessory 2300 first passes through the special figure gate 2500, and the jackpot start command is set. The Rukoto. As a result, when the second closing control period ends, the big hit game in which the big winning opening 2003 is opened is started (see FIG. 232). At this time, the round display 648 lights up to indicate the number of rounds.

Further, when the second closing control period having an indefinite length ends and the big hit game in which the big winning opening 2003 is opened is started (the flag corresponding to the big hit start command is set), for example, the liquid crystal Even if the content of the effect (explicit winning effect or opening effect) appearing on the display device 1400 is in the middle stage, the jackpot game indicating that the first round game has started is in progress. It is executed by forcibly switching to the production. However, on the other hand, unless the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500 after the end of the first closing control period having a certain length, the second closing control period having an indefinite length is set. Since it does not end (the flag corresponding to the jackpot start command is not set), it is not forcibly switched to the production during the jackpot game indicating that the round game of the first round has started.

According to such an extension effect pattern at the time of a big hit, if at least the operation handle portion 410 is not operated after the first closing control period having a certain length elapses from the time when the special symbol is stopped, the special figure Since the game ball does not pass through the gate 2500, the progress of the production will continue to be stagnant in the production before the start of the jackpot game (the production during the second closing control period). That is, in this case, the player does not operate the operation handle portion 410 until he / she surely understands the meaning of the pre-start effect (the effect during the second closing control period) of the jackpot game. It will be possible to keep the production progress stagnant by the production before the start. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500 by the operation of the operation handle portion 410, the pre-start effect of the big hit game ends and the next effect (during the big hit game) proceeds. Therefore, it has become possible to realize a self-paced production that matches the pace of each player, in other words, a sense of speed required for the progress of the production can be realized as a production that suits a wide range of customers regardless of age or gender. Will be.

Furthermore, in such an extended effect pattern at the time of a big hit, the main control MPU4100a is indefinite as long as the effect is not progressed from the effect before the start of the big hit game (stagnation control of the effect by the peripheral control MPU4140a). By controlling so that the second closed control period having the length of is not terminated, the game progresses and the big hit game (bonus game that enables the acquisition of a prize ball) is executed. I try to avoid it. Therefore, from the player's point of view, simply adjusting the speed at which the production progresses to match his own pace makes it appear that the game progresses to match this adjusted production speed. This makes it possible to enjoy the self-paced effect of the liquid crystal display device 1400 without worrying about the progress speed of the game.

In this way, the extended effect pattern at the time of a big hit is a second closing control period that appears in the form of extending the closing control period after the first closing control period having a certain length ends to some extent. It is a production pattern that is premised on continuing for the time of, and within the second closing control period, a part of the production content in the same production pattern (winning explicit production) and the opening production before the big hit game ( By performing a right-handed game, a production that encourages the start of a big hit game) can be performed. Then, it is possible to end the second closing control period at an appropriate timing according to the understanding speed of each player for these effects, and to start the jackpot game at an appropriate timing.

However, on the other hand, such a second closing control period is, for example, a period that is terminated based on at least the operation of the operation handle portion 410 (a period having an indefinite length). , If the game is played so that the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500 by the operation of the operation handle portion 410 immediately after the first closing control period having a certain length is completed, a winning explicit effect is produced. It is also possible to quickly proceed to the next production (directing during a big hit game) without cutting or making the production itself appear in the middle (skipping the production). Further, as described above, when the production is advanced in this way, the game control itself is also advanced early, and the jackpot game is started at an earlier stage. Therefore, while realizing the self-paced production of the liquid crystal display device 1400, for veteran players and the like, it is possible to enjoy efficient and stress-free quick game and production performance by advancing the game faster by skipping the production. I am trying to do it.

In particular, the time (game time) required for the opening production in which the game explanation for urging the right-handed hit is performed after the winning explicit production (big hit production) is performed is useless for the player in the second and subsequent games. Often it's only time. However, according to the extended effect pattern at the time of a big hit, if the time required for such an opening effect (game time) is prepared, but it functions only as wasted time for the player, this is appropriately used. It is cut to allow the production and the game to proceed faster. As a result, it becomes possible to provide each player with a production and a game suitable for each player.

By the way, the production (game) is also performed by cutting the production time (time for the explicit production) for showing the winning information as to whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device. If you proceed faster, the final effect result (for example, whether or not the character wins the battle) in the extended effect pattern at the time of big hit will not be fully shown, and even the opening effect Will suddenly appear during the big hit game (round production, etc.). That is, in this case, the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit is ended in the middle stage before the effect result is sufficiently displayed, and even the opening effect can be omitted so that the big hit game can be started early. Become.

By the way, in the production within the second closing control period having an indefinite length, first, a winning effect that clearly indicates that the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device is performed. After that, an opening effect is performed to encourage the start of the big hit game by performing a right-handed game. However, after performing the opening effect for a predetermined time (or while performing the opening effect), a feature-length movie dedicated to a big hit may be played. According to the second closed control period having an indefinite length, even when such a redundant effect is realized, there is no adverse effect such as a decrease in the entertainment interest due to the extension of the effect, and the effect is produced. You will be able to widen the range of.

Further, in this second closing control period, operation acceptance for a predetermined operation means (main button 371 of the operation button unit 370) is allowed, and the result of the game lottery based on the operation of the main button 371 An operation system effect that can indicate the degree of expectation of the above (for example, an effect that suggests the degree of expectation regarding the number of rounds of the big hit game, the game state after the big hit game, etc.) may be performed. That is, in this case, the player can realize an operation system effect that can be operated at his / her own pace without worrying about the expiration date (the period during which operation acceptance is allowed) that can be operated. Will be.

Further, the main control MPU4100a according to this embodiment is lit on the round display 648 at the time of winning the big hit and at the end of the first closing control period having a certain length from the time when the special symbol is stopped. Is controlled so that is not performed. Then, by releasing the control on condition that the game ball has passed through the special figure gate 2500 after the end of the first closing control period, the round display 648 is turned on. As a result, in the second closing control period, the liquid crystal display device 1400 can perform the winning effect clearly while the round display 648 is turned off. Further, no matter how much the production stagnation occurs in the second closing control period, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the number of rounds in the jackpot game.

[Extended production pattern for small hits]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 245 (b), even when the display effect pattern at the time of extension (extension effect pattern at the time of small hit) is selected based on the fact that the small hit is won, the special symbol is also displayed. Is extended with respect to the fluctuation time of the special symbol by the time (first closing control period with a certain length) until the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) is timed up after the is stopped. So, I am trying to perform a display effect related to the big hit lottery. It should be noted that such a display effect can be realized, for example, as an effect in which a specific character is challenging a battle with an enemy character.

However, as described above, in the main control MPU4100a according to this embodiment, the closing control from the stop of the special symbol based on the winning of the small hit to the start of the small open hit game (small hit game). Regarding the period (opening period), it consists only of the time (first closing control period with a certain length) from when the special symbol is stopped until the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) is timed up. It is controlled to. Therefore, in such an extension effect pattern at the time of a small hit, a first closing control period (here, 8 seconds) having a certain length elapses, and a small open hit game (small hit game) is performed. At the time of starting, the effect content appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is clearly indicated as the winning information as to whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device. I try to switch to. Here, the winning effect is clearly shown as a loss effect that clearly indicates that the result of the big hit lottery is a loss that was lost to a hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device. For example, a specific character It can be realized as a production in which the appearance of losing the battle with the enemy character is projected. Further, considering that one display effect pattern comprises a display effect related to a big hit lottery and a winning explicit effect in which the effect result appears, the extended effect pattern at the time of a small hit according to this embodiment is used. Is an effect pattern in which the effect content is extended to the period during which the small open hit game (small hit game) is performed after the first closing control period ends after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. I can say.

According to such an extension effect pattern at the time of a small hit, it is possible to shift to a display effect related to the next fluctuation (holding digestion of a special symbol) relatively quickly after it is shown that the loss is lost in the big hit. become. Furthermore, by extending the production content to the period during which the small opening hit game (small hit game) is being performed, the liquid crystal display is provided during the execution period of the small opening hit game (small hit game). The operation of the opening / closing member 2006 becomes less noticeable as much attention is paid to the display device 1400. That is, in this case, since the production content proceeds in the same manner as in the so-called high-expected loss effect (loss effect in which the opening / closing member 2006 does not operate), the loss effect pattern for the extension effect pattern at the time of a big hit It has come to be positioned as (pair production), and it becomes difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a hit (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device.

Moreover, according to the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation mode of the opening / closing member 2006 is similar to or the same as that of the opening / closing member 2006 when the small opening hit game (small hit game) corresponding to the winning of such a small hit is performed. There is no big hit game in which the opening / closing member 2006 is operated according to the operation mode of the above, and a latent effect state (a latent effect state using a so-called small hit) based on this is not prepared. That is, the extended effect pattern at the time of a big hit (see FIG. 245 (a)) and the extended effect pattern at the time of a small hit (see FIG. 245 (b)) in the first effect mode are only equipped with a small hit. It was made based on a technical idea (a technical idea opposite to the conventional one) that makes it difficult to grasp that it is the pachinko machine 1 that is being used, and based on such a technical idea, a special design is used. Considering that a series of behaviors at the time of a small hit such as fluctuation and stop, the first closing control period, and the opening of the big winning opening appear at the time of a big hit, the production contents in each production pattern are extended respectively. ..

In the extension effect pattern at the time of a big hit and the extension effect pattern at the time of a small hit according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 245 (a) and 245 (b), the interval effect is produced after the special symbol is stopped. Whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device only after the time until the timer (8 seconds in this case) is up (the first closing control period) has elapsed. Information is shown (winning explicit production). However, regarding these extended effect patterns, if the display effect related to the big hit lottery is performed in the form of extending to within the first closing control period, the display effect is within the first closing control period of the same display effect. In the effect portion that appears, the winning information as to whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (big hit) accompanied by the operation of the condition device may be shown. Even in such a case, it is possible to shift to the display effect related to the next fluctuation (holding digestion of the special symbol) relatively quickly after it is shown that the loss is at least a big hit. In this case, in the jackpot explicit production, a special production for the jackpot to congratulate the character on winning the battle while it is already known that the jackpot has been won, or a right-handed strike is encouraged. Along with the appearance of a production to explain the game, in the directing of winning and losing at the time of a small hit, the character is defeated in the battle and regrets that it is already known that it is a loss that was lost to the big hit. A special production at the time of a small hit will appear.

[Challenge bonus production pattern at the time of big hit]
In contrast to the extended effect pattern when in the first effect mode, in the second effect mode, an opportunity (bonus game) for obtaining a prize ball by the operation of the opening / closing member 2006 is provided. If this is the case, the liquid crystal display device 1400 may select a challenge bonus effect pattern indicating that the player has won the prize ball. This challenge bonus effect pattern is a display effect pattern in which not only a big hit but also a small hit is treated as one type (type of hit) as a hit for which a prize ball can be obtained by opening the big prize opening 2003.

For example, as shown in FIG. 245 (c), when the challenge bonus effect pattern is selected based on the fact that the jackpot is won in the second effect mode, the peripheral control MPU4140a starts to change the special symbol. The display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is started so as to match (based on the fact that the variation pattern reception flag is set). Then, the display effect started in this way is ended (based on the fact that the flag corresponding to the confirmation stop command is set) so as to match the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol.

However, this display effect does not show the lottery result related to the winning of the big hit, but wins the winning (big hit or small hit) where the opportunity to win the prize ball is given by opening the big winning opening 2003. It is shown whether or not it has been done (winning effect on the challenge bonus). More specifically, it is shown that when a big hit or a small hit is won, an opportunity to win a prize ball is given by opening the big winning opening 2003 within the fluctuation period of the special symbol. A specific display image will appear. In this case, although the player cannot grasp how many prize balls the player can obtain by opening the large prize opening 2003, the prize balls are obtained by opening the large winning opening 2003. What is possible will be graspable.

In this way, after a specific display image appears in the winning effect of the challenge bonus, the peripheral control MPU4140a is set to the flag corresponding to the interval effect command (at the time of big hit), and the big winning opening 2003 A pre-start effect is performed to start a challenge bonus effect on how many prize balls the player can obtain by opening the game. As will be described later, in the challenge bonus effect, the time (first closed control period having a certain length) from when the special symbol is stopped until the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) is timed up has elapsed. After that, the game starts on the condition that the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500.

Here, in the pre-start effect for starting the challenge bonus effect, the operation amount of the operation handle unit 410 (8 seconds in this case) is used by using the first closing control period until the time is up. Aiming at the special figure gate 2500 by right-handed game) and operation timing will be explained.

In the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, as such a pre-start effect, a countdown effect in which the operation timing of the operation handle unit 410 is indicated by a countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed. This countdown effect is, for example, a countdown display of about 3 to 5 seconds is performed while explaining that the special figure gate 2500 is aimed at by a right-handed game, and this countdown display has been changed to "0". When the operation handle portion 410 is operated with an appropriate operation amount, the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500 immediately after the first closing control period ends.

Therefore, according to such a countdown effect, when the operation handle portion 410 is operated according to the instruction of the effect, the big hit start command is set relatively quickly after the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) is timed up. The second closing control period ends, and as a result, the challenge bonus production and the jackpot game (special bonus game) regarding how many prize balls the player can obtain are started early. Become so. At this time, the round display 648 lights up to indicate the number of rounds.

That is, according to such an effect progress in the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a big hit, the time (indefinite) from the time-up of the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) to the passage of the game ball through the special figure gate 2500. Even if the second closed control period having a length) is compared with the case of the challenge bonus effect pattern (see FIG. 245 (d)) at the time of a small hit described later in which the time does not exist, this can be produced. It will be possible to shorten it to a negligible level. That is, the above-mentioned countdown effect is intended for this purpose, and is described later by ending the second closing control period having an indefinite length at an early stage and cutting it. As in the case of the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of small hit (see FIG. 245 (d)), only the first closing control period having a certain length appears as the interval period before the big hit game (before the challenge bonus effect). We are trying to encourage the progress of the game (directing progress) in the form. As a result, not only big hits but also small hits will be treated as one type (type of hit) as a hit that makes it possible to win a prize ball by opening the big winning opening 2003, and in the challenge bonus production, it will be a long opening. Not only the winning game and the medium opening winning game, but also the small opening hit game, and which game mode appears can be displayed.

Further, the main control MPU4100a according to this embodiment is lit on the round display 648 at the time of winning the big hit and at the end of the first closing control period having a certain length from the time when the special symbol is stopped. Is controlled so that is not performed. Then, by releasing the control on condition that the game ball has passed through the special figure gate 2500 after the end of the first closing control period, the round display 648 is turned on. As a result, prior to the challenge bonus effect being performed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, the player is elected a big hit by lighting the round display 648, and the number of rounds in the big hit game (special bonus game) is given to the player. It will be avoided that it is easily grasped.

Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU4140a according to this embodiment, after the countdown display is changed to "0", the time from the launch of the game ball to the passage through the special figure gate 2500 is the following preceding effect (not shown). ), The time from the time-up of the interval production timer (8 seconds in this case) to the passage of the game ball through the special figure gate 2500 (the second with an indefinite length). The existence of the closing control period) can be further concealed in a dramatic manner.

Here, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, a portion (backflow prevention member 604) where the game ball is launched into the game area 605 of the outer rail 602 (front component member 601). A sensor (not shown) capable of detecting a game ball passing through the same portion is provided at a nearby portion) X. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU4140a, when the detection signal from the sensor indicates that the game ball launched after the countdown display has changed to "0" has passed the same location X, the liquid crystal display device 1400 Start the preceding production at. According to such a preceding effect, when the operation handle portion 410 is operated as instructed by the countdown effect, the countdown display changes to "0" immediately without waiting for the game ball to pass through the special figure gate 2500. When the game ball passes through the above-mentioned part X, the production content is advanced, and there is no second closing control period having an indefinite length. The challenge bonus production pattern at the time of a small hit described later (Fig.) (Refer to 245 (d)), the content of the effect and the timing of its appearance are less likely to deviate from each other.

Although not shown in the illustration, in the countdown effect according to this embodiment, the timing at which the countdown display changes to "0" is slightly earlier than the time-up of the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) (No. 3). It is set within the closing control period of 1. According to such a countdown effect, at least a part of the time from when the game ball is launched by the operation of the operation handle portion 410 until the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500 is defined as the first closing control period. Of the second closing control period, the game can be played so that it can be included as the time on the first closing control period side, and the second closing control period having an indefinite length is used as the game. It becomes possible to shorten by a minute (a minute included as a time on the first closing control period side). In this case, the preceding effect is started in advance of the second closing control period, and as an effect that may straddle the first closing control period and the second closing control period. It will be positioned.

Here, as a series of production contents leading from such a countdown production to a challenge bonus production through a preceding production, for example,
-In the countdown effect, in addition to the countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400, "attack the enemy character by starting the right-handed game at the timing when the countdown display becomes" 0 "! ”Is displayed.
-After the countdown display becomes "0", for example, an attack such as launching a rocket launcher at an enemy character based on the fact that the game ball has passed the above-mentioned location X by operating the operation handle portion 410. Along with starting the advance production to be set, the challenge bonus production showing the result of the attack to be set is started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the special figure gate 2500 (the flag corresponding to the jackpot start command is set).
And so on.

However, regarding the preceding production, if the game ball that has passed through the above-mentioned location X also passes through the special figure gate 2500 as it is, only about "0.5 seconds" can be given, so the production content is changed from the countdown production. It is desirable to prepare it as something that can be advanced (a connecting effect until the challenge bonus effect is started).

In addition, as a challenge bonus effect, for example, as a result of the attack that was launched, when the attack on the enemy character was avoided, it was shown that it was a small open hit game, and the attack on the enemy character was hit but could not be defeated. Sometimes it can be realized by showing that it is a game per medium opening, and when an enemy character collapses due to an attack, it is a game per long opening. Alternatively, when the attack hits the enemy character but cannot be defeated, it indicates that it is either a medium open hit game or a long open hit game, and in the subsequent round production, the medium open hit game and the long open hit game. It may be specified whether it is a winning game. According to such a challenge bonus effect, as long as the attack hits the enemy character, not only the amount of prize balls that can be obtained but also the possibility of small hits is eliminated, which is advantageous to the player. It will be possible to dramatically increase the degree of expectation of transition to a game state.

However, in such a challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a big hit, it is assumed that the operation handle portion 410 may not be operated for a long time even after the countdown display in the countdown effect is changed to "0". That is, in this case, the second closing control period having an indefinite length is continued for a long time, but in this second closing control period, the countdown display is set to "0" on the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is more desirable to prevent new effects from appearing, such as displaying as it is, in order to diminish the interest of the player who causes such a situation.

However, in the situation where the challenge bonus production pattern has appeared, such a situation where the production progress is stagnant is limited to the case where the big hit is won, and the challenge bonus production pattern at the time of the small hit described later ( In the case of FIG. 245 (d)), it cannot occur. That is, in this case, the amount of prize balls that can be obtained as much as the possibility that the game is performed per small opening is excluded while the production is stagnant (no production state) in which no production is newly performed. Not only that, but also the degree of expectation of transition to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player will be dramatically increased.

It should be noted that the countdown effect is realized by the countdown display, but it is not necessarily counted as long as it is performed so that the specific timing at which the operation handle portion 410 should be operated can be grasped. May be good.

[Challenge bonus production pattern at the time of small hit]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 245 (d), even when the challenge bonus effect pattern is selected based on the fact that the small hit is won in the second effect mode, the peripheral control MPU4140a is special. The display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is started so as to coincide with the start of fluctuation of the symbol (based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern reception flag is set). Then, the display effect started in this way is ended (based on the fact that the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command is set) so as to coincide with the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol.

Similarly, in the challenge bonus production pattern at the time of a small hit, the prize ball due to the opening of the large prize opening 2003 in such a production (winning production related to the challenge bonus) performed during the fluctuation period of the special symbol. A specific display image appears showing that the opportunity for acquisition is granted. As a result, the player cannot grasp how many prize balls the player can obtain by opening the large prize opening 2003, but the prize balls can be obtained by opening the large winning opening 2003. It will be possible to grasp what is said to be.

In addition, after a specific display image appears in the winning effect of the challenge bonus in this way, the peripheral control MPU4140a is based on the fact that the flag corresponding to the interval effect command (at the time of small hit) is set. A pre-start effect is performed to start a challenge bonus effect on how many prize balls the player can obtain by opening the large prize opening 2003.

However, as described above, when the small hit is won, the special symbol is stopped during the closing control period (opening period) from the stop of the special symbol to the start of the small open hit game (small hit game). It consists only of the time until the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) is timed up (the first closed control period with a certain length), and when the timer is timed up, the special figure gate A game per small opening (small bonus game) is started regardless of whether or not the game ball has passed through 2500 (see FIG. 233).

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU4140a according to this embodiment, in the small hit challenge bonus effect pattern, the operation of the operation handle portion 410 (passing the game ball to the special figure gate 2500) originally proceeds with the game or effect. Although it is not necessary to make it, as a pre-start effect to start the challenge bonus effect, the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) is timed up as in the case of the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of the big hit described above. By utilizing the first closing control period up to, the operation timing of the operation handle unit 410 is indicated by the countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 to perform the countdown effect.

Therefore, according to the countdown effect at the time of such a small hit performed during the first closing control period, when the operation handle portion 410 is operated according to the instruction of the effect, the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds). ) Time-up (set with a small hit start command), relatively early after the small open hit game (small bonus game) is started (or just before the small open hit game is started), the outer rail 602 (front) The game ball passes through a portion (a portion in the vicinity of the backflow prevention member 604) X where the game ball is launched into the game area 605 of the constituent members 601).

Then, even in the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a small hit, the peripheral control MPU4140a detects from the sensor that the game ball launched after the countdown display changes to "0" has passed the same location X. When indicated by a signal, the liquid crystal display device 1400 starts the preceding effect. Similarly, in the countdown effect, the timing at which the countdown display changes to "0" is slightly earlier than the time-up of the interval effect timer (here, 8 seconds) (within the first closing control period). It is set in. However, when the preceding effect is started, it is necessary for the game ball that has passed through the same location X to pass through the special figure gate 2500 as it is, regardless of whether or not the game ball has passed through the special figure gate 2500. When a predetermined temporary rolling time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the liquid crystal display device 1400 is controlled so that the challenge bonus effect is started.

According to such a challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a small hit, when the operation handle portion 410 is operated according to the instruction of the effect, the challenge bonus at the time of a big hit leads from the countdown effect to the challenge bonus effect through the preceding effect. The challenge bonus production will be started by the same series of production contents as in the production pattern. As a result, not only big hits but also small hits will be treated as one type (type of hits) as hits that can be won by opening the big winning opening 2003, and in the challenge bonus production, long opening Not only the winning game and the medium opening winning game, but also the small opening winning game can be included, and it becomes possible to perform an effect display as to which game mode appears.

In the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment, regardless of whether or not the game ball has passed through the special figure gate 2500, until the game ball that has passed through the above-mentioned location X can pass through the special figure gate 2500 as it is. When the predetermined provisional rolling time (for example, 0.5 seconds) required for the above has elapsed, the challenge bonus effect is started on the liquid crystal display device 1400, but the detection signal of the special figure gate sensor 2502 is directly monitored. By doing so, even in the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a small hit, the challenge bonus effect may be started based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the special figure gate 2500.

However, in the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of small hit, even though the small open hit game (small hit game) is started immediately after the first closing control period ends, the countdown is displayed in the countdown effect. It is also assumed that the operation handle portion 410 may not be operated for a long time even after the value is changed to "0". In this respect, the peripheral control MPU 4140a according to this embodiment is preliminarily produced by the liquid crystal display device 1400 when the game ball does not pass through the above-mentioned location X within a predetermined time after the countdown display changes to "0". Is falsely started, and when a predetermined provisional rolling time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed since the preceding effect was falsely started, the challenge bonus effect is also controlled to be falsely started.

That is, in this case, in the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a small hit, regardless of whether or not an operation system effect that requires an operation on the operation handle portion 410 is performed, in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the countdown effect is followed by a preceding effect. A series of production contents that lead to the challenge bonus production will appear falsely (false production). Therefore, the player has an operation on the operation handle portion 410, whether or not the game ball has passed through the special figure gate 2500, and a difference between the passing timing of the above-mentioned location X and the start timing of the preceding effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400. By confirming such things, it is possible to grasp that the small opening hit game will be performed prior to the surrounding rubberneckers who are trying to confirm the liquid crystal display device 1400, and this will immediately interrupt the game. You will be able to show off your actions.

As described above, the extended effect pattern in the first effect mode is the existence of the small hit itself by continuing the second closing control period having an indefinite length for a certain amount of time, as described above. It is a production pattern aimed at concealing, and after extending the production content to within the first closing control period with a certain length that also exists in the production pattern at the time of small hit, at the time of small hit Within the second closing control period, which cannot exist in the effect pattern, the opening effect before the jackpot game (the effect of urging the start of the jackpot game by performing the right-handed game) is performed. On the other hand, the challenge bonus effect pattern in the second effect mode aims to treat a small hit as one of the hits by preventing the second closed control period having an indefinite length from appearing as much as possible. It has a certain length that exists in the production pattern at the time of small hit as well as the opening effect before the big hit game (the effect that encourages the start of the big hit game by performing the right-handed game). It is designed so that it can be completed within the first closing control period.

Such an effect on the premise that there is a second closed control period having an indefinite length by the extension effect pattern in the first effect mode and the challenge bonus effect pattern in the second effect mode. According to the structure (the effect structure in which the timing for prompting the right-handed game within the second closed control period is different), even if the display effect pattern is based on one effect command (the variation time of the special symbol is the same), It is possible to greatly differ the length of the production time required from the start of the change of the special symbol (decorative symbol) to the start of the jackpot game between the first production mode and the second production mode. As a result, it becomes possible to realize a wide variety of effects with greatly different production contents without changing the logic on the main control MPU4100a side one by one.

By the way, according to the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of big hit (see FIG. 245 (c)) and the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of small hit (see FIG. 245 (d)), the display effect at the time of hit (specific). At the time when the display image) appears, an opportunity to obtain a prize ball is provided so that at least a specific number of prize balls (for example, a small number of prize balls (about 40 to 50 in this embodiment)) can be obtained. With the player knowing that it will be done, it will be performed as a challenge bonus production with a round lottery element such as how many prize balls can be added as a bonus. ..

Furthermore, when the number of prize balls is increased, there is a possibility that the game state (the game state in which the probability variation function and the time saving function are activated) that is advantageous to the player is changed. Therefore, in such a challenge bonus effect, a higher probability is obtained by adding the winning probability (3/400) without the operation of the conditional device to the winning probability (1/400) with the operation of the conditional device. With (1/100), not only the prize ball can be paid out to the player (in other words, the opening / closing member 2006 operates), but also the game state can be shifted to the player's advantage. Will also be able to raise awareness. As a result, due to the winning probability of the big hit (special hit) set low, it is possible to avoid that only the monotonous loss effect is repeatedly displayed, and the deterioration of the game interest is suppressed. ..

Further, according to such a challenge bonus effect, even if a big hit is lost, the display effect (specific display image) at the time of hit appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when a specific condition is satisfied. In spite of the fact that the prize ball can be paid out to the player and the player is made aware of the change to the game state that is advantageous to the player, the big prize opening 2003 is a big hit. A specific image that does not appear when the player is elected (an image that appears when a false effect such as a preceding effect or a challenge bonus effect is performed even though there is no operation on the operation handle 410) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. I'm trying to get it. That is, in this case, until the big winning opening 2003 is opened according to the winning of the big hit, it can also function as a waiting effect period for whether or not a specific image (false effect) appears. In particular, when a specific image (false effect) appears, not only is there no change to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, but also the number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player is the same specific image (false effect). This indicates that the jackpot was won, coupled with the size of such a gap in the profits that the player can obtain, as the number of prize balls will be significantly smaller than when It becomes possible to further enhance the game entertainment when the effect (stagnation effect from the first closing control period) appears.

Then, according to the configuration in which these two effect modes are adopted, in the first effect mode in which the extension effect pattern can be selected, the player is asked to perform the small open hit game (small hit game). In the second production mode in which the challenge bonus production pattern can be selected, the production can be performed without being aware that the prize ball can be paid out (in other words, the opening / closing member 2006 operates). When executing the open hit game (small hit game), it is possible to make the player aware that the prize ball can be paid out (in other words, the opening / closing member 2006 operates). .. As a result, in the second production mode in which the challenge bonus production pattern can be selected, the probability is higher than in the first production mode in which the extension production pattern can be selected (the jackpot winning probability is "1/400", which is small. With a higher probability of winning "3/400" plus a higher probability of "1/100")), an effect that makes the player aware that the prize ball can be paid out will appear, and such an effect mode Probability of execution of a bonus game (opening of the large winning opening 2003 by the opening / closing member 2006) in which a prize ball can be paid out to the player without causing a change in the game state accompanied by the operation of the conditional device. Will be able to realize a deeper production as if it changes each time. It should be noted that such an effect can be realized in the second effect mode after making it difficult for the player to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a small hit in the first effect mode. This is because the display effect is such that not only the big hit but also the small hit is treated as one of the hits that can be won by opening the big winning opening 2003.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU4140a) according to this embodiment, there are a first effect mode in which such an extension effect pattern can be selected and a second effect mode in which a challenge bonus effect pattern can be selected. It is provided with a mode compulsory control means that is forcibly determined to any of the effect modes and creates a mode compulsory period in which a change from the forcibly determined effect mode by the operation of the player is not allowed.

For example, the first predetermined period after the pachinko machine 1 is delivered to the hall (for example, the period until a predetermined month and day such as one month elapses) is forcibly determined in the first production mode. , The second predetermined period after the lapse of the first predetermined period (for example, the period until the predetermined month and day such as the next one month elapses) is forcibly determined in the second production mode. When the control related to the creation of the above-mentioned mode compulsory period is performed, the big hit is performed for the first month so as to hide the fact that the small hit is installed as described above. It operates as a pachinko machine 1 in which prize balls can be paid out to players based on the winning probability. On the other hand, for the next month, the small hit will be treated as one type of hit that makes it possible to win the prize ball by opening the big prize opening 2003, so that the winning probability of the big hit will be higher. It came to operate as a pachinko machine 1 in which prize balls can be paid out to players with a high probability, and although it is a pachinko machine 1 equipped with only one game specification, the first first predetermined Coupled with the fact that it was difficult to notice the existence of small hits during the period, it seems as if another pachinko machine with different game specifications, not to mention the content of the production on the liquid crystal display device 1400, was newly put into operation. You will be able to give a good impression to the player. After the second predetermined period has elapsed, the effect mode can be set according to the player's operation on the operation means during the demo effect.

In this regard, as shown in FIG. 242, in the process of step S1233, the peripheral control MPU4140a first sets the first effect mode and the second effect mode based on the time information such as the calendar information and the time information of the built-in RTC4140aa. It is determined whether or not the mode is in the mode compulsory period that is compulsorily determined to be one of the effect modes. As a result, when it is determined that the first production mode is forcibly determined (for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is in the first predetermined period after being delivered to the hall), or when the second production is performed. When it is determined that the mode is forcibly determined (for example, when it is in the second predetermined period after the first predetermined period has elapsed), it is considered that the change of the effect mode by the operation of the player is not allowed. (NO in step S1233), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is temporarily terminated. That is, in this case, it waits for the variation pattern reception flag to be set (YES in step S1221) while the demo effect is being executed (YES in step S1232).

On the other hand, based on the time information such as the calendar information and the time information of the built-in RTC4140aa, it is determined that the mode is not in the above-mentioned mode compulsory period for which the first effect mode and the second effect mode are forcibly determined. When this is done (for example, when the second predetermined period has already passed), it is assumed that the effect mode can be changed by the player's operation (YES in step S1233), and then step S1234. Is processed.

In the process of step S1234, it is determined whether or not there is an operation by the player to change the effect mode. Here, the operation by the player is, for example, an operation on the main button 371 or the sub button 372 of the operation button unit 370 (see FIG. 20), and the main button 371 or the sub button 371 or the sub button 371 or the sub button 371 is operated under the demonstration effect. When the button 372 is operated, it is conceivable that the liquid crystal display device 1400 performs display control for displaying the effect mode selection screen. In this case, when such a selection screen appears, a specific effect mode is selected by an operation on the sub button 372, and the selected specific effect mode is determined by an operation on the main button 371. It is determined that there was an operation by the player to change the mode (YES in step S1234), and the setting process related to the effect mode is performed to change to the determined effect mode (step S1235).

It should be noted that the means to be operated by the player does not have to be the main button 371 or the sub button 372 of the operation button unit 370 (see FIG. 20), and is predetermined by the player including the proximity operation by the touch panel. Anything that can be operated is sufficient. Further, as the processing when there is an operation by the player, in addition to the control (appearance of the selection screen, the display at the time of selection, the display at the time of determination, etc.) that causes a change in the display on the liquid crystal display device 1400, for example, transparency. The player is informed that the production mode has been switched by changing the production mode of the predetermined decorative member, such as changing the emission color from the back surface of the game panel 600 having sex (changing from blue to red, etc.). It may be shown to.

On the other hand, in the process of step S1221, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern reception flag that can be operated in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 240) is in the ON state (set), the main control board 4100 side. Assuming that the predetermined start condition (NO in step S301) is satisfied, the following steps S1222 to 1227 for starting the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 are performed.

That is, the peripheral control MPU4140a first operates (reset) the fluctuation pattern reception flag to the OFF state (step S1222). Then, on this basis, it is determined whether or not the game state flag indicates that the game state is normally in the external disadvantageous game state (step S1223). The game state flag is operated so as to indicate the type of game state controlled after the big hit game, for example, at the end of the big hit game (for example, the big hit display process (step S1230)).

Then, when the game state flag indicates that the game state is normally in the external disadvantageous game state (YES in step S1223), then, as the process of step S1224, the setting state of the effect mode in the process of step S1235 or the built-in RTC4140aa Based on the time information such as the calendar information and the time information of the above, it is determined whether or not the first effect mode is set. As a result, when the first effect mode is forcibly determined, or when the first effect mode is set during the period when the player is allowed to change the effect mode. , It is determined that the first effect mode is set (YES in step S1224), and then the process of step S1225a is performed.

In the process of step S1225a, the processing is stored in the variation display pattern storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU4140a) while referring to the effect pattern table when the first effect mode is set. The effect pattern and the stop symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1400 are determined based on the information related to the fluctuation pattern and the winning information stored in the winning information storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4140a).

Next, the advance notice selection process for determining whether or not to execute the advance notice effect based on the advance notice determination random number is executed (step S1226a). That is, not only the effect pattern in the liquid crystal display device 1400 but also the execution frequency of the advance notice effect and the effect content thereof change depending on whether the first effect mode is in the second effect mode or the second effect mode. In the selection process, in the advance notice effect table when the first effect mode is set, the effect mode (preliminary effect pattern) related to the advance notice effect is determined based on an appropriate advance notice determination random number.

Then, a display command (notice command) associated with each of the effect pattern, the stop symbol, and the advance notice effect pattern in the first effect mode determined in this way is set (step S1227), and the process selection flag is set to "1". (Step S1228), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is terminated. That is, the display command and the advance notice command set in this way are transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. 239, so that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 side in the liquid crystal display device 1400. Through the control, the display effect of the content (extended effect pattern, etc.) indicated by the display command appears, and the advance notice effect of the content indicated by the advance notice command appears.

On the other hand, in the process of step S1224, the second effect mode is set during the period in which the second effect mode is forcibly determined, or in the period in which the effect mode can be changed by the operation of the player. When it is in the state, it is determined that it is not in the set state of the first effect mode (NO in step S1224), and then the process of step S1225b is performed. In the process of step S1225b, the processing is stored in the variation display pattern storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU4140a) while referring to the effect pattern table when the second effect mode is set. The effect pattern and the stop symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1400 are determined based on the information related to the fluctuation pattern and the winning information stored in the winning information storage area of the RAM of the peripheral control board 4140 (peripheral control MPU 4140a). Next, in the advance notice effect table when the second effect mode is set, the effect mode (notice effect) related to the advance notice effect based on an appropriate advance notice determination random number, including the determination of whether or not to execute the advance notice effect. The advance notice selection process in which the pattern) is determined is executed (step S1226b).

Then, a display command (notice command) associated with each of the effect pattern, the stop symbol, and the advance notice effect pattern in the second effect mode determined in this way is set (step S1227), and the process selection flag is set to "1. (Step S1228), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is terminated. That is, the display command and the advance notice command set in this way are transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. 239, so that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 side in the liquid crystal display device 1400. Through the control, the display effect of the content indicated by the display command appears, and the advance notice effect of the content indicated by the advance notice command appears.

On the other hand, in the process of step S1223, when it is determined that the game state flag does not normally indicate that the game state is in the external disadvantageous game state (NO in step S1223), the details are omitted, but the current game state is used. The effect pattern and the stop symbol are determined based on the corresponding effect table (step S1229), and an appropriate advance notice is included in the advance notice effect table according to the current gaming state, including the determination of whether or not to execute the advance notice effect. The advance notice selection process in which the effect mode (notice effect pattern) related to the advance notice effect is determined based on the determination random number is executed (step S1230).

Then, a display command (notice command) associated with each of the effect pattern, the stop symbol, and the advance notice effect pattern according to the current game state determined in this way is set (step S1227), and the process selection flag is set to "1". (Step S1228), the decorative symbol variation start process (step S1210) is terminated. That is, the display command and the advance notice command set in this way are transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 by the information output process (step S1500) shown in FIG. 239, so that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 side in the liquid crystal display device 1400. Through the control, the display effect of the content indicated by the display command appears, and the advance notice effect of the content indicated by the advance notice command appears.

FIG. 243 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect pattern and stop symbol determination process (step S1225a) in the first effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 243, in the process of step S1225a, first, the variation pattern command stored in the variation display pattern storage area in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 240) is read, and the variation pattern command is used. The associated effect pattern is determined (step S1301). Here, in the effect pattern determination table in the first effect mode, a plurality of effect patterns may be associated with one variation pattern command (see FIGS. 249 and 250), 1 Only one effect pattern may be associated (see FIGS. 246 and 247). When a plurality of production patterns are associated with each other, one of the production patterns is determined based on the result of the production lottery using a predetermined random number for production, or one of the productions is based on the type of jackpot. The pattern will be decided.

After the specific effect pattern is determined in this way, the stop symbol (combination of symbols at the time of stop) that appears when the decorative symbol is stopped is determined. That is, as will be described later, the decorative symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1400 should be adjusted to the fluctuation stop of the special symbol, including the case where the extension effect pattern in which the display effect is not terminated when the special symbol is stopped is adopted. It is supposed to stop (based on the stop command being set).

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU4140a according to this embodiment, when determining the stop symbol, an "extended effect pattern" and an "extended effect pattern, although not an extension effect pattern, can be prepared as a paired effect of the extension effect pattern." It is determined whether any of the effect patterns of the "loss effect pattern" is determined by the process of step S1301 (step S1302). As a result, when any of these effect patterns is determined, when a predetermined stop symbol at the time of extension (specific reach loss symbol or the like) is determined (step S1303), the step S1225a (FIG. 242) is determined. Refer to) to end the process. That is, in this case, during the opening period, the content of the display effect centering on the story such as the character is extended (developed) under the state where the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the stopped symbol at the time of extension. It will continue to appear, after which the result of whether or not the jackpot was won will be clarified.

On the other hand, a normal production pattern (Fig.) That is different from both the "extension effect pattern" and the "loss effect pattern that is not an extension effect pattern but can be prepared as a pair effect of the extension effect pattern". When 246 (c), see FIG. 249) is determined, the stop symbol according to the result of the jackpot lottery indicated by the winning information command is determined through the processes of steps S1304 to S1310.

That is, first, it is determined whether or not the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit based on the winning information command stored in the winning information storage area in the process of step S1106 (FIG. 240) (step S1304). As a result, when the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, the process of the step S1225a (see FIG. 242) is terminated when the stop symbol dedicated to the big hit is determined (step S1305).

When the result of the big hit lottery is not a big hit (NO in step S1304), it is determined whether or not the result is a small hit (step S1306), and when the result of the big hit lottery is a small hit. , The stop symbol dedicated to the small hit will be determined (step S1307). However, when in the first effect mode, all the effect commands are associated with the extension effect pattern so that the existence of the small hit is concealed. Therefore, in the process of step S1306, it is always necessary. , It is determined that the result of the big hit lottery is not a small hit, and then, as the process of step S1308, it is determined whether or not it is a display effect (highly expected loss effect) in which reach is formed.

As a result, in the case of the display effect in which the reach is formed, the process of the step S1225a (see FIG. 242) is terminated when the stop symbol of the reach loss is determined (step S1309), whereas the reach is formed. If it is not the display effect to be performed, the process of step S1225a (see FIG. 242) is terminated when the irregular stop symbol from which reach is not formed is determined (step S1310).

FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect pattern and stop symbol determination process (step S1225b) in the second effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 244, in the process of step S1225b, first, the variation pattern command stored in the variation display pattern storage area in the process of step S1104 (see FIG. 240) is read, and the variation pattern command is used. The associated effect pattern is determined (step S1321). Here, also in the effect pattern determination table in the second effect mode, a plurality of effect patterns may be associated with one variation pattern command, or only one effect pattern is associated with it. You may be. When a plurality of production patterns are associated with each other, one of the production patterns is determined based on the result of the production lottery using a predetermined random number for production, or one of the productions is based on the type of jackpot. The pattern will be decided.

After the specific effect pattern is determined in this way, the stop symbol (combination of symbols at the time of stop) that appears when the decorative symbol is stopped is determined. That is, as described above, in the second effect mode, the decorative symbol in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is adjusted to stop the fluctuation of the special symbol when the lottery result that enables the winning of the prize ball is obtained ( The stop symbol (specific display image) at the time of hit is stopped (based on the fixed stop command being set).

In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU4140a according to this embodiment, when determining the stop symbol, a big hit is made based on the winning information command stored in the winning information storage area in the process of step S1106 (see FIG. 240). It is determined whether or not the result of the lottery is a hit (big hit or small hit) for which the prize ball can be obtained (step S1322, step S1324). As a result, when the result of the big hit lottery is a hit (big hit or small hit) in which the prize ball can be obtained (YES in step S1322 or YES in step S1324), the opening of the big winning opening 2003 is confirmed. When the bonus challenge stop symbol that can be grasped is determined (step S1323), the process of the step S1225b (see FIG. 242) is terminated. As the bonus challenge stop symbol, for example, a special symbol that is not a component of the jackpot symbol combination is made to appear during the fluctuation, and then the special symbol is included in the symbol combination at the time of stop. can do.

In this case, in the opening period after the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, for example, at least a specific number of prize balls (for example, a small number of prize balls (about 40 to 50 in this embodiment)) can be obtained. A round lottery element such as how many prize balls can be added as a bonus while the player knows that the opportunity to get prize balls will be provided. A certain challenge bonus production will be performed.

On the other hand, if the result of the big hit lottery is not a hit (big hit or small hit) for which a prize ball can be obtained (NO in both processes of step S1322 and step S1324), then as the process of step S1325, A judgment is made as to whether or not the display effect forms a reach.

As a result, when the display effect is such that the reach is formed, the process of the step S1225b (see FIG. 242) is completed when the stop symbol of the reach loss is determined (step S1326), whereas the reach is formed. If it is not the display effect to be performed, the process of step S1225b (see FIG. 242) is terminated when the irregular stop symbol from which reach is not formed is determined (step S1327).

Hereinafter, an example of a display effect appearing when such various processes (steps S121 to S1240) by the peripheral control MPU4140a according to this embodiment will be described will be described. FIG. 246 is a time chart showing an example of a display effect that appears on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when any one of the effect commands “01H” to “04H” shown in FIG. 237 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side.

[About the extended production pattern when the production command "01H" is used in the first production mode]
As shown in FIG. 246 (a), the fluctuation time shown in FIG. 237 is based on the fact that the jackpot was won on the main control MPU4100a side when the first effect mode is set. Assuming that the fluctuation of the special symbol having Ta1 is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the display effect a at the time of a big hit (for example, a specific mission a) associated with the effect command “01H”. The dynamic display of the extended effect pattern with the content of whether or not the character A can succeed (whether or not the character A can defeat the enemy) is started. Then, the extended effect pattern (effect command "01H") having the content of the display effect a started in this way is even in a situation where the timing t1 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped with the passage of the variation time Ta1 has arrived. , The display effect a is continued without ending (without making the specific mission a successful or unsuccessful).

In addition, when the extension effect pattern is dynamically displayed when the effect command "01H" is used, the decorative pattern is also started to change. However, as described above, the variation of the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at the timing t1 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped in the loss stop mode at the time of extension.

In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU4140a according to this embodiment, when the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped within the time of the fluctuation time Ta1 in the lost stop mode at the time of extension. Then, under the condition that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the loss stop mode at the time of extension, the display effect a on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is until the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with the passage of the fluctuation time Ta1. As for, the continuation expectation effect as to whether or not this is continued (for example, whether or not the character A who has fallen under the attack from the enemy can stand up) is performed.

That is, in this case, since the display effect a (no development, loss) described later associated with the command “03H” shown in FIG. 237 is prepared, the display effect a even after the timing t1 has passed. When is continued, this functions as "post-development display effect a (effect with a chance to succeed a specific mission a)". Therefore, when this "post-development display effect a" appears, the special symbol is displayed from the player's side even though it is in the first closing control period after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. It will be possible to grasp it as being still fluctuating. Further, the decorative symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1400 can also be grasped as being maintained in the temporarily stopped state even though it is in the state after the fixed stop, and by extension, at the time of the above-mentioned extension. It will be possible to make it appear that there is still a chance to show that the jackpot has been won in a way that the loss stop mode is overturned.

However, at this time, the extended effect pattern (effect command "01H") having the content of the display effect a is performed in the large display area (center or the entire display area) of the liquid crystal display device 1400. In the above, the variable display of the decorative pattern shall be performed only in a small display area (a portion of the liquid crystal display device 1400 that is difficult to be noticed, such as an edge portion of the display area) for such a display effect a. However, the player is made to grasp the result of the big hit lottery depending on whether or not the specific mission a in the display effect a can be succeeded without paying attention to the movement of the decorative pattern (the result is displayed by the character). More desirable to do.

That is, in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (big hit) associated with the effect command "01H", in the first closing control period after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the actual closing control period is performed. However, despite the fact that the decorative design has been fixedly stopped, we succeeded in producing continuous expectations at the time of temporary stop (for example, character A, who has fallen under the attack of the enemy, has risen). Under the condition that it is held, "display effect a after development" will appear. In this "display effect a after development", using the time until the end timing t2 of the first closing control period on the main control MPU4100a side, for example, the appearance of the character A confronting the enemy again is projected. A production will be made as to whether or not mission a can be successful.

However, as will be described later, such "post-development display effect a (effect as to whether or not a specific mission a can be succeeded)" in the first closed control period on the main control MPU4100a side is shown in FIG. 237. It is also performed in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the command "02H". And as described above, in order to make it difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a small hit when in the first effect mode, the display effect a (small hit) is a big hit defeat. It is more desirable to shift to the next fluctuation (holding digestion of special symbols) relatively soon after is shown.

Therefore, in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (big hit) associated with the effect command "01H", a specific effect is specified until the end timing t2 of the first closing control period arrives. The appearance of success in mission a (character A defeats the enemy) is not shown, and the effect of whether or not a specific mission a can be successful (character A attacks the enemy and this succeeds). Only the production (whether or not) appears. As a result, the jackpot explicit effect a can appear in the form of showing the success of the specific mission a after the end timing t2 of the first closing control period, and is associated with the effect command "01H". The displayed display effect pattern will function as a "hit effect pattern among the effect patterns having the effect content a".

However, as described above, in the extension effect pattern at the time of a big hit, after the first closing control period having a certain length ends, the closing control period is extended to have an indefinite length. The closing control period of 2 is further appearing. Then, within the second closing control period, a part of the effect content in the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit (big hit explicit effect a) and the opening effect before the big hit game (the big hit game is started by performing the right-handed game). It is possible to perform a production that encourages what should be done). Then, as a result of the operation handle portion 410 being operated at an appropriate timing according to the understanding speed of each player for these effects, when the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500 (timing tx), the second closing control is performed. The period will end, and eventually the jackpot game and the production during the jackpot game will start. The details of the production during the big hit game will be described later.

Further, this is also as described above with reference to FIG. 245 (a), but the second closing control period from the timing t2 to the timing tx is terminated based on the operation of the operation handle portion 410. Since it is a thing (a period having an indefinite length), for example, immediately after the first closing control period having a certain length ends, the operation handle portion 410 is operated to play the special figure gate 2500. When the game is played so that the ball passes through, the jackpot explicit production a and the opening production are cut at that point, or the production itself is almost not made to appear (effect skipping), and the next production (production during the jackpot game) It will be forced to proceed.

[About the extended production pattern when the production command "02H" is used in the first production mode]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 246 (b), FIG. 237 is based on the fact that a small hit was won on the main control MPU4100a side when the first effect mode is set. Assuming that the fluctuation related to the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta2 (here, it is described as being set to the same time as the fluctuation time Ta1) shown in the above is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 , Display effect a at the time of a small hit associated with the effect command "02H" (for example, whether a specific mission a can be successful (whether character A can defeat the enemy), etc.) The dynamic display of the extended effect pattern with the content is started. Then, when the extension effect pattern (effect command "02H") having the content of the display effect a thus started is also the extension effect pattern (see FIG. 246 (a)) associated with the effect command "01H". Similarly, even in a situation where the timing t1 at which the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped due to the passage of the fluctuation time Ta2 has arrived, the display effect a is not terminated (without making the specific mission a successful or unsuccessful). ) Continue this.

Further, even when the extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the effect command "02H" is dynamically displayed, the decorative pattern is started to change. Further, regarding the fluctuation of the decorative symbol, the extension effect pattern (FIG. 246) associated with the effect command "01H" is also determined to stop with the loss stop mode at the time of extension at the timing t1 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped. This is the same as in (see (a)). In addition, as for the loss stop mode at the time of this extension, although the lottery result of the big hit is different between the big hit and the small hit, a single display mode is adopted, and the display mode is distinguished. Not done.

Furthermore, under the condition that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the loss stop mode at the time of extension, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed until the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with the passage of the fluctuation time Ta2. Regarding a, it is also about the point that the continuous expectation production (for example, whether or not the character A who has fallen under the attack from the enemy can stand up) is performed as to whether or not this is continued. This is the same as for the extended effect pattern (see FIG. 246 (a)) associated with the effect command “01H”.

That is, even in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the effect command "02H", in the first closing control period after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, In fact, even though the decorative design has been fixedly stopped, we succeeded in producing continuous expectations at the time of temporary stop (for example, character A who has fallen under the attack of the enemy has stood up). With a feeling, "post-development display effect a" will appear. Then, in this "display effect a after development", for example, a state in which the character A confronts the enemy again is projected by using the time until the end timing t2 of the first closing control period on the main control MPU4100a side. A production is performed as to whether or not a specific mission a can be successful.

Furthermore, similarly, until the end timing t2 of the first closing control period arrives, the appearance of success in the specific mission a (character A defeats the enemy) is not shown, and it is specific. An effect on whether or not mission a can be successful (an effect such as whether or not character A attacks an enemy and this is successful) appears. However, as described above with reference to FIG. 245 (b), the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (small hit) associated with the effect command "02H" has a certain length. After the end of the first closing control period, the second closing control period having an indefinite length does not appear further in the form of extending the closing control period. Therefore, it is specified from the end timing t2 of the first closing control period to the end timing t3 of the control related to the opening of the large winning opening 2003 in the small opening hit game (small hit game) when the effect command "02H" is issued. The loss explicit effect a will appear in the form of showing the failure of mission a. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "02H" functions as a "loss effect pattern among the effect patterns having the effect content a".

In this loss explicit production a, for example, the attack by the character A is evaded and the enemy escapes, and after that, the appearance of the character A regretting is projected, which is performed as a big hit defeat production.

According to the extended effect pattern associated with the effect commands "01H" and "02H", the opening end timing t3 (or the second closing control period) of the special winning opening 2003 is started from the start timing t0 of the special symbol. Since the time until the end of the big hit explicit effect a) will function as one effect for winning the big hit, it will be possible to direct the player's attention to such an effect. It becomes possible to make it difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the opening of the large winning opening 2003 and the small hit when the loss explicit effect a is being performed.

In order to obtain such effects, it is necessary to prevent the player from obtaining any information even if the player confirms that the large winning opening 2003 is open (an event that can be a reason for confirming the opening). It is important to keep the configuration excluding. For example, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the big hit game in which the big winning opening 2003 is opened in the same or similar opening mode as in the small opening hit game (small hit game) can be executed, the opening is confirmed by confirming the opening. After that, it becomes possible to recognize that the gaming state may be changed on condition that the condition device is operated. In addition, since the player can obtain information that may be an opportunity to quit the game, such as winning a big hit with few balls that do not match the low winning probability of the big hit, pay attention to the opening of the big winning opening 2003. It may be one of the factors that make you turn.

[About the display effect pattern when the effect command "03H" is used in the first effect mode]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 246 (c), when the first production mode is set, a loss (pure loss) in which neither the big hit nor the small hit is won on the main control MPU4100a side. ) Is obtained, and the fluctuation related to the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta3 shown in FIG. 237 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timing t0 to t1) is generated. If it is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, is it possible to succeed in the display effect a (for example, a specific mission a) at the time of loss associated with the effect command "03H" (character A)? The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern with the contents of) (whether or not can defeat the enemy) is started. However, the display effect pattern (effect command "03H") having the content of the display effect a started in this way is displayed when the timing t1 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped with the passage of the variation time Ta3 arrives. End this without extending the production a (in the form of failing a specific mission a).

More specifically, even when the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (no development) at the time of loss associated with the effect command "03H" is dynamically displayed, the change of the decorative pattern is started. Further, even in the case of the change of the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the loss stop mode at the time of extension in order to make a definite stop in the loss stop mode at the time of extension at the timing t1 when the change of the special symbol is stopped. ing. Regarding the mode of stopping the loss at the time of this extension, a single display mode appears at the time of a big hit, at the time of a small hit, and at the time of the loss.

Further, under the condition that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the loss stop mode at the time of extension, the display effect a on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is until the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped by the passage of the fluctuation time Ta3. Regarding, it is also directed that the continuation expectation production (for example, whether or not the character A who has fallen under the attack from the enemy can stand up) is performed as to whether or not this is continued. This is the same as for the extension effect pattern (see FIGS. 246 (a) and 246 (b)) associated with the commands “01H” and “02H”.

However, in the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect a (no development) at the time of loss associated with the effect command "03H", the continuous expected effect at the time of temporary stop fails (for example, from the enemy). Character A, who has been attacked and collapsed, did not stand up), so that the player can know that he has failed a specific mission. By preparing such an effect pattern, the effect pattern that continues after the timing t1 shown in FIGS. 246 (a), (b), and (d) can function as an effect pattern with development. become.

[About the display effect pattern when the effect command "04H" is used in the first effect mode]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 246 (d), when the first production mode is set, a loss (pure) in which neither the big hit nor the small hit is won on the main control MPU4100a side. Based on the fact that the loss) was obtained, the variation related to the special symbol having the variation time Ta4 shown in FIG. 237 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timing t0 to t3). Is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, is it possible to succeed in the display effect a (for example, a specific mission a) at the time of loss associated with the effect command "04H" (character)? Dynamic display of a non-extended display effect pattern with the content of (whether or not A can defeat the enemy) is started. However, when the display effect pattern (effect command "03H") having the content of the display effect a started in this way is the effect commands "01H" to "03H" even though it is a non-extended display effect pattern. Even if the timing t1 arrives due to the passage of the fluctuation time ta1 to ta3 of the special symbol, the display effect a is not terminated (the specific mission a is continued without success or failure). .. Furthermore, when the display effect pattern (effect command "04H") is dynamically displayed, the variation of the decorative symbol is started, but the variation of the decorative symbol is also continued without being terminated at the above timing t1. It has become.

That is, in the case of loss (pure loss), unlike the case of a big hit or a small hit, not only the time required for opening control of the big winning opening 2003 but also this is maintained in the closed state prior to the opening of the big winning opening 2003. Since the first closed control period is not prepared and the next fluctuation is immediately performed, it is difficult to extend the time required for the display effect a with respect to the fluctuation time of the special symbol.

In this regard, regarding the display effect pattern (display effect a) associated with the effect command "04H", in the main control MPU4100a, from the fluctuation start timing t0 at the time of a small hit to the opening end timing t3 of the large winning opening 2003. It is prepared to be adopted when a variation time Ta4 having a length corresponding to the time as a reference is selected. Therefore, in this display effect pattern (display effect a), the display effect a in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is the same as in the case of the display effect pattern (display effect a) associated with the effect commands "01H" to "03H". Although the effect with the contents of the above appears, the special symbol is not stopped at the timing t1, and the display effect has a longer time in the first place.

That is, in this case, with respect to any of the fluctuations of the special symbol and the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol among the symbols is not fixedly stopped in the loss stop mode at the time of extension at the above timing t1. , As in the case of the display effect pattern associated with the effect commands "01H" to "03H", when the timing t1 is extended, which is only an intermediate stage for the fluctuation time Ta4. Temporarily stop in the loss stop mode. Then, under the condition that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the loss stop mode at the time of extension, whether or not the display effect a in the liquid crystal display device 1400 is continued until the timing t1 arrives. (For example, whether or not the character A who has fallen under the attack of the enemy can stand up) will be performed. In addition, the loss stop mode at the time of this extension is a single display even though the lottery result and the fluctuation time of the big hit are different between the big hit, the small hit, and the loss (pure loss). Aspects are adopted, and there is no distinction between the display modes.

And, in this way, with the decorative design temporarily stopped, we succeeded in producing continuous expectations (for example, character A, who has fallen under the attack of the enemy, stood up). Then, "display effect a after development" will appear. However, after this, the temporarily stopped decorative symbol is not returned to the fluctuating state again, and the display effect a is similarly subjected to the display effect pattern associated with the effect commands "01H" to "03H". In the small display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (a part that is difficult to pay attention to, such as the edge of the display area), the stopped state (fixed stop when "01H" to "03H", provisional when "04H" (Stop) will be maintained until timing t2.

In this "display effect a after development", there is an effect as to whether or not a specific mission a can be succeeded, for example, a state in which character A confronts an enemy again is projected within the time of fluctuation time Ta4. Will be done. However, as in the case of the display effect pattern associated with the effect commands "01H" to "03H", it seems that the specific mission a was successful (character A is an enemy) until the timing t2 arrives. (Defeat) is not shown, and only the effect about whether or not a specific mission a can be successful (character A attacks the enemy and whether or not this is successful) appears. ing.

Then, after the timing t2, it seems that the specific mission a has failed until the end timing t3 of the control for opening the large winning opening 2003 in the small opening hit game (small hit game) when the production command "02H" is issued. The loss explicit effect a will appear in the form shown. In this loss explicit production a, as in the case of the production command "02H", for example, the attack by the character A is evaded and the enemy escapes, and after that, the appearance that the character A regrets is projected. It is performed as a defeated production. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "04H" functions as a "loss effect pattern among the effect patterns having the effect content a".

As described above, in the first effect mode, based on the result of the big hit lottery being a loss, a specific loss effect pattern (effect command “) in which a specific effect content (display effect a) appears in the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the display control related to "04H") is performed, when a specific fluctuation time (fluctuation time Ta4) is determined on the main control MPU4100a side, within the determined specific fluctuation time (fluctuation time Ta4). The display control for a specific loss effect pattern is performed so that a specific effect content (display effect a) appears. Nevertheless, for the above-mentioned specific loss effect pattern (effect command "04H") in which a specific effect content (display effect a) appears in the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the result of the big hit lottery. When the display control related to the hit effect pattern (effect command "01H") is performed, the fluctuation time (variation time Ta1) shorter than the specific fluctuation time (variation time Ta4) is determined on the main control MPU4100a side. At that time, not only the determined short fluctuation time (variation time Ta1) but also a longer time including at least a predetermined interval period (first closing control period, second closing control period) is set as the effect time. Then, the display control related to the specific hit effect pattern is performed so that the specific effect content (display effect a) appears within this effect time.

According to such an effect method, even in a predetermined interval period after the special symbol is stopped, the liquid crystal display device 1400 can perform a winning effect as to whether or not a hit has been won and an opening effect. Become. In addition, these effects can be appropriately cut to allow the effects and the game to proceed, so that the effect progress (game progress) at a good tempo can be realized. In addition, when the display effect pattern of such a specific effect content (display effect a) appears, a noteworthy effect element is added to whether or not the special symbol is stopped in the middle of the process. When the suspension is confirmed, it will be possible to grasp that an opportunity to win a prize ball will be given by opening the large winning opening 2003, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

In addition, by preparing the display effect pattern for the effect command "04H" for the extended effect pattern for the effect commands "01H" and "02H", the "display effect a after development" can be obtained. It is now possible to avoid having to set the expected degree of big hit when it appears within the range constrained by the appearance ratio of big hit and small hit, and small hit is installed. Even under such a production system that makes it difficult to recognize the fact, it becomes possible to perform a production design with a higher degree of freedom as shown in FIG. 237.

Further, in the display effect pattern when the effect command is "04H", the special symbol is changed even after the timing t1, so that even if the player confirms the change state of the special symbol, there is no problem. Absent. Then, by preparing such a non-extended effect pattern in a form of being mixed with the above-mentioned extended effect pattern, even when the stopped state of the special symbol in the extended effect pattern is confirmed, the player can be informed. On the other hand, it will be possible to raise awareness that may be misunderstood.

Further, in the display effect pattern when the effect command is "04H", the large prize opening 2003 is not opened when the loss explicit effect a is performed. Therefore, when the player confirms the large prize opening 2003. There is no problem even if there is. Then, by preparing such a non-open loss explicit effect a in a form of being mixed with the loss explicit effect a at the time of the above effect command "02H", the large winning opening 2003 in the loss explicit effect a is opened. Even if is confirmed, it will be possible to encourage the player to be aware that it may be misunderstood.

In the peripheral control MPU4140a according to this embodiment, in the display effect pattern when the effect commands are "01H", "02H", and "04H", a specific mission a is used until the timing t2 arrives. Whether or not it succeeded (whether or not character A defeats the enemy) is not shown, but whether or not it succeeded in a specific mission a prior to the arrival of timing t2 (character A) Whether or not to defeat the enemy) may be indicated. That is, in this case, after the same result display appears, the big hit explicit effect or the loss explicit effect is performed, but even with such an effect method, in the small hit display effect a, the small hit time Most of the first closing control period of It is possible to shift to the next fluctuation (holding digestion of special symbols) relatively quickly after being broken.

By the way, as described above, such a display effect appears when any of the effect commands "01H" to "04H" shown in FIG. 237 is received from the main control MPU4100a side in the first effect mode. Is. Then, the player wins the big hit with the winning probability of the big hit without being aware of the existence of the small hit which is not particularly required to realize such a game property (color rendering) in the first production mode. You will enjoy the game as to whether or not it will be played.

However, even when any of the effect commands "01H" to "04H" shown in FIG. 237 is received from the main control MPU4100a side, when the second effect mode is set, the main control MPU4100a The production commands "01H" to "04H" from the side, as well as the content of the production itself, and even though there is no change in the normal external disadvantageous game state, the big prize opening 2003 by winning a small hit By changing the display of the production content on the premise of opening the production mode and actively adopting it, the chance frequency of winning the prize ball by opening the large winning opening 2003 is compared with when in the first production mode. We are trying to realize the playability (directability) as if the number was greatly increased.

[About the display effect pattern when the effect command "01H" is used in the second effect mode]
That is, as shown in FIG. 246 (a), it is shown in FIG. 237 based on the fact that the jackpot was won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the second effect mode is set. Assuming that the fluctuation of the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta1 is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 has the content of the display effect a'at the time of a big hit associated with the effect command "01H". The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern and the variation of the decorative pattern are started respectively.

However, the content of the display effect a'in the second effect mode is different from that of the display effect a in the first effect mode. For example, is it possible to succeed in a specific mission a'(this implementation)? In the form of, the display effect pattern (challenge) has contents such as whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed with the bonus challenge stop symbol that makes it possible to grasp that the opening of the grand prize opening 2003 is confirmed. It is prepared as a bonus production pattern). Therefore, the variable display of the decorative pattern is also performed over the entire display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (at least in a place that is easily noticed, such as the central portion of the display area). In this way, in the second effect mode, attention is paid to the movement of the decorative symbol, and a big hit depends on whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed in a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line. The result of the lottery is made to be grasped by the player.

In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU4140a according to this embodiment, the display form of the decorative symbol is also different between the first effect mode and the second effect mode. For example, the decorative symbol in the first effect mode is a relatively small symbol image mainly composed of numbers, while the decorative symbol in the second effect mode is displayed as a relatively large symbol image mainly composed of characters. In the second effect mode, such as, the decorative pattern is set as a display form that is more easily noticed.

Then, in the non-extended display effect pattern when the effect command "01H" is used, for example, such a decorative symbol is stopped in a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears in the fluctuation time Ta1 until the timing t1 arrives. A display effect a'with contents such as an appropriate character struggling to display appears, and at the timing t1 when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, it is possible to win a prize ball by opening the large winning opening 2003. The decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line so that the player can grasp that the bonus challenge is to be performed. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "01H" functions as a "hit effect pattern among the effect patterns having the effect content a'".

Further, when the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped in the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears, the liquid crystal display device 1400 uses the first closing control period and is acquired by the player by opening the grand prize opening 2003. As a pre-start effect of the challenge bonus effect on how many prize balls are possible, a countdown effect a'is performed in which the operation timing of the operation handle portion 410 is indicated by the countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400. I am doing it.

Here, as described above, the countdown effect a'is that, for example, a countdown display of about 3 to 5 seconds is performed while explaining that the special figure gate 2500 is aimed at by a right-handed game. If the operation handle portion 410 is operated with an appropriate operation amount when the countdown display changes to "0", the game ball will pass through the special figure gate 2500 immediately after the first closing control period ends. become.

Therefore, according to such a countdown effect a', when the operation handle portion 410 is operated as instructed by the effect, the end timing t2 of the first closing control period is shown as shown in FIG. 246 (a). As soon as the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500 immediately after the arrival of the above, the end timing tx of the second closing control period arrives earlier than in the case of the first effect mode. As a result, the challenge bonus effect on how many prize balls the player can obtain is started relatively early after the end timing t2 of the first closing control period arrives. In the production, it is shown which opening mode (long opening hit game, medium opening hit game, small opening hit game) the big winning opening 2003 is opened. That is, in this case, the player launches a game ball against the big winning opening 2003 not only in the big hit game but also in the small open hit game (small hit game), and thus when the player is in the first production mode. In comparison with this, the playability (directability) as if the frequency of chances of winning a prize ball by opening the large prize opening 2003 has been greatly increased will be realized. The details of the production during the big hit game will be described later.

By the way, as described above with reference to FIG. 245 (c), in such a challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a big hit, the operation is performed for a long time even after the countdown display in the countdown effect a'is changed to "0". It is also assumed that the handle portion 410 may not be operated. That is, in this case, the second closing control period having an indefinite length is continued for a long time, but in this second closing control period, the countdown display is set to "0" on the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is more desirable to prevent new effects from appearing, such as displaying as it is, in order to diminish the interest of the player who causes such a situation.

However, in the situation where the challenge bonus production pattern has appeared, such a situation where the production progress is stagnant is limited to the case where the big hit is won, and the challenge bonus production pattern at the time of the small hit described later ( In the case of FIGS. 245 (d) and 246 (b)), this cannot occur. That is, in this case, the amount of prize balls that can be obtained as much as the possibility that the game is performed per small opening is excluded while the production is stagnant (no production state) in which no production is newly performed. Not only that, but also the degree of expectation of transition to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player will be dramatically increased.

[About the display effect pattern when the effect command "02H" is used in the second effect mode]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 246 (b), FIG. 237 is based on the fact that a small hit was won on the main control MPU4100a side when the second effect mode is set. Assuming that the fluctuation related to the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta2 (here, it is described as being set to the same time as the time of timing t0 to t1) shown in the above (timing t0) is started, the liquid crystal display device. In 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the content of the display effect a'at the time of a small hit associated with the effect command "02H" and the variation of the decorative pattern are started respectively.

Then, the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command "02H") having the content of the display effect a'started in this way also has, for example, such a decorative pattern in the variable time Ta2 until the timing t1 arrives. , Bonus challenge stop symbol appears A display effect a'with contents such as an appropriate character struggling to stop and display in a stop display mode appears, and at the timing t1 when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, it is large. The decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on the predetermined symbol line so that the player can grasp that the prize ball can be acquired by opening the winning opening 2003. It becomes. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "02H" functions as a "hit effect pattern among the effect patterns having the effect content a'".

However, as described above, at the time of winning the small hit, the special symbol is stopped during the closing control period (opening period) from the stop of the special symbol to the start of the small open hit game (small hit game). It consists only of the time until the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) is timed up (the first closed control period with a certain length), and when the timer is timed up, the special figure gate The small open hit game (small hit game) is started regardless of whether or not the game ball has passed through the 2500 (see FIG. 233).

In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU4140a according to this embodiment, even in the case of the display effect pattern when the effect command is "02H", the decorative pattern is the same as in the case of the display effect pattern when the effect command is "01H". When the bonus challenge is confirmed and stopped with the stop display mode in which the stop symbol appears, how many prize balls can the player obtain by opening the large winning opening 2003 using the first closing control period? As a pre-start effect of the challenge bonus effect as to whether or not it is a thing, the operation timing of the operation handle unit 410 is indicated by the countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400.

That is, in the display effect pattern when in the second effect mode, both the big hit and the small hit are treated in the same way as the hit to open the big winning opening 2003, and the variation of the decorative pattern is started. There is no distinction in the production content from timing t0 to the challenge bonus effect, and when the operation handle 410 is operated according to the instructions of the effect, the challenge is performed from the countdown effect a'to the preceding effect (not shown). The challenge bonus production will be started by the same series of production contents as in the case of the challenge bonus production pattern (production command "01H") at the time of a big hit, which leads to the bonus production. Therefore, not only the big hit but also the small hit will be treated as one type (type of hit) as the hit that can win the prize ball by opening the big winning opening 2003, and in the challenge bonus production, the long open hit. In addition to the game and the game per medium opening, the game including the game per small opening can be displayed to indicate which game mode appears. As a result, compared to when in the first production mode, the gameability (color rendering) as if the frequency of chances of winning a prize ball by opening the large winning opening 2003 is greatly increased is realized. .. Of the long-opening game, the medium-opening game, and the small-opening game, the small-opening game ends in a relatively short time, so the small hits A to E and the small hits are small. Whether or not the hit is won may be made available to the player by displaying a specific image that does not appear when the big hit is won in the production within the first closing control period.

In this way, the display effect pattern when the effect command is "02H" is a display effect pattern based on one effect command, but
-The extended production pattern in the first production mode, in which the small hit is treated as a no-chance loss (similar to the production pattern at the time of pure loss (production command "04H")) in which the opportunity to win the prize ball is not given, and ... A non-extended display effect pattern in the second effect mode that treats a small hit as a high chance hit (similar to the effect pattern at the time of a big hit (effect command "01H")) that gives an opportunity to win a prize ball Challenge bonus production pattern)
It is selectively executed as one of the above. That is, in this case, the effect information related to the winning is appropriately reversed on the peripheral control MPU4140a side, whereby a wide variety of effects with greatly different production contents can be produced without changing the logic on the main control MPU4100a side one by one. It will be possible to realize it.

Furthermore, further, the game per small opening (small hit game) is not only that only a small amount of prize balls (about 40 to 50 in this embodiment) can be substantially acquired by the player as a privilege. Since the game does not shift to a game state that is more advantageous to the player than before the small open hit game (small hit game) is performed, the game interest is reduced even though the opening / closing member 2006 operates. It can be said that care must be taken in handling the game settings in that it may occur. Therefore, conventionally, when mounting a small hit, a large hit game is performed with the same behavior as a small open hit game (small hit game), and after that, a specific function that functions to shift to an advantageous gaming state. First, prepare the winning type, and in the situation where the small opening hit game (small hit game) is performed, make the player aware of the possibility that the winning type is a big hit game according to the winning of the specific winning type. Therefore, it was a major premise to maintain the interest of the game when the small open hit game (small hit game) is performed. However, even with such a conventional gaming machine, if a specific winning type is won, the jackpot is finally won under the jackpot winning probability set extremely low in the normal gaming state. Nevertheless, it is inevitable that the game interest will decline due to the fact that the prize balls commensurate with this low probability cannot be obtained (the difference between the jackpot probability and the real probability of the jackpot will result in a decline in the game interest). It was.

In this respect, with the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when mounting a small hit, a large hit game is performed with the same behavior as a small open hit game (small hit game), and after that, an advantageous gaming state is performed. In that a specific winning species that functions to shift to is not prepared, the technical idea for suppressing the decline in the game interest when a small open hit game (small hit game) is performed is different from the conventional gaming machine. In the first place, it is very different.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when mounting a small hit, a large hit winning type (big hit) can be executed so that a plurality of types of big hit games having different prize ball amounts that can be obtained by the player can be executed. A, jackpots B to E) will be prepared. Then, when opening the big winning opening 2003, first, the lottery result in which the opening of the big winning opening 2003 is confirmed in the big hit lottery (big hit A, which is expected to get a large amount of balls, is expected to get a medium amount of balls. A display effect is performed as to whether or not a large hit B to E, a small hit expected to obtain a small amount of balls) has been obtained (a challenge bonus effect pattern appears regardless of the type of hit). I have to). As a result, when it is shown that the lottery result is obtained, it is possible for the player to know that at least a small amount of balls can be obtained. After that, a challenge bonus production will be performed on how many balls can be added (from small amount of balls to medium or large amount of balls). I am doing it.

Furthermore, when the number of prize balls is increased, there is a possibility that the game state (the game state in which the probability variation function and the time saving function are activated) that is advantageous to the player is changed. In this regard, in this embodiment, depending on how many balls are piled up (big hit A, which is expected to obtain a large amount of balls, or big hits B to E, which are expected to obtain a medium amount of balls). The degree of expectation for the operation of the probability fluctuation function (probability of transition to the gaming state in which the probability fluctuation function operates) is made different. That is, in this case, a challenge is made as to which of a plurality of types of operation modes is prepared so that the probability of the change to the gaming state in which the probability variation function operates is different after the opening of the large winning opening 2003 is completed. It will function as a bonus effect. Therefore, in such a challenge bonus effect, a higher probability is obtained by adding the winning probability “3/400” without the operation of the conditional device to the winning probability “1/400” with the operation of the conditional device. With "1/100", not only can the prize ball be paid out to the player (in other words, the opening / closing member 2006 operates), but also the game state can be shifted to the player's advantage. Will also be able to raise awareness.

In this embodiment, the expectation for the operation of the probability fluctuation function (probability change expectation at the time of jackpot A) when the players are piled up until a large amount of balls can be obtained is 100%, which is at least medium. The expectation for the operation of the probability fluctuation function (probability change expectation at the time of big hits A to E) when it is piled up until it is possible to get a large amount of balls is 82%, and it is possible to get a medium amount of balls. The expected value for the operation of the probability fluctuation function (probability change expectation when the jackpots B to E) is 61.7% when it is piled up until it is said, and the expected value of the number of balls that can be obtained is high. The higher the situation, the higher the expectation of probability change.

Moreover, according to such a challenge bonus production, it is positioned as the default production state that a small amount of balls can be obtained, so that a large amount of balls can be obtained according to the winning of the big hit. Unlike conventional game machines, where whether or not the game is a basic game (basic production), even when a small open hit game (small hit game) is performed in which a small amount of balls can be obtained. Since the big prize opening 2003 is only opened in a form that matches the default production state, the decline in the game interest will be suppressed. Furthermore, when in the second production mode, the probability of appearance of the winning production (probability of entering the challenge bonus) is as much as the default production state is that a small amount of balls can be obtained. ) Is set to a higher probability (a higher probability that the winning probability of a small hit is added to the winning probability of a big hit), and this makes it impossible to obtain a prize ball commensurate with the low probability. It is also avoided that the interest is reduced.

Then, in order to have the challenge bonus production pattern that realizes such a game / directability in the second production mode, the lottery for small hits is not only performed in the first production mode as well. At the time of winning the small hit, the fluctuation time Ta2 to Td2 having a length corresponding to the fluctuation time Ta1 to Td1 of the special symbol at the time of winning the big hit can be selected. However, in the first effect mode, the small hit is not originally required, and the display effect as to whether or not the big hit is won is basically performed based on the jackpot probability. Therefore, in the first effect mode, it is convenient to realize a display effect in which it is difficult for the player to notice that the pachinko machine is equipped with a small hit, but the liquid crystal display device 1400 has a variation of a special symbol. If the production method in which the result of the big hit lottery appears at the time of stop is simply adopted, after the special symbol is stopped, the opening period when the small open hit game (small hit game) is executed and the opening period of the big winning opening 2003 after that. The presence of the game becomes conspicuous, which may reduce the interest in pachinko.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, in the first effect mode, the flag corresponding to the fixed stop command is set at the timing t1 (at the end of the change of the special symbol). However, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is not terminated and is continued. Further, at the time of entering the first closing control period, the flag corresponding to the interval effect command is set at the timing t1, but the peripheral control MPU4140a indicates that the large winning opening 2003 is opened. The set of the same command is ignored without switching to the interval effect, and the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is continued. Then, when the first closing control period ends and the second closing control period starts at the timing t2, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed, and the result of the big hit lottery is a hit accompanied by the operation of the conditional device. It is executed in the form of switching to the winning effect, which shows the winning information about whether or not it is a (big hit), and further to the opening effect.

That is, in this case, the above-mentioned small hit effect is positioned as one effect that appears when the big hit is lost, and the first closing when the small open hit game (small hit game) is executed after the special symbol is stopped. By performing it over the control period and the opening period of the big winning opening 2003 after that, the display effect on the next change (holding digestion of special symbols) relatively soon after it is shown that the big hit was lost. Will be able to migrate to. As a result, the production proceeds in the same manner as in the so-called high-expected loss production, so that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a hit (small hit) that does not involve the operation of the condition device. This becomes difficult to notice, and as a result, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game due to the opening / closing member 2006 operating in response to the winning of a small hit.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 in which such a first effect mode and a second effect mode are prepared, in particular, the peripheral control MPU4140a according to this embodiment is the first effect mode as described above. It is provided with a mode compulsory control means that creates a mode compulsory period in which a player is forcibly determined to be one of the effect modes of ing. Then, on this basis, the first predetermined period (for example, one month) after the pachinko machine 1 is delivered to the hall is forcibly determined in the first production mode, and the first predetermined period elapses. The control for creating the mode compulsory period is controlled so that the second predetermined period (for example, the next one month) after that is forcibly determined as the second effect mode.

According to such a mode compulsory period, the hall side hides the small hit from the player during the first predetermined period by the appearance of the extension effect pattern as described above. By performing a hit display in the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on the jackpot winning probability "1/400", the player is awarded a prize ball under the jackpot winning probability "1/400". It will be possible to start the operation of the first game-specification pachinko machine that can be paid out (first new store opening). Further, in the second predetermined period after the first predetermined period has elapsed, not only the big hit but also the small hit is one type of hit that enables the winning of the prize ball by opening the big winning opening 2003. By making the above-mentioned challenge bonus production pattern to be handled appear, it is difficult to notice the existence of small hits in the first predetermined period, and the winning probability of big hits is higher than "1/400". Based on the probability "1/100", the hit display is performed in the display effect of the liquid crystal display device 1400.

That is, in this case, the prize ball can be paid out to the player under the higher probability "1/100" which is the sum of the jackpot winning probability "1/400" and the small hit winning probability "3/400". It will be possible to start the operation of a new pachinko machine with a second game specification (second new store opening). As a result, although the pachinko machine 1 is originally equipped with only one game specification, another pachinko machine that differs not only in the production content of the liquid crystal display device 1400 but also in the game specification related to the acquisition of balls is newly operated. It will be possible to give the player such an impression.

Furthermore, according to such a mode compulsory period, unless it is determined that a predetermined date (first predetermined period) has not passed and it is on a specific date and time (second predetermined period). Not only is the change control from the first production mode not allowed, but some of the multiple production modes (second production mode) have not yet appeared and are hidden. Will be done. That is, in this case, as the days have passed since the pachinko machine 1 was delivered to the hall, the production function that had been hidden until then was gradually exposed, and finally, it was exposed. Since the resulting production function can be selectively used by the operation of the player, it becomes possible to maintain the game interest for a long period of time.

[About the display effect pattern when the effect command "03H" is used in the second effect mode]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 246 (c), when the second production mode is set, the main control MPU4100a side does not win either the big hit or the small hit (pure loss). ) Was obtained, and the fluctuation of the special symbol having the fluctuation time Ta3 shown in FIG. 237 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timing t0 to t1) is generated. Assuming that it is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the content of the display effect a'at the time of loss associated with the effect command "03H" , Start the variation of the decorative pattern, respectively.

Then, the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command "03H") having the content of the display effect a'started in this way also has, for example, such a decorative pattern in the variable time Ta3 until the timing t1 arrives. , A display effect a'with contents such as an appropriate character struggling to display the stop in a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears appears. However, at the timing t1 when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on the predetermined symbol line without the effort of the appropriate character. Naru (challenge bonus production pattern). As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "03H" functions as a "loss effect pattern among the effect patterns having the effect content a'".

As described above, the display effect pattern when the effect command "03H" is used is defined as the "non-extended display effect pattern" regardless of the effect mode. Therefore, when the display effect pattern is in the first effect mode, the display effect pattern is between the effect pattern (effect command "01H") having the content of the display effect a at the time of a big hit in which the "extended effect pattern" is adopted. Since there is a gap in the production time in, it cannot function as a production pattern at the time of loss with respect to the production pattern having the content of the display production a at the time of a big hit, and the content of the display production a develops. As described above, it functions only as an intermediate production pattern that ends in the intermediate stage.

On the other hand, when in the second effect mode, the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect a'at the time of the big hit when the effect command is "01H" is the "non-extended display effect pattern (challenge bonus effect pattern). ) ”, So there is no discrepancy in the production time with the same production pattern (production command“ 01H ”), and the production pattern (production command“ 01H ”) has the content of the display production a’ at the time of a big hit. It functions as an effect pattern (a effect pattern in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on a predetermined symbol line) when the command is lost to "01H"). Further, as described above, when in the second effect mode, the "non-extended display effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a'at the time of the small hit when the effect command "02H" is also produced at the time of hit. Since it appears as a pattern (effect pattern in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line), even for this effect pattern (effect command "02H"), the effect pattern (bonus challenge stop symbol is predetermined) at the time of loss. It will function as an effect pattern that does not appear on the symbol line).

[About the display effect pattern when the effect command "04H" is used in the second effect mode]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 246 (d), when the second production mode is set, a loss (pure) in which neither the big hit nor the small hit is won on the main control MPU4100a side. Based on the fact that the loss) was obtained, the variation related to the special symbol having the variation time Ta4 shown in FIG. 237 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timing t0 to t3). Is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c'at the time of loss associated with the effect command "04H". Is started.

That is, the display effect pattern when the effect command "04H" has the content of the display effect a at the time of a big hit when the display effect pattern when the effect command "03H" is in the first effect mode. In view of the fact that it cannot function as an effect pattern at the time of loss with respect to the effect pattern (effect command "01H"), in order to compensate for this (effect pattern at the time of loss when in the first effect mode). It is prepared. Therefore, the display effect pattern when the effect command "04H" is used is the "non-extended effect pattern" when the second effect mode is set, contrary to the display effect pattern when the effect command is "03H". There will be a discrepancy in the production time with the production pattern (effect command "01H") that has the content of the display effect a'at the time of the big hit, and the effect that has the content of the display effect a'at the time of the big hit. It cannot function as an effect pattern when the pattern is lost.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the fluctuation time Tc1 when the fluctuation number “9” and the fluctuation time Tc2 when the fluctuation number “10” are shown in FIG. 237 are set to the fluctuation number “4”. It is prepared as a fluctuation time having the same length as the fluctuation time Ta4 at the time of. That is, in this case, when in the second effect mode, the display effect pattern (see FIG. 247 (a)) described later having the content of the display effect c'at the time of the big hit at the effect command "09H" is "non". Since it appears as an "extended display effect pattern", there is no discrepancy in the effect time with the same effect pattern (effect command "09H"). Therefore, regarding the display effect pattern when the effect command "04H" is used, when in the second effect mode, the display effect c'at the time of loss associated with the effect command "04H" is not included. By starting as a dynamic display of the extended display effect pattern, the effect pattern (bonus) at the time of loss with respect to the effect pattern (effect command "09H") having the content of the display effect c'at the time of a big hit. The challenge stop symbol is made to function as an effect pattern) that does not appear on the predetermined symbol line.

In the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command "04H") having the content of the display effect c'started in this way, for example, in the variable time Ta4 until the timing t3 arrives, such a decorative pattern is used. , A display effect c'with contents such as an appropriate character struggling to display the stop in a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears appears. However, at the timing t3 when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on the predetermined symbol line without the effort of the appropriate character. Become.

As described above, the display effect pattern when the effect command "04H" appears when a specific loss fluctuation time Ta4 is selected, but the effect command (variation time) from the main control MPU4100a is different. It can function as each loss display effect pattern for the jackpot display effect patterns of the two types of effect contents a and c', and functions as a loss display effect pattern for any of the jackpot display effect patterns. Whether to do so is selectively set based on which of the first effect mode and the second effect mode is set. As a result, regarding the two jackpot production commands "01H" and "09H", the production command "01H" at the time of the jackpot is obtained when the first production mode is in the first effect mode and when the second effect mode is in the second effect mode. , The appearance probability of the loss display effect pattern prepared for the jackpot display effect pattern of "09H" can be changed.

More specifically, regarding the jackpot production pattern of the production command "01H", in the first production mode, although the production command "04H" at the time of loss is adopted as the loss production pattern, the second In the effect mode of, the effect command "04H" at the time of loss is not adopted as the effect pattern of the loss. Therefore, regarding the jackpot effect pattern of the effect command "01H", the appearance probability of the effect command "04H" for the loss effect pattern is higher in the second effect mode than in the first effect mode. Regarding the jackpot production pattern of the production command "09H", in the first production mode, although the production command "04H" at the time of loss is not adopted as the loss production pattern, the second effect pattern is used. In the production mode, the production command "04H" at the time of loss is adopted as the loss production pattern. Therefore, regarding the jackpot effect pattern of the effect command "09H", the appearance probability of the effect command "04H" for the loss effect pattern is higher in the first effect mode than in the second effect mode. As a result, a wide variety of display effect patterns with different expectations can be made to appear according to the effect mode without changing the logic on the main control MPU4100a side one by one (see FIG. 248).

The reason why such a special effect can be realized is that the effect command adjusts the length of each effect by using the stop timing t3 of the special symbol as the effect time for one loss fluctuation time Ta4. Although the jackpot production pattern of "09H" and the fluctuation time Ta1 shorter than the loss fluctuation time Ta4, at least the first closing control period after the symbol is stopped are added as the production time and used to produce each other. This is because the jackpot effect pattern (first effect mode) of the effect command "01H" whose length is adjusted is prepared. That is, by preparing the jackpot effect pattern in which the effect time is adjusted in this way, the jackpot effect patterns of the effect commands "01H" and "09H" having different variation times Ta1 and Tc1 are associated with one loss fluctuation time Ta4. When this loss fluctuation time Ta4 is selected, it becomes possible for the peripheral control MPU4140a side to determine which effect contents a and c'appear. Furthermore, even as such a first closing control period, which is added as an effect time, when a hit (big hit or small hit) to open the big winning opening 2003 is won, a certain length is given regardless of the type. It is also important that the time is set as a long time (for example, 8 seconds) in order to realize such a special effect by including the effect pattern at the time of a small hit.

FIG. 247 is a time chart showing an example of a display effect appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when any one of the effect commands “09H” to “11H” shown in FIG. 237 is received from the main control MPU 4100a side.

[About the extended production pattern when the production command "09H" is used in the first production mode]
As shown in FIG. 247 (a), the fluctuation time shown in FIG. 237 is based on the fact that the jackpot was won on the main control MPU4100a side when the first effect mode is set. Assuming that the fluctuation related to the special symbol having Tc1 is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the display effect c at the time of a big hit (for example, a specific mission c) associated with the effect command "09H". The dynamic display of the extended effect pattern with the content of whether or not the character C can succeed (whether or not the character C can defeat the enemy) is started. Then, the extended effect pattern (effect command "09H") having the content of the display effect c started in this way is even in a situation where the timing t3 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped with the passage of the variation time Tc1 has arrived. , The display effect c is continued without being terminated (without making the specific mission c successful or unsuccessful).

That is, as described above, the fluctuation time Tc1 at the fluctuation number “9” shown in FIG. 237 is not prepared as a fluctuation time having the same length as the fluctuation time Ta4 at the fluctuation number “4”. However, when the first production mode is set, such an "extended production pattern" is adopted, so that the production time is different from that of the production pattern (production command "04H"). Is to occur. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when in the first effect mode, there is an effect relationship (big hit effect pattern, loss effect) with the display effect pattern when the variation number is "4". Pattern) is not provided.

Further, when the extension effect pattern is dynamically displayed when the effect command "09H" is issued, the decorative pattern is also started to change. However, the change of the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped at the timing t3 when the change of the special symbol is stopped in the loss stop mode at the time of extension.

In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU4140a according to this embodiment, when the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped within the time of the fluctuation time Tc1 in the lost stop mode at the time of extension. Then, under the condition that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the loss stop mode at the time of extension, the display effect c on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is until the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped by the passage of the fluctuation time Tc1. As for, the continuation expectation effect as to whether or not this is continued (for example, whether or not the character C who has fallen under the attack from the enemy can stand up) is performed.

That is, in this case, since the display effect c (no development, loss) described later associated with the command “11H” shown in FIG. 237 is prepared, the display effect c even when the timing t3 has passed. When is continued, this functions as "post-development display effect c (effect that leaves a chance to succeed a specific mission c)". Therefore, when this "post-development display effect c" appears, the special symbol is displayed from the player's side even though it is in the first closing control period after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. It will be possible to grasp it as being still fluctuating. Further, the decorative symbol on the liquid crystal display device 1400 can also be grasped as being maintained in the temporarily stopped state even though it is in the state after the fixed stop, and by extension, at the time of the above-mentioned extension. It will be possible to make it appear that there is still a chance to show that the jackpot has been won in a way that the loss stop mode is overturned.

However, at this time, the extended effect pattern (effect command "09H") having the content of the display effect c is performed in the large display area (center or the entire display area) of the liquid crystal display device 1400. In the above, the variable display of the decorative pattern shall be performed only in a small display area (a portion of the liquid crystal display device 1400 that is difficult to be noticed, such as an edge portion of the display area) for such a display effect c. However, it is more desirable to let the player grasp the result of the big hit lottery depending on whether or not the specific mission c in the display effect c can be succeeded without paying attention to the movement of the decorative symbol.

That is, in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (big hit) associated with the effect command "09H", in the first closing control period after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the actual closing control period is performed. However, despite the fact that the decorative design has been fixedly stopped, we succeeded in producing continuous expectations at the time of temporary stop (for example, character C, who has fallen under the attack of the enemy, has risen). Under the condition that it is held, "display effect c after development" will appear. In this "display effect c after development", using the time until the end timing t4 of the first closing control period on the main control MPU4100a side, for example, the appearance of the character C confronting the enemy again is projected. A production will be made as to whether or not mission c can be successful.

However, as will be described later, such "post-development display effect c (effect on whether or not a specific mission c can be succeeded)" in the first closed control period on the main control MPU4100a side is shown in FIG. 237. It is also performed in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the command "10H". And as described above, in order to make it difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a small hit when in the first effect mode, the display effect c (small hit) is a big hit loss. It is more desirable to shift to the next fluctuation (holding digestion of special symbols) relatively soon after is shown.

Therefore, in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (big hit) associated with the effect command "09H", a specific effect is specified until the end timing t4 of the first closing control period arrives. The appearance of success in mission c (character C defeats the enemy) is not shown, and the effect of whether or not a specific mission c can be successful (character C attacks the enemy and this succeeds). (Direction such as whether or not) appears. As a result, the jackpot explicit effect c can appear in the form of showing the success of the specific mission c after the end timing t4 of the opening effect, and the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "09H". Comes to function as a "hit effect pattern among the effect patterns having the effect content c".

However, as described above, in the extension effect pattern at the time of a big hit, after the first closing control period having a certain length ends, the closing control period is extended to have an indefinite length. The closing control period of 2 is further appearing. Then, within the second closing control period, a part of the effect content in the extended effect pattern at the time of the big hit (big hit explicit effect c) and the opening effect before the big hit game (the big hit game is started by performing the right-handed game). It is possible to perform a production that encourages what should be done). Then, as a result of the operation handle portion 410 being operated at an appropriate timing according to the understanding speed of each player for these effects, when the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500 (timing ty), the second closing control is performed. The period will end, and eventually the jackpot game and the production during the jackpot game will start. The details of the production during the big hit game will be described later.

Further, this is also as described above with reference to FIG. 245 (a), but the second closing control period from the timing t4 to the timing ty is terminated based on the operation of the operation handle portion 410. Since it is a thing (a period having an indefinite length), for example, immediately after the end of the first closing control period having a certain length, the operation handle portion 410 is operated to play the special figure gate 2500. When the game is played so that the ball passes through, the jackpot explicit production c and the opening production are cut at that point, or the production itself is almost not made to appear (effect skipping), and the next production (production during the jackpot game) It will be forced to proceed.

[About the extended production pattern when the production command "10H" is used in the first production mode]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 200B, FIG. 237 is based on the fact that a small hit was won on the main control MPU4100a side when the first effect mode is set. Assuming that the fluctuation related to the special symbol having the fluctuation time Tc2 (here, it is described as being set to the same time as the fluctuation time Tc1) shown in the above is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 , Display effect c at the time of small hit associated with the effect command "10H" (for example, whether a specific mission c can be successful (whether character C can defeat the enemy), etc.) The dynamic display of the extended effect pattern with the content is started. Then, when the extension effect pattern (effect command "10H") having the content of the display effect c thus started is also the extension effect pattern (see FIG. 247 (a)) associated with the effect command "09H". Similarly, even in a situation where the timing t3 at which the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped due to the passage of the fluctuation time Tc2 has arrived, the display effect c is not terminated (the specific mission c is neither successful nor unsuccessful). ) Continue this.

Further, even when the extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the effect command "10H" is dynamically displayed, the decorative pattern is started to change. Further, regarding the fluctuation of the decorative symbol, the extension effect pattern (FIG. 247) associated with the effect command "09H" is also determined to stop with the loss stop mode at the time of extension at the timing t3 when the variation of the special symbol is stopped. This is the same as in (see (a)). In addition, although the lottery result of the big hit is different between the big hit and the small hit, the single display mode is adopted and the display mode is distinguished. As mentioned above, it has not been removed.

Furthermore, under the condition that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the loss stop mode at the time of extension, the display effect on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is displayed until the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with the passage of the fluctuation time Tc2. Regarding c, there is also a point that continuous expectation production (for example, whether or not the character C who has fallen under the attack from the enemy can stand up) is performed as to whether or not this is continued. This is the same as for the extended effect pattern (see FIG. 247 (a)) associated with the effect command “09H”.

That is, even in the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the effect command "10H", in the first closing control period after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, In fact, despite the fact that the decorative design has been fixedly stopped, we succeeded in producing continuous expectations at the time of temporary stop (for example, character C who has fallen under the attack of the enemy has risen). With a feeling, "display production c after development" will appear. Then, in this "display effect c after development", for example, the appearance of the character C confronting the enemy again is projected by using the time until the end timing t4 of the first closing control period on the main control MPU4100a side. A production is performed as to whether or not a specific mission c can be successful.

Furthermore, similarly, until the end timing t4 of the first closing control period arrives, the appearance of success in the specific mission c (character C defeats the enemy) is not shown, and it is specific. An effect on whether or not mission c can be successful (an effect such as whether or not character C attacks an enemy and this is successful) appears. However, as described above with reference to FIG. 245 (b), the extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (small hit) associated with the effect command "10H" has a certain length. After the end of the first closing control period, the second closing control period having an indefinite length does not appear further in the form of extending the closing control period. Therefore, it is specified from the end timing t4 of the first closing control period to the end timing t5 of the control related to the opening of the large winning opening 2003 in the small opening hit game (small hit game) when the production command "10H" is issued. The loss explicit production c will appear in the form of showing the failure of the mission c of. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "10H" functions as a "loss effect pattern among the effect patterns having the effect content c".

In this loss explicit production c, for example, the attack by the character C is evaded and the enemy escapes, and after that, the appearance that the character C regrets is projected, as a big hit defeat production different from the loss explicit production a. Will be done.

According to the extension effect pattern associated with such effect commands "09H" and "10H", the opening end timing t5 (or the second closing control period) of the special winning opening 2003 is started from the start timing t0 of the special symbol. Since the time until the jackpot explicit effect c ends) will function as one effect for winning the jackpot, it will be possible to direct the player's attention to such an effect. It becomes possible to make it difficult to notice that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with the opening of the big winning opening 2003 and the small hit when the loss explicit effect c is being performed.

[About the display effect pattern when the effect command "11H" is used in the first effect mode]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 247 (c), when the first production mode is set, a loss (pure loss) in which neither the big hit nor the small hit is won on the main control MPU4100a side. ) Was obtained, and the fluctuation of the special symbol having the fluctuation time Tc3 shown in FIG. 237 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timing t0 to t3) If it is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, is it possible to succeed in the display effect c (for example, a specific mission c) at the time of loss associated with the effect command "11H" (character C)? The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern with the contents of) (whether or not can defeat the enemy) is started. However, the display effect pattern (effect command "11H") having the content of the display effect c started in this way is displayed when the timing t3 at which the variation of the special symbol is stopped with the passage of the variation time Tc3 arrives. End this without extending the production c (in the form of failing a specific mission c).

More specifically, the variation of the decorative pattern is also started when the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (no development) at the time of loss associated with the effect command "11H" is dynamically displayed. Further, also in the case of the change of the decorative symbol, when the change of the special symbol is stopped at the timing t3, the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the loss stop mode at the time of extension in order to make a definite stop in the loss stop mode at the time of extension. ing.

Further, under the condition that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the loss stop mode at the time of extension, the display effect c on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is until the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with the passage of the fluctuation time Tc3. Regarding, it is also directed that the continuation expectation production (for example, whether or not the character C who has fallen under the attack from the enemy can stand up) is performed as to whether or not this is continued. This is the same as for the extension effect pattern (see FIGS. 247 (a) and 247 (b)) associated with the commands “09H” and “10H”.

However, in the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c (no development) at the time of loss associated with the effect command "11H", the continuous expected effect at the time of temporary stop fails (for example, from the enemy). It is shown that the character C, who has fallen under the attack, did not stand up), so that the player can know that he has failed a specific mission. By preparing such an effect pattern, the effect pattern that is continued after the timing t3 shown in FIGS. 247 (a) and 247 (b) can be made to function as an effect pattern with development.

In the peripheral control MPU4140a according to this embodiment, even in the display effect pattern when the effect commands are "09H" and "10H", did the specific mission c succeed until the timing t4 arrives? Whether or not (whether or not character C defeats the enemy) is not shown, but whether or not a specific mission c is successful (whether or not character C defeats the enemy) prior to the arrival of timing t4. Whether or not) may be indicated. That is, in this case, after the same result display appears, the big hit explicit effect or the loss explicit effect is performed, but even with such an effect method, in the small hit display effect c, the small hit time Most of the first closing control period of the above is used for the display effect c, and after that, the big hit defeat effect appears, such as showing the character C's regrettable appearance, and the big hit defeat effect is performed. It is possible to shift to the next fluctuation (holding digestion of a special symbol) relatively quickly after being broken.

By the way, as described above, such a display effect appears when any of the effect commands "09H" to "11H" shown in FIG. 237 is received from the main control MPU4100a side in the first effect mode. Is. Then, the player wins the big hit with the winning probability of the big hit without being aware of the existence of the small hit which is not particularly required to realize such a game property (color rendering) in the first production mode. You will enjoy the game as to whether or not it will be played.

However, even when any of the effect commands "09H" to "11H" shown in FIG. 237 is received from the main control MPU4100a side, when the second effect mode is set, the main control MPU4100a The production commands "09H" to "11H" from the side, as well as the content of the production itself, and even though there is no change in the normal external disadvantageous game state, the big prize opening 2003 by winning a small hit By changing the display of the production content on the premise of opening the production mode and actively adopting it, the chance frequency of winning the prize ball by opening the large winning opening 2003 is compared with when in the first production mode. Is designed to realize playability (directability) as if the number was greatly increased.

[About the display effect pattern when the effect command "09H" is used in the second effect mode]
That is, as shown in FIG. 247 (a), it is shown in FIG. 237 based on the fact that the jackpot was won on the main control MPU 4100a side when the second effect mode is set. Assuming that the fluctuation of the special symbol having the fluctuation time Tc1 is started (timing t0), the liquid crystal display device 1400 has the content of the display effect c'at the time of a big hit associated with the effect command "09H". The dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern and the variation of the decorative pattern are started respectively.

However, the content of the display effect c'in the second effect mode is different from that of the display effect c in the first effect mode. For example, can a specific mission c'succeed (this implementation). In the form of, the display effect pattern (challenge) has contents such as whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed with the bonus challenge stop symbol that makes it possible to grasp that the opening of the grand prize opening 2003 is confirmed. It is prepared as a bonus production pattern). Therefore, the variable display of the decorative pattern is also performed over the entire display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (at least in a place that is easily noticed, such as the central portion of the display area). In this way, in the second effect mode, attention is paid to the movement of the decorative symbol, and a big hit depends on whether or not the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed in a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line. The result of the lottery is made to be grasped by the player.

Then, in the non-extended display effect pattern (challenge bonus effect pattern) at the time of the effect command "09H", for example, in the fluctuation time Tc1 until the timing t3 arrives, for example, such a decorative symbol is used as a bonus challenge stop symbol. At the timing t3 when the change of the special symbol is stopped, the display effect c'with the content that the appropriate character struggles to stop and display with the appearing stop display mode appears, and at the timing t3, when the big prize opening 2003 is opened. The decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line so that the player can grasp that the opportunity to acquire the prize ball is given. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "09H" functions as a "hit effect pattern among the effect patterns having the effect content c'".

Further, when the decorative symbol is confirmed and stopped in the stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears in this way, the liquid crystal display device 1400 uses the first closing control period and is acquired by the player by opening the large winning opening 2003. As a pre-start effect of the challenge bonus effect c'about how many prize balls are possible, the countdown effect c'in which the operation timing of the operation handle portion 410 is indicated by the countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400. I try to do.

Here, as described above, the countdown effect c'is, for example, a countdown display of about 3 to 5 seconds is performed while explaining that the special figure gate 2500 is aimed at by a right-handed game. If the operation handle portion 410 is operated with an appropriate operation amount when the countdown display changes to "0", the game ball will pass through the special figure gate 2500 immediately after the first closing control period ends. become. However, as will be described later, since the expectation of this countdown effect c'is different from that of the above-mentioned countdown effect a', it is necessary to perform this as different effects (for example, different background colors). I have to.

Therefore, according to such a countdown effect c', when the operation handle portion 410 is operated according to the instruction of the effect, the end timing t4 of the first closing control period is shown as shown in FIG. 247 (a). As soon as the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500 immediately after the arrival of, the end timing ty of the second closing control period arrives earlier than in the case of the first effect mode. As a result, the challenge bonus effect on how many prize balls the player can obtain is started relatively early after the end timing t4 of the first closing control period arrives. In the production, it is shown which opening mode (long opening hit game, medium opening hit game, small opening hit game) the big winning opening 2003 is opened. That is, in this case, the player launches a game ball against the big winning opening 2003 not only in the big hit game but also in the small open hit game (small hit game), and thus when the player is in the first production mode. In comparison with this, the playability (directability) as if the frequency of chances of winning a prize ball by opening the large prize opening 2003 has been greatly increased will be realized. The details of the production during the big hit game will be described later.

By the way, as described above with reference to FIG. 245 (c), in such a challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a big hit, the operation is performed for a long time even after the countdown display in the countdown effect c'is changed to "0". It is also assumed that the handle portion 410 may not be operated. That is, in this case, the second closing control period having an indefinite length is continued for a long time, but in this second closing control period, the countdown display is set to "0" on the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is more desirable to prevent new effects from appearing, such as displaying as it is, in order to diminish the interest of the player who causes such a situation.

However, in the situation where the challenge bonus production pattern has appeared, such a situation where the production progress is stagnant is limited to the case where the big hit is won, and the challenge bonus production pattern at the time of the small hit described later ( In the case of FIGS. 245 (d) and 247 (b)), this cannot occur. That is, in this case, the amount of prize balls that can be obtained as much as the possibility that the game is performed per small opening is excluded while the production is stagnant (no production state) in which no production is newly performed. Not only that, but also the degree of expectation of transition to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player will be dramatically increased.

[About the display effect pattern when the effect command "10H" is used in the second effect mode]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 247 (b), FIG. 237 is based on the fact that a small hit was won on the main control MPU4100a side when the second effect mode is set. Assuming that the fluctuation related to the special symbol having the fluctuation time Tc2 (here, it is described as being set to the same time as the time of timing t0 to t3) shown in (Timing t0) is started, the liquid crystal display device. In 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c'at the time of a small hit associated with the effect command "10H" and the variation of the decorative symbol are started respectively.

Then, the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command "10H") having the content of the display effect c'started in this way also has, for example, such a decorative pattern in the fluctuation time Tc2 until the timing t3 arrives. , Bonus challenge A display effect c'with contents such as an appropriate character struggling to display a stop display with a stop display mode appears, and at the timing t3 when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, a bonus is given. The decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with the stop display mode in which the challenge stop symbol appears on the predetermined symbol line. As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "10H" functions as a "hit effect pattern among the effect patterns having the effect content c'".

However, as described above, at the time of winning the small hit, the special symbol is stopped during the closing control period (opening period) from the stop of the special symbol to the start of the small open hit game (small hit game). It consists only of the time until the interval effect timer (8 seconds in this case) is timed up (the first closed control period with a certain length), and when the timer is timed up, the special figure gate The small open hit game (small hit game) is started regardless of whether or not the game ball has passed through the 2500 (see FIG. 233).

In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU4140a according to this embodiment, even in the case of the display effect pattern when the effect command is "10H", the decorative pattern is the same as in the case of the display effect pattern when the effect command is "09H". When the bonus challenge is confirmed and stopped with the stop display mode in which the stop symbol appears, how many prize balls can be obtained by the player by opening the large winning opening 2003 using the first closing control period? As a pre-start effect of the challenge bonus effect as to whether or not it is a thing, the countdown effect c'in which the operation timing of the operation handle unit 410 is indicated by the countdown display on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is performed.

That is, in the display effect pattern when in the second effect mode, both the big hit and the small hit are treated in the same way as the hit to open the big winning opening 2003, and the variation of the decorative pattern is started. There is no distinction in the production content from timing t0 to the challenge bonus effect, and when the operation handle 410 is operated according to the instructions of the effect, the challenge is performed from the countdown effect c'to the preceding effect (not shown). The challenge bonus production will be started by the same series of production contents as in the case of the challenge bonus production pattern (production command "09H") at the time of a big hit, which leads to the bonus production. Therefore, not only the big hit but also the small hit will be treated as one type (type of hit) as the hit that can win the prize ball by opening the big winning opening 2003, and in the challenge bonus production, the long open hit. In addition to the game and the game per medium opening, the game including the game per small opening can be displayed to indicate which game mode appears. As a result, compared to when in the first production mode, the gameability (color rendering) as if the frequency of chances of winning a prize ball by opening the large winning opening 2003 is greatly increased is realized. .. Of the long-opening game, the medium-opening game, and the small-opening game, the small-opening game ends in a relatively short time, so the small hits A to E and the small hits are small. Whether or not the hit is won may be made available to the player by displaying a specific image that does not appear when the big hit is won in the production within the first closing control period.

In this way, the display effect pattern when the effect command is "10H" is a display effect pattern based on one effect command, but
・ The extended production pattern in the first production mode where the small hit is treated as a no-chance loss where the opportunity to win the prize ball is not given, and ・ The small hit is the high chance hit where the opportunity to win the prize ball is given ( It is selectively executed as one of the non-extended display effect patterns in the second effect mode, which is handled in the same manner as the effect pattern at the time of a big hit (effect command "09H"). That is, in this case, the effect information related to the winning is appropriately reversed on the peripheral control MPU4140a side, whereby a wide variety of effects with greatly different production contents can be produced without changing the logic on the main control MPU4100a side one by one. It will be possible to realize it.

[About the display effect pattern when the effect command "11H" is used in the second effect mode]
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 247 (c), when the second production mode is set, the main control MPU4100a side does not win either the big hit or the small hit (pure loss). ) Was obtained, and the fluctuation of the special symbol having the fluctuation time Tc3 shown in FIG. 237 (here, it is assumed that the time is set to the same time as the timing t0 to t3) is generated. Assuming that it is started (timing t0), in the liquid crystal display device 1400, the dynamic display of the non-extended display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c'at the time of loss associated with the effect command "11H" , Start the variation of the decorative pattern, respectively.

Then, the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command "11H") having the content of the display effect c'started in this way also has, for example, such a decorative pattern in the variable time Tc3 until the timing t3 arrives. , A display effect c'with contents such as an appropriate character struggling to display the stop in a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears appears. However, at the timing t3 when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped with a stop display mode in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on the predetermined symbol line without the effort of the appropriate character. Naru (challenge bonus production pattern). As a result, the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "11H" functions as a "loss effect pattern among the effect patterns having the effect content c'".

As described above, the display effect pattern when the effect command "11H" is used is defined as the "non-extended display effect pattern" regardless of the effect mode. Therefore, when the display effect pattern is in the first effect mode, the display effect pattern is between the effect pattern (effect command "09H") having the content of the display effect c at the time of a big hit in which the "extended effect pattern" is adopted. Since there is a gap in the production time in, it cannot function as a production pattern at the time of loss with respect to the production pattern having the content of the display production c at the time of a big hit, and the content of the display production c develops. As described above, it functions only as an intermediate production pattern that ends in the intermediate stage.

On the other hand, when in the second effect mode, the display effect pattern having the content of the display effect c'at the time of the big hit when the effect command "09H" appears as the "non-extended display effect pattern". , With respect to the production pattern (production command "09H") having the content of the display production c'at the time of a big hit without causing a difference in the production time with the same production pattern (production command "09H"). It will function as an effect pattern at the time of loss (an effect pattern in which the bonus challenge stop symbol does not appear on the predetermined symbol line). Further, as described above, when in the second effect mode, the "non-extended display effect pattern" having the content of the display effect c'at the time of the small hit when the effect command "10H" is also produced at the time of hit. Since it appears as a pattern (effect pattern in which the bonus challenge stop symbol appears on a predetermined symbol line), the effect pattern (bonus challenge stop symbol is predetermined) even for this effect pattern (effect command "10H") at the time of loss. It will function as an effect pattern that does not appear on the symbol line).

As described above, the display effect pattern when the effect command "09H" is used corresponds to the display effect pattern when the effect command "01H" is shown in FIG. 246 (a), and when the effect command is "10H". The display effect pattern corresponds to the display effect pattern when the effect command "02H" is shown in FIG. 246 (b), and the display effect pattern when the effect command "11H" is used is shown in FIG. 246 (c). It corresponds to the display production pattern at the time of the production command "03H", and although the production contents are different from each other among the corresponding production patterns, the production series addressed to itself (production content a series, production content). For the c series), it functions as an effect pattern that has almost the same role as each other.

However, in the production content c series (production commands "09H" to "11H"), a display production pattern corresponding to the production command "04H" in the production content a series (production commands "01H" to "04H") is prepared. Not. That is, even in the effect content c series, if a display effect pattern corresponding to the effect command "04H" is prepared, in the first effect pattern, the display effect pattern at the time of the effect command "09H" is obtained. Although this can be effectively functioned as a loss display effect pattern, the second effect pattern cannot function as a loss display effect pattern with respect to the display effect pattern when the effect command is "09H". Therefore, despite the fact that it has been given a relatively long time, it will exist as a display production pattern dedicated to loss where the jackpot symbol combination does not appear, and I was concerned that this could reduce the game's interest. It is a thing.

Therefore, when in the first effect mode, for the hit effect pattern when the effect command is "09H", the effect pattern at the time of loss (pure loss) in which a specific condition is not satisfied is adopted as the loss effect pattern. Only the effect pattern when a specific condition is satisfied (display effect pattern when the effect command is "10H") functions as the only existence that replaces the effect pattern at the time of the loss (pure loss). Will come to do. That is, in this case, in the production content c series (production commands "09H" to "11H"), unlike the production content a series (production commands "01H" to "04H"), "display production c after development" appears. The expectation of a big hit at that time must be set within the range constrained by the appearance ratio of the big hit and the small hit. However, the production content c of the production content c series (production commands "09H" to "11H") has a longer time than the production content a of the production content a series (production commands "01H" to "04H"). As for the jackpot expectation, it is executed as a production with a higher expectation than the production content a. Therefore, the degree of expectation of a big hit when the "display effect c after development" appears is set as an appropriate value to be described later, which is required even within the range constrained by the appearance ratio of the big hit and the small hit. It is relatively easy to set.

Further, regarding the display effect pattern associated with the effect command "04H" in the effect content a series (effect commands "01H" to "04H"), when in the second effect mode, the effect content a By making it function as a loss production pattern for the production content c series hit production pattern (production command "09H", "10H") instead of the series hit production pattern (production command "01H", "02H"). As described above, the jackpot symbol combination is prevented from existing as a display effect pattern dedicated to loss without appearing. Therefore, in the effect content c series (effect commands "09H" to "11H"), when in the second effect mode, the hit effect patterns (effect commands "09H" and "10H") are prepared. The loss effect pattern appears with a higher probability than the ratio of the loss effect pattern (effect command "11H") by the addition of the selection probability of the display effect pattern of the effect command "04H".

Although details are omitted, each display effect pattern associated with the effect commands "05H", "06H", "07H", and "08H" of the effect content b series shown in FIG. 237 is the effect content. A display having the same mode as each display effect pattern (see FIGS. 246 (a) to 246 (d)) associated with the effect commands "01H", "02H", "03H", and "04H" of the a series. It is set as a production pattern. Furthermore, each display effect pattern associated with the effect command "12H", "13H", and "14H" of the effect content d series shown in FIG. 237 is the effect command "09H" of the effect content c series. It is set as a display effect pattern having the same mode as each display effect pattern (see FIGS. 247 (a) to 247 (c)) associated with "10H" and "11H", respectively. That is, each display effect pattern associated with the effect commands "05H", "06H", "07H", and "08H" of the effect content b series shown in FIG. 237, and the effect content d shown in FIG. 237. The production relationship with each display production pattern associated with the production commands "12H", "13H", and "14H" of the series is the production content a series production commands "01H", "02H", Each display effect pattern (see FIGS. 246 (a) to (d)) associated with "03H" and "04H", and the effect commands "09H", "10H", and "11H" of the effect content c series. It is set to have the above-mentioned effect relationship with each display effect pattern (see FIGS. 247 (a) to 247 (c)) associated with the above-mentioned effect pattern.

FIG. 248 (a) is a table showing the degree of expectation of a big hit when in the first production mode for each production content series, and FIG. 248 (b) shows a challenge when in the second production mode. It is a table showing the degree of expectation of bonus rush for each production series. In addition, since the numerical value indicating the probability is rounded off to the first decimal place and shown as a numerical value up to the first decimal place, the total probability value of each element may not be 100%.

According to the setting mode related to such a display effect pattern, the jackpot expectation degree, which is the expectation degree at which the hit effect appears in the first effect mode, is shown in FIG. 248 (a) of the effect content a. The jackpot expectation when the display effect pattern appears is "0.5%", and the jackpot expectation when the display effect pattern of the effect content b appears is "1.5%", and the effect content c The jackpot expectation when the display effect pattern appears is "13.7%", and the jackpot expectation when the display effect pattern of the effect content d appears is "33.1%". Since the jackpot expectation is "100%" when the display effect pattern of the effect content e appears, this is omitted in the table. In the display effect pattern of the effect content e, a definite effect that the jackpot has been won appears regardless of the effect mode.

In addition, regarding the degree of expectation of a big hit (the degree of expectation that a hit effect will appear) when each display effect pattern that can appear in the first effect mode is in the stage of development, when the developed content a appears. The jackpot expectation is "1.3%", the jackpot expectation when the post-development production content b appears is "3.7%", and the jackpot when the post-development production content c appears. The degree of expectation is "25%", and the degree of expectation for a big hit when the post-development production content d appears is "72.7%".

On the other hand, regarding the challenge bonus rush expectation level, which is the expectation level at which a hit effect appears in the second effect mode, when the display effect pattern of the effect content a'appears, as shown in FIG. 248 (b). The challenge bonus rush expectation is "7.9%", and the challenge bonus rush expectation when the display production pattern of the production content b'appears is "11.8%", and the production content c'is displayed. The challenge bonus rush expectation when the effect pattern appears is "15.4%", and the challenge bonus rush expectation when the display effect pattern of the effect content d'appears is "10%".

That is, as described above, only the display effect patterns of the effect contents a and b among the effect contents a to d are the jackpot effect patterns (effect command "01H", effect command "05H") set as the extension effect pattern. ”), A non-extended display effect pattern (effect command“ 04H ”, effect command“ 08H ”) that can function as a loss effect pattern only when in the first effect mode is prepared. Then, on this, the non-extended display effect pattern (effect command "04H", effect command "08H") prepared in this way is applied, and in the second effect mode, the hit effect pattern of the effect content c'(effect command "08H") is applied. 09H ”, the production command“ 10H ”) and the hit production pattern (production command“ 12H ”, production command“ 13H ”) of the production content d'are diverted as each loss production pattern.

According to the display effect patterns associated with such effect commands "04H" and "08H", when in the first effect mode, it is expected that a hit effect will appear including the developed effect contents a and b. Although the degree (expected jackpot) is low, the appearance probability of each display effect pattern of the effect contents a and b is increased (for each display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d), and thereby the jackpot It becomes possible to prevent the display effect pattern, which cannot be expected, from being repeatedly performed. Furthermore, with respect to the display effect patterns of the effect contents c and d, although the appearance probability is low including the developed effect contents c and d, a hit effect appears in each display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d. The degree of expectation (the degree of expectation of a big hit) has been increased (for each display effect pattern of the effect contents a and b), and as a result, the game interest when a specific display effect pattern (effect contents c and d) appears. Will be able to improve.

On the contrary, the display effect pattern associated with the effect commands "04H" and "08H" is used as the display effect pattern of the effect contents c and d series when in the second effect mode. By doing so, the appearance probability of the production contents c and d series can be increased by that amount (operation for appearance probability). As a result, the difference in the appearance probability between the effect contents a to d and the expectation that the hit effect appears can be reduced as compared with the case in the first effect mode, and the logic on the main control MPU4100a side can be reduced. It will be possible to realize a wide variety of productions with greatly different production contents without changing them one by one.

Moreover, when in the second production mode, the disparity between the production contents regarding the expectation that the hit production appears (challenge bonus entry expectation) is the display production associated with the production commands "04H" and "08H". In addition to the pattern being used as a display production pattern for the production content c and d series, not only big hits but also small hits are one type of hits that can be won by opening the big prize opening 2003. It is also reduced by being treated as (an operation to reduce the difference in the degree of expectation that a hit effect appears).

According to the effect mode when in the second effect mode, the display effect patterns of the effect contents a'to d'are relatively easy to appear regardless of the type of the effect contents a'to d'. Become. In addition, the probability of entering the challenge bonus effect (probability of executing the winning effect), in which the opportunity to win the prize ball is confirmed, will be equalized compared to when in the first effect mode (here, the content of the effect). (Within ± 10% between the types of a'to d'), and the above-mentioned disparity in appearance probability has been filled, so even if any of the production contents a'to d'appears, the game It becomes easier for a person to expect to be given an opportunity to win a prize ball.

In this regard, when in the second production mode, when the challenge bonus production is entered (executed), the "large winning opening 2003 is opened in any mode (long opening game, medium opening game, small opening game). Since it has a characteristic such as "is it done?", It is better to make it relatively easy to appear as a display effect pattern of the effect contents a'to d', rather than when it appears biased to either one. It is more desirable to suppress the decline in the game interest.

That is, as shown in FIG. 248 (b), in the display effect patterns of the effect contents a'to d'related to this embodiment, the effect content a'is the most regarding the appearance probability of the game per long and medium opening. It is getting smaller, and it is getting bigger in the order of the production contents b', c', and d'. Further, regarding the appearance probability of the game per small opening, the effect content a'is the largest, and the effect content b', c', and d'are gradually decreased in this order. Therefore, when the display effect pattern of the effect content a'appears, there is a high possibility that the large prize opening 2003 will be opened by the small opening game, but at least a small amount of prize balls (in this embodiment) as a privilege. , 40 to 50 pieces) is confirmed to be available, and there is a sense of expectation that the big prize opening 2003 will be opened by the long opening game and the medium opening game. You will be able to enjoy it as a production. In addition, when the display effect pattern of the effect content d'appears, the probability that the large prize opening 2003 will be opened by the long opening game or the medium opening game, and the large prize opening 2003 will be opened by the small opening game. Since it is higher than the probability of winning, it is not confirmed that at least a small amount of prize balls can be obtained as a privilege, but rather, the big prize opening 2003 is given by the game per long opening or the game per medium opening. It will function as a production of shades such as whether or not it is released. Then, the display effect patterns of the effect contents b'and c'function as an effect of a color tone between the display effect pattern of the effect content a'and the display effect pattern of the effect content d', respectively. , The display effect pattern of the effect content b'has a darker shade of the effect of the display effect pattern of the effect content a', and the display effect pattern of the effect content c'has the effect color of the display effect pattern of the effect content d'. Is getting darker. Therefore, since all of the display effect patterns of the effect contents a'to d'are relatively easy to appear, the player can enjoy the effect of various colors.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is expected that the hit effect will appear for the above-mentioned operation of reducing the difference in the degree of expectation that the hit effect appears between the effect contents as compared with the case of the first effect mode. The magnitude relationship of the degree is reversed according to the production mode. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 248 (a) and 248 (b), when in the first production mode, the expectations of the production contents b and c are "1.5%" and "1.5%", respectively. It is "13.7%", which is smaller than the expectation of the production content d "33.1%", whereas when in the second production mode, the expectation of the production contents b'and c' Are "11.8%" and "15.4%", respectively, which are larger than the expected degree "10%" of the production content d'. Even with such a setting mode, it is possible to realize a wide variety of productions in which the production contents are significantly different without changing the logic on the main control MPU4100a side one by one.

However, when the production pattern of the production content d'appears, the degree of expectation (probability) that the winning production (challenge bonus production) is executed is certainly higher than when the production patterns of the production contents b'and c'appear. Although it is low, as long as you enter the challenge bonus production, there is a higher probability that the large winning opening 2003 will be opened by the long, medium opening hit game than in the production pattern of the production contents b'and c'. , It is easy to get a lot of balls. Therefore, the production patterns of the production contents b'and c'and the production patterns of the production content d'are different in preference depending on the player, and such various shades are provided according to the display production pattern. By doing so, the decline in the game interest will be suppressed.

Next, an example of an effect appearing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 when the control for opening the big winning opening 2003 is performed based on the result of the big hit lottery in the normal external disadvantageous game state will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 237, 246 (a) and 247 (a), according to the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first production mode, the types of big hits (big hit A to big hit E). ), And the type of production is not shown and the control for opening the big prize opening 2003 (here, the control for the big hit game) is started. It will be. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first production mode, the type of jackpot and the period thereof can be determined by using the period when the control for opening the prize opening 2003 is performed. It will be an effect that can show the game state after the end.

That is, as described above, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal external disadvantageous game state is either jackpot A or B, both the time saving function and the probability fluctuation function are activated after the jackpot game is completed. It will be controlled to the probabilistic external advantageous gaming state. Therefore, when either of the big hits A and B is won, the liquid crystal display device 1400 first clearly indicates that the big hit has been won as the big hit explicit effects a to d, and then the long-time opening / closing pattern and the medium time. Information on the amount of balls to be played (big bonus, regular bonus, etc.) regarding which of the opening and closing patterns the big winning opening 2003 is open will be shown (the big hit game production). It should be noted that, as the effect during the big hit game related to the amount of balls to be ejected, the big hit is won in the big hit explicit effects a to d even if it is not performed after the big hit explicit effects a to d are performed. May be displayed (simultaneously displayed) together with the information (type of big hit) related to the amount of balls to be ejected.

In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the normal external disadvantageous game state is any of the jackpots C to E, the time saving function does not operate after the jackpot game ends, and the external disadvantageous game state (probability fluctuation function also operates). It is controlled to the normal external disadvantageous game state, or the probabilistic external disadvantageous game state in which the probability fluctuation function is activated. Then, as the effect state after the jackpot game is completed, it is controlled to a predetermined latent effect state in which whether or not the probability fluctuation function is operating is concealed. Therefore, when any of the jackpots C to E is won, the liquid crystal display device 1400 first clearly indicates that the jackpot has been won as the jackpot explicit effects a to d, and then either of the jackpots A and B. By performing an effect different from the effect during the big hit game when is elected, an effect indicating that one of the big hits C to E among the big hits A to E has been won will be performed ( Directed during the jackpot game). In addition, since the opening mode of the medium opening hit game is adopted at the time of winning the big hits C to E, it is only shown that the big hits C to E are won, and the information on the amount of balls to be ejected is also available. It will be shown. Further, regarding the production showing that one of the jackpots C to E has been won, even if the production is not performed after the jackpot explicit productions a to d are performed, the jackpot explicit productions a to d have a jackpot. It may be displayed (simultaneously displayed) at the same time when it is clearly indicated that the winner has been won.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 237, 246 (a) and 247 (a), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the second production mode, it is an opportunity to open the grand prize opening 2003. The content of the production does not differ depending on the type of hit (big hit A to big hit E, small hit), and the type is not shown and the control for opening the big winning opening 2003 (big hit 2003) is kept secret. Here, the big hit game or the control related to the small hit game) is started. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the second production mode, the type of hit (big hit, small hit) is used by utilizing the period when the control for opening the big winning opening 2003 is performed. The above-mentioned challenge bonus effect that can show the type of hit, big hit) and the game state after the end of the period will be performed.

That is, in the opening production (challenge bonus production) in the second production mode, first, in what mode (long opening per game, medium opening per game, small opening per game) the large winning opening 2003 is opened. Information on the amount of balls to be played (big bonus, regular bonus, small bonus, etc.) will be shown. As a result, when it is shown that the big winning opening 2003 is opened by the long open hit game (big bonus), it is naturally shown that it is controlled to the probabilistic external advantageous game state based on the winning of the big hit A. Will be. In addition, when it is shown that the big winning opening 2003 is opened by the small opening game (small bonus), it is naturally shown that the small hit is won and the game state is not changed. It becomes.

However, when it is shown that the big winning opening 2003 is opened by the game per middle opening (regular bonus), a battle effect by a predetermined character is further performed as the opening effect. As a result, when the character wins in the battle production, it is shown that the character is controlled to the probabilistic external advantageous game state based on the winning of the jackpot B. On the other hand, when the character is defeated in the same battle production, it will be shown that one of the jackpots C to E has been won, and after the opening production (big hit game) is completed, the time is shortened. It is controlled to an external disadvantageous game state in which the function does not operate (a normal external disadvantageous game state in which the probability variation function does not operate, or a probabilistic external disadvantageous game state in which the probability variation function operates). Then, as the effect state after the jackpot game is completed, it is controlled to a predetermined latent effect state in which whether or not the probability fluctuation function is operating is concealed.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the predetermined latent effect state is limited to a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) until the special symbol fluctuates. For example, when a specific enemy character is not encountered until the end of the same period, it indicates that the player is in a probabilistic external disadvantageous game state, and when a specific enemy character is encountered during the same period, a predetermined battle effect is performed. I am doing it. Then, when the character wins in this battle production, it indicates that the character has been won a big hit, and when the character is defeated, it indicates that it is normally in an external disadvantageous game state, and waits for the end of the same period. The latent effect state is terminated without any trouble.

In this way, according to the latent effect method in which the current gaming state is shown by the end of the period until the special symbol changes a specific number of times (for example, 10 times) at the latest, as a player, eventually It becomes easier to purely enjoy whether or not the game is in the game state, and it becomes possible to suppress a decline in the game interest due to the game state being kept secret for a long period of time even though the time saving function does not operate.

By the way, in the above-described example with reference to FIG. 246 (a), the effect command “01H” shown in FIG. 237 in the first effect mode has an “extended effect pattern” having the content of the display effect a. Is associated, but as shown in FIG. 249, in addition to the "extended effect pattern", a "non-extended display effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a is also associated. It may be.

That is, in this case, when the effect command "01H" shown in FIG. 237 is received in the first effect mode, the peripheral control MPU4140a has an "extended effect pattern" having the contents of the display effect a and the display effect a. One of the "non-extended display effect patterns" having the content of the above is selected, and the dynamic display of the selected display effect pattern is started by the liquid crystal display device 1400.

Here, as a method for selecting an "extended effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a and a "non-extended display effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a, for example,
(B) Based on the result of a predetermined effect lottery based on random numbers, either an "extended effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a or a "non-extended display effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a. How to choose
(B) Based on the type of jackpot won in the jackpot lottery, there are "extended effect pattern" with the content of display effect a and "non-extended display effect pattern" with the content of display effect a. In addition to the method of selecting any of (a) and (b), a method of combining (a) and (b) can be adopted.

When the method (a) is adopted, how many of the random numbers that can be acquired are associated with the "extended effect pattern" and the "non-extended display effect pattern", respectively. An "extended effect" having the content of the display effect a when the effect command "01H" shown in FIG. 237 is received in the first effect mode according to the ratio of the random number values associated in advance such as Each appearance probability of the "pattern" and the "non-extended display effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a is determined. Regarding the setting of such appearance probability, it is necessary to make the jackpot expectation higher when the "extended display effect pattern" appears than the "non-extension display effect pattern" until the end of the display effect pattern. It is more desirable to entertain the production.

In addition, when the method (b) is adopted, when a specific winning type (for example, jackpot A) is won, a dynamic "non-extended display effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a The display will be started by the liquid crystal display device 1400. According to such an effect method, at the timing t1, at least the winning result for a specific winning species (for example, jackpot A) is shown.

For example, when a jackpot symbol (a jackpot explicit effect that clearly indicates that it is a jackpot) appears at the stop timing t1 of the special symbol by the "non-extended display effect pattern", the player has the highest advantage of "big hit A". In the first closing control period, the liquid crystal display device 1400 will perform an opening effect such as "Congratulations!" To congratulate the player. Then, for example, at the timing t2 when the first closing control period ends and the second closing control period starts, it is possible to switch to the effect display indicating that the jackpot game should be started by the right-handed game. The timing tx at which the game ball passes through the gate 2500 is likely to arrive relatively earlier than in the case of the display effect pattern at the time of extension, and in the subsequent jackpot game, the jackpot effect dedicated to the "big hit A" is performed. It becomes. However, when the hit effect (the big hit explicit effect that clearly indicates that it is a big hit) does not appear at the stop timing t1 of the special symbol by the "non-extended display effect pattern", the most advantageous "big hit A" for the player. On the contrary, it will be possible to grasp that "" has not been won. In this case, it is possible to grasp that any one of "Big hit B" to "Big hit E" has been won when the big hit explicit effect appears after the above-mentioned continuous expected effect by the "extended effect pattern". It will be.

In addition, when adopting the method combining (a) and (b), a production lottery table is prepared for each type of jackpot, and based on the acquired random number value while referring to this production lottery table. Therefore, either an "extended effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a or a "non-extended display effect pattern" having the content of the display effect a is selected. That is, by preparing the effect lottery table for each type of jackpot, it becomes possible to make the selection rate of the "extended effect pattern" and the "non-extended display effect pattern" in each table different. As a result, for example, the degree of expectation of the type of jackpot that has been won differs depending on whether the "extended effect pattern" or the "non-extended display effect pattern" clearly indicates that the jackpot has been won. In addition to being able to do this, the "non-extended production pattern" has a lower expectation of a jackpot, but when it is clearly stated that it is a jackpot, the expectation of a "big hit A" with the highest advantage is high. , "Extended production pattern" has a higher expectation of big hit, but when it is clearly stated that it is a big hit, the expectation of "big hit A", which has the highest advantage, is low. Is also possible.

Regarding the method for selecting the "extended effect pattern" and the "non-extended display effect pattern", in addition to the display effect pattern of the above-mentioned effect command "01H", the effect command "05H" shown in FIG. 237, Similarly, each display effect pattern of "09H" and "12H" can be adopted. However, when it is adopted as the display effect pattern of the effect commands "01H" and "05H", the display effect pattern of the effect commands "03H" and "07H" is lost with respect to the display effect pattern as the hit effect pattern. It will be possible to function as a pattern.

Further, in the above-described example with reference to FIG. 247 (a), the effect command “02H” shown in FIG. 237 in the first effect mode has an “extended effect pattern” having the content of the display effect a. Is associated, but as shown in FIG. 250, in addition to the "extended effect pattern", an "extended effect pattern" having the content of the display effect c may also be associated. Good.

That is, in the "extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c" associated with the effect command "02H" in this way, the display effect is performed by extending the stop timing t1 of the special symbol. The content of the effect is only the display effect pattern of the effect command "11H" when in the first effect mode (see FIG. 247 (c)), and the display effect after development that the jackpot expectation becomes higher. It will be a production content that does not appear. Therefore, in the first effect mode, when the effect command "02H" shown in FIG. 237 is received, a part of it is allocated to the effect content in which such a developed display effect does not appear. , It becomes possible to set a higher probability of winning a small hit while keeping the appearance probability of the display effect after development when in the first effect mode low. In this case, when in the second production mode, the probability of entering the challenge bonus production (the degree of expectation that the winning production will appear) will be increased by the amount that the winning probability of the small hit is set higher. This makes it possible to give a higher probability of winning a prize ball by opening the large prize opening 2003.

In this case, when the effect command "02H" shown in FIG. 237 is received in the first effect mode, the peripheral control MPU4140a is set to "an extended effect pattern having the contents of the display effect a" and "display effect". One of the "extended effect pattern having the content of c" is selected, and the dynamic display of the selected display effect pattern is started by the liquid crystal display device 1400. Further, as a method for selecting the "extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a" and the "extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c", for example, the result of a predetermined effect lottery based on a random number. Based on the above, it is possible to adopt a method of selecting either "extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a" or "extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c". When this method is adopted, how many of the random number values that can be acquired are "extended effect pattern having the content of display effect a" and "extended effect pattern having the content of display effect c". The content of the "display effect a" when the effect command "02H" shown in FIG. 237 is received in the first effect mode according to the ratio of the random number values associated with each other in advance. Each appearance probability of the "extended effect pattern having the display effect c" and the "extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c" will be determined.

Further, regarding the method for selecting the "extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect a" and the "extended effect pattern having the content of the display effect c", the display effect pattern of the above-mentioned effect command "02H" is described. In addition, the display effect pattern of the effect command "06H" shown in FIG. 237 can be similarly adopted. When adopted as the display effect pattern of this effect command "06H", the "extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect b" and the "extension effect pattern having the content of the display effect d" are selected. It becomes.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it was decided to prepare the fluctuation pattern (variation number “15”, effect command “15H”) shown in FIG. 237 for determining the jackpot. You may omit it. That is, in this case, when the big winning opening 2003 is opened in the second effect mode, the challenge bonus effect pattern can always appear.

[4. Game content]
The content of the game in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be specifically described. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 151, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the operation handle portion 410 arranged at the lower right of the door frame 5, and the storage plate of the plate unit 300 is stored. The game ball stored in the 311 is driven into the upper part of the game area 605 arranged in front of the game panel 600, and the game by the game ball is started. Further, in the game area 605, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 600, and when the game ball comes into contact with the obstacle nails, the game ball flows down. While the speed is suppressed, various movements are given to the game ball so that the movements can be enjoyed. The game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 605 will flow down in the game area 605 on the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2300 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the operation handle portion 410, and the more it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the driving force can be.

That is, a game in which the game ball is launched relatively weakly to cause the game ball to flow down to the game area 605 on the left side of the center accessory 2300 is called a left-handed game. On the other hand, a game in which the game ball is launched relatively strongly to cause the game ball to flow down to the game area 605 on the right side of the center accessory 2300 is called a right-handed game. The left-handed game and the right-handed game can be switched by the player adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation handle portion 410.

Here, when a game ball enters the first starting port 2001 or the second starting port 2002, a special random number is acquired in addition to the entering starting port. That is, when the game ball enters the first starting port 2001, the first special random number is acquired, and when the game ball enters the second starting port 2002, the second special random number is acquired.

Then, the special random number acquired based on the entry into the starting ports 2101, 1022 is temporarily held before being subjected to the hit / fail determination process. When the start condition is satisfied and this hold is released, the variable display of the special symbol is started, and the decorative symbol is also changed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1400 so as to synchronize with the variable display of the special symbol. The display starts. For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed in synchronization with this, and when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in synchronization with this. .. At this time, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the result of the hit / fail determination process for the first special random number. Similarly, when the variable display of the second special symbol is started, the decorative symbol is variablely displayed in synchronization with this, and when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in synchronization with this. To. At this time, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the result of the hit / fail determination process for the second special random number. In this way, the decorative symbol functions as a symbol common to both the variable display and stop display of the first special symbol and the variable display and stop display of the second special symbol. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, whether or not the probability variation function is activated by the symbol random number (random number for big hit symbol) acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 2001 or the second starting port 2002 is determined. The number of rounds during the jackpot game is determined.

However, in the external disadvantageous game state (normal external disadvantageous game state, probabilistic external disadvantageous game state) in which the time saving function (opening extension function) is not activated, it is difficult to enter the second starting port 2002. Therefore, the player plays the game while adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation handle portion 410 so that the left-handed game is performed. Then, as a result of such a left-handed game, the result of the hit / fail judgment regarding the special random number corresponding to the entry into the first starting port 2001 is a hit (big hit or small hit) in which an opportunity to win a prize ball is given. ), The opening / closing member 2006 will operate so that the grand prize opening 2003 will be opened regardless of the winning type.

As described above, regarding the special symbol, the lighting mode of the plurality of LEDs (special symbol) at the time of winning the small hit (when the special symbol is stopped) and the lighting mode of the plurality of LEDs (special symbol) at the time of winning the big hit. (When the special symbol is stopped), the difference is only whether or not one LED is lit, and the appearance is similar to each other (see FIG. 235). On the other hand, for decorative symbols, the result of the hit / fail judgment for the special random number according to the entry into the first starting port 2001 is the hit (big hit or small hit) where the chance to win the prize ball is given. Even in such a case, the handling at the time of a big hit and the time of a small hit is largely different depending on the above-mentioned effect mode (first effect mode, second effect mode) (see FIG. 245). ).

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even if the result of the hit / fail judgment for the special random number is a hit (big hit or small hit) in which an opportunity to win a prize ball is given, the type of the same hit. When is a big hit, the big winning opening 2003 is not opened only by this (the execution of the big hit game is not started). That is, as described above, when the jackpot is won, the closing control period (when the opening / closing member 2006 is closed) from when the special symbol (first special symbol) is stopped until the grand prize opening 2003 is opened. As the maintenance control period), in addition to the "first closing control period having a certain length" that appears even when a small hit is won, the "second closing control period having an indefinite length" is the relevant. It is becoming more apparent in the form of extending the closing control period. The second closing control period ends when the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500 after the first closing control period having a certain length has elapsed.

Therefore, when the jackpot is won, the player makes the game ball pass through the special figure gate 2500 after the first closing control period having a certain length has elapsed at an arbitrary timing (right-handed game). ), The game is performed while adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation handle portion 410 at an arbitrary timing. As a result, when the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500, the big hit game is started by the end of the second closing control period, but the player maintains such a right-handed game. By simply continuing the operation of the operation handle portion 410, the game balls will be entered one after another into the opened large winning opening 2003.

Then, when the jackpot is a non-specific winning species, after such a jackpot game is performed, the game is performed again under the control of an external disadvantageous game state in which the time saving function (opening extension function) does not operate. Become. On the other hand, when the jackpot is a specific winning type, the external advantageous gaming state (normal external advantageous gaming state, probabilistic external advantageous gaming state) in which the time saving function (opening extension function) is activated after such a jackpot game is performed is performed. ) Will be used to play the game.

Here, in the external advantageous game state, the game ball wins the second starting port 2002, which triggers the execution of the lottery (variation) so that the hold state of the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol is not interrupted. Control is performed to increase the frequency of changing to an easy state. As such control, for example, the following first to third methods can be considered, but the frequency of "normal hits" is increased, and the blade 2337 that closes the second starting port 2002 is expanded for a predetermined time. Any method may be adopted as long as the frequency of winning a prize can be increased.
-The first method to set the probability of being judged as "normal hit" to be higher when the time saving function is operating than when the time saving function is not operating.
-Although the probability of being judged as "normal hit" is the same when the time saving function is operating and when the time saving function is not operating, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is when the time saving function is not operating. A second method that shortens the time when the time saving function is activated.
-A third method that employs both the first method and the second method.

That is, in the external advantageous gaming state in which the time saving function (opening extension function) is activated, such control makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting port 2002 than the first starting port 2001. Therefore, the player plays the game while adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation handle portion 410 so that the game ball passes through the gate member 2200 (gate 2201) (so that the right-handed game is performed). It becomes. As a result, when the gate sensor 2202 detects that the game ball has passed through the gate member 2200 (gate 2201), the main control board 4100 generates a normal random number as a normal lottery result based on the detection signal. .. Then, based on the ordinary random number, the ordinary symbol of the ordinary symbol display 645 in the function display unit 640 is displayed in a variable manner, and the ordinary lottery result is shown after a predetermined time (for example, between 2 seconds and 30 seconds) has elapsed. It will be stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the variation display of the ordinary symbol is performed based on the ordinary symbol variation pattern selected from the predetermined ordinary symbol variation pattern selection table.

As a result, when the normal symbol suggesting normal hit is stopped and displayed, the blade 2337 is expanded for a predetermined time by the start port solenoid 2344, whereby the blade 2337 is driven into the game area 605 by the right-handed game. The game ball will be entered into the second starting port 2002.

In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the execution of the lottery of the first special symbol is always postponed, and the hit (small hit) without the operation of the condition device is not won. As described above, the lottery based on the winning of the prize (the lottery of the second special symbol) is controlled so as to be digested first (see FIG. 227). Therefore, until the number of holdings for the lottery on the second special symbol side is interrupted and becomes "0", only the games (lottery on the second special symbol side) without being won in the above small hits are sequentially performed. Then, when the result of the hit / fail judgment for the special random number corresponding to the entry into the second starting port 2002 is a hit that gives an opportunity to win a prize ball, that is, it is assumed that the big hit is won, the big prize opening The opening / closing member 2006 comes into operation so that 2003 is opened.

However, in the case of the lottery of the second special symbol as well, the big prize opening 2003 will not be opened only by winning the big hit (the execution of the big hit game will not be started), and it is special. The closing control period (the period during which the opening / closing member 2006 is maintained and controlled in the closed state) from the stop of the symbol (second special symbol) to the opening of the grand prize opening 2003 is "having a certain length. A "first closing control period" and a "second closing control period having an indefinite length" have come to appear.

Therefore, at the time of winning the jackpot, the player so that the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500 after the first closing control period having a certain length has elapsed (so that the right-handed game is performed). ), The game is performed while adjusting the amount of rotation of the operation handle portion 410 at an arbitrary timing. In this case, in order to further increase the lottery efficiency when the time saving function (opening extension function) is activated, the period ends in the first closing control period, as in the challenge bonus effect pattern at the time of a big hit. It is desirable to perform a countdown effect or the like so that the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500 immediately.

As a result, when the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500, the big hit game is started by the end of the second closing control period, but the player maintains such a right-handed game. By simply continuing the operation of the operation handle portion 410, the game balls will be entered one after another into the opened large winning opening 2003. Then, when the jackpot is a non-specific winning species, after such a jackpot game is performed, the game (left-handed game) under the control of an external disadvantageous game state in which the time saving function (opening extension function) does not operate is performed. Will be done. On the other hand, when the jackpot is a specific winning species, after such a jackpot game is performed, the game is controlled to an external advantageous game state in which the time saving function (opening extension function) is activated (right-handed game). Will be done again.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the embodiments, the above-described embodiments of the invention are for facilitating the understanding of the present invention and do not limit the present invention. The present invention can be modified and improved without departing from the spirit and claims, and the present invention includes equivalents thereof.

For example, in the above embodiment, the big hit is given to the player when the big hit is won in the lottery process on the first special symbol side and when the big hit is won in the lottery process on the second special symbol side. Although there is no difference in the expected value of profit (such as the number of prize balls that can be obtained), a difference may be provided in the expected value. For example, when the lottery process on the first special symbol side is performed, there is a relatively high probability that the jackpot game with the largest (or least) number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player will be executed ( Or, while it is set to be low), when the lottery process on the second special symbol side is performed, the jackpot game with the largest (or least) number of prize balls that can be obtained by the player is executed. It corresponds to the case where the probability is set relatively low (or high).

Further, in the above embodiment, in the second effect mode, the opening effect before the big hit game (the effect of urging the start of the big hit game by performing the right-handed game) is also applied to the effect pattern at the time of the small hit. It was allowed to be completed within the first closed control period having a certain length that exists. However, even if the effect is not completed within the first closed control period, and the same effect is performed within the second closed control period, for example, in the second effect mode, the first effect is performed. If the right-handed game is encouraged at an earlier timing than in the production mode, even if the display production pattern is based on one production command (the variation time of the special symbol is the same), in the first production mode. It is possible to make a large difference in the length of the effect time required from the start of the change of the special symbol (decorative symbol) to the start of the jackpot game between the second effect mode and the second effect mode.

In addition, among the lottery related to the progress of the game (big hit lottery) regarding the winning of the big hit, the number of rounds when the big hit game is performed, whether it is a probability variation hit, etc., the lottery related to the number of rounds is a big hit. It does not necessarily have to be determined based on the symbol random number. For example, a round in which a random number for determining a round is acquired based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the special figure gate 2500 after the first closing control period has elapsed, and the number of rounds is determined based on the acquired random number. A lottery may be held. According to such a configuration, even when the special symbol is stopped based on the winning of the big hit, the lottery related to the progress of the game (big hit lottery) that can affect the profit itself that the player can enjoy is processed halfway. It will be possible to be left in the stage. Then, regarding such an intermediate processing stage as a big hit lottery, since the game ball can be maintained until the game ball is newly launched by the player and the game ball is accepted at a specific reception, the big hit is won. Even after the special symbol is stopped based on the above, until the jackpot game is started, it is already impossible to reveal information by, for example, a round lamp, and the jackpot lottery has already been drawn. It is now possible to produce expectations about the results of the lottery part (whether it is a big hit, whether it is a probable hit, etc.), and this makes it possible to enjoy the game until the big hit game is actually executed. Can be suitably maintained.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the operation handle portion 410 is used as an operation target (operation means) by the player for ending the second closing control period. However, as such an operation target, for example, Other operating means such as the main button 371 and the sub button 372 of the operation button unit 370 may be adopted. However, in this case, the game ball can be held in the game area 605, and the special figure gate 2500 is set for the held game ball based on the operation of an appropriate operation means (for example, the main button 371). A holding device that can be released so as to pass through will be arranged in an area directly above the special figure gate 2500 or the like.

Further, in the second effect mode, a false countdown effect is performed so that the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500 at an earlier stage than the end of the first closing control period at the time of a big hit or a small hit. May be done. As a result of such a false countdown effect, the special figure gate 2500 (or the special figure gate 2500 (or) is operated by a predetermined operating means (operation handle portion 410) at a stage earlier than the end of the first closing control period. When the game ball passes through the location X), the peripheral control MPU4140a avoids the attack on the enemy character as a result of the small hit effect (as a result of the attack that was set), even if the big hit is won. Etc.) will be controlled to appear. That is, when the player confirms the production content at the time of such a small hit, he / she will be disappointed once, but after that, when the small hit is won, the big winning opening 2003 is automatically opened. On the other hand, when the big hit is won, the big winning opening 2003 may be opened unless the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500 by operating the predetermined operation means (operation handle part 410) again. Absent. In addition, the reservation of the special symbol is not exhausted, and a new symbol change is not started. Therefore, the player can grasp the possibility of winning the big hit due to such a change in the game state (stagnation state of the game), and can greatly lift the mood from the disappointed state once. Will be. On the other hand, depending on the player, at the time of confirming the production content at the time of a small hit, there is a person who stops the game early without confirming such a change in the gaming state. In this case, the condition device It has become possible to create an extremely unusual state (a state that is advantageous for other players), such as the pachinko machine 1 in which the machine is operating becomes an empty stand, and by extension, it is installed in the hall. The operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 will be preferably maintained. Further, at the start of the game, a game method of first passing the special figure gate 2500 can be established, and the player can start the big hit game without inserting the game ball into the starting port. It is advantageous in that there are cases, and it is also advantageous for the hall side in that the player's ball can be digested by the amount that the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500 in this way.

Further, the first closing control period is prepared as a time having a predetermined length (time until the interval effect timer is timed up) after the special symbol (identification symbol) is stopped. However, for example, when the special symbol fluctuates, it may be determined based on a value such as a random number for a jackpot symbol acquired or a random number of a variable display pattern. That is, in this case, when the special symbol fluctuates, any one of a plurality of closed control periods (a plurality of interval effect timers that time different times) prepared in advance and having different lengths is selected as the first closed control period. Will be used as a target. In this way, at least if the length is predetermined when the special symbol fluctuates, the addition time between the time determined in this way and the fluctuation time of the special symbol (or this addition time is used as the maximum production time, and the addition time is greater than this. It is possible to selectively use a display effect pattern that uses (a short time) as one effect unit (effect time) to perform a display effect.

Further, regarding the first closing control period, different times may be predetermined for the big hit and the small hit. For example, when the interval effect timer at the time of big hit clocks the first time, and the interval effect timer at the time of small hit clocks the second time longer than the first time, the following It is possible to realize such a production. That is, in both the case of a big hit and the time of a small hit, it is after the first time has elapsed from the time when the special symbol (identification symbol) is stopped and until the second time elapses. In addition, if an opening effect such as the above-mentioned countdown effect is performed so that the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500, the game ball may not pass through the special figure gate 2500 immediately after the effect is performed. However, until the second time elapses, the large winning opening 2003 can be prevented from being opened, and such an operation system production can be given a time margin. In this case, at the time of a small hit, the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500 (or the location X) after the first time has elapsed and before the second time elapses. When any of the conditions of the second time and the elapse of the second time are satisfied, the challenge bonus effect will be performed. However, if the game ball passes through the special figure gate 2500 (or location X) before the second time elapses, the challenge bonus production will start before the big winning opening 2003 is opened. Become. Further, since the time until the large winning opening 2003 is opened is relatively long, it becomes easier to grasp that the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a small hit as compared with the case of the above embodiment. There is a demerit that it will end up.

Further, in the above embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is shown as the game machine, but even if the game machine is a game machine other than the pachinko machine, for example, a pachislot machine or a game machine in which the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine are fused, the present invention The invention can be applied. Considering the application of the present invention to a pachislot machine, the "game ball" in each of the above configurations may be used as the "game medium".

A pachinko machine is a gaming machine in which an input medium such as a game ball, which is a medium that a player inputs into a game machine, and a game medium, which is a medium used for a substantial game performed by a player, are the same. Yes, it is a type of gaming machine in which a game is played using a medium such as a game ball that has been introduced. Specifically, "a launching device that launches a game ball in response to the operation of the operation handle, and appropriate equipment such as a large number of obstacle nails, center accessories, display means, etc. are incorporated, a starting prize opening, a big prize, etc. A game area provided with an appropriate entry port for a game ball such as a mouth, a passage port, and an arrival port, a rail for guiding the game ball from the launcher to the game area, and a game ball guided to the game area. It is provided with a payout means for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls in response to the entry of balls into the entrances and the mode of entry of game balls into a plurality of entrances. "

There are various types of pachinko machines, and a "ball-entry state detecting means (that is, a game state) for detecting a ball-entry state at the ball-entry port" represented by a machine generally called "digipachi". (Detection means), a lottery means for performing a predetermined lottery when a ball is detected by the ball entry state detection means, and a special symbol display means for changing and stopping the change according to the lottery result of the lottery means. "In addition, while the special symbol is changing, the decorative symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of decorative symbols is variablely displayed, and the effect image display means for displaying a character or the like at a predetermined timing is further provided." , Generally referred to as a "multifunction machine", "a lottery means for drawing a lottery by distributing game balls in a character and a lottery means for drawing a lottery by winning a prize at a starting port" , Generally, one game is played by a predetermined number of game balls such as 16 balls represented by what is generally called "Arepachi", and depending on the mode of entering the game balls into a plurality of entrances in one game. For example, "a player who pays out a predetermined number of game balls" and the like.

On the other hand, in a pachislot machine, a medal, which is a game medium, is inserted, and after the medal is inserted, a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed according to the operation of a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever), and then. It is a slot machine with a stop operation function, which performs a substantial game such as stopping the fluctuation of the symbol sequence in response to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button). If the stop operating means is not operated even after the predetermined time has elapsed, the fluctuation of the symbol sequence may be stopped according to the elapse of the predetermined time. Then, when the combination of symbols at the time when the fluctuation of the symbol sequence stops satisfying a specific condition, a predetermined number of medals can be paid out according to the satisfied condition, or the player can acquire a large number of medals. In addition, a special advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is generated.

Further, in a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused, a plurality of (for example, five) game balls are used as one unit of input medium, and after the input medium is charged, a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever) is used. ), The symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols is varied and displayed, and then the fluctuation of the symbol sequence is stopped according to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button). If the stop operating means is not operated even after the predetermined time has elapsed, the fluctuation of the symbol sequence may be stopped according to the elapse of the predetermined time. Then, when the combination of symbols at the time of stopping the fluctuation of the symbol sequence satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined number of medals can be paid out according to the satisfied condition, or the player can acquire a large number of medals. , A special advantageous state that is advantageous to the player is generated.

In addition, at first glance, it seems that there is no game medium in a game machine such as a pachislot machine or a game machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused, in which a substantial game is not performed depending on the medium to be input. However, even with such a gaming machine, it can be assumed that the entire game content includes a game played using a gaming ball or other appropriate article. Therefore, even such a game machine can be a target of a game machine in which a game is played using a game medium.

Further, the effect display device in the above-described embodiment is preferably a liquid crystal display device, but is not necessarily limited to the liquid crystal display device. It may be an EL display device, a plasma display device, a display device such as a CRT, or the like.

1 Pachinko machine 1400 Liquid crystal display device 3011 Decorative plate 3012 Upper lighting body 3013 Lower lighting body 3014 Flat cable 3015 Upper LED board 3016 Lower LED board 3017 Recess 3018 Protrusion 3018a Diffuse reflection surface 3019 Upper frame-shaped decoration 3020 Frame-shaped decorative body 3021 Groove forming part 3021a Drawer port 3023 Rack 3031 Decorative plate 3034 Flat cable 3051 Decorative plate 3090 Drive part 3094 Left inner motor 3096 Gear 3097 Pinion 3110 Lower support part 4140 Peripheral control board

Claims (1)

The game area where the game ball is launched and
A starting port capable of receiving a game ball driven into the game area, and
A large winning opening, which is arranged in the game area and facilitates acceptance of a game ball by the operation of a predetermined opening / closing means,
A lottery means for drawing a lottery based on the acceptance of a game ball at the starting port, and
An identification symbol control means that determines the variation time of the identification symbol based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, changes the identification symbol by the determined variation time, and then stops and displays the identification symbol.
After the identification symbol is stopped and displayed by the identification symbol control means based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined opening / closing so as to facilitate acceptance of the game ball at the grand prize opening. Opening and closing control means that can execute control related to the operation of the means,
An effect executing means that indicates information on the result of the lottery by the lottery means by a display effect on a predetermined effect display device, and
In operating the predetermined opening / closing means based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means, the predetermined opening / closing means can be maintained in the closed state for a predetermined period after the identification symbol is stopped and displayed. State maintenance means and
With
The display effect in the predetermined effect display device is an effect using a display image different from the identification symbol.
The effect executing means is
When the first effect mode is determined based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means being a specific hit among the hits, the identification symbol control means is used for the display effect in the predetermined effect display device. By executing this as a display effect in which a hit effect image appears within the fluctuation time until the identification symbol is stopped and displayed, an opportunity is given to facilitate acceptance of the game ball at the grand prize opening. When the second effect mode is determined based on the first effect execution means shown and the result of the lottery by the lottery means being a specific hit among the hits, the display effect on the predetermined effect display device is determined. Has a second effect executing means for executing the above in a period until the end of the fluctuation time and the predetermined period maintained by the closed state maintaining means after the end of the fluctuation time.
In the display effect executed by the second effect executing means, the hit effect image by the first effect executing means does not appear, and the predetermined effect display device within the fluctuation time until the identification symbol is stopped and displayed. The display effect appearing in is performed in a form of being continued until the predetermined period maintained by the closed state maintaining means.
The predetermined opening / closing means maintained in the closed state by the closed state maintaining means starts operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
It is determined that the information on the result of the lottery is shown in the first effect mode based on the result of the lottery by the lottery means being a specific hit among the hits, and the identification symbol is stopped and displayed. after the display demonstration has been performed by the first demonstration execution means, in the predetermined period in which the predetermined opening and closing means by said closed state maintaining means until is maintained in the closed state the predetermined opening and closing means is operated, the front Stories A gaming machine characterized in that a display prompting a player to launch a game ball is performed without executing a display effect executed by the second effect executing means.